2021 Audi Q5 Owner Manual

Owner's Manual
2021 Q5
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality
equipment that a vehicle has to offer. Audi recommends that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly
so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, there are many useful tips and information
concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. Audi also
gives you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environ-
mentally-friendly manner.
Audi hopes you enjoy driving your vehicle and wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
ZA\ warNiNc
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize expo-
sure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.
ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
80B012721BA
Table of contents
About this Owner's Manual...... Lights and Vision.................

Exterior lighting...............0000ee
SUMIMAry: < = exe : eens:
Seen cs sens
NOD OO
QutckeaeCe ssh: «i esis se ois a eaves @
Cockpit. ...... 0... eee eee eee eee Windshield wipers................05-
Indicator lights overview...........4.. Digital compass’ « < sces ss sees sz wees ae
Display and operation........... 12 Sitting correctly and safely...... 62

Instrument cluster............... 12 Correct passenger seating position...... 62
Instrument cluster overview........... 12 Frontis@ats's « sais « ¢ sine « » saree yo eae a 62
Operating. ecccuse w+ were oo wens oo ayes 9 ¥ 13 ReAarSeats verse a coecns oo area oo semen nw aie 65
Adjusting the display................. 13 Steering wheel.............2.200005. 65
Coolant temperature display........... 14 Head restraintsts: « » gare x 2 oawa ys qe a 5 66
Tachometer’ series i ewe so snes ¥ & ome 14 Safety belts..............00..00000. 67
Power meter...............0 00000005 15 Memory function............2..00 eee 71
QUOOMEtEr as + 2 ame < gas = papas s ¥ HERS & 15 Airbag syst@m aces ss cece se ees ee ees 71
Outside temperature display........... 16 Child safety seats cic «4 wessn « women © vane 76
Engine oil temperature indicator....... 16
Boost indicator’: 2 2c« «= sesa ¢ x sews «x 2x8 16 Storage and convenience........ 82
Vehicle functions « seis ss emis ee mes ee 16 POWer SOURCES sisson «+ women « ¥ oes 3 6 eos 82
Cup holders........ 00... e cece eee 82
Touch display..................... 18 Climatized cup holders............... 83
General touch display operation........ 18 Storage and compartments............ 83
Multi Media Interface................ 20 Luggage compartment............... 84
ROOF PACK: « « ewws 4s ewes 4s nees ¥ e reese gs 88
Head-up display.................. 26
DeSeriptioni: << sone so sisi © » axsinne oo sxe 26 WV erence Chl ieee. & socsese 5 & newer 3 0 we 91
Climate control system............00. 91
Voice recognition system........ 27 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control . 92
General information................. 27 Steering wheel heating............... 94
Description ...... 0... ccc eee ee eee 27 Auxiliary climate control.............. 94
External voice operation.............. 28 Fluids in the A/C system.............. 96
Global functions................. 30 Driving...........

0... cece eee
Additional function buttons........... 30 Starting the vehicle..................
Whenid rivitngnes ss sons 6 x tana © 8 cuere a 6
Starting and driving............. 31 Drive systeM.... 2... eee eee eee
Personalization.................. 3h Start/Stop system..........2--00000-
31
Electromechanical parking brake.......
34 Special driving situations..............
34
38 Driving dynamic..................
Luggage compartment lid............. 41 Audi drive select..........0.-..000005
Child'safety lock ses < « se0% cs eee se oes 44 SUSPENSION is: + & eas » s eews 6 y Gews Fo HEE
Power windows: ss sew. «sass as eaves a 45 SEONG « csevaiss 5 + sevens = anecome © u enecans + © ox
Panoramic glass roof................. 46 All wheel drive (quattro) ..............
Garage door opener..........--..00-5 Electronic Stabilization Control.........
Table of contents
High-voltage system............. 122 MeSSaQeS essscns sa cavswce ww amuses vo someone vw oe 194

Generalinformation................. 122 Do It Yourself... 2... eee eee eee 196
Charging the high-voltage battery...... 123
Charging equipment................. 129 AUP CONNECE « 6:65. 6 ev ee ews se os 197
General information................. 197
Trailer ROwilne is «i wows «seas
gs eeees 138 Audi connect Infotainment............ 197
Driving witha trailer................. 138 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot................ 198
Audi connect Infotainment services..... 198
Assist systems................... 141 Functions on demand................ 199
ASSIST SYSTCINIS§ 65 6 i onws 5 can so oe 141 Audi connect vehicle control services.... 199
General information................. 141 SOTUIAGS cecssin « ws oseuwnn & prresenwin m iovewene @ n sexe 200
Surrounding area detection............ 142 Do It Yourself. ...... 0.0... eee eee 201
Driving information.............. 145 EMErGéency CALL. . « ccc cs ses een 202

Speed warning system................ 145 Overview... .... 2... eee eee ee 202
Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 145 Emergency Call + wsws < nau 9 = seep 2 aOR 202
Traffic light information.............. 147 Online roadside assistance............ 203
Laptimer..... 0.2... cee eee eee eee 148
Integrated Toll Module............... 149 Navigation’... « : ssc: <: soos ss eins ees 205
Opening navigation.................. 205
DriVeEraSSISTAMGES .. 6. cies
me oon 151 myAudi navigation.................0. 205
Cruise control system.............0-. 151 Entering adestination................ 206
Efficiency @SSISl cass ¢ & news ¢ v wees as nwa 152 Stopping route guidance.............. 209
Audi adaptive cruise control........... 154 1) on 209
Traffic jam assist... 6.0.0...
cee eee ee 162 Alternative routes.............2.-04. 211
Distance warning ..............00.08. 164 Additional functions...............-. 211
Audi active lane assist/lane departure Satellite map...............
0. eee 212
WarNing .... 22... eee ec 165 Map update................0.000
005 213
Audi presense...........--.0 eee eee 167 Traffic information...............0005 214
SIGEASSISE vce ow sani © seunie wv ree 6 8 ae T71, SettINGS cee: oo weaves © crerenee © wveeee = ese 215
Exit warning .................0.0000. 173
Raqio:: « esc ss news se eee se eee 2 x BOS 217
Parking and maneuvering....... 174 General information................. 217
Introduction. ............ 2. eee eee eee 174 Radio functions...............00000) 218
Parking aid DlUS ¢ cows ss news se mews sane 174 Online radio's: ss sees se eees a eee ve oe 221
Rearview camera and peripheral cameras. 176 Options and settingsion ss mew s 6 sows a vs 222
Rear cross-traffic assist............... 180 Do It Yourself. ........
cece eee eee 223
Assisted parking..............000e00- 181
Parkeassistts ew 2 omnom 2 2 anwon w 2 avons 6 ¢ 183 Mela wise: 2 2 were se were se mere se ween 2 225
Generalinformation................. 225
Infotainment system............ 186 Bluetooth audio player............... 225
Telephone..................-0-055 186 AiMaZOniAleXaion « = wisee 5 ¢ wavs a wove 4 @ 226
TEROGUCLION « « sccoane a woness o 0 varaim + vi nee 186 Multimedia connections.............. 226
Setup ..... 0... cee eee ee eee eee 186 Playing media...............2.20000- 227
Using the Audi phone box............. 188 Options and settings................. 231
Using the telephone..........0.0. 000 190 Supported media and file formats...... 231
80B012721BA
Settings...............0 0000000000. 194 Do It Yourself. .........

0.0... e eee eee 233
Table of contents
Audi smartphone interface...... 234 JUIMIPFSTANEING 5 x exces 6 w erates @ a cawcens vw ae 294

Setup... eee eee eee eee 234 TOWING... cece ete 296
DOIt YOURSELT sce 5 s woes se meee 5 2 ee 235
Fuses and bulbs.................. 299
Additional settings.............. 236 Fuses... 0... eee ee eee eee 299
System Settings: : s eens s i vows ve sews es 236 BUILDS: sss s = wavs & & ees 5 2 ctetDs sb eG ee 303
Software update...............2..-0. 237
Connected devices.............000005 238 Customer information........... 304
Legalinformation................... 239 Data privacy................000 eee 304
Privacy NOLICE « naw, 2 w aay ¥ Kaew + Meee © 304
Additional information.......... 240 Timage reGOrding). « « canew + sect ws caver a os 304
Brands and licenses..............0005 240 Data memories............00.00e eee 304
Transmitted information.............. 305
Maintenance and Care........... 241
Checking and Filling............. 241 Accessories and technical
FUGles « = seam = = sews ez nes eg eee Eee 241 CINERGSS:. « » sem: : x ews ce ee be ee ee 308
RefaelinGuecs « sess oo wea 2 wen 2 wenn 242 Warranty’ « = eon x 2 manors 6 o ois wv ee 6 308
Emissions control system............. 245 Audi Literature Shop.............000- 308
Motor compartment................. 246 Driving in other countries............. 308
Engine@iOiles esive s+ wacom ov soe 3 v ema ¥ vs 249 Maintenance, repairs, and technical
Cooling systeM............0 0.002 253 modifications..................00008 308
Brake fluid): < s asws s ¢ qa > § eee + tf eee 255 Accessories and parts..............-. 310
Electrical:system iiss ee sccwe owe 2 x ere 256 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 310
Battery... .. eee eee eee eee 256 Declaration of compliance for
Windshield washer system...........- 259 telecommunications equipment and
Service interval display............... 259 electroniesystems's « «cows
se mean 2 news 314,
Wheels............. 6.0. c eee eee 261 Technical data.................... 373

Wheels and Tires...........--0000005 261 Identification data................... 313
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 278 Vehicle datatics ss saves o srewa sv awe 0 ve 313
Run-flat tires... 2.2...
eee eee eee 280
TAAGK es = see « = wee « = owe Be nee eg oe 315
Care and cleaning................ 282
Car washes « swas 5 ¢ sams se pean co eee Gs 282
Cleaning and care information......... 283
Taking your vehicle out of service....... 287
Do'lt Yourself sos so isis é genes scene 288

Emergency assistance........... 288
EQUIPMENE wees + « wees = nae go wees 8 2 ee 288
Tire MOBILE KEE scccee x © creases we © anairers 6% cenie 288
Changingatire...................000- 290
Collapsible spare tire.............000. 293
About this Owner's Manual
In this manual, Audi provides important informa- => A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING” within a
tion, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using section. Ifa page number is indicated, the
your vehicle. “Audi” refers to AUDI AG, the re- WARNING is located outside of the section.
spective importer in a country, as well as joint
ventures. IN WARNING
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously Text with this symbol contains information
improve its products. Audi reserves the right to about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
make changes in design and specifications, and rious personal injury or death.
to make additions or improvements in its prod-
ucts without incurring any obligation to install C) Note
them on products previously manufactured. This Text with this symbol contains information
owner's manual is based on the current data about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, hicle.
and specifications in this owner's manual are
based on the most current information available (@) For the sake of the environment
at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a Text with this symbol contains information on
basis for liability claims. protecting the environment.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
G) Tips
Keep this manual and any other applicable docu-
Text with this symbol contains additional use-
ments in your vehicle at all times. This is espe-
ful information.
cially important if you loan your vehicle to others
or sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment

range for all model versions of this vehicle at the
time of printing. Individual equipment options
described may only be available at a later date or
may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the section indicates the validity, for example
“Applies to: vehicles with speed warning sys-
tem”. Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is
also identified with an asterisk ugn “*”.
The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

Some of the details in your vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

“rear”, are based on the vehicle's direction of
travel.
* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

ment
b> The section continues on the next page.
80B012721BA
Quick access
Quick access
Cockpit
Fig. 1 Cockpit
@ Door handle @ Lockable glove compartment with:

@ Central locking switch ........... @ Front passenger's airbag ........
@ Memory function buttons ........ @ Climate control system ..........
@ Vent @ Depending on equipment, buttons
© Lever for: for:
—Turn signals and high beams .... 51 —drive select ...............0.. 115
—High beam assistant .......... — Hybrid modes |=] (plug-in
— Audi active lane assist ......... 165 hybrid drive) ss i scsi ov sven 6 oa 105
— Traffic jam assist ............. 162 — Start/Stop system ............ 108
Multifunction steering wheel with: — Electronic Stabilization Control
©
(ESO) ca ss wuss 5 4 Hema a i eos a ee 120

— Horn be
— Parkeassist ws 3 ¢ avo » x eeay a y me 183
— Driver's airbag ............... 71
— Parking system ............... 174
— Operating buttons ............ 13,30
Hill Hold assist ves: es sseose. 2 animes 114
= Shift paddles: « « coi e ewes sv ove 101
—Center display .............00.
Instrument cluster ............. 12
@ Audi music interface ............
Windshield washer system lever .. 57
OOOO
@ Socket ......... 0... c eee eee

Reset trip odometer ............ 15
@ MMI On/Off button .............
Emergency flashers ............. 52
Center display ................. 20
Quick access
Center armrest with storage com- Indicator lights overview

partment. Depending on vehicle
equipment, it may have:
—Cup holder ...............0-. 82 The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
—Audi music interface .......... 226 blink or turn on. They indicate functions or mal-
—Audi phone box ............... 188 functions. Some warning and indicator lights
— Starting the engine if there is a turn on when you switch the ignition on and must
MALFUNCTION vise x 2 sever @ & smaeae os 97 turn off when the drive system is switched on or
@0) Electromechanical parking brake while driving.
BUGEON seesess so sranes os soneene & 6 seamen « L1d.
With some indicator lights, messages may ap-
@) Selector lever (automatic transmis- pear and warning signals may sound. The indica-
SHOW) csweves « 2 cxasims a % euesess @ % cmTeeNe @ 9 99
tor lights and messages may be covered by other
@3 Storage compartment .......... 83 displays. To show them again, select the second
@ START ENGINE STOP| button .... 97 tab for messages with the multifunction steering
@) Steering wheel adjustment ...... 66 wheel © page 13.
@3) Lever for: Some indicator lights in the display can display in
— Cruise control system ......... 151 several colors.
— Audi adaptive cruise control .... 154
@8 Button for switching the head-up OMe reel eis
display on and off, adjusting the
R@IGKE ¢ + s wes s « peewee wen & e wow 26 If the A or N indicator light turns on, check
@) Instrument illumination ......... 55 the message in the instrument cluster.
@8 Connection port for the On Board

Diagnostic System (OBD) ........ 304
@3) Headlight control switch ........ 50 The following indicator lights may be available,
or Hood release’ « =: eas»¢ awe ys wees 247 depending on the vehicle equipment:
@2 All-weather lights button ........ 50
Red indicator lights
@3 Button for:
Central indicator light
— Luggage compartment lid ...... 41
=> page 7,
— Fuel filler door release (plug-in
Instrument cluster
hybrid AFIVE); «sesso siemwse © atieesus 243
=> page 12
63) Exterior mirror adjustment ...... 55
Cooling system
64 Buttons for:
> page 14,
— Power windows .............. 45 => page 253,
—Child safety lock .............. 44 => page 253
Safety belt
G) Tips
=> page 70
Some the equipment listed here is only instal-
Transmission
led in certain models or is available as an op-
=> page 103
tion.
80B012721BA
Quick access
Drive system Pre sense

=> page 107, => page 168
High-voltage system Hood
> page 122, => page 248
Charging system
Engine oil pressure
=>page 129,
=> page 250
Vehicle electrical system
=> page 256 Engine oil level (MIN)
Brake system => page 250

=> page 110, Electrical system
=>page 255, => page 256
Electromechanical parking brake
=>page 112 Yellow indicator lights
Brake system Central indicator light

=> page 110, > page 7
=>page 255, Engine speed limitation
Electromechanical parking brake =>page 14
=>page 112 Engine speed limitation
Electromechanical parking brake > page 14,
=>page 111 Drive system
Electromechanical parking brake = page 107,
= page 111 Cooling system
=> page 253
Air suspension
=>page 116 Central locking
=> page 36
Steering
> page 117 Bulb failure indicator
=> page 53
Steering lock
=>page 117
Adaptive light
=> page 53
Charging system
=> page 129 Headlight range control system
=> page 53
Adaptive cruise control
>page 155,
Light/rain sensor
> page 53,
Safe start monitor
=> page 160, =>page 59
Driver intervention request Windshield wipers
> page 161 => page 59
Traffic jam assist Safety systems
=> page 162 => page 72
Steering intervention request Engine start system

=> page 163 => page 98
Distance warning Convenience key
=>page 164 => page 98
Active lane assist Transmission
=>page 165 = page 103
Quick access
Vehicle sound Distance warning

=> page 107 => page 164
Drive system Active lane assist
=> page 107 =>page 165,
Brake system = page 167
=>page 110 Pre sense
=> page 167
=> page 112 Side assist, exit warning
Suspension control
=>page 172
=>page 116 Parking systems
=>page 176
Air suspension
=>page 116 Rear cross-traffic assist
Steering => page 181
>page 117 Park assist
=>page 185
Steering lock
=> page 117 Emergency call function
All wheel drive
=> page 203
> page 118, Tank system
Sport differential => page 242,
=>page 118 => page 242
Electronic Stabilization Control Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
(ESC) => page 246,
=> page 120 Engine oil level (MIN)
Electronic Stabilization Control => page 250
(ESC) Engine oil level (MAX)
=> page 120
=> page 250
Electronic Stabilization Control
Engine oil sensor
(ESC) => page 250
=> page 120
Engine warm-up request
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
=> page 250
=> page 120
Electrical system
=> page 256
=> page 120
Washer fluid level
High-voltage battery range
=>page 259
=>page 129,
Tank system Tire pressure
=> page 242 => page 279,
=> page 279
=> page 162, Tire pressure
Traffic jam assist => page 279
=> page 163
Other indicator lights
80B012721BA
Steering intervention request

Low beam headlights
=> page 163,
=> page 50 >
=> page 166
9
Quick access
Parking lights Adaptive cruise control

=> page 50 => page 160
Turn signals Traffic jam assist
> page 51, => page 162
=> page 52 Traffic jam assist
Turn signals => page 162
>page 51,
Active lane assist
=> page 52
=>page 165
Plug-in hybrid modes
High beam headlights
=>page 105
=> page 51,
Start/Stop system => page 51
=> page 108
High beam assistant
Hill hold assist > page 51
>page 114
Child safety lock
Trailer turn signals =>page 45
=> page 139
Child safety lock
Cruise control system >page 45
=>page 151
Child safety lock
Cruise control system =>page 45
>page 151
High beam assistant
Efficiency assist =>page 51,
=> page 153, => page 53
=> page 153
Convenience key
Efficiency assist => page 98
=> page 153
Transmission
Efficiency assist => page 103
re => page 153
Efficiency assist =>page 105
ou => page 153
=> page 153
=> page 153
=> page 153
Adaptive cruise control =>page 105
=>page 155
Adaptive cruise control =>page 105
=>page 155
Start/Stop system
Adaptive cruise control => page 109
>page 155
Adaptive cruise control => page 112 >
=>page 155
10
Quick access
Electromechanical parking brake Pre sense

=>page 112 => page 167
Hold assist Pre sense
=>page 112 =>page 168
Hill hold assist Side assist, exit warning
=>page 114 => page 172
Steering Parking systems
=> page 117 =>page 176
Speed warning system Rear cross-traffic assist
=>page 145 > page 181
Speed warning system Park assist
=>page 145 =>page 185
Camera-based traffic sign recog- Park assist
nition =>page 185
=> page 146 Fuel filler door
Cruise control system => page 242
> page 151,
eit => page 152,
=> page 152
Cruise control system
> page 151,
=> page 152,
=> page 152
Efficiency assist
> page 153,
Predictive control
=> page 158,
=> page 162,
Traffic jam assist
=> page 163
>page 158
=> page 162,
rae Traffic jam assist
=> page 162,
=> page 163
Distance warning
=> page 164
Active lane assist
=> page 165,
80B012721BA
=> page 167
11
Instrument cluster
Belo
6/24/2019
6/24/2019
C100 T 0,0 mi
LOT SAF ela
Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- — High-voltage battery charge level
ing items may appear in the instrument cluster: @) Right additional display with speed-
@® Left dial ometer
—Tachometer ........ 000.000 14 Left additional display with:
HSPOWERIMEER secur 2s essa oo awacnn @ 6 15 —'G@al a: = s qos os eee es eee er es 99
Tab ara. « < sexes < + sgeps = ¢ eau 9 eee 13 — Audi drive select mode ......... 115
Central area ...............000. 13 Display
Status line (one or two lines) — Engine coolant temperature ~E .. 14
Right dial — High-voltage battery charge level
— Convenience display
— Speedometer
Display
—Fuellevel Y ............0.005 242
12
Instrument cluster
ZA WARNING Information is organized within various tabs@

in the instrument cluster. The tab contents are
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
displayed in the central area (2).
If there is a severe malfunction in the instru-
ment cluster, the display may turn off. The /\| Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
indicator light may also turn on. Stop the ve- Selecting a tab
hicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. > Press the <J/ > button @) repeatedly until the
desired tab is selected.
@) Tips Returning to functions at higher levels
— The following pages primarily show illustra-
> Press the D button ©).
tions of the Audi virtual cockpit*. The dis-
play or location of the items that are shown Opening and closing the menu
may vary on the different versions of the in-
> Press the =] button ©.
strument cluster.
— You can select the units used for tempera- Selecting and confirming a function
ture, speed, and other measurements Requirement: a menu or list must be displayed.
> page 236.
— Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per > To select a function, turn the left thumbwheel
hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour). @ to the desired function.
> To confirm a selection, press the left thumb-
— Certain instrument cluster content can also
be displayed in the head-up display* wheel (7).
=> page 26. Switching the view
> Press the VIEW button @) > page 13.
Operating
The following tabs may be available, depending
on vehicle equipment:
First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Second tab | Driver messages (this is only dis-
3:50™
played if at least one indicator
12/5/2018 light/message is being displayed)
Third tab Radio > page 217
Fig. 4 Driver information system display Media > page 227
Fourth tab | Telephone > page 190
Fifth tab Navigation > page 205
Adjusting the display
Fig. 5 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

80B012721BA
Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit

Fig. 6 Center display: adjusting the display
13
Instrument cluster
Switching the view Normal range

The engine has reached its operating tempera-
> Press the VIEW button to switch between the ture once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge
default view @) and the enhanced view (2). turn on. If the | indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster display turns on, the coolant tem-
Adjusting the layout
perature is too high > page 253.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various lay- @) Note

outs may be available.
— Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: front of the air intake impair the cooling ef-
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu- fect of the coolant. This increases the risk of
al cockpit. the engine overheating during high outside
> To adjust the desired layout, press @). temperatures and heavy engine load.
—The front spoiler also helps to distribute
Adjusting the additional display
cooling air correctly while driving. If the
spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the addi- be impaired and the risk of the engine over-
tional displays that can be selected may vary. heating will increase. See an authorized
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu- cility for assistance.
al cockpit > Configure.
> Select the desired additional display. Tachometer
Reducing the display The tachometer (@) 9 page 12 displays the engine
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). The be-
hide the central area in the instrument cluster.
ginning of the red zone in the tachometer indi-
cates the maximum permissible engine speed for
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle func- all gears once the engine has been broken in. Be-
tions tab > E=] button > Reduced display, or fore reaching the red zone, you should shift into
> Press the VIEW button on the multifunction the next higher gear, select the "D" or "S" selec-
steering wheel. tor lever position, or remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
Coolant temperature
Displaying the tachometer
display Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Applies to: vehicles with a coolant temperature indicator
> Open the Vehicle functions tab.
The coolant temperature display @) > page 12 > Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
only functions when the ignition is switched on. cluster: Select on the multifunction steering
To reduce the risk of engine damage, please ob- wheel: [=] button > Tachometer.
serve the following notes about the temperature > Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
ranges. Select on the MMI home screen: SETTINGS >
Display & brightness > Audi virtual cockpit >
Cold range
Left dial > Tachometer or Combined.
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn
on, the engine has not reached operating tem- Engine speed limitation
perature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accel- If the BB indicator light turns on, the engine will
eration, and heavy engine loads. be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in
the instrument cluster. This will protect the >
14
Instrument cluster
engine components, for example during a cold Displaying the power meter
start or from overheating. Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
The engine speed limitation is deactivated if you > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
release the accelerator pedal while the engine is SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu-
at normal operating temperature. al cockpit > Left dial > Power meter or Com-
bined.
If the engine speed limitation was activated by
an engine control malfunction, the By indicator The power meter (@) > page 12 gives feedback
light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed about the usage capacity of the drive system. The
does not go above the speed displayed, for exam- power meter needle displays the current usage
ple when downshifting. Drive to an authorized capacity.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit: In
mediately to have the malfunction corrected.
Audi virtual cockpit, a colored border indicates
how much the drive system can be currently uti-
@) Note
lized. The colored borders may vary depending on
The needle in the tachometer may only be in the selected driving program and the electric
the red area of the gauge for a short period of power currently available.
time before there is a risk of damaging the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the power
engine. The location where the red zone be-
gins varies depending on the engine. meter displays the following driving statuses:
@ Drive system switched off
Power meter @ Vehicle recovering electrical energy
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive @® Drive system switched on
©
@ Vehicle is driving with the electric
©
RAZ-0575,
motor (green)
@ Ip
© Vehicle is driving with the electric
motor, the combustion engine can
switch on automatically (green
dash)
© Vehicle is driving with the combus-
tion engine (orange)
@ Vehicle is driving with maximum
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit power from the electric motor and
Fig. 7 Instrument cluster: power meter combustion engine for a brief peri-
od of time
[RAzZ-1117]
9 ©
Odometer
Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster

Fig. 8 Instrument cluster: power meter
80B012721BA
Fig. 9 Instrument cluster: reset button
15
Instrument cluster
The trip odometer and odometer are displayed in > Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
the status bar @) > page 12. cluster: Open the lap timer > page 148.
The trip odometer shows the distance driven When engine oil temperatures are low, the dis-
since it was last reset. It can be used to measure play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-
short distances. The odometer shows the total ter. The engine has reached its operating temper-
distance that the vehicle has been driven. ature when the engine oil temperature is be-
tween 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under
Resetting the trip odometer
normal driving conditions. The engine oil temper-
> To reset the trip odometer to zero, press the re- ature may be higher if there is heavy engine load
set button @. and high temperatures outside. This is not a
cause for concern as long as the E or = indica-
@) Tips tor lights do not turn on.
Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km
(kilometers). Boost indicator
Applies to: vehicles with boost indicator
Outside temperature Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en-

display gine load (meaning the current boost pressure)
may be indicated by a bar in the instrument clus-
The outside temperature is displayed in the sta-
ter.
tus bar @) > page 12.
> Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:
If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at
Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to
very low speeds, the temperature displayed in
the enhanced view > page 13.
the instrument cluster may be slightly higher
> Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument
than the actual temperature outside due to heat
cluster: Open the lap timer > page 148.
radiating from the motor.
At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake Vehicle functions

symbol appears in front of the temperature dis-
play > A. Overview
Z\ WARNING The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of

the driver information system. Additional vehicle
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based functions can be accessed depending on the vehi-
on the outside temperature display. Be aware cle equipment.
that there may be ice on roads even when the
outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C) > Press the [=] button on the multifunction steer-
and that ice can increase the risk of accidents. ing wheel.
— On-board computer > page 17

Engine oil temperature — Energy flow > page 106
indicator — Tachometer > page 14
Applies to: vehicles with engine oil temperature indicator —Lap times > page 148
— Lap statistics > page 148
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine
— Reduced display > page 14
oil temperature 7 may be indicated by a bar in
the instrument cluster.
» Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:

Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to
the enhanced view > page 13.
16
Instrument cluster
On-board computer Energy consumers

The Energy consumers view lists other equip-
Resetting values to zero
ment that is currently affecting fuel consump-
Requirement: the Consumption, Short-term tion. The display shows up to three equipment
memory, or Long-term memory display must be items. The equipment using the most power is
selected. listed first. If more than three items using power
> To reset the values in the respective memory to are switched on, the equipment that is currently
zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on using the most power is displayed. A gauge also
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec- shows the current total consumption of all other
ond. equipment.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call @) Tips

up the following displays in the on-board com- The date, time of day, and time and date for-
puter one at a time by turning the left thumb- mat can be set > page 236.
wheel on the multifunction steering wheel:
— Time and date > page 236

— Level
— Digital speedometer
— Plug-in hybrid drive: range display
— Average consumption > page 17
— Range
— Short-term memory overview
— Long-term memory overview
— Energy consumers > page 17
— Driver assistance
— Traffic sign recognition and traffic light infor-
mation
Short-term memory and long-term memory

The short-term memory collects driving informa-
tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
two hours after switching the ignition off, the
new values will be included when calculating the
current trip information.
Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

memory is not erased automatically. You can se-
lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
tion yourself.
Average consumption
The current consumption can be shown using a
bar graph. The average consumption stored in
the short-term memory is also displayed. If the
80B012721BA
bar is green, your vehicle is saving fuel (for exam-

ple, using recuperation).
17
Touch display
Touch displa > Press and hold an item until the associated op-
tions are displayed.
General touch display
operation Teen LCR ite
Applies to: touch display
The center display is a touchscreen. Operation is

very similar to operating a smartphone.
@) Tips
Certain gestures are not available in every
menu.
Fig. 12 Touch display: pressing and pulling

>)
Applies to: touch display : Moving an item
You can position some items at any location on

the screen.
>» Press and hold an item, and then use your fin-
ger to pull it to the desired location.
inching fingers together and ling a

Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing
Selecting a function or button

> Press the desired function or button.
Applies to: touch dis play
Fig. 13 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

ing them apart
Zooming in and out on an item

> To increase the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers apart.
> To decrease the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers together.
Fig. 11 Touch display: pressing and holding
Accessing options
For some items, you can access additional op-
tions that are not directly visible.
18
Touch display
tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of

Applies to: touch display the screen
Fig. 14 Touch display: rotating

Fig. 16 Touch display: dragging away from the edge of the
Rotating the view or perspective screen
> Rotate the item using two fingers. Opening hidden menus
The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden

eli menu.
> Use your finger to drag inward from the upper
or lower edge of the screen, or
> Press the E=] button.
Closing hidden menus

> Press within the menu and drag it toward the
upper or lower edge of the screen.
nformation about menu paths

Fig. 15 Touch display: @ dragging with one finger, @
dragging with two fingers This guide shows you at a glance the paths for
opening a desired menu and its settings and
Scrolling or browsing through menus/lists functions.
> To scroll through menus and lists, swipe up-
ward or downward with one finger. Examipls at's path
> To browse through menus and lists, swipe to > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the right or left with one finger. SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Tilting 3D displays Following the path

> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. > First, determine in which display the path
should be entered. In this example, it is the
MMI display.
> To open the home screen, press (Y.
> If the SETTINGS button is not displayed, use
your finger to swipe to the left or right until it
appears.
> Press the SETTINGS button.
> If the General button is not displayed, swipe
80B012721BA
toward the left or right with one finger until it

appears. >
19
Touch display
> Press the General button. > To switch the MMI on, press the On/Off knob.
> If the Date & time button is not displayed,
Restarting the MMI
swipe upward or downward with one finger un-
tilit appears. > Press and hold the On/Off knob for at least 10
> Press the Date & time button. seconds.
G) Tips Switching the center display on or off

> To switch the center display on or off, press the
If a menu or symbol is in parentheses in the
fo] button in the center console above the se-
path, for example, (General) or ({23), then it is
lector lever, or
an optional menu item that does not need to
> To switch the center display off, press LJin the
be used in every system.
notification center > page 23.
> To switch the center display on, touch the dis-
play or press lwJagain.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & Brightness > MMI. Introduction
Possible settings: You can display and operate Infotainment system

and vehicle functions using the touch display in
— Brightness
the Multi Media Interface, abbreviated MMI.
— Touchscreen Feedback
Configuration wizard
Multi Media Interface After starting for the first time, the configuration
wizard helps you to set up the vehicle, for exam-
Cem lucien)
ple to set the desired system language and con-
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain- nect a telephone.
ment system functions, such as entering a desti-
> Follow the instructions in the center display.
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary. Al-
>» Applies to: MMI: To access the configuration
ways be prepared to stop operating the Infotain-
wizard at a later time, select on the home
ment system in the interest of your safety and
screen: HELP > Configuration wizard.
the safety of other road users.
Tool tips
Z\ WARNING You can have tool tips displayed if necessary.
Only use the Infotainment system when road, They introduce various MMI functions to you.
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per-
mit and always in a way that allows you to > Applies to: MMI: To open the tool tips, select on
maintain complete control over your vehicle. the home screen: HELP > Tool tips > Basic in-
formation or Expert information.
@) Tips > Follow the instructions in the display.
Certain functions are not available while driv-

ing.
Sica memes
Switching the MMI on or off

> To switch the MMI off, press and hold the
On/Off knob > page 30, fig. 24 until all Info-
tainment functions are switched off.
20
Touch display
Menus and symbols
RAX-0176
[cae O)
Cer
ea Ec
ce
ae oO ane
Co coy aren PL)
eh aed CW Pa ss) eau)
Fig. 17 MMI: center display
Label Description
Displays selected information tiles and provides quick access to
Overview screen
certain functions > page 21
© | ©
©|@|
Return to the home screen or the overview page, open menus

Quick access bar
quickly > page 22
Display area Select a menu, apply settings, display content > page 22
Favorites Use or manage favorites > page 22
Operate functions and apply quick settings > page 23, display
®©®-@ Status bar of available notifications © > page 23, status indicator @)
=> page 23, time
Description of common symbols Symbol Description

You can operate the default functions using the Open additional actions
symbols that follow. The symbols may be found Open additional information for
in any menu, depending on the context. the selected menu
Description
Go back one level Overview screen
Close the menu The overview screen is the first menu page in the
Search for content MMI. Information about certain vehicle functions
Open explanations for a menu such as media, time, and phone is displayed in
tiles. The available information tiles can be rear-
Open settings for the selected
ranged on the overview screen or replaced with
menu
others. Depending on the system context, you
Open the submenu may be able to operate certain functions directly,
Adjust the settings such as muting the sound.
Set as favorite
Switching between the overview screen and
Switch functions on or off the home screen
80B012721BA
Switch functions on or off

> Press ( repeatedly until the desired view ap-
Switch functions on or off pears.
21
Touch display
Configuring the overview screen Switching between menu pages

> Press and hold an information tile on the over- Ifa menu contains multiple menu pages, Bas is
view screen. displayed in the display area. The white bar
> To change the position of an information tile, shows the location of the current menu page.
press and hold it and then slide it to the desired
> To switch between menu pages, swipe your fin-
position.
ger to the right or left.
> To replace an information tile, press Z and se-
lect the desired information tile.
> Press Done to complete the configuration. Wedgiesty
By creating favorites, you can have quick access

Quick access to various items, such as radio stations, frequent-
ly-used contacts, or vehicle settings. In the FA-
With quick access, you can return to the home
VORITES menu, the stored favorites are sorted
screen and quickly switch between four menus
by topic into information tiles.
that can be individually configured.
Adding a favorite
Returning to the home screen or opening a
menu quickly A YY button indicates if you can add a favorite,
such as a selected radio station. Depending on
> Press ( or one of the four buttons.
the context, you may also be able to add items
Configuring quick access without the yy button to the favorites, such as
entries ina list.
> Press and hold a button on the home screen
display area or in the quick access bar. > Press YY, or
> To move a button to the quick access bar, pull it > Press and hold an item ina list.
from the display area to the quick access bar. > Press Store as favorite. The selected item will
> To adjust the placement of the buttons in the be added as a favorite.
quick access bar, pull them to the desired posi-
tion in the bar. Using favorites
> Press Done to complete the configuration. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
FAVORITES. The stored favorites will be dis-
G) Tips played.
> To access a stored favorite, press that favorite.
The position of © cannot be adjusted.
Stored favorites can only be deleted or config-
Display area ured in the corresponding menu (such as RADIO).
You can freely change the location of the buttons Arranging information tiles
on the home screen display area. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
FAVORITES.
Configuring the display area
>» Press and hold the desired information tile.
> Press and hold a button on the home screen > Pull the information tile into the desired posi-
display area. tion.
> To adjust the placement of the buttons, pull > Press Done to confirm the configuration.
them to the desired locations.
> Press Done to complete the configuration.
22
Touch display
Of OB OB
[RAZ-1078
Oo OB OB om Ce ay
OM OB OB 2a
eA eee pe tceri or
PCr cog esa Cuneo
Fig. 18 Center display: frequently used symbols in the sta- Fig. 19 Center display: notification center
tus bar
Notifications can be displayed in the center dis-
The symbols in the status bar show you informa- play. After a specified time, they will be hidden
tion at a glance, such as ifa mobile device is con- and a corresponding symbol will appear in the
nected or if there is a data connection. The most status bar©) > page 21, fig. 17. In the notifica-
common symbols are listed in the table. tion center, you can view these notifications @)
Description > fig. 19, apply quick settings @), and operate
functions @).
There is a data connection. The bar indi-
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con- Using the notification center
nection. Data:is being transmitted now: > To open the notification center, pull the status
There is a data connection. The bar indi- bar downward, or
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con- > Press the E=] button on the status bar.
nection. No data is being transmitted now. > To turn quick settings on or off, press the re-
A mobile device is connected. The bar indi- spective symbol @).
cates the signal strength of the cell phone > To apply quick settings, press the respective
©
connection. symbol (2).

There is no data connection. > To obtain additional information about a notifi-
®©®e;)© |@|®|
cation, press it.

An error occurred with the mobile device
> To delete a notification, pull it toward the right
connection to the MMI.
edge of the screen.
A user is selected. Ifa question mark ap- > If there are more than four notifications in the
pears in the symbol ;y, the guest user is ac- notification center, the older notifications will
tive. be hidden. To display the older notifications,
A Bluetooth device is connected. drag your finger upward on the screen.
Bluetooth is switched on, but no Bluetooth
Setting which content is displayed
device is connected.
You can set whether some notifications should be
Audio playback was interrupted.
©|©
displayed.
The audio source is muted.
Privacy settings are enabled. The additional > To set the displayed content, press ©&, or
symbol indicates which privacy settings are > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
©
currently activated > page 305. SETTINGS > Notifications.

> Select and confirm which notifications should
The Integrated Toll Module is switched on.
be displayed.
The numbers 1 - 3+ indicate how many pas-
®
sengers are selected in the MMI.

80B012721BA
23
Touch display
Possible functions characters that have been entered @) and results

may be shown @).
Description
Opening text input
Press: switches the center display
on or off (this can also be done us- > Tap inside the input field @.
ing the button in the center con-
Switching input languages
sole)
Press and hold: switches the Requirement: multiple input languages must be
screen clearing mode on or off defined in the MMI > page 25.
(can also be done using the but- > To switch between the defined input languages,
ton in the center console) press the button (2).
Opens the garage door opener
Switching the input methods
function
> To switch between handwriting input or the on-
Possible quick settings
screen keyboard, press the button @).
Symbol Description
Entering text
Apply sound settings
Manage connected devices > Applies to: the on-screen keyboard: To enter
text, press the buttons on the keyboard. De-
Manage users
pending on the usage context, you may also be
= Set displayed content in the noti- able to swipe over the letters )).
fication center > Applies to handwriting input: To enter text,
YP OWES Set date and time simply write in the input area using one finger
©. You can write the separate characters next
a catilltia to each other or one on top of the other with-
out having to move your finger over after writ-
ing a character. When you end the entry, the
RAZ-0955,
writing is interpreted by the system.

> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard with an in-
ce
put language that uses accented characters: To
Prac
enter accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6),
cH
Prac press and hold a character that has accented
Los Angeles,
Dandy versions available and select the desired ac-
cented character.
> Applies to: handwriting input: To enter a space,
drag a line from left to right in the input sec-
Fig. 20 Center display: text input
tion©.
Overview > To select a location in the text input, press on
the desired location in the input field. You can
In the input fields of various menus, you can en- control the location more accurately using the
ter letters, numbers and characters, for example slider on the screen 6)”.
to find an address in navigation”. > To delete individual characters, press <I (4), or
The text that is currently entered is displayed in > Applies to: handwriting input: Drag a line from
the center display @). Depending on the context, right to left in the input section ©.
word suggestions may be given based on the > To delete multiple characters, press and hold
a@.
2) Depending on the country or equipment
24
Touch display
> To delete all characters at a specific location,

press and hold <]@) and drag up to the desired
location ), When released, the highlighted
characters are deleted.
Accepting suggested words or selecting

entries from the results list
> To accept a suggested word (2) or select an en-
try from the results list @), press on it.
> To display more content in the results list, drag
your finger upward or downward on the screen.
> To enlarge the results list, press the @) button
or pull it inward.
Setting the input language or keyboard

layout
>» Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Lan-
guage & keyboard > Keyboard.
> To define additional input languages, press the
© button.
> To change the keyboard layout for an input lan-
guage, press >. For example, you can select be-
tween QWERTZ and QWERTY.
80B012721BA
2) Depending on the country or equipment
25
Head-up display
Head-up display @) Note

Description To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display covering the head-up display, do not place any
objects in the projection opening.
RAZ-1083.
@ Tips
— Sunglasses with polarization filters and un-
favorable lighting conditions can impair visi-
bility of the display.
— An optimal display depends on the seat po-
sition and the height adjustment of the
head-up display.
— A special windshield is needed for the head-
Fig. 21 Instrument panel: knob for the head-up display
up display function.
The head-up display projects certain warnings or — For information on cleaning, see > table In-
selected information from the assist systems on terior cleaning on page 284.
the windshield. The display appears within the
driver's field of vision.
Switching on and off

> To switch the head-up display on, press the 67
knob @).
> To switch the head-up display off, press the S7
knob.
Adjusting the height

The height of the display can be adjusted to the
individual driver.
> Make sure you are seated correctly > page 62.
> Turn the knob & to the right or left.
Settings in the Infotainment system

» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display.
Possible settings:
— Display rotation
— Brightness
— Display contents: you can set which informa-
tion should be displayed. The display of certain
information and some of the red indicator
lights cannot be hidden.
26
Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system Description

General information eye aU mame ees eR
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
You can operate many functions in the vehicle Se

easily using voice commands. Drive me to
Where is a a
Using the voice recognition system optimally Connect
Pre)
Play
> Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. Eg
Maes
Speak louder when driving faster. coy
» Emphasize the words in the commands evenly
and do not leave long pauses. Fig. 22 Center display: voice recognition system
> Close the doors, the windows, and the sunroof*

to reduce background noise. Make sure that Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
passengers are not speaking when you are giv- switched on. A system language supported by
ing a voice command. the voice recognition system must be set. There
> Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free must be no phone calls in progress and the park-
microphone, which is in the roof headliner near ing aid must not be active.
the front interior lights. Operating by button «£
> Only the driver should speak to the system, be-
cause the handsfree microphone is aimed to- > Briefly press the «€ button on the multifunction
ward this seating position. steering wheel, or depending on the context,
press we in the center display.
ZA\ WARNING > Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To switch the voice recognition system off,
— Direct your full attention to driving. As the press and hold the «€ button on the multifunc-
driver, you have complete responsibility for tion steering wheel, or say or press Cancel (@)
safety in traffic. Only use the functions in > fig. 22.
such a way that you always maintain com-
plete control over your vehicle in all traffic Operating with voice commands
situations. > Applies to: MMI: To operate the voice recogni-
— Do not use the voice recognition system in tion system using voice commands, select on
emergencies because your voice may change the home screen: SETTINGS > General >
in stressful situations. The system may take (Speech dialog system) > Activate the speech
longer to dial the number or may not be dialog system with "Hey Audi".
able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency > Say the activation phrase Hey Audi together
number manually. with the desired command.
> To switch the voice recognition system off, say
G) Tips Cancel or press and hold the «£ button on the
There are no voice guidance* prompts when a multifunction steering wheel, or press @)
dialog is active. > fig. 22.
Commands and assistance

In the voice recognition system menu, possible
commands or help settings are displayed for the
current dialog @).
80B012721BA
> To receive additional help for the current dia-

log, say or press Help (2).
27
> To pause voice recognition, say or press Pause screen: SETTINGS > General > (Speech dialog
@. To reactivate voice recognition, press @) system) > Activate the speech dialog system
again or briefly press the «€ button on the mul- with "Hey Audi".
tifunction steering wheel. >» Say the activation phrase “Alexa” together with
the desired command.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system () Note
Command during voice output Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section
If the function is switched on, you can simply say =@ in General information on page 197.
a new command during a prompt.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Gi) Tips
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system > Audi provides access to services from third
Allow commands during voice output. party providers. Permanent availability cannot
be guaranteed, because that depends on the
Online recognizer
third party provider.
Applies to: vehicles with online recognizer
You can activate the online recognizer for addi-

External voice operation
tional functions and to improve the results of
Applies to: vehicles with external speech dialog system
voice recognition. A supported menu language
must be selected. When there is an active Inter- You can access and control the voice operation on
net connection, the spoken command is evaluat- a connected mobile device through your vehicle.
ed in the vehicle and online.
Switching external voice operation on or off
> When you switch on the voice recognition sys-
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
tem for the first time, a menu for the online
switched on. A cell phone must be connected to
recognizer will open, or
the MMI with the Handsfree profile > page 186.
The mobile device being connected must have
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system >
voice control that can be controlled externally.
Consent to online speech recognizer.
There must be no phone calls in progress and the
> Read the licensing agreements and accept
parking aid must not be active.
them.
> To switch on the external voice operation, press
Amazon Alexa and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
tion steering wheel.
You can activate Amazon Alexa to access certain > To switch off the external voice operation, press
functions. A reduced number of commands for and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Amazon Alexa are available during this. tion steering wheel or press Cancel.
Requirement: you must be logged in to your Using external voice operation
myAudi account in the vehicle. The online recog-
nizer must be activated. A system language that >» Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To reactivate voice recognition when it is
is supported by both the voice recognition system
paused, press the w€ button briefly on the mul-
and Amazon Alexa must be selected.
tifunction steering wheel or press Resume.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
USER > Connect to Amazon Alexa. G) Tips
> Follow the instructions in the display.
Audi simply provides access to control your
> Applies to: MMI: To operate Amazon Alexa us-
cell phone with voice operation and does not >
ing voice commands, select on the home
28
take any responsibility for the contents and

commands within the external voice control.
80B012721BA
29
Global functions
Global functions Quick access steering wheel button

Depending on vehicle equipment, the button ©)
Additional function
may provide quick access to various functions.
buttons
> @ button, see > page 94.
You can program the >K button with various func-
tions.
> To bring up the function that is currently set,
press the button.
> To perform the function that is currently set,
press and hold the >K button, or:
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Steering wheel
button assignment.
> Select and confirm the desired function.
Switching voice operation on or off

«€ button @, see > page 27.
Using the telephone functions
button @, see > page 192.
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that

Fig. 24 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Adjusting the volume
times.
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a
system message (for example, from the voice
recognition system) when the sound is playing.
> To increase or decrease the volume, turn the

right thumbwheel @) © fig. 23 upward or
downward, or turn the On/Off knob > fig. 24 to
the right or left.
> To mute, push the right thumbwheel or the
On/Off knob.
Selecting the previous/next track or station

> Press the ld<J/ DP button @ or briefly press
the On/Off knob to the left/right.
Fast forward/rewind
> Press and hold the ld<1/ DD] button @, or
press the On/Off knob to the left or right until
the desired playback position is reached.
30
Personalization
Personalization @) Tips
Users — Certain Infotainment and vehicle settings
(such as mirrors, last radio stations) may be
General information stored, depending on vehicle equipment.
Applies to: vehicles with personalized user settings
You can find additional information in the
Depending on vehicle equipment and your coun- MMI. Select on the home screen: SETTINGS
try, your vehicle may be able to manage various > General > Legal notes > About Audi con-
users in the MMI. Each user will be assigned the nect.
settings that they last used. — Applies to: myAudi users: The stored set-
tings can only be transferred to vehicles
Before you begin driving, you can select a user in
that are capable of receiving the transmit-
the MMI and load personalized Infotainment and
ted information. There may be restrictions
vehicle settings.
that prevent this, particularly in other coun-
Possible users in the MMI: tries.
— myAudi user: as a myAudi user, you can use — Applies to: myAudi users: The settings can
Audi connect services that require a myAudi ac- only be transferred and loaded when there
count. Certain settings are transferred online to is coverage from the applicable mobile
your myAudi account. If you log into your phone service provider.
myAudi account in another vehicle, you can — Applies to: myAudi users with PIN protec-
load your settings in the other vehicle. tion switched on: If the MMI displays a de-
— Local user: as a local user, you can only store tected user but you simply start driving or
settings in the current vehicle. Your settings wait without entering the 4-digit PIN, then
cannot be transferred to other vehicles. Audi the guest user will be selected. Some set-
connect services that can only be used with a tings for the detected myAudi user will be
myAudi account will not be available. transferred to the guest user.
— Guest: as a guest, you can store settings in the
vehicle without changing the settings for other OTe e le (ta 4
users. Audi recommends only using the guest Applies to: vehicles with user management
user temporarily, because settings can be over-

Opening user management
written by other users.
Applies to: MMI
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following > Press USER on the home screen.
options may be used to detect the active user so
that the user settings can be loaded automatical- Selecting a user
Applies to: MMI
ly before you start driving.
— Vehicle key > Press on the desired user.
> Enter the 4-digit myAudi PIN, if necessary.
Requirement: the driver's door has been opened.
Adding myAudi users
The detected user must be shown in the MMI.
Applies to MMI and Audi connect
Confirm the user shown, select another user
= page 31, or add another user > page 31. Requirement: you must have successfully regis-
tered at my.audi.com and have created a 4-digit
ZA WARNING myAudi PIN.
It may not be possible to load Infotainment > Press Add user.
and vehicle settings, or they may only load > Press Log in now to log in with your myAudi
80B012721BA
partially. The driver is always responsible for credentials.

the Infotainment and vehicle settings in order > Follow the system instructions.
to reduce the risk of an accident.
31
Personalization
To transfer existing destinations from the MMI to

your myAudi account one time, confirm the sys- Applies to: vehicles with key user management
tem prompts with Yes.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the vehicle
You can set a profile pictured for your myAudi owner must be set as the key user for certain
user at my.audi.com. Audi connect vehicle control services and possibly
for functions on demand.
Adding a local user
Applies to: MMI The key user automatically has remote access au-
> Press Add user. thorization that allows control of certain func-
> Press Initiate setup. tions such as Audi connect vehicle control serv-
> Press Local user. ices through the myAudi app.
> Follow the system instructions.
Setting the key user
Editing users Requirement: a key user must not be set yet.
Applies to: MMI
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a
Requirement: the user must be selected and that
myAudi account. Register at my.audi.com.
user’s settings must be loaded. > Add your vehicle at my.audi.com and then veri-
> Press on the user. fy your myAudi account using the verification
process that is provided.
Depending on the user type, available options
may include the following.
USER > (¥ > Set key user.
PIN protection: when this function is switched > Follow the system instructions and enter the
on, the 4-digit myAudi PIN must be entered be- 10-digit vehicle code > page 38. The key user
fore any settings for this user can be loaded. is set. You have the rights to use the Audi con-
nect vehicle control services > page 199 that
Remove the user from the vehicle: the user will
depend on vehicle equipment as well as the
only be deleted in the vehicle from the list in the
ability to manage other vehicle functions and
MMI.
any other users.
Change name: you can change the name of the
local user. Managing additional users
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
Removing users
grant authorization for additional users to use
Applies to: MMI
Audi connect vehicle control services at my.audi.
> Select on the home screen: Users > > one or com.
more entries > Delete. The user will only be de-
leted from the list in the MMI. The authoriza- Removing the key user
tions for the user in the vehicle (such as key If you remove the key user, all other users that
user) will not be removed. were stored by the key user at my.audi.com and
their authorizations will be deleted. It will no
@ Tips longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehi-
— The guest user cannot be renamed. cle control services, depending on the vehicle
— When changing users, the new user settings equipment.
are loaded in the vehicle. Requirement: a key user must be set.
— Ifa user has the & symbol, PIN protection is
active. To switch off PIN protection, you can > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
edit the user. USER > @} > Remove key user.
— Depending on the country, you may be able
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
32
Personalization
@) Tips
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
— You do not need to log into the vehicle with
a myAudi user in order to use Audi connect
vehicle control services, which depend on
the vehicle equipment.
— If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
the factory default settings.
— Store the vehicle code in a secure place. It
may be necessary to re-enter the vehicle
code.
— When entering the vehicle code, please note
that the code is case-sensitive.
— If you do not have the 10-digit vehicle code,
contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
80B012721BA
33
Opening and closing
Opening and closing Automatic locking

If you unlock the vehicle but then do not open
Central locking any of the doors, the luggage compartment, or
(eT e e eeu) the hood within a short period time, the vehicle
locks again automatically. This feature prevents
ZA WARNING the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked
for a long period of time.
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This applies Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
particularly when children remain in the ve-
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the
hicle. Otherwise, children could start the ve-
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
hicle or operate electrical equipment (such
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The ve-
as power windows), which increases the risk
hicle will unlock again if the unlock function in
of an accident.
the central locking switch is pressed, the “P” gear
— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys-
is engaged, or the ignition is switched off.
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the
outside, no one - especially children - should You can open the doors individually from the in-
remain in the vehicle, because the windows side by pulling the door handle one time. To open
can no longer open from the inside the rear doors individually, you must pull the
= page 37, Anti-theft alarm system. door handle twice.
Locked doors make it more difficult for In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment,
emergency workers to enter the vehicle,
the doors will also automatically unlock to allow
which puts lives at risk.
access to the vehicle.
Unintentionally locking yourself out

Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and
All doors and the luggage compartment lid can
the luggage compartment lid are closed and
be centrally unlocked and locked at once. You can
there is no key in the vehicle. This reduces the
select in the MMI if the entire vehicle or only the
risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
driver's door should unlock when unlocking the
vehicle > page 35. The turn signals flash twice The following features help to reduce the risk of
when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
you lock the vehicle. If they do not flash when — If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
locking, check if all doors and lids are closed. be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may mote control key or by touching the locking
have different options for centrally unlocking and sensor* on a door.
locking your vehicle. — If the vehicle key that was used most recently is
inside the luggage compartment, the luggage
— Vehicle key > page 39
compartment lid will automatically open again
— Sensors in the door handles > page 39
after it closes >.
— Lock cylinder in the driver's door > page 37
— If the vehicle key that was last used is detected
— Interior central locking switch > page 36 inside the vehicle, then the vehicle cannot be
Vehicle key locked from the outside > ©.
The term “vehicle key” refers to the remote con- Z\ WARNING

trol key or convenience key*. The convenience
Observe the safety precautions > page 34. >
key* is a remote control key with special func-
tions > page 39 and > page 97.
34
Opening and closing
@) Note Setting the central locking system
The following applies when locking the vehi- You can adjust the central locking system to your
cle: preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
— If the vehicle key that was last used is de- equipment.
tected inside the passenger compartment,
then the vehicle cannot be locked from the
HICLE > Settings & Service > Central locking.
outside using the sensor. Take the vehicle
key with you and lock the vehicle again. Oth- Door unlocking
erwise, the vehicle will not be protected
—If you select All, all doors and the luggage
against unauthorized access.
compartment lid will be unlocked when unlock-
— If you try to lock the vehicle using the but- ing the vehicle.
ton on the vehicle key while the front pas-
— If you select Driver's door, only the driver's
senger's or rear door is open, and you acci-
door will be unlocked. To unlock all doors and
dentally place the vehicle key inside the pas-
the luggage compartment lid, press the (9 but-
senger compartment and close the door,
ton on the vehicle key twice. In vehicles with a
the vehicle will lock at first. But if the key-
convenience key”, only the driver's door will un-
less system detects a vehicle key inside the
lock when you pull the driver's door handle. If
vehicle after it locks, then the vehicle will
you pull another door handle, the entire vehicle
unlock again. The turn signals will flash sev-
will be unlocked.
eral times to indicate this. If you do not
open the vehicle to remove the vehicle key The entire vehicle will always be locked f you
within a brief period, then the vehicle will press the &@ button.
lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle
Long press to open windows
from being left unlocked for long periods of
time. The vehicle key will then be locked in- You can select if all windows and the panoramic
side the vehicle. glass roof* should open using the vehicle key
— If the luggage compartment lid closes and = page 46, Convenience opening and closing. If
the system detects that the last vehicle key you press and hold the f button on the vehicle
that was used is inside the luggage com- key, all of the windows and the panoramic glass
partment, then the luggage compartment roof* will close.
lid will open again. The turn signals will
Disable rear lid handle
flash several times to indicate this. The
doors will lock. Always take the vehicle key You can select if the luggage compartment lid
with you, or unauthorized persons may be can open with the handle. If you activate this
able to enter the vehicle. function, the luggage compartment lid can only
be opened with the <¥ or 4s button on the vehi-
@ Tips cle key or in the driver's door. In vehicles with a
convenience key*, you can still open the luggage
— Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve-
compartment lid using the handle if an author-
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
ized convenience key is detected > page 41.
—The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when
you lock the vehicle. If the LED turns on for Fold mirrors
approximately 30 seconds after locking,
You can select if the exterior mirrors automatical-
there is a malfunction in the central locking
ly fold in when locking.
system. Have the problem corrected by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
80B012721BA
Service Facility.
35
Opening and closing
Tone when locking!) — The central locking switch is inoperative

You can select if an audio signal sounds when when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
locking the vehicle.
WEEE
Te (4
Open with convenience key
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
2 Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before
You can deactivate the feature for unlocking us- leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
ing the sensor > page 39.
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Secure
the vehicle before exiting by selecting the “P” se-
(etiam ere den) in] lector lever position. Drive immediately to an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
S
3
=2
Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
c
oa
2B Central locking: malfunction! See owner's
manual
There is a central locking malfunction. If the

doors cannot lock, you can emergency lock the
doors > page 37. Drive to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
ately to have the malfunction corrected.
Fig. 25 Driver's door: central locking switch
> To lock or unlock the vehicle, press the or B

button > A\.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking

switch, the following applies:
— The doors and the luggage compartment lid

cannot be opened from the outside for security
reasons, for example, to reduce the risk of un-
authorized entry while stopped at a light.
— The LED in the central locking switch turns on
when all doors are closed and locked.
— You can open the doors individually from the in-
side by pulling the door handle one time. To
open the rear doors individually, you must pull
the door handle twice.
— In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment,
the doors unlock automatically to allow access
to the vehicle.
Z\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > page 34.
— The central locking button works when the
ignition is switched off.
D_ This function is not available in all countries.
36
Opening and closing
Mechanically unlocking and locking the Locking the front passenger's door and rear
doors doors using the mechanical key
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the
lock the doors separately. doors
(a) or in the latch opening @) > fig. 27. It is
only visible when the door is open.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 38.

> If necessary, remove the cap from the opening
> fig. 27.
> Insert the mechanical key into the slot on the
inside and turn it all the way to the right (right
door) or left (left door).
> If necessary, install the cap in the opening and
close the door.
Fig. 26 Driver's door: door lock cylinder Once the front passenger’s door or rear doors
[RAz-1149| close, it will no longer be possible to open them
from the outside. The front doors can be opened
from the inside by pulling the door handle one
time. The rear doors can be unlocked from the in-
side by pulling the door handle one time and
then opened by pulling the door handle again. If
the child safety lock in one of the rear doors is ac-
tivated, you must first pull the door handle from
the inside. Then you can open the door from the
outside.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 34.
OMe aa)
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle

break-in, audio and visual warning signals are
Fig. 27 Door: mechanically locking
triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switch-
ed on or off when locking or unlocking your vehi-
Unlocking or locking the driver's door with cle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
the mechanical key matically after a certain amount of time.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 38. Switching the alarm off manually
> To unlock the driver's door, turn the mechanical
> To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
key to the unlock position in the direction of ar-
the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
row @) > fig. 26.
> Pull the door handle to open the driver's door. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the anti-
> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" position theft alarm system may have the following fea-
and turn the mechanical key once to the close tures: >
80B012721BA
position @=> A\.
37
Opening and closing
Break-in security feature

The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the
doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid.
RAZ-0720,
Interior/towing protection monitor
The alarm will be triggered if there are move-
ments detected in the vehicle interior (for exam-
ple, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehi-
cle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being
towed).
You can prevent the alarm from being triggered

by deactivating the interior/towing protection
monitor. Fig. 28 Your vehicle key set
Deactivating the interior/towing protection @ Vehicle key

monitor
You can unlock and lock your vehicle with the ve-
There are the following options for deactivating hicle key.
the interior/towing protection monitor:
@ Mechanical key and release buttons for
> Press the & button on the vehicle key a second the mechanical key
time within two seconds. Or
A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key.
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
To remove it, press the release button and re-
Touch the sensor on the door handle a second
move the mechanical key.
time within two seconds. Or
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the Using the mechanical key, you can:
close position a second time within two sec-
— Applies to: vehicles with lockable glove com-
onds.
partment: locking/unlocking the glove com-
> Applies to: vehicles with MMI: Select on the
partment.
home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service >
— Manually unlock and lock the doors > page 37.
Interior monitoring.
— Applies to: sedan with locking backrests: Lock-
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing ing and unlocking the backrest > page 86.
protection monitor will stay off until the next — Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the
time the vehicle is unlocked. emergency release > page 44.
@® Key fob with vehicle code

ZA WARNING Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
No one, especially children, should stay in the
Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the vehicle
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle
cause the windows can no longer be opened
control services* for your vehicle with this vehicle
from the inside. Locked doors make it more
code. For additional information, see
difficult for emergency workers to enter the
=> page 199. If a key fob is lost, contact an au-
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
Facility.
@) Tips
The interior/towing protection monitoring on-
ly functions correctly when the windows and
the roof* are closed.
38
Opening and closing
@ PANIC button
@) Tips
In an emergency, you can press the PANIC button
— The vehicle key function can be temporarily
to trigger the alarm for the anti-theft alarm sys-
disrupted by interference from transmitters
tem. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers
near the vehicle working in the same fre-
will turn on if you trigger the alarm.
quency range (such as a mobile device or ra-
—To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] but- dio equipment). Always check if your vehicle
ton @)° fig. 28. is locked.
—To turn the alarm off, press the red [PANIC] but- — Applies to MMI: You can view the number of
ton again. keys programmed to the vehicle by selecting
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Lost key/replacing a key Service > Vehicle information.
If a vehicle key is lost, contact an authorized Audi — The system complies with United States FCC
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have regulations and ISED regulations
this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to => page 311.
bring all keys with you.
If a key is lost, you should report it to your insur- Unlocking and locking the vehicle
ance company.
B8W-0148
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of
the vehicle.
In some cases, it may not be possible to start the

vehicle if there is a vehicle key from a different
vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the vehicle key

Fig. 29 Door handle: sensor for locking
When driving, service and maintenance-relevant
data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. An Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service have various options for unlocking and locking
Facility can read out this data and tell you about your vehicle. The settings in the MMI specify
the work your vehicle needs. which doors will unlock > page 35.
ZA\ WARNING Unlocking or locking using the vehicle key

buttons
> To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button
=> page 38, fig. 28.
@) Note
> To lock the vehicle, press the ff button once.
Protect the key against high temperatures
and direct sunlight. Unlocking or locking using the sensors
() For the sake of the environment > To unlock a door or the luggage compartment
XE Do not dispose of vehicle keys in household lid, grasp the door handle or luggage compart-
trash. They contain materials that can be re- ment lid handle.
cycled. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or > To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
authorized Audi Service Facility for more in- the sensor on the door handle once >fig. 29.
80B012721BA
formation. Do not grasp the door handle while locking the

vehicle, or else the vehicle will not lock. The >
39
Opening and closing
door cannot be opened for a brief period direct- the vehicle key
ly after locking it. This way you have the oppor-
tunity to check if the doors locked correctly.
RAZ-0722
Unlocking and locking with the Audi connect
vehicle control service
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Requirement: Audi connect vehicle control serv-

ices must be activated > page 199. The vehicle
must be parking and the ignition must be switch-
ed off.
ZX WARNING
BFV-0277
G) Tips
— Only use the vehicle key when you can see
the vehicle.
— The vehicle can only be locked when the "P”
selector lever position is engaged.
— Do not use the vehicle key to lock and un-
lock when you are inside the vehicle. Other- Fig. 31 Vehicle key (rear side): removing the battery holder
wise, you could trigger the anti-theft
alarm*. If this happens, press the @ unlock LED in the vehicle key
button. The LED (@) indicates the vehicle key function.
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks
@) Tips
once.
> If you press and hold a button (convenience
— When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
convenience key cannot be more than ap- > If the LED does not blink, the vehicle key bat-
proximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the tery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehi-
door handle or luggage compartment. cle key.
— Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless
access) can be deactivated in the MMI sys- Replacing the vehicle key battery
tem > page 35. > Press the release buttons (2) > fig. 30 and re-
— To prevent the vehicle battery from dis- move the mechanical key.
charging, the energy management gradual- > Press the release buttons @) > fig. 31 while
ly switches off convenience functions that pulling the battery holder out of the vehicle key
are not needed. You then may no longer be in the direction of the arrow.
able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors. > Replace the battery and insert the new battery
with the “+” symbol facing up.
> Slide the battery holder carefully into the vehi-
cle key.
> Insert the mechanical key.
40
Opening and closing
ZA WARNING inside it. To reduce the risk of injury, do not

allow children to play in or around the vehi-
If batteries or coin cell batteries are swal-
ley
lowed or enter the body in any other way, they
—To reduce the risk of injuries by pinching,
can cause serious or fatal injuries within a
make sure that no one is in the operating
short period of time. There is a risk of chemi-
area of the luggage compartment lid, in-
cal burns.
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and
— Keep vehicle keys and key fobs with batter-
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid.
ies out of the reach of children.
— After closing the luggage compartment lid,
— Keep new or used batteries away from chil-
make sure that it is latched. The luggage
dren.
compartment lid could open suddenly while
— If the battery compartment on a vehicle key
driving, which would increase the risk of an
does not close securely, stop using the key
accident.
and keep it away from children.
— Never drive with the luggage compartment
— Seek medical attention immediately if you
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
suspect that a battery was swallowed or has
from the surrounding area can enter the ve-
entered the body in any other way.
hicle interior and increase the risk of asphyx-
iation.
@ For the sake of the environment
— If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle
Discharged batteries must be disposed of us- rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the
ing methods that will not harm the environ- luggage compartment lid may not open
ment. Do not dispose of them in household completely under certain circumstances or it
trash. could close by itself if open due to the extra
weight. Therefore, the open luggage com-
G) Tips partment lid must be given additional sup-
Replacement batteries for the vehicle key port or the cargo must first be removed
must meet the same specifications as the from the luggage rack.
original battery. — Applies to vehicles with power-operated or
sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid:
Luggage compartment Pay careful attention when closing the lug-
gage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could
lid
cause serious injury to yourself or others de-
General information spite the pinch protection.
ZA\ WARNING @) Note

— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys- The luggage compartment lid can bump into
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the objects such as the garage ceiling when open-
outside, no one - especially children - should ing and become damaged.
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer open from the inside @) Tips
= page 37. Locked doors make it more diffi- — When the vehicle is locked, the luggage
cult for emergency workers to enter the ve- compartment lid can be unlocked separately
hicle, which puts lives at risk. by pressing the “S button twice on the vehi-
— Always close and lock the luggage compart- cle key. The luggage compartment lid locks
ment lid and the doors when the vehicle is automatically when it is closed again.
80B012721BA
not in use. Otherwise someone such as a — The ability to open the luggage compart-
child could enter the vehicle through the ment lid using the handle can be deactivat-
luggage compartment and become locked ed or activated in the MMI > page 35. >
41
Opening and closing
— Applies to: vehicles with fixed rear backr- omatic luggage compar nt lid
ests: The luggage compartment lid can be Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid
unlocked from the inside in an emergency.
Opening and closing the luggage

compartment lid
Fig. 33 Luggage compartment lid: @ closing button*, @)

lock button* (vehicles with convenience key*)
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and

closed automatically > A\ in General informa-
Fig. 32 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment
lid tion on page 41.
Opening the luggage compartment lid

Opening the luggage compartment lid
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
» Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull
> Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull
the << button* in the driver's door. Or
the < button* in the driver's door. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
> Applies to: vehicles without convenience key:
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
Unlock the vehicle or the luggage compartment
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
lid using the B/ Zs button on the vehicle key
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
and press the handle in the luggage compart-
compartment.
ment lid. Or
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press Closing the luggage compartment lid
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
> Press the < button in the luggage compart-
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
ment lid. Or
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment
compartment.
lid. Or
Closing the luggage compartment lid > Press the luggage compartment lid downward
slightly. Or
> Applies to vehicles without automatic luggage
> When the ignition is switched on, pull the <
compartment lid: Use the inside grip to pull the
switch in the driver's door > page 42, fig. 32
luggage compartment lid down and allow it to
until the luggage compartment lid is closed. Or
drop gently to close it. Or
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
» Applies to vehicles with automatic luggage
and hold the 4s button on the vehicle key while
compartment lid: Note > page 42.
the ignition is switched off until the luggage
compartment lid closes. Make sure there is
ZA WARNING enough distance (maximum of approximately 9
Observe the safety precautions > page 41. feet (3 m)) between you and the luggage com-
partment lid. Or
> Applies to vehicles with convenience key: When
the ignition is switched off, press the < / fi* >
42
Opening and closing
button in the luggage compartment lid. The ve- Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of
hicle key must not be more than approximately force needed.
4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compart-
ment and it must not be inside the vehicle. If Opening and closing the luggage
you press the &* button, then the vehicle will loYpay atl MUU Lm celol mls C dC <UTs)
lock. movement)
Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compart-
Storing the luggage compartment lid ment lid
opening position
BGA-0025
The position must be at a certain height or higher
to store.
> Bring the luggage compartment lid into the de-

sired open position. If you want to move the
luggage compartment lid to a lower position,
move it slowly in small increments; otherwise,
the luggage compartment lid will close auto-
matically.
> Press and hold the <3 button in the luggage Fig. 34 Vehicle rear: foot motion (example)
compartment lid for at least four seconds to
store the new opening position. A visual and The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
audio signal will follow. closed automatically » > /\ in General informa-
> To set a higher open position, wait at least five tion on page 41.
seconds and then carefully press the luggage Requirements: you must be carrying your conven-
compartment lid upward. ience key* with you. The ignition must be switch-
> Press and hold the <3 button again for at least ed off. You must be standing at the center behind
four seconds to store the desired opening posi- the luggage compartment lid.
tion.
> Move your foot back and forth under the bump-
The automatic opening or closing will stop if: er one time > fig. 34. Do not touch the bumper.
— You press the << button or press the handle in Make sure you have firm footing. The luggage
the luggage compartment lid again Or compartment lid will open or close » once the
system detects the movement. The automatic
— If something blocks the luggage compartment
opening or closing will be canceled if you re-
lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move.
peat one of the movements described.
If you press the <s button or press the handle in
the luggage compartment lid again, the luggage Z\, WARNING
compartment lid will open again.
A\ WARNING
@) Tips
The luggage compartment lid will only open
@ Tips or close )) if you perform the movement as
described. This prevents the luggage com-
The luggage compartment lid can be operat- partment lid from opening or closing due to
ed manually if the vehicle battery is low. It is similar movements ), such as when you walk
necessary to use more force when doing this. between the rear of the vehicle and your
80B012721BA
D_ The closing function applies to vehicles that also have au-

tomatic luggage compartment lid operation.
43
Opening and closing
garage door. In some situations, the function

\ WARNING
may be limited or temporarily unavailable.
This may happen if: If you have folded the backrests into the up-
— You are standing too close to the bumper or right position, always check if the lock is cor-
too far away from it rectly engaged by pulling forward on the
backrest.
— The luggage compartment lid was closed or
opened immediately beforehand
— You park close to a hedge and the branches Child safety lock
move back and forth under the vehicle for a The child safety lock prevents the rear doors
long period of time from being opened from the inside and the rear
— You clean your vehicle, for example with a power windows from being operated.
pressure washer or in a car wash
— There is heavy rain
— The bumper is very dirty, for example after
driving on salt-covered roads
— There is interference to the vehicle key's ra-
dio signal, such as from mobile devices or
remote controls
Mechanically unlocking the luggage

compartment lid
82S
=
=a
3
Fig. 35 Inner luggage compartment lid: access to the

emergency release Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety locks
Fig. 37 Rear door: manual child safety lock
> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seat for-

Vehicles with @ button
ward > page 86. Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks
> Pry the cover <3 out using a suitable tool (such
as a screwdriver) or the mechanical key if neces- > To activate and deactivate the child safety lock
sary > fig. 35. (door handle and power window switch) for the
> To unlock the luggage compartment lid, press a rear door, press the left or right 8 button in
the lever in the direction of the arrow using a the driver's door @) that corresponds to that
suitable object (such as a screwdriver) or using rear door > fig. 36. The indicator light in the
the mechanical key if necessary. button turns on/blinks.
> Fold the backrest backward until it locks into > Make sure the child safety lock is working by
place. checking the function on the rear power win-
dow switch and door handle.
ZA\ WARNING
44
Opening and closing
Vehicles with & button Power windows

Applies to: vehicles with manual child safety lock
Opening and closing the windows
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock
for the power window switch in the rear doors,
[RAZ-0723
press the button in the driver's door (2)
> fig. 36. The indicator light in the button turns
on/blinks.
> To activate or deactivate the manual child safe-
ty lock for the rear door handle, open the re-
spective rear door and turn the key switch with
the mechanical key in the direction of the arrow
or opposite the direction of the arrow 9fig. 37.
This will disable the function of the rear door Fig. 38 Driver's door: power window switch
handle.
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by Power window switches:
checking the function on the rear power win- @ Left front door
dow switch and door handle.
® Right front door
Applies to: vehicles with power child safety locks: @® Left rear door
It is not possible to operate the rear climate con- @ Right rear door
trol system* when the child safety lock is activat-
ed. The SET REAR function allows you to adjust Opening and closing the windows
all settings in the rear using the climate control The driver can control all power windows. All
system controls in the cockpit. power window switches are equipped with a two-
stage function:
Message in the instrument cluster display
> To open or close the window completely, press
@/8 Child safety lock: malfunction! Please
the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to
contact Service
the second level. The operation will stop if the
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock. switch is pressed or pulled again.
Press the @/ & button again. > To select a position in between opened and
closed, press or pull the switch to the first level
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
until the desired window position is reached.
Facility to have the malfunction repaired. Correcting a malfunction in the one-touch
up/down function
Z\ WARNING
You can reactivate the one-touch up/down func-
— Observe the safety precautions > page 34. tion if it malfunctions.
—A malfunction in the child safety lock could
allow the rear doors to be opened from the > Pull the power window switch up until the win-
inside, which increases the risk of an acci- dow is completely raised.
dent. > Release the switch and pull it up again for at
least one second.
ZA WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > page 34.
— Never close the windows carelessly or in an
80B012721BA
uncontrolled manner, because this increases

the risk of injury.
4s
Opening and closing
G) Tips G) Tips
— You can still open and close the windows for Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass
several minutes after turning the ignition roof: If the sunshade is closed, it will auto-
off. The power window switch is not disa- matically open partially or halfway when the
bled until the driver's door or front passeng- roof is tilted or opened.
er's door is opened.
— The power windows are equipped with pinch Panoramic glass roof
protection. The automatic window may stop
closing and will open all the way again even emu aCe em ele lir)
if no obstacle is detected. Pull the power
sunshade
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof and roof sun-
window switch up until the window is com- shade
pletely raised.
Convenience opening and closing

Convenience opening and closing the

windows and roof*
You can set in the MMI if all windows or the roof*
should open or close all at once > page 35, Set-
ting the central locking system.
Fig. 39 Headliner: panoramic glass roof and sunshade*
> Press and hold the (@ or @ button on the vehicle
buttons
key until all windows and the roof* have
reached the desired position > A\. The control buttons are equipped with a two-
> Touch the sensor* on the door handle until all stage function.
of the windows and the roof* are closed. Do not
place your hand in the door handle when doing When tilting or opening the roof, the roof sun-
this. shade will open partially or halfway if the sun-
shade is closed.
When all of the windows and the roof* are
closed, the turn signals will flash once. Operating the roof sunshade
Requirement: the roof must be closed.
ZA WARNING > Opening and closing the sunshade: push the -&&
— Never close the windows or the roof* care- switch in the headliner @) briefly toward the
lessly or in an uncontrolled manner, because rear or forward to the second level.
this increases the risk of injury. > Partially opening the sunshade: press the
— For security reasons, the windows and the switch to the first level until the sunshade
roof* can only be opened and closed with reaches the desired position.
the vehicle key at a maximum distance of
approximately 6.5 feet (2 m) away from the Operating the roof
vehicle. Always pay attention when using > Tilting the roof: press the 4S switch in the
the & button to close the windows and the headliner briefly up to the second level @.
roof* so that no one is pinched. The closing > Closing the tilted roof: pull the > switch down
process will stop immediately when the f} briefly to the second level.
button is released. > Opening the roof: slide the 2> switch back
briefly twice in a row to the second level @). >
46
Opening and closing
> Closing the opened roof: push the 23 switch Garage door opener
forward briefly to the second level.
> Opening or closing partially: slide the A>
switch to the first level and hold it there until Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
the roof reaches the desired position. With the garage door opener, you can activate
Quick opening systems such as the garage doors, security sys-
tems or house lights from inside your vehicle.
You can also open the roof and roof sunshade in These functions are operated in the MMI. Multi-
one movement. ple receivers can be programmed, which can con-
> Push the 2S switch back briefly to the second trol the functions of up to eight!) hand-held
level
@ twice in a row. transmitters.
Roof emergency closing ZA WARNING

If an object is detected when closing, the roof — When operating or programming the garage
will open again automatically. In this case, you door opener, make sure that no people or
can then close it with the power emergency clos- objects are in the area immediately sur-
ing function. rounding the equipment. People can be in-
jured or property can be damaged if struck
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-
when closing.
tomatically, pull the applicable button until the
— Do not allow yourself to be distracted from
roof is closed.
traffic by the viewing and operating the dis-
ZA WARNING plays.
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten- @) Tips

tion when closing the roof. Always switch the
—If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
ignition off and take the key with you when
the factory default settings > page 237.
leaving the vehicle.
— The system complies with United States FCC
regulations and ISED regulations
@) Note
> page 311.
Always close the roof when you leave the vehi-
cle and when there is precipitation to reduce G) Tips
the risk of damage to the interior equipment,
Before you program your system to the ga-
particularly the electronic equipment.
rage door opener, first check the compatibili-
ty:
@) Tips
— Ask an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— After switching off the ignition, the roof and Audi Service Facility or check at www.
sunshades can still be operated for several homelink.com. You can also find more infor-
minutes as long as neither of the front mation about HomeLink there.
doors have been opened.
— You can display information about Home-
—It is not possible to open the roof when Link (compatibility level/status/country
temperatures are too low. code/HomeLink generation) in the MMI:
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Set-
tings & Service > Garage door opener > @.
80B012721BA
)) The possible number of hand-held transmitters depends

on the equipment.
47
Opening and closing
> If you would like to program other systems, se-

Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener lect on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Service > Garage door opener. Select the de-
Requirements: the remote control transmitter
sired button: G@). Follow the instructions in the
must be programmed > page 48, the vehicle
MMI.
must be within range of the system, and the igni-
> If you would like to reprogram systems that are
tion must be switched on.
already programmed, select on the home
There are multiple options to open or close the screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
system (such as the garage door). door opener. Press the Z button and select 7
for the system to be reprogrammed. Select:
> If you have only programmed one remote con-
Program. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
trol transmitter, press the - button on the
display. Or With some systems, the garage door opener will
> If you have programmed multiple remote con- be immediately available after programming.
trol transmitters, press the -@ button on the With other systems, the garage door opener
display and then press the respective system must also be synchronized.
button. Or
Synchronizing”
> Applies to: vehicles with programmable steer-
ing wheel button: If you have configured the Requirement: the hand transmitter must already
programmable steering wheel button, press be programmed and the vehicle must be within
the 2K button = page 30. Or range of the system (such as the garage door).
» Applies to: vehicles with location pairing: If you
If the system synchronization is performed di-
have programmed Location pairing, press the
rectly after the programming procedure, follow
button for this in the display (notification cen-
the instructions on the MMI.
ter > page 23). As you approach the system,
the button is displayed on the MMI. If you would like to sync at a later time:
If transmission was successful, the message: > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Send to: XXX will appear. VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
> Press the button for the system that you would
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
like to synchronize.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
You can program both fixed code and rolling code
systems in the MMI using the procedure that is Renaming programmed systems
described. You can rename the programmed systems indi-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. vidually (names may have a maximum of 10 char-
acters).
Programming the system
Applies to: MMI
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
Requirement: the hand transmitter must be opener.
present and the vehicle must be within range of > Press the Z button.
the system (such as the garage door) that you > Press the 7 button for the system that you
would like to program. would like to rename.
> If you are programming the garage door opener > Select: Rename. If necessary, delete the preset
for the first time, press the - button on the name, such as Garage door opener 1.
display. Follow the instructions in the MMI. Or > Follow the instructions in the MMI.
D_ Only applies to rolling code systems
48
Opening and closing
Location pairing
@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with location pairing
In some cases, the system may need to be
For easier operation, you can program your sys-
programmed in a different mode (“D mode”).
tem's location.
— Switch the ignition on.
Requirements: the respective hand transmitter — Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
must be programmed > page 48 and the vehicle VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
must be located in front of the system. door opener.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Press and hold the desired button @).
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door — Select Yes, in D mode and follow the in-
opener. structions on the MMI.
> Press the Z button.
> Press the # button for the system your vehicle
is facing.
> Select: Location pairing.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
Only a maximum of three systems can be dis-

played in the notification center > page 23. If
you would like to have all systems displayed,
press G3.
Deleting programmed systems
The programmed systems can be deleted individ-
ually or all at once.

VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
> Press the Z button.
> To delete an individual system, press the L]
button for the desired system. If the checkmark
¥ is set, select: Delete.
> To delete all systems, select: All > Delete.
@ Tips
— Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-
mitter are charged before starting the pro-
gramming process.
— The programming process may take up to
30 seconds. It may be necessary for the
hand transmitter to be pressed again in the
meantime.
— The garage door opener may need to be
synchronized with the system after pro-
gramming. Follow the manufacturer's in-
structions for doing this.
80B012721BA
49
Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision @ Rear fog lights!) Qt

Applies to: vehicles with rear fog lights
Exterior lighting Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU-
Switching the lights on and off TO or ZO position.
To reduce glare for traffic behind your vehicle, the

rear fog lights should only be turned on in ac-
cordance with the legal regulations in the coun-
try where you are operating the vehicle.
Automatic headlight range control

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic head-
light range control. It reduces glare for oncoming
traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight
range adjusts automatically.
Fig. 40 Instrument panel: light switch with buttons
Audi adaptive light
@ Light switch & Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
Turn the light switch @ to the corresponding po- Audi adaptive light provides better visibility when
sition when the ignition is switched on. The 2 driving in the dark. The lights are adapted to the
symbol and the selected position will turn on (ex- road conditions based on speed, such as when
cept position 0). driving on expressways, rural roads, at intersec-
tions, and around curves. The adaptive lights only
O - The daytime running lights* will automatical-
function when the light switch is in the AUTO po-
ly turn on. In vehicles for some markets, you can
sition and the all-weather lights are switched off.
switch the automatic daytime running lights on
and off in the MMI.
A WARNING
AUTO - The headlights will automatically adapt to
— Observe the safety precautions and note the
the surrounding brightness. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
300: — Parking lights cameras > page 141.
— Automatic headlights are only intended to
2D - Low beam headlights
assist the driver. The driver is still responsi-
When the low beam headlights or parking lights ble for controlling the headlights and may
are switched on, the corresponding BB or 200 in- need to switch them on and off manually
dicator light will turn on depending on vehicle depending on light and visibility conditions.
equipment. For example, fog cannot be detected by the
light sensors. So always switch on the low
@ All-weather lights Zo beams ZO under these weather conditions
Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU- and when driving in the dark.
TO or ZO position.
@ Tips
The headlights automatically adjust so that there
will be less glare, for example when the road sur- — If the vehicle battery has been discharging
face is wet. for a while, the parking light may switch off
automatically. Avoid using the parking
lights for several hours.
D_ Depending on the country, two rear fog lights may be in-

stalled.
sO
Lights and Vision
— When using lighting equipment, the driver High beams =O and headlight flasher
is responsible for adhering to any local ap- > Move the lever to the corresponding position:
plicable regulations while driving and when
parking the vehicle. @) High beams on (vehicles with high beam assis-
— Only the front headlights turn on when the tant”) > page 51
daytime running lights are switched on*. In @ High beams off or headlight flasher
vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights
will also turn on. The =o] indicator light in the instrument cluster
will turn on.
—Incool or damp weather, the inside of the
headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can
fog over due to the temperature difference Z\ WARNING
between the inside and outside. They will High beams can cause glare for other drivers,
clear shortly after switching them on. This which increases the risk of an accident. For
does not affect the service life of the light- this reason, only use the high beams or the
ing. headlight flasher when they will not create
glare for other drivers.
Turn signal and high beam lever
ithe
BFV-0012
Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
The high beam assistant automatically turns the

high beams on or off depending on the surround-
ing conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-

tect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
on the position of vehicles driving ahead and on-
Fig. 41 Lever: switching on the turn signal and high beams
coming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as oth-
er environmental factors and traffic conditions.
The lever operates the turn signals, the high
beams and the headlight flasher. Activating high beam assistant
Turn signals @ > Requirement: the light switch must be in the AU-
TO position and the high beam assistant must be
The turn signal will activate when you move the
switched on in the MMI > page 52.
lever into a turn signal position while the ignition
is switched on. The respective KJ or By indicator > To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
light will flash. lever forward @) > page 51, fig. 41. The fa in-
dicator light will appear in the instrument clus-
@ Right turn signal
ter display and the high beams will be switched
@ Left turn signal on or off automatically. The Ed indicator light
will turn on if the high beams are switched on.
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the
lever (convenience turn signal). Activating and deactivating the high beam
head lights manually
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual,
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an If the high beams did not switch on or off as ex-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service pected, you may switch them on or off manually
80B012721BA
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- instead:

rected.
51
Lights and Vision
> To activate the high beams manually, tap the Activation time - You can adjust if the headlights
lever forward @) > page 51, fig. 41. The =0} in- switch on Early, Medium, or Late based on the
dicator light will turn on. sensitivity of the light sensor.
> To deactivate the high beams manually, pull
High beam assistant - You can switch the high
the lever back @) > page 51, fig. 41. The high
beam assistant on and off.
beam assistant is deactivated.
Entry/exit lighting
Operating the headlight flasher
The Entry/exit lighting illuminates the area
> To operate the headlight flashers, pull the lever
around the vehicle when the vehicle is unlocked
back @ © page 51, fig. 41. If the high beam
or when the driver’s door is opened while the ig-
headlights are not switched on, the high beam
nition is off. The entry/exit lighting works when it
assistant will remain activated.
is dark and the light switch is in the AUTO posi-
tion. The front and rear daytime running lights*
ZA WARNING switch on automatically each time the vehicle is
— Observe the safety precautions and note the unlocked regardless of how bright it is outside
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and the vehicle.
cameras > page 141.
Daytime running lights
— High beam assistant is only intended to as-
sist the driver. The driver is responsible for USA models: The daytime running lights can be
controlling the high beam headlights and switched on and off.
adjusting them to match the lighting and
Canada models: This function cannot be switched
visibility conditions.
off. They activate automatically each time the ig-
— High beams can cause glare for other driv-
nition is switched on.
ers, which increases the risk of an accident.
For this reason, only use the high beams or
the headlight flasher when they will not cre- Emergency flashers
ate glare for other drivers.
@) Tips
Adhere to any local applicable regulations
when using the lighting equipment, for exam-
ple in regard to reducing glare for other driv-
ers. The driver is always responsible for adher-
ing to the regulations applicable in the coun-
try where the vehicle is being operated.
Fig. 42 Center console: emergency flashers
Adjusting the exterior lighting
The emergency flashers help to make other driv-
You can adjust the exterior lighting separately. ers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
> Press the A @ button to switch the emergency
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: flashers on or off.
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Exterior light-
When the emergency flashers are turned on, the
ing.
and BJ indicator lights will flash at the same
Automatic headlights time.
You can adjust the following settings in the Auto- You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the
matic headlights menu: emergency flashers are switched on by using the >
52
Lights and Vision
turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop High beam assistant: currently unavailable.
temporarily. Camera view limited due to environmental con-
ditions
The emergency flashers also work when the igni-
tion is turned off. This message appears if the camera's visual field
is blocked. The system will switch itself off. Try
G) Tips switching the systems on later.
You should switch the emergency flashers on a Automatic headlights: malfunction! See
if owner's manual
— you are the last car in a traffic jam so that
all other vehicles approaching from behind The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. In the
can see your vehicle AUTO light switch position, the low beams re-
main switched on at all times for safety reasons.
— your vehicle has broken down or you are
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
having an emergency
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
— your vehicle is being towed or if you are tow-
malfunction repaired.
ing another vehicle
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting
If the Ea indicator light turns on, a bulb has
failed. The displayed message indicates the cause
and possible solutions. If one of the messages re-
mains on, drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired.
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own-

er's manual
Adaptive light* is not working. The headlights

still function. Drive immediately to an authorized
Fig. 43 Headliner: front interior lighting
have the malfunction repaired. Interior lighting buttons
By Headlight range control: malfunction! See =x — Interior lighting on/off
owner's manual
4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
There is a malfunction in the headlight range ing is controlled automatically.
control system, which may cause glare for other
drivers. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- Touch-sensitive reading lights
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have > To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
the malfunction corrected. face@ briefly.
> To activate the manual dimming function,
High beam assistant: malfunction! See own-
touch the surface @) when the light is switched
er's manual
off and keep touching it until the desired
You can still switch the high beams on or off brightness is reached.
manually. Drive immediately to an authorized
have the malfunction repaired.
80B012721BA
53
Lights and Vision
Tata » Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

HICLE > Light & Visibility > Interior lighting.
RAZ-1100
You can choose from various color profiles, such
as Maritime.
Additional settings and profiles:
— Brightness: you can adjust the brightness for

all of the interior lighting.
— Individual: you can adjust the brightness and
color of the interior lighting separately, divided
Fig. 44 Headliner: reading lights, version 1
into contour and surface lighting.
— Audi drive select: the contour and surface
lighting color changes depending on the select-
RAZ-0831
ed drive select* mode.
, oto) Gi) Tips

Depending on vehicle equipment, when the
drive select function is activated, the color of
the contour and surface lighting may briefly
change to red or blue when the interior tem-
perature is manually increased or decreased.
Fig. 45 Headliner: reading lights, version 2
Reading lights Display brightness
> Version 1: to turn a reading light on or off, You can adjust the instrument and display illumi-
press the “€ button @. nation separately. The settings depend on the ve-
> To activate the manual dimming function*, hicle equipment.
touch the surface while the light is switched off
> Applies to MMI: select on the home screen:
“¥@ and keep touching it until the desired
SETTINGS > Display & brightness.
brightness is reached.
> Version 2 (touch-sensitive reading lights with Possible settings in the MMI:
manual dimming function*): to turn a reading
light on or off, briefly touch the surface (2) — Cockpit dimming
> fig. 45. — Head-up display
> To activate the manual dimming function, — MMI
touch the surface (2) when the light is switched — Audi virtual cockpit
off and keep touching it until the desired
brightness is reached.
Interior lighting
Applies to: vehicles with interior lighting
The ambient lighting turns on when the ignition

is switched on. The O light switch position deacti-
vates the interior lighting.
You can adjust the interior lighting individually.

54
Lights and Vision
aa atta are] 0 - Deactivates all adjustment functions.
Q/ ®- Selects the left or right exterior mirror.

To adjust the mirror glass in a mirror, press the
knob in the desired direction.
GA - Heats the mirror glass depending on the

outside temperature.
©) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir-

rors out, turn the knob to one of the other posi-
tions. In the MMI, you can select if the mirrors
fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle
Fig. 46 Light switch: instrument illumination
=> page 35.
%, - You can adjust the background brightness of Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt
the instruments and display illumination. function*
> Press the knob (@ to release it. Requirement: the knob must be in the position
> Turn the knob toward "-" or "+" to reduce or infor the front passenger’s exterior mirror.
crease the brightness.
The mirror surfaces tilt slightly when reverse
> Press the knob again to return it to its original
gear is selected to provide a better view, for ex-
Position.
ample of the edge of the curb.
@) Tips You can adjust the mirror surface by turning the

knob in the desired direction.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-
ment illumination (needles and gauges) may The mirror moves from the reversing position
turn on when the lights are off and the igni- back to the original position:
tion is switched on. The illumination for the
— When you switch the ignition off
gauges reduces automatically and eventually
— When you drive forward at speeds faster than 9
turns off as brightness outside increases. This
mph (15 km/h).
function reminds the driver to turn the low
— When the knob is no longer in the position for
beams on at the appropriate time.
the front passenger exterior mirror
Vision Z\ WARNING
Adjusting exterior mirrors Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex)
enlarge the field of vision. However, they
make objects in the mirror appear smaller and
RAZ-0150
farther away. When using these mirrors to es-

timate your distance to vehicles behind you
when changing lanes, you could estimate in-
correctly, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent.
@) Note
— Applies to: vehicles with power folding exte-
Fig. 47 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors
rior mirrors: If the mirror housing was
80B012721BA
> Turn the knob in the driver's door to the desired moved by outside forces (such as an impact
position: when maneuvering), you must use the pow-
er folding function to fold the mirror all the >
55
Lights and Vision
way out. The mirrors will make a loud noise — If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
when they latch into place. The mirror hous- the eyes, flush them thoroughly with plenty
ing must not be moved back into place by of clean water for at least 15 minutes and
hand because this could impair the function then seek medical attention.
of the mirror mechanism. — If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
— Applies to: vehicles without power folding the skin, flush the affected area with clean
exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was water for at least 15 minutes, and then
moved by outside forces (such as an impact clean with soap and water and seek medical
when maneuvering), you must move it back attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes
in place by hand. thoroughly before wearing again.
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car — If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in conscious, flush the mouth with water for at
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting
Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* unless this is recommended by medical pro-
by hand. Only fold them in and out using fessionals. Seek medical attention immedi-
the power controls. ately.
G) Tips C) Note
If the power adjusting function malfunctions, Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
the glass in both mirrors can be adjusted by Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken mir-
pressing on the edge of it by hand. ror glass. This liquid damages plastic surfaces
and paint. Clean this liquid as quickly as possi-
Dimming the mirrors ble, for example with a wet sponge.
Manual dimming rearview mirror

G) Tips
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back. Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
Automatic dimming rearview mirror — If the light reaching the rearview mirror is
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
will not function correctly,
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automati-
— The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim
cally when light shines on them, for example
when the interior lighting is turned on or
from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
the reverse gear is selected.
ZA WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
ire}
— Electrolyte fluid can leak out from broken KR
So
2
mirror glass. This liquid can irritate the skin, =
z
eyes and respiratory system. If there is con- a
tact with the fluid, flush immediately with

plenty of water. Consult a physician if neces-
sary.
— Repeated or long-term exposure to electro-
lyte fluid can lead to irritation of the air-
ways, especially in people with asthma or
other respiratory conditions. Take deep Fig. 48 Roof headliner: sun visor
breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the
doors and windows as wide as possible.
56
Lights and Vision
Sun visor
RAZ-0253
The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets
and turned toward the doors @).
They can also be moved back and forth length-

wise in this position.
Vanity mirror
The mirror light switches on when the cover over
the vanity mirror
@) opens. Fig. 51 Lever: rear window wiper
> Move the windshield wiper lever \7 to the cor-

Applies to: vehicles with sunshade responding position:
Q6 @ Windshield wipers off
<= =
gS
z @ Rain sensor/intermittent mode. The wind-
a
shield wipers switch on once the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is
raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sen-
sor that is set (switch © to the right), the earlier
the windshield wipers react to moisture on the
windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor
mode, which switches the interval mode on. In
Fig. 49 Rear door: sunshade
intermittent mode, you can adjust the interval
time using the switch ©.
Rear door sunshade
> Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re- VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Rain sensor.
tainer on the upper door frame > fig. 49.
@ Slow wiping
Windshield wipers @ Fast wiping
Switching the windshield wipers on @ Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi-
tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping
to fast wiping.
© Clean the windshield &. The number of wipes

and afterwipes depends on how long the lever is
held in position ©).
The wipers wipe one time after several seconds of
driving to remove water droplets. You can switch
this function off by moving the lever to position
© within ten seconds of the afterwipe. The after-
Fig. 50 Lever: windshield wipers wipe function is reactivated the next time you
switch the ignition on.
If you hold the lever in position ©) for longer

than half a second, the edge wiping feature will
80B012721BA
be activated. This moves the windshield wipers

closer to the edge of the windshield and per-
forms an afterwipe to clean the residue that >
57
Lights and Vision
results from the wiping process from the edge of switching on unintentionally and causing
the windshield. The function is available when damage to the windshield wiper system.
driving at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
G) Tips
The headlight washer system” operates only
when the low beam headlights are on. If you — The windshield wipers switch off when the
move the lever into position ©, the headlights ignition is switched off. You can activate the
will be cleaned at fixed intervals. windshield wipers after the ignition is
switched on again by moving the windshield
@ Wipe the rear window W. The number of wiper lever to any position. The single wipe
wipes depends on the windshield wiper move- function (lever in position @) also functions
ment. when the ignition is switched off.
The rear wiper automatically switches on when — Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
the reverse gear is selected and the front wind- in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor
shield wipers are on and running. function. Check your windshield wiper
blades regularly.
Clean the rear window @. The number of — The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield
wipes depends on how long the lever is held in washer system are heated when the ignition
position (@). is on if the outside temperature is low.
This may also clean the rearview camera, depend- — When stopping temporarily, such as at a
ing on the vehicle equipment. traffic light, the speed of the windshield
wipers automatically reduces by one level.
ZA\ WARNING
— The rain sensor is only intended to assist the (eG cue a Rewiper blades
ct
driver. The driver may still be responsible for
B8V-0696)
manually switching the wipers on based on
visibility conditions.
— The windshield must not be treated with
water-repelling windshield coating agents.
Under unfavorable conditions, such as wet-
ness, darkness, and when the sun is low,
these coatings can cause increased glare,
which increases the risk of an accident. They
can also cause wiper blade chatter.
Fig. 52 Windshield wipers: changing the wiper blades
— Properly functioning windshield wiper
blades are required for a clear view and safe
Wiper blade replacement position
driving > page 58, Cleaning/changing wip-
er blades. >» Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield
wiper lever in position @) > page 57, fig. 50 un-
@) Note til the windshield wiper moves into the wiper
blade replacement position.
— If there is frost, make sure the windshield
> To bring the windshield wipers into the normal
wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-
position, switch the ignition on and hold the
shield. Switching on the windshield wipers
windshield wiper lever in position @ until the
when the blades are frozen to the wind-
windshield wipers go back to the original posi-
shield can damage the wiper blades.
tion, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
— Prior to using a car wash, the windshield
wiper system must be switched off (lever in You can also turn the wiper blade replacement
position @). This prevents the wipers from position on or off in the MMI:
58
Lights and Vision
> Switch the windshield wipers off (position @

@) Tips
=> page 57, fig. 50).
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- — You can also use the wiper blade replace-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Wiper change po- ment position for other reasons, for exam-
sition. ple if you want to protect the windshield

from icing by using a cover.
Cleaning the wiper blades — You cannot activate the wiper blade replace-
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in ment position when the hood is open.
the wiper blade replacement position.
Cleaning/changing the rear wiper blade
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
B8R-0380
> For information on cleaning, see > table on
page 283.
Replacing the wiper blades

Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in
the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the

windshield.
> Press the locking knob (@) on the wiper blade. Fig. 53 Rear window wiper: installing the wiper blade
Hold the wiper blade firmly.
> Remove the wiper blade from the windshield Cleaning the wiper blades
wiper arm mount (2). > Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on > For information on cleaning, see > table on
the wiper arm until it clicks into place. page 283.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield.
> Exit the wiper blade replacement position. Removing the wiper blade
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
ZA\ WARNING > Remove the wiper blade from its holder.
— For safety reasons, the windshield wiper Installing the wiper blade
blades should be replaced once or twice
each year. > Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer.
> Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear
— Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi-
window.
sion, which increases the risk of an accident.
@) Note Z\ WARNING
— The windshield wipers must only be lifted For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
up when in the wiper blade replacement po- blades should be replaced once or twice each
sition. Otherwise, you risk damaging the year.
paint on the hood or the windshield wiper
motor. Messages
— You should not move your vehicle or press
If the & indicator light turns on, then there is a
the windshield wiper lever when the wiper
windshield wiper malfunction. The message that
arms are folded up from the windshield. The
is also displayed indicates the cause and possible
80B012721BA
windshield wipers would move back into

solutions. If one of the messages does not turn
their original position and could damage the
off, drive immediately to an authorized Audi
hood and windshield.
59
Lights and Vision
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have > To turn the compass on or off, press the button
the malfunction repaired. @ until the compass display in the mirror turns
on or off.
SB Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's
manual The digital compass only works when the ignition
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. You can is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
still control all functions that are not controlled breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east),
by the rain sensor using the windshield wiper lev- SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W
er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal- (west), NW (northwest).
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
G) Tips
malfunction repaired.
To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do
Digital compass not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
ces or metallic objects near the mirror.
Scare meee lu Rei Rela
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
BFV-0288
3
Fig. 54 Rearview mirror: digital compass is switched on
60
Lights and Vision
B42-0405
Fig. 55 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for

the compass to read accurately.
To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-
> Press and hold the button @ > page 60, fig. 54 ers, calibrate the compass in an area where
until the number of the magnetic zone appears there is no traffic.
in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button () repeatedly to select the
correct magnetic zone. The selection mode
turns off after a few seconds.
Calibrating the co
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the com-

pass must be recalibrated.
> Press and hold the button @ until a C

=> page 60, fig. 54 appears in the rearview mir-
ror.
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
a direction is displayed in the rearview mirror.
80B012721BA
61
Sitting correctly and safely
Sitting correctly and — Never kneel on the seats.

— Never tilt your backrest too far back.
safely
— Never lean against the instrument panel.
Correct passenger — Never lie down on the rear bench seat.
seating position — Never sit only on the front section of the seat.
— Never sit sideways on the seat.
(eT reeeleur isola)
— Never lean against the window.
As the driver, you are responsible for making sure — Never place your feet out of the window.
every passenger is sitting correctly in their seat — Never place your feet on the instrument panel.
and maintaining this seating position while driv- — Never place your feet on the seat cushion.
ing. Make sure that: — Never ride in the footwell.
— Never sit on the armrests.
— Every passenger in the vehicle has adjusted his
— Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening
or her seat correctly > page 62
your safety belt.
— The steering wheel is adjusted correctly
— Never ride in the luggage compartment.
=> page 65
— The mirrors are adjusted so that there is a suffi-
cient view of the area around the vehicle
ZA WARNING
=>page 55 Incorrect seating positions, failure to wear a
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her safety belt, or being too close to an airbag in-
head restraint adjusted correctly > page 66 crease the risk of serious or fatal injury to ve-
hicle occupants, especially if the airbags de-
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her
ploy and come into contact with occupants
safety belt fastened correctly > page 67
who are not seated correctly. Note the impor-
— The activation status of the front passenger's
tant information and warnings in the chapters
airbag is suitable for the passenger in the front
for the topics given above.
passenger's seat > page 74
— Children are secured in suitable child safety
seats that are secured to appropriate vehicle
G) Tips
seats > page 76. Read and observe the impor- If you or other vehicle passengers have physi-
tant safety information pertaining to the use of cal limitations that prevent sitting in a correct
child safety seats on the front passenger's seat position, modifications to the vehicle may be
= A\ in General information on page 76. necessary. For more information, contact an
Examples of incorrect seating positions Service Facility, or call Audi customer support
Safety belts can only provide its optimal protec- at 1-800-822-2834.
tion when they are routed correctly. Incorrect
seating positions significantly reduce the protec- Front seats
tive functions of the safety belts and increase the
risk of injury due to incorrect belt routing. General information
The following list includes examples of seating Make sure that:

positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle — You can press the pedals down completely
occupants. This is not a complete list. The pur- while your legs are slightly bent
pose is to provide examples to increase your
— The distance between your upper body and the
awareness of the topic. The following points ap- steering wheel or instrument panel is at least
ply when the vehicle is in motion:
10 inches (25 cm)
— Never stand inside the vehicle. — The distance between your knees and the in-
— Never stand on the seats. strument panel is at least 4 inches (10 cm) >
62
— Your thighs are lightly supported by the front window, or on the seat surfaces. This also
surface of the seat applies to passengers in the rear seats.
— The backrest is in an upright position and your
back is resting against it CG) Note
— You have a sufficient view of the area around Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head re-
the vehicle straints
— You have a clear view of the instrument cluster, To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful
indicator lights, and the head-up display* when adjusting the seat to make sure the
head restraints do not come into contact with
JN WARNING the headliner or the sunroof*.
— If you are too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel, the airbag system cannot
provide the optimal protection, which in-
creases the risk of injury and death.
— To reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking maneuvers or accidents,
never drive with the backrest reclined very
far. The airbag system and seat belts can on-
ly provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver
is wearing the seat belt correctly. If the
backrest is angled back too far, the safety
belt can shift to soft areas of the body, such Fig. 56 Front seat: adjusting the seat
as the stomach, which increases the risk of
injury The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust Adjusting the backrests
the seats when the vehicle is stationary.
> To move the backrest forward or backward,
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Lack of
press the button @) forward or backward.
control or attention when adjusting can re-
sult in injuries due to pinching to vehicle oc- Adjusting the seat position
cupants both in the front seats and rear
ee > To move the seat forward or backward, push
the button @) forward or backward.
— Never place objects in the driver's footwell.
> To adjust the seat upward or downward, push
Objects could shift and enter the area
the rear section of the button (2) upward or
around the pedals, which could prevent you
downward.
from using them. You would then be unable
> To adjust the seat surface, press the front part
to use the pedals if sudden driving or brak-
of the button @) upward or downward.
ing maneuvers were needed, which increas-
es the risk of an accident. Adjusting the lumbar support
— Make sure that the floor mats are always se-
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
curely attached.
@) in the desired direction.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, never place
additional floor mats or other floor covers Adjusting the upper thigh support
over the installed floor mats, because this
> To increase or decrease the upper thigh sup-
reduces the pedal's range of motion and can
port, lift the handle @) and move the upper
80B012721BA
impair pedal operation.

thigh support.
—To reduce the risk of injury, never place your
feet on the instrument panel, out of the
63
Massage function Massage

> To switch the massage function on or off, press See > page 64
the button ©) > fig. 56.
Additional seat settings
ZA WARNING See > page 64
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust

the driver's seat when the vehicle is station- Front seat massage function
ary. Applies to: vehicles with massage function
— The power front seats can also be adjusted Selecting the massage function
when the ignition is switched off. To reduce
> To open the Massage menu, press the button
the risk of injury, children should never be
left unattended in the vehicle for this rea-
© > page 63, fig. 56.
son. Switching the massage function on or off
— Exercise caution when adjusting the seat Applies to: MMI
height. Unsupervised or careless seat adjust-
> To switch the massage function on or off, press
ment could cause parts of the body to get
the button ©) > page 63, fig. 56.
pinched, which increases the risk of injury.
> Press Start/Stop on the MMI.
— The front seat backrests must not be re-
clined too far back when driving, because Setting the massage type and intensity
this impairs the effectiveness of the safety Applies to: MMI
belts and airbag system, which increases the > To adjust the massage type, press the desired
risk of injury. button on the MMI, for example Wave.
> To adjust the intensity of the massage, press
Adjusting the front seats in the MMI Intensity on the MMI repeatedly until the de-
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI sired level is reached.
3a
RAZ-0873
G@) Tips
The massage function switches off automati-
cally after approximately 10 minutes.
Xe Tie Cea etal MME

@-—S
Fig. 57 Center display: seat settings
VEHICLE > Seats.
The settings and the number of menus and but- > Swipe to the left if necessary.
tons depend on the vehicle equipment.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
Operating ing options may be available.
Applies to: MMI
Driver seat entry assistance
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
> To access the various menus (@), swipe to the Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or exit
left or right. the vehicle.
> To display the various seats, press ) or (@).
Front center armrest
The red coloring in the symbol @) indicates which
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
seat is selected.
The front center armrest is located between the
front seats.
64
Adjusting the center armrest iSBy

oI
ny
<|
> To adjust the armrest forward or backward,

move the armrest in the desired direction.
> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest in stages.
> To move the armrest back into the original posi-
tion, raise it slightly out of the top level and
fold it downward.
Fig. 59 Adjusting the backrests
ZX WARNING
In certain positions, the front center armrest Adjusting the seat position
can interfere with the driver’s arm movement, > To adjust the seat forward or back, pull the
which increases the risk of injury. handle > fig. 58 and slide the seat.
> Release the handle and continue sliding the
Rear seats seat until it locks into place.
(ee eee lela) Adjusting the backrests

> Support the backrest with one hand and pull
Z\ WARNING the loop @ at the same time.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust > Move the backrest forward or back to the de-
the seats when the vehicle is stationary. sired position.
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Unsu- » Release the loop and continue moving the back-
pervised or careless seat adjustment could rest until it locks into place.
cause parts of the body to get pinched,
which increases the risk of injury. Steering wheel
— Always pull forward on the backrest to make
General information
sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
place. Make sure that:
— The distance between your upper body and the

Adjusting the seats steering wheel is at least 10 in (25 cm)
2© — Your arms are bent slightly at the elbows
oO3
iia
— You have a sufficient view of the area around
oO
oO the vehicle and you have a clear view of the in-
strument cluster and head-up display”.
— You are always holding the steering wheel with
both hands on the outer edge at the sides (9:00
and 3:00 position) when driving
ZX WARNING
Fig. 58 Adjusting the seat position — If you are too close to the steering wheel,
the driver's airbag cannot provide optimal
protection, which increases the risk of injury
or fatality.
80B012721BA
— Never hold the steering wheel in the 12:00

position or in any other way, such as holding
the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise,
65
your arms, hands, and head could be injured Power steering wheel position adjustment
in the event that the driver's airbag deploys. Applies to: vehicles with power steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel position can be adjusted elec-

Adjusting e steering wheel position trically up/down and forward/back.
manually
Applies to: vehicles with manual steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel position is adjustable up and

down and forward and back.
Fig. 61 Steering column: switch for adjusting the steering

wheel position
> To move the steering wheel upward or down-

ward, press the switch upward or downward.
Fig. 60 Steering column: lever for adjusting the steering
> To move the steering wheel forward or back-
wheel position
ward, press the switch forward or backward.
> Press the lever in the direction of the arrow.

The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the
> Bring the steering wheel into the desired posi-
ignition is switched off.
tion.
> Push the lever all the way up until it engages. In vehicles with memory function, the steering
column settings are stored together with the
Z\ WARNING seat position.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust

the steering wheel before you start driving. Head restraints
— Push the lever upward firmly so that the General information
steering wheel position does not change un- Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
intentionally while driving, which would in-
crease the risk of an accident.
B4G-0454
Fig. 62 Correctly-adjusted head restraint
Make sure that:
— The upper edge of the head restraint is as even

as possible with the top of your head
— The head restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head
66
— The head restraints in any occupied rear seats matte Mee)

are all the way up Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
ZA\ WARNING
— There is one head restraint for each seat. All
vehicle occupants must adjust the head re-
straint correctly before every trip. Having
head restraints that are not adjusted cor-
rectly or not installed in the vehicle increas-
es the risk of a neck injury during sudden or
unexpected driving or braking maneuvers or
ina collision.
Fig. 64 Rear seat: adjusting or removing the head restraint
— Only remove the rear seat head restraints if
it is necessary to install a child safety seat Adjusting the head restraints
=> page 76. Stow the removed head re-
straints securely, for example in the luggage > To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it un-
compartment. Reinstall the head restraints til it locks into place.
immediately once the child safety seat has > To adjust the head restraint downward, press
been removed. Driving without head re- the button @) and slide the head restraint. Re-
straints increases the risk of serious neck in- lease the button and slide the head restraint
juries. farther until it locks into place.
Removing the headrests

Front head restraints Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints > Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 86.
> Move the head restraint upward all the way.
RAZ-0683,
> Insert a suitable object, such as the extended

vehicle key or mechanical key, into the release
point @ on the inside or outside of the base.
> Press the button (2) and pull the head restraint
out of the backrest.
Installing the headrests

> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 86.
> Slide the posts on the head restraint down into
Fig. 63 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
the guides until the posts click into place.
Adjusting the head restraints » Press the button (2) and slide the head restraint
all the way down. It should not be possible to
> To adjust the head restraint upward or forward,
remove the head restraint from the backrest
slide it until it locks into place. without pressing the button.
> To adjust the head restraint downward or back-
ward, press the button on the side and slide the
head restraint. Release the button and slide the
Safety belts
head restraint farther until it locks into place.
Each seat is equipped with a three-point safety

belt. Safety belts that are worn correctly are the
80B012721BA
most effective way to reduce the risk of serious or

fatal injuries in a collision. Therefore, wear your >
67
safety belt correctly and make sure that all vehi- —To ensure the maximum protective function
cle passengers are also wearing their safety belts of the safety belts, all vehicle passengers
correctly when the vehicle is moving. must sit in the correct seating position
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an air- => page 62.
bag system, every vehicle passenger must still al- — Check the condition of your vehicle’s safety
ways wear the appropriate safety belt. In addi- belts regularly > page 283. If you find dam-
tion to their normal protective function, safety age to the belt webbing, the belt connec-
belts also hold vehicle occupants in the correct tions, the retractor, or the buckle, have the
seating position in the event of a collision so that damaged safety belt replaced by an author-
the airbags can deploy correctly and provide addi- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
tional protection. Safety belts provide protection Facility.
during collisions when the airbags do not deploy — The safety belts must not be removed or
or if they have already deployed. modified in any way. Do not attempt to re-
pair the safety belts yourself.
ZA\ WARNING — Safety belts that are strained during an acci-
The risk of serious or fatal injury increases if dent must be replaced by an authorized
the safety belt is not fastened, if it is worn in- Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.
correctly, or if it is damaged.
— All vehicle occupants, including the driver,
must fasten their safety belts correctly be- (electra tae tlie teil lars)
fore every trip and must always keep their
safety belts fastened during the trip, regard-
B4H-0751
less of whether the seat is equipped with an
airbag or not. This also applies to children
that are seated in a child safety seat that is
appropriate for their weight and age and
that is secured with a safety belt.
— In the event of a collision, vehicle occupants
that are not wearing safety belts could be
propelled through the vehicle interior and
collide with vehicle components, such as the
steering wheel, instrument panel, wind-
shield, or doors. In some situations, vehicle
occupants could also be ejected from the ve-
hicle. Vehicle occupants in the rear seats
who do not wear safety belts not only en-
danger themselves, but also other people in
the vehicle.
— Only one person may be fastened with a
safety belt at a time. Never secure more
=~
than one person, including children, with a Fig. 66 Safety belt positioning for pregnant women
single safety belt.
— Never allow children or infants to ride on an- Fastened safety belts only offer optimal protec-
other person's lap and be belted into the tion during an accident and reduce the risk of se-
safety belt with them. rious injury or death when they are positioned
— Insert the belt buckle only in the belt latch correctly. Furthermore, the correct safety belt
belonging to the corresponding seat, so that position holds the vehicle occupant in place so
the protective function is not impaired. that a deployed airbag can provide maximum >
68
protection. Therefore, always fasten the safety —A safety belt that is too loose may lead to in-
belt and make sure it is positioned correctly juries during an accident, because your body
> fig. 65. will move farther forward due to kinetic en-
To ensure the safety belt is positioned correctly, ergy and will be stopped abruptly by the
make sure of the following points: belt.
— Heavily bulky, loose clothing (for example, a
—The lap portion of the safety belt must be locat- coat over a sports jacket) may prevent the
ed across the lap. seat and safety belts from functioning cor-
— The shoulder portion of the safety belt must rectly.
rest over the center of the shoulder. — Do not position the safety belt over hard or
— The safety belt must always rest flat and se- breakable objects (such as glasses, pens,
curely on the body. etc.).
For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest — The lap belt portion of the safety belt must
evenly across the chest and as low and flat as sit as low as possible on the lap of pregnant
possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied women and lie flat under the belly.
to the lower abdomen. This should be done
throughout the entire pregnancy > fig. 66. () Note
Make sure that there are no hook-and-loop
ZA WARNING fasteners or sharp objects such as zippers or
Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause se- rivets on clothing in the area where the safety
rious injury in the event of an accident or dur- belt is worn. Otherwise, the safety belt could
ing sudden braking or driving maneuvers. be damaged.
— Never drive with the backrest reclined ex-
tremely far. The more the backrest is tilted Fastening and unfastening safety belts
back, the greater the risk of injury due to the
safety belt being routed incorrectly.
— The safety belt itself or a loose safety belt
can cause serious injuries if it shifts onto
soft areas of the body, such as the stomach.
— The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
lie over the center of the shoulder and
chest, and never under the arm, behind the
back, or across the neck or face.
— The lap portion of the safety belt must lie
across the lap and never over the stomach.
— The safety belt must lie flat and securely on
B4H-0270
the upper part of the body and the lap.

— The belt webbing must not be pinched or
twisted, or rub against sharp edges.
— If the safety belt height is set incorrectly
and/or the safety belt is routed incorrectly,
then the safety belt's protective function
will be impaired in the event of an accident.
Make sure the safety belt is at the right
height and is routed correctly for the pas- Fig. 68 Releasing the belt buckle from the belt latch
80B012721BA
senger using it.

69
Fastening the safety belt Additional safety belt functions

> Pull the safety belt by the belt buckle evenly
Belt retractor lock
across your chest and lap.
> Insert the belt buckle in the belt latch belong- The safety belts on the rear seats and on the
ing to the seat until it audibly engages front passenger seat are equipped with a belt re-
> fig. 67. tractor lock.
> Pull on the belt to make sure that the belt is se- > If you secure a child safety seat with a safety
curely locked in the latch. belt, the belt retractor lock on the safety belt
may need to be activated. Follow the instruc-
Unfastening the safety belt
tions from the child safety seat manufacturer.
> Press the red button on the belt latch > fig. 68. > When a vehicle passenger has fastened a safety
The belt buckle will pop out. belt, the belt retractor lock should not be acti-
> Guide the belt back by hand so that the safety vated. If the belt retractor lock has been acti-
belt can roll up more easily. vated unexpectedly, deactivate it.
Deactivating or activating the belt retractor lock

Safety belt monitoring system
=> page 79.
Ba - If the indicator light turns on or flashes, a
Safety belt retractor
safety belt is not fastened or it has been unbuck-
led while driving. Above certain speeds, addition- The safety belts are equipped with an automatic
al warning tones will sound. belt retractor. This automatic retractor allows the
safety belt to be pulled all the way out when the
belt is pulled slowly. However, the automatic re-
Adjusting the height of the safety belt
tractor locks during sudden braking maneuvers.
It also locks the belts when accelerating, driving
B4G-0004)
uphill, and driving around curves.
Belt force limiter

Safety belts with belt force limiters reduce the
force placed on the body by the safety belts dur-
ing acollision.
Safety belt pretensioners
Fig. 69 Belt height adjustment for the front seats - safety In certain driving situations, safety belts may be
belt relay tightened with reversible belt tensioners when
you start driving. If the safety belt is too loose, it
> To move the belt higher, slide the safety belt re- will be tightened so that the belt will rest closer
lay @ upward. to the body.
> To move the belt lower, press the release but-
In some collisions, pyrotechnic belt tensioners
ton @ and slide the safety belt relay (2) down-
may secure the safety belts so that they cannot
ward.
loosen. This reduces forward movement by the
> To check if the safety belt relay is securely
vehicle passengers.
locked in place, pull firmly on the belt.
G) Tips
ZA\ WARNING
The pyrotechnic system can only provide pro-
You can also adjust the height of the front
tection during one collision. If the pyrotechnic |>
seats to change the position of the safety
belts.
70
belt tensioners deploy, the pretensioning sys- — In an emergency, the recall process can be
tem must be replaced by an authorized Audi canceled by pressing the seat adjustment
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. button on that seat.
G) Tips Airbag system

Smoke may be released when pyrotechnic belt
tensioners deploy. This is not a sign of a vehi-
cle fire.
Z\ WARNING
Memory function — If you have not fastened your safety belt,
you are in an incorrect seating position, or
General information you are too close to the airbag system, the
Applies to: vehicles with memory function airbag system will not be able to protect
With the memory function, you can save and call you. This increases the risk of serious or fa-
up seat profiles using the memory buttons in the tal injuries. Make sure that every vehicle
door trim panel. passenger has their safety belt correctly fas-
tened and is sitting in a correct seating posi-
Depending on vehicle equipment, some settings tion > page 62. This is necessary regardless
such as the driver’s seat and exterior mirror posi- of whether the seat is equipped with an air-
tion can be stored. bag or not.
— Never place your feet on the instrument
Storing and recalling a seat profile panel, out of the window, or on the seat sur-
Applies to: vehicles with memory function faces. To help ensure that the airbag system
can deploy correctly, never bend forward or
The memory function buttons are located in the
lean on the door or the side window. Other-
door trim panel.
wise, serious and possibly fatal injuries can
Storing a seat profile occur if the airbags deploy.
— People, animals, or objects between the
> Press the |SET] button. If the LED in the button
passengers and the airbag system can inter-
turns on, a seat profile can be stored.
fere with the correct deployment of the air-
> Push one of the numbered memory buttons. A
bag or can be thrown through the vehicle in-
tone confirms that the settings were stored.
terior, increasing the risk of serious or fatal
Recalling a seat profile injuries. Make sure that nothing is located
between the vehicle occupants and the air-
> When the a door is open and the ignition is
bag system. Do not secure or transport any
switched off, press the memory button once
objects within the deployment zone of the
briefly. The seat will be fully adjusted to the
airbag systems, especially on the steering
settings in the seat profile.
wheel, on the instrument panel, on the
> If the door is closed or the ignition is switched
doors, on the windows, or in the footwell.
on, press and hold the memory button until the
seat is fully adjusted to the settings in the seat — Never put stickers on the airbag system cov-
profile. ers or cover them with any objects.
— Only lightweight clothing should be hung
Z\ WARNING from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat The pockets of the clothing must not con-
setting can only be recalled when the vehicle
80B012721BA
tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged

is stationary. objects. This could impair the effectiveness
of the side curtain airbags.
71
— You must not use seat or protective covers particularly for individuals who have or have
that are not specifically approved for use on had asthma or other health issues that af-
Audi seats with side airbags. Since the side fect breathing. Exit the vehicle or open the
airbags deploy from the seat backrest, such windows or doors to get access to fresh air.
covers could impair the protective function
of the side airbags. G@) Tips
— Damage to the original seat covers in the If you are transporting children in the vehicle,
side airbag deployment area must always be read the information and follow the safety
repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or au- precautions > page 76.
thorized Audi Service Facility.
— Airbag system components are installed at Ss
. . . ; Se melee]
various locations in your vehicle. Incorrect
work or repairs on the vehicle could damage The B@ indicator light in the instrument cluster
the airbag system components or impair monitors the safety systems such as the airbags
their functionality. This may prevent the air- (including the control modules, sensor, and wir-
bags from deploying or cause them to de- ing) and the belt tensioners. It turns on when you
ploy incorrectly in the event of an accident, switch the ignition on and turns off after several
which increases the risk of serious or fatal seconds.
injuries. Only have an authorized Audi dealer
If the indicator light does not turn on when the
or authorized Audi Service Facility make re-
ignition is switched on, does not turn off after
pairs or modifications to a vehicle.
several seconds, or turns on or flashes while driv-
— The airbag system can only provide protec-
ing, there may be a malfunction in one of the
tion during one collision. If there is another
safety systems. Drive to an authorized Audi deal-
collision, the airbag system will not deploy
er or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately
again. If the airbag system has deployed,
to have the malfunction corrected.
have it replaced immediately by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service A WARNING
Facility.
— Fine dust may appear if the airbags deploy. Have the malfunction in the safety systems in-
This is completely normal and does not indi- spected immediately. Otherwise, there is a
cate a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can ir- risk that the systems may not activate during
an accident, which increases the risk of seri-
ritate the skin and mucous membranes in
the eyes and can cause difficulty breathing, ous or fatal injury.
72
Description
RAZ-0785)
Fig. 70 Airbag overview image (enlarged section: deployed airbags)
The locations of the airbags are labeled with or soft), the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
“AIRBAG”. The following airbags are installed in The deciding factor for the deployment of the air-
your vehicle: bag system is the deceleration that occurs during
an accident. Sensors in the vehicle are designed
@ Driver's airbag
to detect the severity of an accident in conjunc-
@ Front passenger's airbag
tion with the control module, and to provide a
@®) Front side airbags and rear, if applicable targeted and timely deployment of the restraint
@ Head curtain airbag with ejection mitigation system. If the vehicle deceleration that is meas-
Airbags offer the best possible protection in your ured during an accident is below the specified
reference values in the control module, then the
vehicle during an accident when they are used to-
gether with safety belts that are fastened cor- airbags will not deploy, even though the vehicle
rectly, and when passengers are sitting in the cor- may be severely damaged from the accident. In
rect seating position. Airbags are a supplementa-
these cases, the vehicle occupants will be pro-
ry restraint system and do not replace safety tected by the safety belts if they are fastened and
belts. worn correctly.
Airbags may deploy during front-impact, side-im- The deployment of the front passenger's airbag
pact, or rollover accidents. will depend on the occupancy of the seat
=> page 74.
The deployment area for the airbag system can-
not be defined for every situation, since the cir-
Each deployed airbag is filled with gas. When this
occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags
80B012721BA
cumstances surrounding accidents can vary wide-

ly. Factors that play an important role include the unfold with great force into the deployment zone
condition of the object that the vehicle hits (hard within milliseconds. Inflated airbags reduce the >
73
movement of passengers wearing safety belts in for “low risk deployment” for children aged 3 to
the direction of the impact and thus help to re- 6 years old (as defined in the standard).
duce the risk of injury. They can help to protect
The advanced airbag system will activate or deac-
the head, upper body, and lap, for example. How-
tivate the front passenger's airbag based on the
ever, there is the possibility that airbag deploy-
occupancy of the seat. If a front airbag deploys
ment can cause injuries.
during an accident, the deployment force will
The airbag system only works when the ignition adapt to the passenger.
is turned on.
Components
If you or other vehicle passengers have physical
The advanced airbag system consists of the fol-
limitations that prevent sitting in a correct posi-
lowing components:
tion, modifications to the vehicle may be neces-
sary. For more information, contact an author- — Front airbags in the steering wheel and in the
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- instrument panel on the front passenger's side:
ty, or call Audi customer support at these can protect the front passengers during
1-800-822-2834. an accident
— Passenger occupant detection sensor in the
@ Tips front passenger's seat: this detects if the front
The side curtain airbags in your vehicle have passenger's seat is occupied (for example, by a
ejection mitigation functions. This reduces person or asmall child in a child safety seat)
the risk of being ejected from the vehicle inte- — Seat position sensors on the front seats: these
rior during an accident, especially in the event determine the distance between the seat and
of a vehicle rollover. the steering wheel or instrument panel
— Sensors in the front seat belt latch: these de-
Advanced airbag system tect if the safety belts are fastened
— PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; ON ® indi-
cator light in the headliner:this indicates if the
front passenger's airbag is activated or deacti-
vated
- ka indicator light in the instrument cluster:
this monitors the function of the Advanced Air-
bag System components to ensure they are
functioning correctly
How the components function together

Fig. 71 Headliner: indicator light to display the status of The passenger occupant detection sensor in the
the front passenger's airbag front passenger's seat detects if the front pas-
senger's seat is occupied. The passenger occu-
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has
pant detection sensor measures the electrical ca-
been certified to comply with the requirements
pacity on the front passenger’s seat. The pas-
of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated de-
Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor pending on the electrical capacity that is meas-
Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica- ured.
ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured.
According to these requirements, the front Ad- The passenger's airbag is activated if:
vanced Airbag System on the passenger’s side — The electrical capacity is higher than the
has been certified for “suppression” for infants threshold stored in the control module
approximately 12 months old and younger, and
74
— The electrical capacity is the same as or greater — An adult or individual of similar size in the
than the electrical capacity of a typical adult front passenger's seat: the front passenger's
airbag must be activated, therefore
The passenger's airbag is deactivated if:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must remain
— The electrical capacity is lower than the thresh- turned on.
old stored in the control module — An individual of smaller size (for example, an
— The electrical capacity is the same as or less adolescent or small adult) in the front pas-
than the electrical capacity of a typical one- senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
year-old child in a child safety seat that has must be activated, so
been used for certification in accordance with PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must stay on.
FMVSS 208 — Child in a child safety seat on the front pas-
If the front passenger's airbag is activated, the senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ indicator light must be deactivated, so
will turn on. If the front passenger's airbag is de- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; must stay on.
activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; — Front passenger's seat not occupied: the front
indicator light will turn on. passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; must stay on.
The deployment force of the front airbags adapts
based on whether or not the safety belt is used Z\ WARNING
and the distance between the seat and the steer-
— An adult or a person with a small stature
ing wheel/instrument panel. For example, if a
(such as a young person or small adult) seat-
person is too close to the front airbag, the front
ed on the front passenger's seat will not be
airbag will deploy with less force to help reduce
protected by the passenger's airbag in the
the risk of injury.
event of a collision if the passenger's airbag
Meaning of PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3; ON is deactivated. This increases the risk of in-
® indicator light jury and death. Always make sure that
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ remains on
When the ignition is switched on, the system de-
while driving. If
tects whether the front passenger's seat is occu-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ does not
pied. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @
turn on, make sure the front passenger is
will turn on for several seconds during this proc-
sitting correctly in the seat > page 62 and
ess. Then it will indicate whether the front pas-
that there is nothing covering the front pas-
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated.
senger's seat (such as blankets or pillows).
— PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%%;: the front If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®@ still does
passenger's airbag is deactivated and will not not turn on, the front passenger's seat must
deploy in the event of an accident. not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi
— PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®:: the front pas- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
senger's airbag is activated and could deploy in and have the airbag system inspected.
the event of an accident. —Achild ina child safety seat on the front
passenger's seat - especially in a rear-facing
If a change to the occupancy status of the front
passenger's seat is detected child safety seat - can receive a severe im-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #, ON @ will pact if the front passenger's airbag deploys,
flash for several seconds and will then display the which increases the risk of serious or fatal
status of the front passenger's airbag. injury. Always secure child safety seats on
the rear seats. If special circumstances re-
Always make sure the indicator light corresponds quire the use of a child safety seat on the
80B012721BA
to the occupancy of the front passenger's seat. front passenger's seat, always make sure
75
that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; stays You can also obtain useful and current informa-
on while driving. If tion from the following sources:
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; does not U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
turn on, remove the child safety seat and in- tration
stall it again according to the child safety http://www.nhtsa.gov
seat manufacturer instructions. If http://www.safercar.gov
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &%; still does
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must National SAFE KIDS Campaign
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi http://www.safekids.org
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A.
and have the airbag system inspected. http://www.carseat.org
— Fluids, electronic devices, or mechanical
Transport Canada Information Centre
damage on the front passenger's seat may
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
cause the front passenger seat occupant de-
tection to malfunction. The system may Audi Customer Experience Center
then incorrectly detect if the front passeng- https://www.audiusa.com/help/contact-us
er's seat is occupied. As a result, it could de- https://www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/models/layer/
ploy the front passenger’s airbag incorrectly contact.html
or fail to deploy it, which increases the risk
of serious or fatal injury. Make sure that no Z\ WARNING
wet objects (such as a wet hand towel) and To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries,
no fluids come into contact with the front children must always be secured in the vehicle
passenger's seat cushion. If the front pas- with a child safety seat that is appropriate for
senger's seat becomes wet, dry it immedi- their body size, weight, and age.
ately. Make sure no electronic devices (such — Children ages 12 and under must be trans-
as a laptop or a retrofitted seat heater) are ported using the appropriate child safety
on the front passenger's seat. Do not trans- seat. Note differences in regulations be-
port any objects on or under the front pas- tween states and countries.
senger's seat.
— Child safety seats secured incorrectly in the
— Seat covers or protective covers may prevent vehicle may cause serious or fatal injuries in
the advanced airbag system from correctly the event of an accident. Always secure the
detecting child safety seats or passengers in child safety seat according to the manufac-
the front passenger's seat. You must not use turer instructions.
seat covers or protective covers on the front
— Children or babies must not under any cir-
passenger's seat that are not specifically ap-
cumstances be held on the lap of the driver
proved for use on Audi seats with an ad- or other passengers while driving.
vanced airbag system.
— Do not secure more than one child in a child
safety seat.
Child safety seats — Never allow a child to sit in a child safety
seat unsupervised.
General information
— Never allow children to ride unsecured in the
When installing and using child safety seats, fol- vehicle or to stand or kneel on the seats
low the information in this Owner's Manual, the while driving. In the event of an accident, a
applicable state and federal regulations, and the child could be propelled through the vehicle.
manufacturer instructions for the child safety This can cause serious or fatal injuries for
seat. the child and passengers.
— If children use an incorrect seating position
while driving, they have a higher risk of
76
injury during a sudden braking maneuver or Facility and have the airbag system in-
accident. This especially applies to children spected.
in the front passenger's seat or children who — If you must use a forward-facing child safety
have their head near the side airbag deploy- seat on the front passenger's seat, move the
ment area, if the airbag system is deployed seat as far back as possible so that it is as
during an accident. This incorrect seating far as possible from the front passenger's
position can cause severe or even fatal inju- airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat
ries. can be adjusted all the way. A child in a child
Make sure there is enough space in front of safety seat on the front passenger's seat can
the child in the child safety seat. If necessa- receive a severe impact if the front passeng-
ry, adjust the angle and position of the seat er's airbag deploys, which increases the risk
in front of the child safety seat. of serious or fatal injury.
The rear side of a forward-facing child safety — Replace the child safety seat after an acci-
seat should be positioned as close as possi- dent because there could be damage that is
ble to the backrest on the vehicle seat. If the not visible.
head restraints make it difficult to install a — Even if a child is not sitting in the child safe-
child safety seat, adjust or remove them if ty seat, the child safety seat must be se-
necessary > page 66. Reinstall the head re- cured. An unsecured child safety seat may
straints immediately once the child safety be thrown through the vehicle interior dur-
seat has been removed. ing sudden braking maneuvers or an acci-
Always make sure that the backrest on the dent.
seat where the child safety seat is installed
is securely locked in place and cannot move (ee aca em Letitia m imate)
forward. Otherwise, the backrest where the
child safety seat is secured could move for- Always secure children in a child safety seat de-
ward in the event of an accident or other signed for the body size, weight, and age of the
emergency situation. child.
NEVER use a rear-facing child safety seat on
You can secure child safety seats in your vehicle
a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG;
using the lower LATCH anchors or the safety
this could cause DEATH or SERIOUS INJU-
belts. You can also secure child safety seats to
RIES to a CHILD.
the top tether anchor. Depending on the child
— Always secure child safety seats on the safety seat, it may also be necessary to secure it
rear seats. If exceptional circumstances re- to the top tether anchor. In Canada, securing for-
quire the child safety seat to be placed on ward-facing child safety seats to the top tether
the front passenger's seat, then the front anchors is required by law.
passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
Always make sure that Always transport children in the rear seats
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; stays on Accident statistics show that children that are se-
while driving. If cured correctly in the rear seats are safer than in
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; does not front seats. Always transport children in suitable
turn on, remove the child safety seat and child safety seats secured on the rear seats.
install it again according to the child safe-
ty seat manufacturer instructions. If In exceptional circumstances: transporting
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4%; still children in the front passenger's seat
does not turn on, the front passenger's If exceptional circumstances require the child
seat must not be used. Drive to an author-
80B012721BA
safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's

ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
deactivated. Please note the important >
77
information for this > page 74, Advanced airbag the fastening systems or safety belts do not
system. If you must secure a forward-facing child impair those in an adjacent seating position.
safety seat, move the front passenger's seat as — All child safety seats are constructed so that
far back as possible so that it is as far as possible they can be secured using the lap safety belt
from the front passenger's airbag. While doing in the vehicle.
this, make sure the seat can be adjusted all the — Child safety seats with a load leg can only
way. be secured to the outer rear seats and to the
front passenger's seat.
Only switch to a larger child safety seat when
absolutely necessary
Secu child safety seats to the lower
Switch to a larger child safety seat only when ab- LATCH anchors
solutely necessary. Secure your child using a safe-
ty belt without a child safety seat only if all of the
following statements are true:
— The child is large enough to sit upright in the

seat
— The child is able to sit with his or her back rest-
ing completely on the seat backrest
—The child is able to sit with his or her knees
bent over the edge of the seat surface
—The child is able to sit with both of his or her
Fig. 72 Rear bench seat: lower LATCH anchors
feet completely touching the floor in the foot-
well
— The lap portion of the safety belt lies flat and
securely over the hip area and never over the In the United States and Canada, child safety
stomach seats can be secured without safety belts using
—The shoulder portion of the safety belt lies flat the LATCH system. LATCH stands for Lower An-
and securely over the center of the shoulder chors and Tethers for Children. In Canada, similar
and the chest, and never under the arm, behind systems are called UCRA, LUAS, or UAS.
the back, or over the neck or face. The lower LATCH anchors in your vehicle are lo-
—The child is able to maintain this seating posi- cated on the outer seats of the rear bench seat
tion throughout the entire trip between the seat surface and the backrest. These
Read and follow the important information and seating locations each have two lower LATCH an-
warnings regarding the correct use of safety belts chors that can be used to secure a LATCH child
=> page 67. safety seat. Marking points with a > fig. 72 sym-
bol are located on the covers for the lower LATCH
@) Tips anchors. You can locate the LATCH anchors using
the marking points.
— Child safety seats can also be secured to
seats with side airbags. In the event of an > Applies to: vehicles with forward/back adjusta-
accident, children can also be protected by ble rear bench seat: Move the rear seat all the
the side airbags if the child is correctly se- way back.
cured in a suitable child safety seat that is > Activate the child safety lock > page 44.
attached correctly. » Remove the cover* from both lower LATCH an-
— The lower LATCH anchors as well as the chors.
safety belt may be required to correctly in- > If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
stall some child safety seats. Using both at secure any unused safety belts that are within >
the same time is permitted, provided that
78
reach of the child > A\ in Securing child safety > If you secure a child safety seat to the front
seats with a safety belt on page 80. passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
> Secure the child safety seat according to the seat to the highest position.
child safety seat manufacturer instructions. > Secure the child safety seat according to the
> Pull on the child safety seat to check if both child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
sides are engaged correctly in the LATCH an- > If necessary, activate the belt retractor lock
chors. >page 79.
> If possible, also secure the child safety seat to > If the child safety seat is secured on the front
the respective top tether anchor in the vehicle passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
=> page 80. seat backrest until it rests flat against the child
safety seat. Also make sure that the upper safe-
ZA WARNING ty belt fixture is behind the child safety seat.
The LATCH anchors in the vehicle are only de-
> If you secure a child safety seat on the rear
seat, also secure it to the correct top tether an-
signed for child safety seats with the LATCH
chor if possible > page 80.
system. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injury, never secure other child restraint sys- Activating the belt retractor lock
tems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
If you secure a child safety seat using the vehicle
safety belt, you must activate the belt retractor
@® Tips lock. Follow the child safety seat manufacturer
The LATCH anchors are designed for a total instructions.
weight (child and child safety seat combined)
up to 65 lbs (29 kg). If the total weight is The belt retractor lock prevents the safety belt
greater than this, the child safety seat must from becoming loose while driving, which could
be secured with the vehicle safety belt. result in the child safety seat no longer being ad-
equately secured.
Securing child safety seats with a safety > Secure the child safety seat according to the
ys child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
While doing so, pull out the safety belt. Insert
Observe the safety precautions > page 76. The
the safety belt into the belt latch that belongs
front passenger’s seat is a dangerous location for
to that seat until it audibly locks.
a child, even with an advanced airbag system. If
> Pull the upper belt out completely and then al-
exceptional circumstances require the child safe-
low it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound
ty seat to be placed on the front passenger's
while the belt is retracting. It will not be possi-
seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
ble to pull the safety belt out any farther.
deactivated. Please note the important informa-
> Push the child safety seat into the seat and al-
tion for this > page 77, Correct positioning for
low the belt to retract more.
children and > page 74, Advanced airbag sys-
> Make sure that the child safety seat cannot
tem.
move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm).
Securing child safety seats
Deactivating the belt retractor lock
> Applies to: vehicles with forward/back adjusta-
> Unbuckle the safety belt from the belt latch.
ble rear bench seat: Move the rear seat all the
> Remove the child safety seat according to the
way back.
manufacturer instructions.
> Activate the child safety lock > page 44.
> Allow the safety belt to retract completely. The
> If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
belt retractor lock is deactivated. >
secure any unused safety belts that are within
80B012721BA
reach of the child > /A\, > page 80.
79

A WARNING
— A safety belt that is not locked by the belt There is a top tether anchor behind every seat in
retractor lock or a locking device cannot se- the rear bench seat to additionally secure a child
cure a child safety seat while driving or in safety seat with an upper belt.
the event of an accident, which increases the > Move the head restraint behind the child safety
risk of fatal injury. Always make sure the seat upward.
belt retractor lock on the safety belt is acti- > Guide the upper belt on the child safety seat
vated if the child safety seat manufacturer under the head restraint or along both sides of
instructions require it. it and toward the rear (depending on the child
— Due to the risk of fatal injury, never place a safety seat model).
rear-facing child safety seat on the front > Fasten the belt to the top tether anchor
passenger's seat when the front passenger's => fig. 74. While doing this, make sure the belt
airbag is switched on. is not twisted and is not running over any sharp
— For the child safety seat to offer the maxi- edges.
mum protection, it is especially important >» Secure the child safety seat according to the
to route the vehicle safety belt correctly. Al- child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
ways follow the instructions from the child > Pull the belt tightly so that the child safety seat
safety seat manufacturer for routing the rests at the top of the seat backrest.
safety belt correctly. Incorrectly fastened > If necessary, move the head restraint behind
safety belts can cause injuries, even during the child safety seat downward.
minor accidents.
Z\ WARNING
The top tether anchors in the vehicle are only
designed for child safety seats equipped with
an upper strap. To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injury, never secure other child restraint
systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
Tae MeeeCoe a meee Meg
ONG"
YT ey -T-14
a
Mt
\
i
1i
Fig. 73 Rear backrest: top tether anchors to secure a child
safety seat with an upper belt
RAZ-0186,
1, —_..
Ss
Fig. 75 Rear bench seat: securing unused safety belts
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench

seat, the child must not be able to reach any
safety belts that are not being used. Secure safe-
Fig. 74 Rear backrest: securing the upper belt to the top ty belts that are within reach of the child. >
tether anchor
80
> If you secure a child safety seat to the LATCH

anchors, fasten the safety belt on the seat
where the child safety seat is installed using
the seat's safety belt latch.
> If you secure a child safety seat to one of the
outer seats, fasten the safety belt for the cen-
ter seat in its latch.
> Activate the belt retractor lock on the fastened
safety belts. To do this, pull the upper belt out
completely and then allow it to retract. You will
hear a clicking sound while the belt is retract-
ing. It will not be possible to pull the safety
belt out any farther.
> Make sure the fastened safety belt does not
block access to the LATCH anchors. Otherwise,
it may not be possible to secure the child safety
seat to the LATCH anchors correctly.
ZA\ WARNING
A child in a child safety seat could play with
the unused safety belts and then become en-
tangled in them, which increases the risk of
fatal injury. Always secure unused safety belts
so that they are not within reach of children in
child safety seats.
80B012721BA
81
Storage and convenience
Storage and convenience — Disconnect the connectors from the power

sources carefully to reduce the risk of dam-
Power sources aging them.
When the ignition is switched on, you may be

G) Tips
able to use multiple power sources for external
devices, depending on the vehicle equipment. Do not connect any other devices to the sock-
ets when using the compressor* provided by
12 volt sockets the factory > page 288. The power consump-
You can connect electrical accessories to the 12 tion in the sockets may be temporarily ex-
volt sockets. The power usage from the sockets ceeded when using the compressor*.
must not exceed a total of 120 watts. Do not
connect multiple devices to the sockets in the ve- Cup holders
hicle at the same time. Applies to: vehicles with cup holders
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the 12V

symbol. They are located in the front center con-
sole, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the
luggage compartment”*.
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB port
You can charge mobile devices using the USB

ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «> or
[4 symbol or CHARGE ONLY. Fig. 76 Rear center armrest*: cup holders
Z\ WARNING Depending on vehicle equipment, your vehicle

— To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all may have cup holders in the front center console
connected devices securely when driving so and in the rear center armrest.
that they do not move around inside the ve-
Cup holders in the rear center armrest*
hicle when braking or in the event of an acci-
dent. > Fold down the center armrest* by pressing on
— Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries the release lever @) > page 86, fig. 82.
or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never > Press the button to open the cup holder
leave children unattended in the vehicle > fig. 76.
with the vehicle key. > To close the cup holder, fold the cover back un-
til it clicks into place.
@® Note
A WARNING
— Read the operating manuals for the con-
nected devices. — Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
—To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
electrical system, never attempt to charge erages could spill, which increases the risk
the vehicle battery by connecting accesso- of injury.
ries that provide power to the power sour- — Do not use any breakable beverage contain-
ces. ers (for example, made out of glass or por-
— Do not connect any device whose network celain). You could be injured by them in the
class (voltage) does not match the network event of an accident. >
class designed for the socket.
82
@) Note CG) Note

Beverage containers in the cup holders should Beverage containers in the cup holders should
always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside
could spill and cause damage to vehicle could spill and cause damage to vehicle
equipment. equipment.
Climatized cup holders Gi) Tips

Applies to: vehicles with climatized cup holders Do not cover the side vent grille > fig. 77; or
the function of the cup holder may be im-
Paired.
Storage and
compartments
Additional storage options
Depending on vehicle equipment, there are a va-

riety of storage areas, compartments, and retain-
Fig. 77 Center console: climatized cup holder ers, such as the glove compartment, for safely
storing and securing objects.
> Press the button to keep your beverage cold.
The LED turns blue @). ZA\ WARNING
> Press the button again to keep your beverage —To reduce the risk of injury, make sure all
warm. The LED turns red @). storage compartments are always closed
> To turn off the cooling or heating function, while driving.
press the button repeatedly until the LEDs @)
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
and (2) turn off. hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
When cooling, the temperature will reach ap- ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of
proximately 38 °F (3 °C). When heating, the tem- an accident. Store objects securely while
perature will reach approximately 128 °F (53 °C). driving.
When the temperature reaches 104 °F (40 °C), — Only use the storage compartments in the
the heat indicator @) also turns on to remind you door trim panels to store small objects that
not to touch the plate when it is too hot. The dis- will not stick out of the compartment and
play turns off if the temperature falls below this impair the function of the side airbags.
value. — Due to strength reasons, only secure objects
up to 11 lbs (5 kg) with the straps* in the
Z\ WARNING luggage compartment. Heavier objects are
not adequately secured. There is risk of per-
—To reduce the risk of burns, never touch the
beverage holder plate when the heat indica- sonal injury.
tor is on. — Only lightweight clothing should be hung
— Do not use any breakable beverage contain- from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
ers (for example, made out of glass or por- not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
celain). You could be injured by them in the The pockets of the clothing must not con-
event of an accident. tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged
objects. This could impair the effectiveness
80B012721BA
of the side curtain airbags.
83
— Make sure your view toward the rear is not — The cargo net* is only strong enough to se-
blocked, for example by hanging clothing or cure light objects. Heavy objects are not ade-
objects in the vehicle. quately secured. Attempting to secure heavy
objects increases the risk of injury.
Luggage compartment — Never exceed the permitted axle and load
and vehicle weight > page 314.
eee) — Never secure a child safety seat to the tie-
downs.
All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely
— Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the
cially if the luggage compartment lid is
following to maintain good vehicle handling:
open. Children could enter the luggage com-
> Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and close the luggage compart-
partment. ment lid from the inside. This creates the
> Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the lug- risk of fatal injury, since the children would
gage compartment as possible. be locked in and may not be able to escape
> Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs by themselves.
to secure objects. — Do not allow children to play in or on the ve-
hicle. Close and lock the luggage compart-
ZA\ WARNING ment lid as well as all other doors when you
— Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart- leave the vehicle.
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov- — Never transport passengers in the luggage
er is not a surface for storing objects. Ob- compartment. Every passenger must be cor-
jects placed on the cover increase the risk of rectly secured with the safety belts in the
injury to all vehicle occupants during sudden vehicle > page 67.
driving or braking maneuvers or in the event — Be careful when releasing the backrest and
of an accident. folding it forward. To reduce the risk of be-
— Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart- ing pinched, pay attention and check when
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov- folding backrests forward.
er must always be securely fastened when in — The backrest must be securely latched so
use to reduce the risk of an accident. objects cannot slide forward out of the lug-
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- gage compartment during sudden braking.
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — The backrest must be latched securely to en-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of sure that the safety belt is protecting the
an accident. Always stow objects securely in center seating position.
the luggage compartment and secure them — Always pull forward on the backrest to make
at the tie-downs. Use straps suitable for sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
heavy objects. place.
— If pieces of luggage or objects are secured
to the tie-downs with unsuitable or dam- @) Note
aged straps, this can increase the risk of in- —To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear
jury during braking maneuvers or accidents. head restraints down > page 67 before fold-
— When transporting heavy objects, the vehi- ing the rear backrests forward.
cle characteristics will change due to the — When folding the backrest forward, make
shift in the center of gravity, which increases sure the outer safety belts are in the belt
the risk of an accident. You may need to guide recess so that they do not get pinched
adapt your driving style and speed to the in the backrest lock and damaged. Other ob-
current conditions. jects should be removed from the rear
84
bench seat to protect the backrest from mounting eyelets in the side trim panel
damage. > fig. 78.
— If you move the front seat back when the > To remove the luggage compartment cover,
rear seat backrest is folded forward, you pull both levers firmly in the direction of the ar-
could damage the head restraints on the row > fig. 79 and remove the cover upward.
rear seat. > To install the luggage compartment cover,
— Make sure that the heating grid strips for place the cover in the mounts on the side trim
the rear window defogger are not damaged panels on the left and right side.
by abrasive objects. > Press the cover down into the right mount until
— Applies to: vehicles with manual luggage it locks into place.
compartment cover: Let the luggage com-
partment cover roll up slowly to reduce the
risk of damage. Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
—The tire pressure must be adapted to the

load > page 271.
— You can purchase straps at specialty stores.
Luggage compartment cover

Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment cover
2
S|
2 Fig. 80 Left side of the luggage compartment: rear lower-
=
+ ing button
ao
The rear of the vehicle can be lowered to make

loading and unloading easier.
Requirement: all vehicle doors must be closed.

The trailer mode for air suspension is switched
off.
> Open the luggage compartment lid.

> Press the lower section of the button (@). The
rear of the vehicle lowers.
> Press the upper section of the button @. The
rear of the vehicle will Lift.
The LED in the button will turn on while the vehi-

cle is lowering. When the loading level has been
reached, the LED will stay on as long as the rear
of the vehicle is in the lowered position. The LED
turns off when the vehicle returns to the original
Fig. 79 Luggage compartment: removing and installing
level.
the luggage compartment cover
The rear of the vehicle will be automatically
Observe the safety precautions > page 84. raised when you select another mode or start to
80B012721BA
drive. >
> To attach the luggage compartment cover, pull
the cover out by the handle and secure it in the
ss
B3DQ
S=
a
— Do not park the vehicle in a lowered loading oO
level.
— Before the rear lowering ends, make sure
there is enough clearance above the vehicle
and the luggage compartment lid, if it is
open.
Oo
— The vehicle will not lower when the ignition
is switched off if the compressed air reser-
voir is empty. The button LED blinks three
times.
— If the compressed air reservoir is empty, it is
refilled while driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h).
ates Man Mlb 4M) mT Mog [oar]

inside the passenger compartment Fig. 82 Center backrest: release lever and release button*
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be
possible to fold the backrests forward separately
Pho coxs
or together.
Folding the outer rear backrests forward and

backward
> Pull the release lever (@) in the direction of the
arrow or pull the lever* > page 65, fig. 59 up-
ward. The backrest will swing forward. Allow it
Fig. 81 Outer backrest: release lever and securing knob
to lock into the lowest position.
> Fold the backrest back up again until it locks in-
to place and the red marking @) is no longer
visible.
Folding the center rear backrest forward and

backward
> Pull on the upper release lever@ and fold the
backrest forward (2), or
> Press the release button* @) downward. The
red marking will become visible. Fold the back-
rest forward.
> Fold the backrest back up again until it locks in-
to place and the red marking (@) is no longer
visible.
86
Increasing the size of the cargo area f

inside the luggage compartment
Applies to: vehicles with release lever in the luggage compart-
ment
B8Ww-0268
Fig. 85 Luggage compartment: partition net
The partition net prevents objects from sliding

into the passenger compartment. You can attach
the partition net behind the front or rear seats.
Fig. 83 Luggage compartment: release lever
Use the mounting eyelets @ or @ for this.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be Observe the safety precautions > page 84.
possible to fold the backrests forward separately
or together. » Fold the backrest forward, if necessary
=> page 86.
Observe the safety precautions > page 84. > To attach the partition net, secure it in the up-
> Pull the release lever > fig. 83 in the direction per mounting eyelets first, and then in the low-
of the arrow to fold the backrest forward. er mounting eyelets.
> To set up the backrest again, fold it back until it > Tighten and secure the straps @).
locks or the red marking (8) > page 86, fig. 81 > Slide the lower section of the partition net @)
is no longer visible. to the desired level.
> To release the partition net, loosen the strap
Pe vaat ated Matte
©.
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
—The straps must face toward the rear when

attaching the partition net.
— You must disengage the partition net before
folding the backrest back into the upright
position.
80B012721BA
D In certain countries.
87
ie-downs and luggage com nt net Car

Applies to: vehicles with removable cargo floor
Fig. 88 Luggage compartment: installing the cargo floor
Removing and installing the cargo floor

> To remove the cargo floor, pull the entire cargo
floor toward the back of the vehicle.
> To insert the cargo floor, slide it toward the
backrests until it audibly engages into the tabs
> fig. 88.
Roof rack
stretched out z -
General information
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack mount
Tie-downs
BFY-0012
There are tie-downs (@ in the luggage compart-
ment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
» Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
Cargo net
Applies to: vehicles with cargo net
Use the cargo net (2) to secure lighter objects in

the luggage compartment Fig. 89 Roof rail: mounting points
> Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward.

If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof,
> Attach the hooks for the cargo net to the tie-
you must observe the following:
downs.
— These roof racks are the basis for a complete
roof rack system. Only roof racks that are suita-
ble for your vehicle may be used. Audi recom-
mends roof racks and attachments from the
Audi Genuine Accessories program.
— Make sure the roof rack is mounted on the vehi-
cle only at the specified locations.
— Note the permitted axle load, permitted total
weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle
=> page 314. The roof load is the total of the >
88
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and

(@) For the sake of the environment
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must
also note the permitted load of the carrier sys- Energy usage will increase because of the in-
tem being used. creased wind resistance. Remove the roof rack
when you are no longer using it.
ZA WARNING
— Follow the installation instructions provided Installing the roof rack
Applies to: vehicles with roof racks supplied by the factory
with the roof rack system. If you do not se-
cure the roof rack system and objects on the
BFY-0041
roof correctly, they could come loose from
the vehicle and cause an accident.
— The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
driving characteristics by shifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface
area exposed to wind. You may need to
adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions. Audi recommends that
you do not drive faster than 80 mph (130
km/h).
— Distribute the cargo evenly on the roof rack
and do not exceed the maximum width or
the maximum total roof load weight.
— Before every trip, all bolts and connections
on the roof rack must be checked. Tighten
them if necessary and recheck them regular-
ly. If you do not do this, there is a higher risk
of the roof rack or the attachments loosen- Fig. 90 Roof rail: installing a roof rack
ing or falling off.
The roof rack set consists of a front and rear roof
@) Note rack, the cover profile and a socket wrench. On
— If you use other roof luggage rack systems the inner side of the roof rail, there are two holes
or do not install the roof racks as specified, for the rear roof rack. To prevent the front and
then any damage to the vehicle is not cov- rear roof racks from being switched during instal-
lation, there are three holes on the inner side of
ered by the warranty. Carefully follow the
the left front roof fail, and two holes on the inner
assembly and installation instructions in-
cluded with the roof rack carrier system. side of the right roof rail > page 88, fig. 89.
—To reduce the risk of damage, you must re- > Before mounting the roof rack, open the cap (@)
move the roof rack and attachment before upward.
taking your vehicle through an automatic » Use the socket wrench (2) to loosen the left and
car wash. right screw in the direction of@ until resist-
— Make sure that the luggage compartment ance is felt. Make sure the arrow on the socket
lid and the panoramic glass roof* do not wrench and the arrow on the screw line up ex-
come into contact with objects on the roof actly.
when they are open. > Clean the rubber washers (4) and the roof rail
80B012721BA
around the mounting points.

> Carefully place the roof rack over the holes in
the roof rail. Make sure the sticker is on the left >
89
side of the vehicle and the imprinted arrow

points in the direction of travel.
> Place the pins @) into the holes. The claw fas-
tener G) must engage into the edge of the roof
rail. Make sure the rubber washers (4) lie flat on
the roof rail.
> Tighten the screw in the direction of (8) using
the socket wrench. Make sure the arrow on the
socket wrench and the arrow on the screw line
up exactly. The required tightening specifica-
tion is 4.5 ft lbs (6 Nm).
> Repeat these steps for the other mounting
points for the roof rack.
Z\ WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with roof racks supplied
by the factory: when installing the roof rack
supplied by the factory on the roof rail, sensor
technology is used to adjust the ESC to any
possible change in the vehicle's center of
gravity resulting from the load. This does not
occur when using other roof rack systems, so
the risk of an accident will increase.
Installing the attachments

> Remove the cap ©) to mount attachments on

the roof rack > page 89, fig. 90.
> Slide the attachment into the T-groove (7).
> Tighten the attachment according to the roof
rack installation instructions.
> Close the cap ©.
Installing the cover profile

> After you have mounted the attachments, seal

the openings in the T-groove (7) > page 89,
fig. 90 with the cover profile (8). The cover pro-
file must not be installed under the caps.
> If you do not want to use the attachment, seal
the whole T-groove (%) with the cover profile @).
> If necessary, shorten the cover profile (8) so
that it matches the length of the open sections
of the T-groove. The caps © must be closed.
Warm and cold
Warm and cold using the seat heating* function. To reduce

the risk of injury, these individuals should
Climate control system not use seat heating*.
Q) Note
Your vehicle has a deluxe automatic climate con-
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat-
trol system with 3 zones where the temperature,
ing* elements, do not kneel on the seats or
air distribution, and air supply can be set sepa-
place heavy pressure on one area of the seat.
rately on the left front side, the right front side,
and in the rear. @) For the sake of the environment
The climate control system warms, cools, dehu- Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C
midifies, and filters the air in the vehicle interior. mode.
It is the most effective when the windows and
panoramic glass roof* are closed. If there is a @) Tips
build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation
—To prevent interference with the heating or
can help to speed up the cooling process. cooling output and to prevent the windows
The automatic climate control system automati- from fogging over, the air intake in front of
cally maintains a temperature once it has been the windshield must be free of ice, snow,
set. In all heating mode functions except defrost, and leaves.
the blower only switches to a higher speed once — Condensation from the cooling system can
the coolant has reached a certain temperature. drip and form a puddle of water under the
vehicle. This is normal and does not mean
Pollutant filter there is a leak.
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as — The energy management system may tem-
dust and pollen from the air. porarily switch off certain functions, such as
the seat heating” or rear window defogger.
ZA\ WARNING These systems are available again as soon as
— You should not use the recirculation mode the energy supply has been restored.
for an extended period of time, because no — If the front passenger's seat heating* is
fresh air is drawn in and the windows can turned on, it will not turn on again automat-
fog when cooling mode is switched off. This ically if more than 10 minutes have passed
increases the risk of an accident. between switching the ignition off and on
— Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain again.
or temperature could develop burns when
80B012721BA
91
Warm and cold
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control
B8W-0137
Fig. 91 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: cockpit controls
B8W-0138
Fig. 92 3-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: rear controls
Press the knobs, buttons or rocker switches to Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Descrip-
turn the functions on or off. When the function is tion on page 91.
switched on, the LED in the respective button or
OFF] Climate control system
knob turns on.
The [OFF] button switches the climate control
Some rocker switches can be assigned with multi-
system on or off. It also switches on when you
ple functions. The various functions can be acti-
press another button or a knob. Airflow from out-
vated by pressing on the switch multiple times.
side is blocked when the climate control system
On right-hand drive vehicles*, the functions of
is switched off.
the rocker switches (8) and ©) are reversed.
The driver and front passenger settings can be A/C / A/C MAX* Cooling mode
adjusted separately. You can adjust the settings You can switch the respective cooling mode on
for the rear of the vehicle using the controls in and off with the rocker switch @).
the rear > fig. 92.
92
Warm and cold
The cooling mode only functions with the blower sure a continuous exchange of air inside the vehi-
turned on. The air is not cooled and humidity is cle. To have the blower regulated automatically,
not reduced when cooling mode is switched off. press one of the knobs ().
This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling
Air distribution
mode switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures. You can use the rocker switches @) to adjust the
vents where the air will flow out of. Press the
If you activate A/C ON, the cooling mode will be
rocker switches (2) repeatedly until the desired
automatically regulated. A/C OFF switches cool-
air distribution setting is displayed in the climate
ing mode off.
control system controls. To have the air distribu-
If you activate A/C MAX*, the cooling mode will tion regulated automatically, press one of the
operate with maximum output. To reduce unnec- knobs (a).
essary energy usage, only use this function brief-
ly. SYNC Synchronization
Use the rocker switch (5) to select the function.
= Recirculation mode
When synchronization is switched on, the set-
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is tings for the driver's side are applied to the front
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil- passenger's side and the rear (except for seat
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the heating/ventilation*). If the settings on the front
vehicle interior A\ in Description on page 91. passenger's side or in the rear are changed, the
synchronization will automatically switch off and
Pressing the <> button switches recirculation
3-ZONE will appear in the display.
mode on or off manually. You can also switch the
recirculation mode off by pressing the knob (@ or SET REAR Function
the §& button.
Use the rocker switch (5) to select the function.
AUTO Automatic mode When the function is switched on, you can adjust
all settings for the rear using the climate control
Automatic mode maintains a constant tempera-
system controls in the cockpit. The rear climate
ture inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow
control system controls cannot be operated at
and air distribution are controlled automatically.
the same time. This function switches off auto-
You can switch automatic mode on or off by
matically after a certain period of time or after
pressing the knob (@).
leaving the menu.
Temperature
a Seat heating*
You can adjust the temperature between 60°F
The seat heating temperature can be set at mul-
(+16°C) and 84°F (+28°C) by turning the knob
tiple levels. Press the w button once to switch on
©. If outside of this range, LO or HI will appear
the highest level. Press the #/ button again to de-
in the climate control system display. In both set-
crease the temperature one level at a time. The
tings, the climate control runs constantly at the
seat heating is off when all of the LEDs are off.
maximum cooling or heating level. The tempera-
ture is not regulated. #4 Seat ventilation*
The temperature can be adjusted in the rear us- The seat ventilation intensity can be set to multi-
ing the rear controls > fig. 92. ple levels. Press the &J button once to switch on
the highest level. Press the £4 button again to
=z Blower
decrease the intensity one level at a time. The
You can adjust the volume of air generated by the seat ventilation is off when all of the LEDs are off. >
80B012721BA
blower to your preference using the rocker switch

@. The blower should always run at a low setting
to prevent the windows from fogging and to en-
93
Warm and cold
& Defrosting must press the §& button if fog forms on the win-
The windshield and side windows are defrosted
dows.
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible.
Align the outer air vents with the side windows. Steering wheel heating
The maximum amount of air flows mainly from
Sica Le molal
the vents below the windshield. Recirculation
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
mode switches off. The temperature should be
set at 72 °F (+22 °C) or higher. The temperature > Press the @ button on the multifunction steer-
is controlled automatically. ing wheel to switch the steering wheel heating
on and off.
You can switch the defroster on or off using the
& button. You can switch the function off by
pressing a knob @). Messages
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
@ Rear window defogger
@& Steering wheel heating: on / Steering wheel
The rear window defogger only operates when heating: off
the engine is running. It switches off automati-
cally after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the This message appears if you switched the steer-
outside temperature. ing wheel heating on or off by pressing the but-
ton on the multifunction steering wheel.
To prevent the rear window defogger from
switching off automatically, press and hold the Steering wheel heating: malfunction! See own:
er's manual
® button for more than three seconds. This is
stored until the ignition is switched off. If this message appears, there is a malfunction.
Vents
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
You can open or close the center and rear vents in malfunction repaired.
the cockpit and the vents in the rear center con-
sole using the ridged thumbwheels. The levers Auxiliary climate control
adjust the direction of the airflow from the vents.
Residual heat Applies to: vehicles with auxiliary climate control
You can activate the residual heat function when

The auxiliary climate control system warms or
the ignition is switched off by pressing the knob
cools the vehicle interior. The vehicle will turn on
@ (left side). The residual heat from the coolant
the auxiliary climate control system if needed,
is used to heat the vehicle interior. The residual
depending on the last temperature that was set
heat function switches off automatically after
with the climate control system controls. This
about 15 minutes.
function can be used when the drive system is
switched off.
ONC eeiaeiilehy
You can turn the auxiliary climate control system
You can adjust additional settings. on and off immediately in the MMI or set a timer.
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

Requirement: the charge level of the high-volt-
HICLE > Air conditioning.
age battery must be sufficient.
Auto recirculation
When switched on, automatic recirculation con-
trols the recirculation mode automatically. You
94
Warm and cold
After switching off the ignition

@) Tips
Information about the active timer will appear in
— Using the auxiliary climate control while
the display after switching off the ignition. You
charging can also reduce the charge level of
can start the set climate control settings imme-
the high-voltage battery.
diately with the f button, or go to the auxiliary
— Starting or stopping the vehicle will not
climate control menu with the > button.
switch off the auxiliary climate control auto-
matically.
— The auxiliary climate control system will not
(i) Tips
turn on automatically or will turn off earlier — Make sure the time and date match in the
if the high-voltage battery charge level is system settings so that the timer can func-
too low, even if the vehicle is being charged tion correctly > page 236.
at the time. — The auxiliary climate control can also be
switched on and off immediately when a
timer is set.
Applies to: vehicles with auxiliary climate control — You can operate the climate control in the
vehicle interior when the high-voltage bat-
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- tery is charging using the charging timer
HICLE > Air conditioning > Auxiliary air condi- => page 123. The climate control output de-
tioning. pends on the power supply capacity.
Immediate start
Additional settings
You can immediately switch the auxiliary climate
Applies to: vehicles with auxiliary climate control
control on and off using the f button. When this
function is switched on, a colored bar lights up >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
over the button and the remaining time is dis- VEHICLE > Air conditioning > Auxiliary air con-
played. ditioning > ©.
The auxiliary climate control will run for a maxi- Start A/C after unlocking
mum of 30 minutes after the immediate start.
If this function is activated, the climate control
Timer programming will continue to run for five minutes after the ve-
hicle has been unlocked.
You can set up and activate up to two timers for
the departure time. Comfort aux. A/C
Applies to: vehicles with comfort auxiliary climate control
> Select a timer using >.
> Set the date and press Next. You can set if the steering wheel heating* and
> Set the time (departure time) and press OK. seat heating* or seat ventilation* should also be
The timer will be activated automatically once automatically activated with auxiliary climate
itis set. control. You can select the respective zones.
>» Set the second timer, if necessary.
Window and mirror heating*
By setting the departure time, you determine Applies to: vehicles with comfort auxiliary climate control
when your vehicle should reach the desired tem- You can set if the rear window and mirrors should
perature. The departure time can be a maximum also be heated during auxiliary climate control.
of six days in the future. The auxiliary climate
control will continue to run approximately ten
Messages
minutes after the departure time is reached.
80B012721BA
Applies to: vehicles with auxiliary climate control
2— There is a malfunction in the auxiliary air

conditioning.
95
Warm and cold
If this message appears, there is a system mal- @) Tips

function. Drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to — Never repair the A/C system evaporator with
have the malfunction repaired. components from old vehicles or from recy-
cling.
Fluids in the A/C system — New replacement evaporators for portable
A/C systems must be certified and labeled
Refrigerant in the A/C system as such, so that they comply with the SAE
The sticker in the motor compartment provides Se Te eee iS
information about the type and amount of refrig-
erant used in the vehicle’s A/C system. The stick-
er is located in the front section of the motor
compartment or at the front or back of the hood.
Symbol | Meaning
Warning: the A/C system must only
A be serviced by qualified technicians.
tr Refrigerant type
tt Lubricant type
Refer to the service information

(only available for authorized Audi
dealers or authorized Audi Service
Facilities)
The A/C system must only be serv-
Be
iced by qualified technicians.
Flammable refrigerant
Se
Make sure all components are dis-

posed of correctly and never install
q components in the vehicle that have
been removed from old vehicles or
taken from recycling.
Lubricant in the A/C system

The sticker in the engine compartment provides
information about the type and amount of refrig-
erant oil used in the vehicle’s A/C system. For the
refrigerant oil quantity, refer to the Technical Da-
ta > page 313.
Z\ WARNING
To ensure secure and safe operation, the A/C
system must only be serviced by qualified
technicians and certified technicians (SAE
standard J2845).
96
Driving
Driving Stopping the engine in an emergency

If necessary in an emergency, the engine can also
Starting the vehicle be stopped while driving using the emergency off
(eta function*.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button twice in
a row or press and hold it one time.
RAZ-1102}
If you would like to switch the ignition on or off
without starting the engine, follow these steps:
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button without

pressing the brake pedal.
Switching the ignition off automatically

Fig. 93 Center console: starting the engine To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the
ignition and possibly the exterior lighting may
Requirement: the key must be in the vehicle. switch off automatically.
Starting the engine Requirements:
> Press and hold the brake pedal. — Conventional drive system: the Start/Stop sys-
>» Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The tem must have stopped the engine.
engine will start. — Plug-in hybrid drive: you must have driven the
vehicle. The combustion engine must not be
Plug-in hybrid drive: the electric drive system is
running.
switched on. The combustion engine only starts
— You must have left the vehicle for longer than
when necessary. The power meter indicates if the
30 seconds.
electric drive system is switched on > page 15.
— The ignition must be switched on.
Equipment that uses a lot of electricity is switch-
Among other indicators, the system detects that
ed off temporarily when you start the engine. If
you have left the vehicle based on the following
the engine does not start immediately, the start-
factors:
ing procedure stops automatically after a short
time. If this is the case, repeat the starting pro- — The driver's door has been opened.
cedure after approximately 30 seconds. — The driver's safety belt has been unbuckled.
— The brake pedal is not being pressed.
Stopping the engine
The ignition will also be switched off after 30 mi-
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop.
nutes or if you lock the vehicle from the outside.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The
engine will switch off.
Z\ WARNING
Plug-in-hybrid drive: the electric drive system and —To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never al-
the combustion engine are switched off. low the engine to run in confined spaces.
Applies to: vehicles with steering lock: The steer- — Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
ing is locked when you turn off the engine and has come to a complete stop. Switching it
open the driver's door. The steering lock helps off before the vehicle has stopped may im-
prevent vehicle theft. “P” must be engaged on pair the function of the brake booster and
80B012721BA
vehicles with an automatic transmission. power steering. You would then need to use
more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
The fact that you cannot steer and brake as [>
97
Driving
usual may increase the risk of accidents and Remote control key: hold back of key
serious injuries. against the designated area. See owner's man-
— Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex- ual
iting the vehicle > page 98. The battery in the vehicle key may be drained or
there may be a malfunction. To start the vehicle,
@) Note you must also hold the vehicle key against the lo-
— Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and cation shown ?) > page 97, fig. 93.
heavy engine load if the engine has not
If the malfunction remains, drive immediately to
reached operating temperature yet. You
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
could damage the engine.
Service Facility to have the malfunction correct-
— If the engine has been under heavy load for ed.
an extended period of time, heat builds up
in the engine compartment after the engine
When driving
is switched off and there is a risk of damag-
ing the engine. For this reason, let the en- Starting to drive, stopping, and parking
gine run at idle for approximately two mi-
nutes before shutting it off. Starting from a stop
> Press and hold the brake pedal.
@ Tips > Start the engine.
— Brief noises are normal when starting and > Select a gear.
stopping the vehicle and are no cause for >» Release the parking brake.
concern. > Release the brake pedal. The vehicle may roll.
— For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en- > Press the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again au-
Securing the vehicle against rolling
tomatically or it may continue to run, even if
the ignition is switched off. Secure your vehicle to prevent it from rolling be-
— It may not be possible to start the vehicle in fore exiting the vehicle.
extremely low temperatures. > Set the parking brake.
— Power will be fully available once the engine > Select the “P” selector lever position.
is at operating temperature. > If parking on a steep road, turn the steering
wheel so that your vehicle will roll against the
Messages curb in case it should start to move.
FJ Engine start system: malfunction! Please If one of these measures is not possible, for ex-
contact Service ample because there is no vehicle power, you
must secure your vehicle against rolling using ad-
There is a malfunction in the engine start system.
ditional measures.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer > Only park the vehicle on a level surface.
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the > Use suitable objects to block the front and rear
malfunction repaired. wheels.
>| Remote control key: key not detected. Is the Set the parking brake before selecting the “P” se-
key still in the vehicle? lector lever position. This prevents too much
The vehicle key was removed from the vehicle stress from being placed on the locking mecha-
while the engine is running. If the vehicle key is nism when parking on a steep surface.
no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ig-
nition on or start the engine once you stop it. You
also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside.
98
Driving
ZA WARNING Requirement: the driver's door must be closed,

the engine must be on, and the vehicle must be
— Always set the parking brake when leaving traveling uphill.
your vehicle, even if for a short period of
time. If the parking brake is not set, the ve- > To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the
hicle could roll away, increasing the risk of brake pedal for several seconds while the vehi-
an accident. cle is stationary.
— Do not leave your vehicle unattended while
the engine is running, because this increases Z\ WARNING
the risk of an accident. —If you do not begin driving immediately af-
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au- ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is may begin to roll backward. Press the brake
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident, pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
do not inadvertently press the accelerator —The hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve- on inclines in every scenario (for example,
hicle is stopped. on slippery or icy ground).
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This is espe- Gears and driving programs
cially important when leaving persons or an-
imals in the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
[RAZ-0410
R Q)—
could start unintentionally, the parking
brake could release, or electronic equipment
could activate, which increases the risk of an (2—*S
accident. N
tt
— No persons or animals should be left in a
locked vehicle. Locked doors make it more
difficult for emergency workers to enter the D/S
vehicle, which puts lives at risk. 7 I
— If you do not begin driving immediately af- Fig. 94 Center console: selector lever
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
may begin to roll backward. Press the brake The automatic transmission shifts automatically
pedal or set the parking brake immediately. depending on the selected gear and the current
driving style. When driving with a moderate driv-
@ Note ing style, upshifting early and downshifting late
will help to improve fuel economy. When driving
If you have to stop on an incline, always press
with a sporty driving style, the transmission per-
the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place to
mits higher RPMs.
reduce the risk of the vehicle rolling back-
ward. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place The gears are displayed next to the selector lever.
by pressing and holding the accelerator pedal.
— P (Park)
The transmission can overheat, which increas-
—R (Reverse): driving in reverse
es the risk of damage.
—N (Neutral): idle
—D (Drive)
Hill hold assist
Selecting a gear
If you take your foot off of the brake pedal when
driving on hills, the braking force will be held for Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
80B012721BA
several seconds. At that time, you can start driv- — Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
ing without the vehicle rolling backward. brake pedal.
99
Driving
— Press the release button @ on the selector lev- Selecting a driving program
er. Various driving programs can be selected when in
—To select the nearest gear, move the selector the “D” gear. The programs influence when the
lever forward or back until you feel the first transmission shifts and how the accelerator ped-
pressure point. al responds.
—To skip a gear (for example, move from “D” to
“R”), move the selector lever past the pressure The selected driving program is displayed in the
point in the desired direction. instrument cluster.
— The label next to the selector lever for the se- —D (Drive): normal driving mode
lected gear will light up. —S (Sport): sporty driving mode
“N” (Neutral) gear If you select the Dynamic mode in Audi drive se-
In the “N” gear, power is not transmitted to the lect*, the “S” driving program will be activated.
driving wheels. Use the “N” gear in a car wash When the ignition is switched off, the driving pro-
gram may be reset to “D”.
(with conveyor belts), for example.
If you unintentionally select “N” while driving To switch between the current driving program
and “S”, push the selector lever toward the rear.
(faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)), you can also shift
back to “D” without pressing the brake pedal. Plug-in hybrid drive system: Not all plug-in hy-
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked
brid modes are available in the “S” driving pro-
when the transmission is in the "N” gear.
gram. The driving program or plug-in hybrid
mode will be automatically adjusted if it is not
“P” (Park) gear compatible with an operation.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ZA\ WARNING
The vehicle is secured from rolling away by the
— Before you start driving, check if the label
parking lock when in the “P” gear.
for the desired selector lever position next
— Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the to the selector lever is lit up.
brake pedal. — Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex:
— Press the “P” button @) on the selector lever. iting the vehicle > page 98.
— The “P” next to the selector lever will light up. — Power is still transmitted to the wheels
when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
“P” engages automatically if you switch the en-
vent the vehicle from “creeping”, you must
gine off while the “D” or “R” gear is selected. If
keep your foot on the brake in all selector
you switch the engine off in “N”, “P” will engage
lever positions (except "P" and "N") when
automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
the engine is running.
Conventional drive system: If you want to switch — To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
from “P” to “D” or “R”, the engine must be run- press the accelerator pedal when changing
ning. gears if the vehicle is stationary and the en-
gine is running.
Plug-in hybrid drive system: If you want to switch
— Never select the “R" or "P” gears while driv-
from “P” to “D” or “R”, the electric drive system
must be switched on or the motor must be run- ing. Doing so could cause an accident.
ning. — The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
switched off.
If you cannot shift out of “P”, for example be-
cause the vehicle has no power, you may need to G) Tips
use the emergency release for the parking lock
If you shift between “D” and “R” within one
=> page 103.
second, you do not need to press the brake >
100
Driving
pedal. This makes it possible to “rock” if it is > To switch back to automatic mode, press and
stuck, for example. hold the @) shift paddle or push the selector
lever toward the rear.
DTT ah If you stop using the shift paddles temporarily,

the transmission will switch back to automatic
RAZ-0411
mode. To keep shifting manually, tilt the selector
lever toward the front passenger's side.
@ Tips
— The transmission only allows manual shift-
ing when the engine speed is within the per-
mitted range.
— The transmission automatically shifts up or
Fig. 95 Center console: shifting manually with the selector down before critical engine speed is
lever RAZ-0003| reached.
Accelerator pedal
RAZ-0565
— a
Fig. 96 Steering wheel: shift paddles*
You can shift the gears manually when in “D”

mode. The transmission must be in tiptronic Big S Sao
my loc co le ogpeua
mode. You can shift into manual shifting mode
while the:vehicle is stationary or while driving: You can accelerate the vehicle using the accelera-
tor pedal.
Shifting with the selector lever , , a
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
> To switch to manual shifting mode, tilt the se- Depending on the equipment, you may be able to
lector lever toward the front passenger's side adjust the haptic feedback for the accelerator
> fig. 95. “M” will be displayed in the instru- pedal in the MMI.
ment cluster.
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > (Charg-
» Upshifting: push the selector lever forward (4).
ing & Efficiency) > Efficiency assist > (Interac-
> Downshifting: push the selector lever toward
tive accelerator).
the rear ©).
> To switch back to automatic mode, tilt the se-
lector lever toward the driver's side. Accelerator pedal feedback
Shifting with the shift paddles
. . Haptic feedback in the accelerator pedal indi-
Applies to: vehicles with shift paddles
cates when you should take your foot off the ac-
> Upshifting: press the @ shift paddle ©fig. 96. celerator pedal to drive more efficiently. >
80B012721BA
> Downshifting: press the ©) shift paddle.
101
Driving
Combustion engine startup Using Launch Control

— Press the brake pedal with your left foot and
A haptic pressure point indicates when the com- hold it all the way down for at least one second.
bustion engine will be started. The pressure point — With the brake pedal pressed, press the accel-
is variable and depends on the high-voltage bat- erator pedal all the way down with your right
tery charge level. foot at the same time.
@ Recuperation — Once the engine reaches a constant speed, re-
@ Power by electric motor move your foot from the brake pedal.
@) Pressure point Once the vehicle has started moving, reactivate

@ Power by combustion engine the ESC so that it is fully functional.
© Maximum acceleration
ZA WARNING
Maximum acceleration Only use Launch Control when road and traffic
If you press the accelerator pedal all the way conditions allow it and other road users will
down, the motor’s full power will be used and not be endangered or impacted by your driv-
you will reach maximum acceleration, also called ing and the vehicle's acceleration. The driving
“kick-down”. wheels could spin and the vehicle could
swerve, especially on slick or slippery road
Applies to: vehicles with boost function: The elec-
surfaces, which increases the risk of an acci-
tric motor can switch on for a brief period if the
dent.
accelerator pedal is pressed all the way down in
the “D” and “S” driving program. The availability
() Note
of this function depends on the charge level of
the high-voltage battery and the temperature of When accelerating using Launch Control, all
the drive system components, among other vehicle components are subject to heavy
things. loads. This can result in increased wear.
ZX WARNING G@) Tips

The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle After accelerating using the Launch Control,
could swerve on slick or slippery road surfaces the temperature of some vehicle components
when using kick-down, which increases the may increase greatly. If that happens, the
risk of an accident. function will not be available for a few mi-
nutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a
cool-down period, Launch Control will be
Launch Control
available again.
Applies to: vehicles with Launch Control
Launch Control provides the best possible accel-

eration when starting from a stop.
Requirements
— The engine must be at operating temperature.
— The steering wheel must not be turned.
— Start/Stop system* must be deactivated
=> page 108.
—ESC must be limited > page 119.
— Driving program “S” > page 100 or the Dynam-
ic Audi drive select* mode must be selected
>page 115.
102
Driving
Manually releasing the parking lock Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible in a safe location and secure it so it
does not roll > page 98. See an authorized Audi
B4M-0189
@
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
sistance.
[Gi Transmission: too hot. Please stop vehicle

@ Do not continue driving. Select "P" and contact an
Facility for assistance.
fs] Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving

Fig. 98 Driver's side footwell: releasing the parking lock
using the emergency release
style
The transmission temperature has increased sig-

The emergency release is located under the floor nificantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break
mat on the driver's side. from driving until the temperature returns to the
Releasing the parking lock using the normal range and the indicator light turns off.
emergency release [&] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
> Secure the vehicle against rolling > page 98. ue driving. See owner's manual
> Pry the cover off the opening using the screw-
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
driver inserted in the slot. sion. You may continue driving. Drive to an au-
> Insert the socket wrench from the vehicle tool
kit into the opening. Facility soon to have the malfunction corrected.
> Turn the socket wrench clockwise until it stops
@ and press it downward until it locks into [@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
place @). ue driving with limited function. Please contact
> Leave the socket wrench inserted. Service
Resetting the parking lock There is a system malfunction in the transmis-

sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
> Grasp the socket wrench with both hands and mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
carefully pull it upward to remove. may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
> Install the cover. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
ZA WARNING malfunction corrected.
— Only use the parking lock emergency release
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
if the vehicle is secured against rolling
ue driving with limited function. No reverse
= page 98. An unsecured vehicle may roll,
gear
which increases the risk of an accident.
— Only activate the emergency release while There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
on a level surface or a slight slope. sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you must mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
not drive when the emergency release is ac- may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
tivated. You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
80B012721BA
rected. >
i] Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
cle
103
Driving
i Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- fs] P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine
ue driving in D until engine is off off. Please contact Service
There is a system malfunction in the transmis- There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency selector lever. The “P” gear is automatically en-
mode. If you turn the engine off, you will not be gaged when you turn off the engine. Drive to an
able to select any other gears after restarting the authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have rected.
the malfunction corrected.
Move selector lever to automatic position
| Danger of rolling away! P not possible.
There is a malfunction in the tiptronic mode. End
Please apply parking brake
tiptronic mode by pushing the selector lever to
— The parking lock was released using the emer- the left into the "D/S" position.
gency release > page 103. Or
— The parking lock can no longer be engaged. Drive system
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
the malfunction corrected. Secure the vehicle
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first
against rolling before exiting the vehicle
1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts
=> page 98.
work smoothly together, which helps to increase
There is a malfunction in the clutch. The engine the service life of the engine and other drive com-
torque that can be transferred is reduced. You ponents.
may continue driving. Avoid using the clutch in
Do not drive higher than two-thirds of the maxi-
the future in any way that will place a heavy load
mum permitted engine RPM during the first 600
on it. Do not let the clutch rub for a long time.
miles (1,000 km) and do not use full accelera-
The indicator light turns off once the clutch is
tion. The engine can be increased RPM gradually
fully operable again.
during the next 300 miles (500 km).
fel Selector lever: malfunction! Gear change on-
ly possible if using both shift paddles. Plug-in hybrid drive
There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
er. You can continue driving with restricted func- With plug-in hybrid drive, you can select between
tion. The selector lever is not working. Gears can the electric and combustion engine drive systems
only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at or combine them > page 105, > page 101.
the same time when the vehicle is stationary. The
“P” gear is automatically engaged when you turn
off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the malfunction corrected. The vehicle is able to recover energy by using “re-
cuperation”. This converts the majority of the
fs} Selector lever: malfunction! You can contin-
movement energy into electric energy, which is
ue driving. Please contact Service
stored in the hybrid drive system battery. In addi-
There is a system malfunction in the selector lev- tion to the engine braking effect from the com-
er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal- bustion engine, the vehicle is braked by recupera-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the tion. This will happen automatically when you
malfunction repaired. press the brake pedal while driving in “D” gear, or
when you remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
104
Driving
When you press the brake pedal, recuperation is If&% is displayed, the navigation route guidance
used to brake the vehicle. The brakes will only be is active and the vehicle is taking the route data
activated if necessary. When driving normally, into account for selecting the drive mode. The ve-
this makes it possible to brake using only recu- hicle will calculate what sections of the route
peration just before coming to stop and to lose should be driven on using electric power in order
little energy and range from braking. to achieve the most efficient driving style that is
possible. Electric driving is preferred for sections
ZA WARNING of the route predicted to have lower speeds, such
as in towns or traffic jams.
In certain situations, the recuperation may
brake proactively. However, the recuperation Electric driving
braking effect is limited. Always be ready to
The <S¥ button will be green when EV mode is
brake to reduce the risk of an accident.
switched on. The vehicle can be driven by the
electric motor if the conditions for this have been
@ Tips
met > page 105, Conditions for electric driving.
If the ESC is limited or switched off, automat-
ic recuperation is not available and will not Conditions for electric driving
brake. — The high-voltage battery charge level and tem-
perature must be sufficient.
Plug-in hybrid mode — Driving program “S” must not be selected.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive — The vehicle speed must be below approximately
Switching the plug-in hybrid mode 85 mph (140 km/h).
— The accelerator pedal must not be pressed too
The <¥ button is located above the selector lever
hard.
in the center console.
Indicator lights
> Press <SY to switch between electric and hybrid
driving. Symbol | Meaning
EV mode is switched on and active.
Hybrid driving
You are driving only with electric
If the <SY button does not turn on, you are driv- power.
ing in hybrid mode. The vehicle can be driven
EV mode is switched on, but is tem-
with the combustion engine or with the electric
porarily in standby mode. Once the
motor if the conditions for it have been met
conditions are met again, electric
= page 105, Conditions for electric driving.
driving will resume.
Depending on the motor, you may be able to EV mode is not available, because
switch among various hybrid modes: the conditions for electric driving
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: have not been met.
VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > e-tron The combustion engine is running.
mode. The Battery Hold hybrid mode is ac-
© Auto Hybrid - The electric motor and combus- tive.
tion engine work efficiently together. This mode The Auto Hybrid hybrid mode is ac-
is particularly effective for long trips. tive.
“= Battery Hold - The vehicle is driven predomi- The Auto Hybrid hybrid mode is ac-
nantly with the combustion engine to maintain tive. Navigation data will be consid-
80B012721BA
the high-voltage battery charge level for as long ered.

as possible.
105
Driving
@) Tips nge monitor

— Depending on the driving style, the high-
voltage battery charge level may still go
RAX-0140)
a=]
down when in Battery Hold mode. Decne 1)
—When map data is outdated, no navigation
data will be considered.
— If you select a destination in the navigation
that is outside of the electric range, the ve-
ee
120 mi ae} i—@
hicle may exit EV mode.
Fig. 100 Range monitor
Energy flow display You can display the projected range of the vehi-
cle.

VEHICLE > Vehicle data.
> You may need to scroll down to the Range
monitor display.
@® Range potential (value)

@ Range potential (graphic)
Fig. 99 MMI: energy flow display
@®) Total range (graphic)
You can display the current energy distribution of

@ Total range (value)
the vehicle. ©® Electric range (value)
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Range potential: the value indicates an addition-
VEHICLE > Vehicle data. al amount of distance that can be gained by turn-
> You may need to scroll down to the Energy flow ing off certain convenience functions. The con-
display. venience functions with high energy usage are
listed on the display.
@ Combustion engine
— Orange: motor on @ Tips
— Gray: motor off — The range can also be displayed in the in-
@ High-voltage battery strument cluster in the on-board computer.
— Green: charge level —The range that is indicated is based on the
— Gray: drive system not switched on previous and predicted consumption values.
@®) Directional arrow For example, these can be affected if con-
venience functions are turned on.
— Green: electric driving
— Orange: driving with combustion engine
— Green-orange: driving with boost function Rye hatia le]
@) Directional arrow
— Green: recuperation You can display statistics about the trips traveled
using electric power and those using fuel. The
G) Tips values are taken from the short-term memory
The energy flow display can also be displayed and long-term memory of the on-board comput-
GF.
in the instrument cluster under the vehicle
functions tab. > Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Vehicle
data.
106
Driving
> If necessary, scroll to the e-tron short-term — Avoid driving short distances when possible.
statistics or e-tron long-term statistics. — Plug-in hybrid drive: If you must brake the vehi-
cle and coasting is not possible, then switch
Vehicle sound quickly from the accelerator pedal to the brake
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive pedal and press the brake with steady pressure.
This allows the best possible use of recupera-
The electric drive system generates considerably tion.
less noise than a combustion engine. An artificial
engine sound is generated when driving electri- (i) Tips
cally so that the vehicle can be heard from the
The amount of noise produced by the vehicle
outside when driving. The vehicle sound auto-
can increase significantly when driving with a
matically fades out at higher speeds when the
sporty style. Show respect to others around
sounds from the tires and wind start increasing.
you and the environment with the way you op-
ZA WARNING erate your vehicle, especially at night.
Other road users may not be able to defini-

Energy management
tively hear electric vehicles when they are
driving. This increases the risk of an accident Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent ener-
particularly when driving in areas with little gy management system for distributing electrici-
traffic, when maneuvering, or when driving in ty. This significantly improves the starting ability
reverse. and increases the vehicle battery life.
aia e Lae MNdeolaaile]

Neda ate lig G) Tips
Taare) — If you drive short distances frequently, the
vehicle battery may not charge enough
Your driving style greatly influences the amount
while driving. As a result, convenience func-
of fuel and energy consumed, the environmental
tions for electrical equipment may be tem-
impact, and the wear on the motor, brakes, and
porarily unavailable.
tires. Note the following information for efficient
— The vehicle battery will gradually drain if
and environmentally-conscious driving:
the vehicle is not driven for long periods of
— Turn off electrical equipment that is not need- time, or if electrical equipment is used
ed, for example seat heating”. when the engine is not running. To ensure
— Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while that the vehicle can still be started, the
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and electrical equipment will be limited or
braking. switched off.
— Avoid driving at high speeds.
— Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if pos- Messages
sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or
bike racks installed when they are not needed. B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
— Make sure the tire pressure is correct. cle
— Have maintenance performed regularly on the There is a malfunction in the drive system. The
vehicle. brake booster and the power steering may stop
— Do not let the engine run while the vehicle working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon
parked. as possible and do not continue driving. Secure
— Do not drive with winter tires during the summ- the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehi-
80B012721BA
er. cle > page 98. Have the problem corrected by an

— Use the Start/Stop system. authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— Utilize the engine braking effect. Facility. >
107
Driving
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact > Press (A)>F to switch the system on or off.
Service
If you switch the system off during a Stop phase,
There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive the engine will start again automatically.
slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Basic requirements
Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction cor-
rected. — The driver’s door and the hood must be closed
and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
BS Vehicle sound: malfunction! Pedestrians
—"P","N", or "D" must be engaged.
cannot hear vehicle. Please contact Service
— The steering wheel must not be turned far in ei-
There is a malfunction in the vehicle sound func- ther direction.
tion. Drive extremely carefully, since other road — The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
users may not be able to hear your electric vehi- (3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
cle. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author- — The vehicle is not in trailer mode.
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunction corrected. @) Note
Other indicator lights Always switch the Start/Stop system off when
driving through water > page 108.
1f J turns on, vehicle performance is limited,
for example because the combustion engine may
Gi) Tips
not be available. Also note the additional instruc-
tions in the instrument cluster. — Depending on the driving situation, the en-
gine may already stop when coasting before
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Start/Stop system
— Ifyou select the "D" position after shifting
into reverse, the vehicle must be driven fast-
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system er than 6 mph (10 km/h) in order for the
Start/Stop system to become active again.
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel
This makes it possible to maneuver without
economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
stopping the engine.
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto-
matically when stopped, for example at a traffic Stopping and starting the engine
light. If certain conditions are met, the engine Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
may stop before the vehicle has come to a com-
plete stop. If you press the accelerator pedal > Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle
when this happens, the engine will start and driv- has stopped. The @J indicator light appears in
ing power will be transmitted. the instrument cluster once the engine stops
automatically.
The ignition and important assist systems such > The engine starts again when you remove your
as the brake booster will remain available during foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light
the Stop phase. The engine will restart automati- turns off.
cally when needed.
If the parking brake is set, the engine will only
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated start again when the accelerator pedal is pressed.
once the ignition is switched on.
Switching the Start/Stop system off and on Gi) Tips
The (A)>F button is located above the selector lev- — Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase
er in the center console. The LED in the button to keep the vehicle from rolling.
turns on when the function is switched off.
108
Driving
— The ignition will turn off if you press the Vehicle starting system: malfunction! Please
START ENGINE STOP] button during a Stop contact Service
phase.
There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system.
— If you leave the vehicle briefly during a Stop
Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or
phase and then enter again, the driver's
authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to
door must be closed and the safety belt
have the malfunction corrected.
must be fastened in order for the engine to
be able to restart.
— You can control if the engine will stop or not
Brakes
by reducing or increasing the amount of General information
force you use to press the brake pedal. For
example, if you only lightly press on the You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake
brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when pedal.
turning, the engine will not switch off when
Operating noise
the vehicle is stationary. If you press the
brake pedal harder, the engine will switch Noises may occur when braking depending on the
off. speed, braking force, and outside conditions such
as temperature and humidity.
Starting and stopping the engine automat- Braking effect

ically
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system The response time from the brakes depends on
the weather and environmental conditions. To
The system checks if certain conditions are met ensure the optimal braking effect, the brake sys-
before and during the Stop phase, and deter- tem is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done
mines if the engine stops and how long it re- by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for
mains stopped. For example, if power usage is a short period of time when driving at high
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with speeds when the windshield wipers are switched
other conditions, the following factors influence on.
the automatic engine start or stop:
If the brake system becomes damp, for example
— Environmental conditions (slopes, inclines, ele- after driving in heavy rain, the braking effect may
vation, temperature) be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily
— Battery (charge status, temperature, power us- increase the response time of the brakes include:
age)
— Wet conditions
— Engine temperature
— Low temperatures, ice, and snow
— Assist systems
— Roads covered in salt
— Driving behavior
— Dirty brake pads
Depending on the engine, the Gy indicator light
may appear if the engine is not stopped. Corrosion
Corrosion may form on the brake rotors if there is
no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driv-
en frequently or for long distances. In this case,
Drive system: please start the vehicle manually
braking heavily several times while driving at
This message appears when specific conditions high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.
are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: Se-
80B012721BA
system will not be able to restart the engine. The

lect the “N” gear so that recuperation is not used
engine must be started with the
for braking. >
START ENGINE STOP] button.
109
Driving
Brake pads — During automatic braking maneuvers, the

New brake pads do not achieve their full braking brake pedal may move downward automati-
effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They cally. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
must be “broken in” first. However, you can com- place your foot under the brake pedal.
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by
pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy @) Note
braking during the break-in period. — Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the pedal lightly when braking is not actually
vehicle is driven and on operating conditions. necessary. This can cause the brakes to over-
Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently heat and increases braking distance and
in the city or short distances or when using a very causes wear.
sporty driving style. — Observe the important information for driv-
ing downhill > page 112. This especially ap-
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: Be- plies when towing a trailer.
cause recuperation is also used for braking, the
break-in period for new brake pads is 500 miles G) Tips
(800 km).
— In vehicles with an electromechanical brake
Automatic post-collision braking system booster, the resistance in the brake pedal
may vary depending on the driving situation
The automatic post-collision braking system can
(such as if driver assistance system are ac-
help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addition-
tive).
al collisions after an accident. If the airbag con-
— If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil-
trol module detects a collision, the vehicle is
er, wheel covers or similar items, make sure
braked by the ESC.
that the air flow to the brakes is not ob-
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of structed. Otherwise the brake system can
the following occurs: overheat.
— The driver presses the accelerator pedal, or — Also refer to the information about brake
— The braking force generated by the pressed fluid > page 255.
brake pedal is greater than the braking force
that would be initiated by the system Messages
— The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
EG / @ Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle
trical system is not functioning
safely
Z\, WARNING There is a malfunction in the brake system. If

— Only apply the brakes for the purpose of BS / Bana B also turn on, there is a malfunc-
cleaning the brake system when road and tion in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution. If
traffic conditions permit. You must not en- the brake booster is not working, you have to use
danger other road users and increase the much more force when braking the vehicle.
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
— Due to the risk of injury, only have an au- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi sistance. Read and follow the other safety pre-
Service Facility work on the brake system. cautions > A\.
Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
EG Z © Brake pads: wear limit reached. You
— Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is
can continue driving. Please contact Service
stopped because this increases the risk of an
accident. The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as >
110
Driving
soon as possible to have the malfunction correct- The @) switch is located under the selector lever
ed. in the center console. It turns on when the park-
ing brake is set. You can release the parking brake
Brake booster: limited functionality. You can
manually or automatically when you start to
continue driving. Please contact Service
drive.
There is a brake booster malfunction. The brake
booster is available, but its effectiveness is re-
Setting and releasing the parking brake
duced. The braking performance may be different > Setting: pull the © switch.
compared to the usual performance. Drive to an > 1* / oa appears, the parking brake is hold-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service ing the vehicle. You can remove your foot from
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- the brake pedal.
rected. >» Releasing: when the ignition is switched on,
press and hold the brake pedal and press the
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual
button.
The brake booster remains active for a brief peri-
If the red indicator light flashes, the braking
od of time after switching off the ignition. Secure
force has not built up enough or it has decreased.
the vehicle against rolling > page 98.
You can also secure the vehicle by selecting the
Other indicator lights “P” gear or pressing the brake pedal. Make sure
When you switch the ignition on, the EMM / ® the indicator light is off before you start driving.
indicator light turns on briefly to check the func- Automatically releasing the parking brake
tion. If the indicator light does not turn on, there when starting to drive
is a system malfunction.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed
1f NG / @ stays on, there is a malfunction in and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
the brake system.
> Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive.
w@- A high load was placed on the brakes from
driving downhill for a long period of time. Follow ZA\ WARNING
the instructions in the message to utilize the en-
—To reduce the risk of an accident, always
gine braking effect and to relieve the brakes.
make sure the vehicle is situated safely
ZA WARNING while stationary.
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
If a malfunction occurs in the ABS, ESC, and
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
braking distribution, interventions that stabi- pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident,
lize the vehicle will no longer be available. do not inadvertently press the accelerator
This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve-
increases the risk that the vehicle will slide. hicle is stopped.
Do not continue driving. See an authorized
— If the power supply fails, you cannot set the
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
parking brake once it is released, or release
for assistance.
it if it is set. Secure the vehicle against roll-
ing before exiting the vehicle > page 98. See
Electromechanical an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
parking brake Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Operating the parking brake

80B012721BA
The electromechanical parking brake is used to

secure the vehicle from rolling away unintention-
ally.
111
Driving
EG / @ Parking brake: malfunction! Please

@) Tips
release parking brake
— On steep inclines, especially when in trailer
mode, the vehicle may roll backwards unin- If one of the two messages appears, there is a
tentionally when starting to drive. To reduce malfunction in the parking brake. If the message
the risk of this happening, pull and hold the appears while stationary, check if the parking
switch while pressing the accelerator brake is released and can be reset. If this is the
pedal. If enough drive power has built up at case, switch the ignition off and back on.
the wheels and the vehicle does not roll If the message stays on, if the parking brake can-
backwards, then release the switch to start not be released, or if the message appears while
to drive. driving, do not continue driving. Secure the vehi-
— If you leave the vehicle when “D” or “R” are cle against rolling before exiting the vehicle
engaged, the parking brake will be set auto- => page 98. See an authorized Audi dealer or au-
matically. thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
— Noises when the parking brake is set and re-
gw Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact
leased are normal and are not a cause for
Service
concern.
— The parking brake goes through a self-test There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive
cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
stopped. Any noises associated with this are Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
normal. tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on inclines
and secure it against rolling before exiting the ve-
Emergency braking function hicle > page 98.
/ Parking brake: warning! Vehicle parked

Emergency braking should only be used in an
too steep
emergency, if the standard brake pedal is mal-
functioning or obstructed. When the emergency The braking force may not be enough to secure
braking function is activated, the braking effect is the vehicle from rolling away. Park the vehicle in
similar to a heavy braking maneuver. a place with less of an incline.
> Pull and hold the ©) switch while driving. if Parking brake: applied
> An audio warning signal will sound and emer-
The parking brake is set. Press and hold the brake
gency braking will begin.
pedal to release the parking brake.
> If you press the accelerator pedal, emergency
braking will be canceled. Take over!
The vehicle cannot be held in place automatically.

ZA\ WARNING Press the brake pedal to secure the vehicle from
Heavy braking while driving through curves or rolling away unintentionally.
in poor road or weather conditions can cause
the vehicle to slide or the rear of the vehicle to Special driving situations
swerve, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent. Driving uphill and downhill
When driving uphill, downhill, or at high alti-

Messages tudes, note the following information:
ERING/ By Parking brake: malfunction! Safely — Drive slowly and carefully.

stop vehicle. See owner's manual — Do not try to turn around if you cannot safely
drive on an incline or hill. Instead, drive in re-
verse.
112
Driving
— When driving down hills, you can activate the

hill descent control if you press the brake pedal
ZX WARNING
while driving in “D” gear. The automatic trans- — Only drive on inclines that your vehicle is de-
mission will select a gear suitable for driving signed to handle. Do not exceed the hill
down the hill and will attempt to maintain the climbing ability of your vehicle. Your vehicle
speed at which the vehicle was traveling at the could tip or slide.
time the brake pedal was pressed. Press the — Do not drive at an angle on steep inclines
brake pedal if necessary. The hill descent con- and hills. If your vehicle is about to tip, you
trol will switch off once the hill levels out or must immediately start steering in the di-
you press the accelerator pedal. rection of the downward slope to reduce the
— Utilize the engine braking effect when driving risk of an accident.
downhill by selecting the “S” driving program — Always be ready to brake when using the hill
=> page 100. This especially applies when tow- descent control function.
ing a trailer. This reduces the load on the — Applies to: vehicles with an inclinometer: Do
brakes. not rely only on the inclinometer when as-
— Applies to: plug-in hybrid drive: In high temper- sessing the driving situation.
atures, make sure the high-voltage battery is
charged to at least 1/4 if towing a trailer while Offroad driving
driving on long stretches of roads with hills.
This relieves some of the load on the cooling Your vehicle is not an offroad vehicle. Note the
system. following points when driving offroad:
— Apply the brakes in intervals and do not press — Drive slowly and carefully.
the brake pedal continuously. —To reduce the risk of underbody damage, pay
— Use the hill hold assist > page 114. attention to the vehicle's ground clearance and
drive across raised areas of the ground with the
Inclinometer
Applies to: vehicles with a tilt angle display
wheels on one side of the vehicle, instead of al-
lowing the center of the vehicle to pass over the
You can display the vehicle's sideways angle and raised areas.
lengthwise angle in relation to the horizon.
—To reduce the risk of becoming stuck, drive
— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: through sandy or swampy areas at a steady
VEHICLE > Vehicle data. speed and without stopping, if possible.
— You may need to scroll down to the Inclinome- If necessary, use the following functions:
ter display.
— Audi drive select* Offroad mode > page 115
The sideways angle of your vehicle should not ex-
— Hill hold assist* > page 114
ceed the yellow range in the gauge. If it reaches
— Limit ESC > page 120
the red range, there is a risk that the vehicle
might tip. ZA\ WARNING
The steering wheel angle, the elevation, the com- Only drive in terrain that is suitable for the ve-
pass direction, and the geo-coordinates of the hicle and your driving ability.
current vehicle position are displayed in addition
to the current vehicle angle. You will also receive (@) For the sake of the environment
information about the maximum sideways and
Avoid actions that are damaging to the envi-
lengthwise angle that was reached in the current
ronment. Show respect for the natural envi-
driving cycle. These values are reset when the ig-
ronment and remain on marked routes.
nition is switched off.
80B012721BA
Note that the accuracy of the display depends on

the driving situation.
113
Driving
Hill descent assist can assist you when driving

@) Tips
down hills by maintaining a constant vehicle
Clean your vehicle after driving offroad. Dirt speed by automatically braking all four wheels.
and stones falling off your vehicle can affect You can adjust the speed using the accelerator
other road users. and brake pedals. The regulation depends on the
hill and the vehicle speed.
PUN Male Ruel
e le
> Switching on: press “2.
If you must drive through water, follow these in- > Switching off: press “2 again.
structions:
Active regulation
— Check the stability of the ground, the current,
Regulation begins shortly after you start driving
and the water depth. If the ground is unstable,
and is possible at speeds up to approximately 19
there is a strong current, or there are waves,
mph (30 km/h) and on hills that have an approxi-
the water must only reach up to the lower edge
mately 6-60% grade. If these conditions are met,
of the body at the most.
regulation will be activated and the BJ indicator
— Deactivate the Start/Stop system*. light will turn on.
— Drive carefully and no faster than at walking
speeds to prevent the front of the vehicle from Ready mode
creating waves, because they could splash If one of the requirements for active regulation is
above the lower edge of the body. Oncoming not met, the system will be in ready mode. The
vehicles could also create waves. indicator light will turn on. Once the require-
— Do not stop the vehicle while in the water. ments are met again, the system will be able to
— Drive in reverse. provide active regulation again.
— Do not turn the engine off.
Z\ WARNING
ZA\ WARNING — Be ready to apply the brakes at all times
After driving through water, press the brake when using the hill hold assist.
pedal carefully to dry the brakes so that the — Always adjust the speed to the visibility,
full braking effect will be restored. weather, road, and traffic conditions. The
system cannot replace the driver's atten-
@) Note tion.
Vehicle components such as the motor, drive — The system cannot maintain a constant vehi-
system, suspension, or electrical system can cle speed in all situations, for example when
be severely damaged by driving through wa- on smooth or slippery ground. This can in-
t er. crease the risk of an accident.
Tips G) Tips
If possible, avoid driving through salt water If you select the Audi drive select* Offroad
because it increases the risk of corrosion. Use mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
fresh water to clean any vehicle components
that come into contact with salt water.
Hill descent assist

Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
The “@ button is located above the selector lever

in the center console. It lights up when the sys-
tem is turned on.
114
Driving dynamic
Driving dynamic Dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel

and is suited to a sporty driving style. The “S”
Audi drive select driving program is selected.
Introduction Individual - Provides the option for personalized

Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select vehicle settings. Press ¥ to configure the mode
=> page 115, Individual settings.
Drive select makes it possible to experience dif-
ferent types of vehicle characteristics in one vehi-
G) Tips
cle. With different driving modes, the driver can
switch the setting, for example from sporty to When the ignition is being switched on, indi-
comfortable. This allows you to adjust the set- vidual systems, such as the drive system, will
tings to your personal preferences. This makes it be reset to a balanced setting. Select the cur-
possible to combine settings such as a sporty rent mode again to attain its full configura-
drivetrain setting with comfortable steering. tion.
Selecting an Audi drive select mode Individual settings

Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The size button is located above the selector lever The equipment in your vehicle will determine
in the center console. which settings you can adjust.
> Press the left or right arrow key until the de- Drive
sired mode appears in the MMI. Or: The drive system will react to accelerator pedal
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- moves more quickly or in a more balanced man-
HICLE > Audi drive select. ner. The shift points are located in higher or low-
er engine speed ranges on vehicles with automat-
You can change the driving mode when the vehi-
ic transmissions.
cle is stationary or while driving. If traffic per-
mits, briefly remove your foot from the accelera- Depending on the setting, the drive power at the
tor pedal after changing modes so that the mode rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ-
you have selected will be activated for the drive ential* to be more sporty or moderate
system. => page 118.
The following modes may be available depending Steering

on the equipment:
The power steering will adapt. Light steering is
Offroad - Provides assistance when driving off- suitable for long trips on highways or smooth
road. The vehicle will be raised to the second- driving around curves, for example.
highest level using the air suspension*. The ESC
will be restricted and the hill descent assist* will Suspension
be activated. The vehicle will exit this mode after The suspension adjusts to be tighter or more
the ignition is switched off. comfort-oriented when it comes to compensat-
ing for uneven spots on the road.
allroad - Provides balanced vehicle handling. The
vehicle will be raised to the second-highest level The vehicle ground clearance is adjusted by the
using the air suspension*. air suspension* based on the setting.
Comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle Engine sound
setup and is suited for long drives on highways.
The engine sound adapts and can be subtle to
80B012721BA
Auto - Provides an overall comfortable yet dy- sporty. In the automatic setting, the engine
namic driving feel and is suited for everyday use. sound depends on the selected driving program.
115
Driving dynamic
Suspension @) Note
CET aR Cn) Led — Also refer to the information about ground
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control clearance > page 116.
— When transporting the vehicle on a road
The adaptive dampers are an electronically-con-
carrier, rail carrier, ship carrier, or other car-
trolled damping system. The firmness of the sus-
rier, it may only be secured at the running
pension will adapt to the driving conditions and
surfaces of the tires (circumference). Secur-
the driving situation. The settings depend on the
ing the vehicle at the axle components, sus-
selected Audi drive select* mode.
pension struts, or towing eyes is not permit-
ted because the pressure in the air suspen-
Air suspension sion struts can change during transport. The
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
vehicle might not be secured sufficiently if
The air suspension is an electronically-controlled this happens.
suspension and leveling system. The firmness of
the suspension will adapt to the driving condi- Ground clearance
tions and the driving situation. The system balan-
The vehicle height and clearance can be influ-
ces out changes in load. The vehicle level will also
adapt gradually to the vehicle speed in order to enced by the following factors:
reduce the wind resistance at high speeds and in- — Change in temperature
crease the ground clearance at low speeds. The — Change in load
settings depend on the selected Audi drive se- — Change to the Audi drive select* mode
lect* mode. — Lifting and lowering via the air suspension*
Displaying the vehicle level — Lower the rear* of the vehicle
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- ZA WARNING

HICLE > Audi drive select.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one
The filled-in boxes represent the current vehicle gets pinched when the vehicle level is chang-
level. The more boxes that are filled in, the high- ing, for example when cleaning the under-
er the ground clearance. The box that corre- body or the wheel housings.
sponds with the current vehicle level will flash
while the vehicle is lifting or lowering. The target () Note
level is highlighted in color.
Always make sure there is enough clearance
Raising the vehicle above and below the vehicle. This is especially
important for entrances with height restric-
tions, for example, before driving into under-
HICLE > Audi drive select. ground garages. You could also scrape the
> Press Raise to reach the highest vehicle level
ground when driving over the edges of curbs
and thus the maximum ground clearance.
or on steep ramps, which could damage your
> Press Lower to lower the vehicle down again.
vehicle.
The Audi drive select* mode will be changed if
necessary when the vehicle is raised. Messages
The vehicle will lower at speeds of approximately Bair suspension: malfunction! You may con-
22 mph (35 km/h) and below. This function may tinue driving slowly at max. XX mph (km/h)
only be used temporarily when increased ground
clearance is necessary. It is not intended for long There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be
drives. limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or >
116
Driving dynamic
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately. Do the power steering depending on the vehicle
not drive faster than the speed given in the mes- speed. The settings depend on the selected Audi
sage. drive select* mode.
Bair suspension: malfunction! You can contin- Dynamic steering

ue driving. Speed limited to max. XXX Applies to: vehicles with dynamic steering
There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be The driving dynamic and driving stability are in-
limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- creased by the steering ratio based on the speed.
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately. The At reduced speeds, steering is direct in order to
maximum speed has been limited. provide agile steering behavior and keep the
steering effort as minimal as possible when the
B Air suspension: malfunction! Safely stop ve-
driver is maneuvering the vehicle. This sets the
hicle. Steering and ground clearance limited
steering to be less sensitive at higher speeds in
There is a malfunction. Do not continue driving. order to provide improved vehicle control.
Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting
the vehicle > page 98. Avoid turning the steering Messages
wheel, because the vehicle ground clearance may
be so low that turning the steering wheel could a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
result in damage to the wheels and wheel hous- The power steering may have failed. Adapt your
ings. driving style immediately to compensate for the
1 o | Suspension: malfunction! You can continue fact that it may be more difficult to turn the
driving steering wheel, and stop your vehicle in a safe lo-
cation as soon as possible. Secure the vehicle
There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi
against rolling before exiting the vehicle
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
= page 98. Do not continue driving. See an au-
sistance.
B Air suspension: Vehicle is too low. Ground Facility for assistance.
clearance limited
|e —e| Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
The vehicle ground clearance is very low. Wait un-
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering
til the air suspension system has restored normal
lock. You cannot turn the ignition on. Secure the
ground clearance. Have an authorized Audi dealer
vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle
or authorized Audi Service Facility repair the mal-
=> page 98. Do not tow your vehicle because it
function immediately if the indicator light does
cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer
not turn off after a significant period of time.
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Bair suspension: malfunction! Please contact
a Steering: malfunction! You can continue
Service
driving
There is a malfunction. The driving stability may
There is a malfunction in the steering system.
be limited and the ground clearance may be low.
Steering may be more difficult or more sensitive.
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Adapt your driving style. Have the steering sys-
Service Facility for assistance.
tem checked immediately by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Please
Steering note that the red indicator light may turn on af-
ter restarting the engine. Do not continue driving
if it does.
80B012721BA
Electromechanical steering supports the driver's

|@—<| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact
steering movements by electronically adapting
Service >
117
Driving dynamic
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering ice. Always read and follow safety precautions
lock. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi >A.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
the malfunction repaired. ZA\ WARNING
Dynamic steering: correcting steering wheel — Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you
position should adapt your driving style to the cur-
rent road and traffic conditions to reduce
The steering is reinitializing. The steering wheel the risk of an accident.
will move easily after starting the vehicle. Reiniti- —The braking ability of your vehicle is limited
alization might be necessary if the steering wheel to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it
was moved while the engine was switched off. is not different from a two wheel drive vehi-
The display turns off if the initialization was suc- cle. Do not drive too fast because this in-
cessful. creases the risk of an accident.
ZA\ WARNING — Note that on wet streets, the front wheels

can “hydroplane’” if driving at speeds that
Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunc- are too high. Unlike front wheel drive
tion in the electronic steering lock because vehicles, the motor RPM does not increase
this increases the risk of an accident. suddenly when the vehicle begins hydro-
planing. Adapt your speed to the road condi-
@) Tips tions to reduce the risk of an accident.
— If there is a malfunction, the steering wheel
may be crooked when driving straight. Sy amet
—Ifthe Ba or fal indicator light only stays on Applies to: vehicles with sport differential
for a short time, you may continue driving.
The sport differential distributes the drive power
to the rear axle based on the situation. The goal
All wheel drive (quattro) is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate
on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steer-
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive ing. The settings depend on the selected Audi
drive select* mode.
The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving
power variably to the front and rear axle to im-
WEE Tel
prove the driving characteristics. It works togeth-
er with selective wheel torque control, which can it} All-wheel drive: malfunction! You can con-
activate when driving through curves tinue driving. Please contact Service
=>page 119.
Applies to: vehicles with quattro ultra: If the driv- or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
ing situation does not require all wheel drive, malfunction repaired.
then the rear section of the drivetrain will decou-
ple to save fuel. The system constantly deter- it} Sport differential: malfunction! Please con-
tact Service
mines and anticipates if all wheel drive is needed.
This allows the rear drivetrain to recouple shortly Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
before it is needed. or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
The all-wheel drive system is designed for high malfunction repaired.
motor power. Your vehicle is exceptionally power- it} All-wheel drive: too hot. Please adapt driv-
ful and has excellent driving characteristics both ing style. See owner's manual
under normal driving conditions and on snow and
118
Driving dynamic
The transmission temperature has increased sig- Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)

nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive ASR reduces drive power when the wheels begin
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re- spinning and adapts the power to the road condi-
turns to the normal range and the indicator light tions. This will increase the driving stability.
switches of.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
it} Sport differential: temperature too high.
Please adapt driving style The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are
slipping and transfers the drive power to the oth-
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
er wheels. This function is not available at higher
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive
speeds.
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re-
turns to the normal range and the indicator light In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
switches of. to keep the brake on the braked wheel from over-
heating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly.
Z\ WARNING EDL will switch on again automatically when con-
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- ditions have returned to normal.
ized Audi Service Facility if the sport differen- Selective wheel torque control
tial is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair
must be performed by trained personnel us- Selective wheel torque control is used when driv-
ing the correct oil in order to ensure safety. ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the
wheels on the inside of the curve as needed. This
allows more precise driving in curves.
Electronic Stabilization
Control Power steering
The ESC can also support vehicle stability
through steering.
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports
driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and ZA\ WARNING
improves driving stability. ESC detects critical sit- —The ESC and its integrated systems cannot
uations, such oversteering and understeering of overcome the limits imposed by natural
the vehicle, the drive wheels spinning, or the risk physical laws. This is especially important on
of the vehicle tipping. slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin
acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should
The brakes are applied or the motor torque is re-
immediately alter your speed to match the
duced in order to stabilize the vehicle.
road and traffic conditions. Do not let the in-
The following stabilization functions are integrat- creased safety provided tempt you into tak-
ed into the ESC, among others: ing risks. This could increase your risk ofa
collision.
— Please note the risk of a collision increases
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when brak- when driving fast, especially through curves
ing. The vehicle can still be steered even during and on slippery or wet roads, and when driv-
hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake ing too close to objects ahead. There is still
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. a risk of accidents because the ESC and its
A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the integrated systems cannot always prevent
system is acting to stabilize the vehicle. collisions.
— Accelerate carefully when driving on
80B012721BA
smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and

snow. The drive wheels can spin even when
119
Driving dynamic
these control systems are installed and this Switching off ESC
can affect driving stability and increase the For a more active control of the vehicle where the
risk of a collision. stabilizing functions of the ESC cannot intervene,
— As the vehicle load increases, especially the the ESC can be switched off.
roof load, the vehicle's center of gravity also
— To switch off the ESC, press and hold the Sor
increases along with the risk of the vehicle
button for more than three seconds. The B
tipping. To reduce the risk of an accident, al-
and aa indicator lights turn on.
ways adapt your driving style to the current
—To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
conditions and avoid sudden driving maneu-
function, press the button again. The indicator
vers.
lights turn off.
G) Tips
ZA\ WARNING
The ABS and ASR only function correctly when
— When the ESC is switched off or limited,
all four wheels have a similar wear condition.
there will be no vehicle stabilization or it will
Different tire sizes can lead to a reduction in
be limited. The driving wheels could spin
motor power.
and the vehicle could swerve, especially on
slick or slippery road surfaces. When there is
a heavy vehicle load and sudden driving ma-
neuvers, it may not be possible to prevent
The So* button (or #, depending on the model)
the vehicle from tipping under certain cir-
for controlling the ESC is located in the center
cumstances, which increases the risk of an
console, in front of the selector lever. The ESC is
accident.
automatically switched on when the ignition is
switched on. — Because of the increased risk of an accident,
only drive with the ESC switched off or Limit-
Limiting ESC ed when it is necessary. Reactivate the ESC
It may make sense in some situations to limit the as soon as possible.
ESC stabilization functions so that the wheels can
spin: G) Tips
— Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck — If you select the Audi drive select* Offroad
— Driving in deep snow, on unpaved ground, or mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
with snow chains — If the ESC is limited, switched off, or mal-
— Driving downhill while braking on loose ground functioning, systems with an automatic
— Driving with axle articulation braking intervention function may not be
fully available.
The ESC can be limited in order to allow the
— If malfunctions occur in other systems or
wheels to spin.
certain driver assist systems are active, the
—To limit the ESC, press the So button briefly. ESC must be switched on by the system. The
The B indicator light will turn on. ESC may switch on automatically and can-
—To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization not be operated with the button.
function, press the button again. The indicator
light turns off.
If you select the Offroad Audi drive select mode,

B fs / B © Stabilization control (ESC/
the Offroad ESC mode will be automatically
ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
used. This mode is suited for driving offroad and
is designed for uneven terrain or loose ground. There is a malfunction in the ABS or EDL. This al-
so causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still >
120
Driving dynamic
function with their normal power, but ABS is not

active.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized

Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunction corrected.
Other indicator lights
if a blinks while driving, the ESC is actively reg-

ulating. Operating noises may occur. If the indi-
cator light stays on, the ESC has been switched
off due to system needs. The indicator light turns
off when the system is fully functional.
80B012721BA
121
High-voltage system
High-voltage system near the high-voltage system and high-volt-

age cables.
General information — Gases that escape from the high-voltage
Introduction battery can be poisonous or flammable.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive — Damage to the high-voltage battery could
cause the high-voltage battery to leak im-
All work done on the high-voltage system must mediately or in the future, and poisonous or
only be performed by certified high-voltage tech- flammable gases could escape. Do not in-
nicians at authorized Audi dealers or authorized hale the gases!
Audi Service Facilities in accordance with Audi
— Do not expose yourself to any leaking fluids
guidelines. and do not come into contact with them.
The high-voltage system is composed of the fol- — The high-voltage battery electrolyte fluid is
lowing high-voltage components, among other caustic. If electrolyte fluid comes into con-
things: the high-voltage battery, the power elec- tact with the skin, flush the affected area for
tronics, the electric motor, the high-voltage A/C at least 15 minutes with clean water. Then
compressor, the high-voltage heater, the charg- wash the affected area with soap. Have the
ing system and charging port, and the orange affected area examined by a medical profes-
high-voltage wiring. sional.
— In the event of a technical emergency, in-
The high-voltage battery is located in the lug-
form the responders that the vehicle is
gage compartment under the cargo floor and
equipped with a high-voltage battery.
does not require any maintenance from the driv-
er.
() Note
ZX WARNING The high-voltage system can be damaged if
The voltage in the high-voltage system is high the vehicle underbody comes into contact
with the ground. Immediately drive your vehi-
enough to cause fatal injuries. Touching a
damaged high-voltage component can result cle to an authorized repair facility and have it
in a fatal electric shock. The components in inspected.
the high-voltage system are marked with a
warning label which warns against the high-
voltage.
B High-voltage battery: risk of fire! Safely
— The voltage level in the high-voltage system
park and exit vehicle now. Contact emergency
is still dangerous and potentially life-threat-
responders!
ening when the ignition is switched off.
— Never perform work on the orange high- Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon as possi-
voltage cables or on other high-voltage ble. Park the vehicle in a safe place outdoors that
components. Only authorized repair facili- is not near buildings, roof overhangs, carports or
ties that are certified may perform work on similar structures. Do not continue driving and
the high-voltage system. switch the ignition off. Make sure there are no
— Never damage, alter or remove the orange people or animals inside the vehicle. Contact
high-voltage cable or disconnect it from the emergency services. See an authorized Audi deal-
high-voltage system. er or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
— Never perform any work using cutting, shap- tance.
ing or sharp-edged tools or heat sources
122
High-voltage system
Charging the high-voltage battery

Introduction
The following options are available to charge the

high-voltage battery:
Charging method Charging cable

Charge with household and industrial alternat- Audi e-tron compact charging system > page 131
ing current (AC) sockets
Charge at public alternating current (AC) charg- Charging station cable
ing stations
Audi recommends using alternating current (AC) — Settings for the climate control inside the vehi-
to charge the high-voltage battery at industrial cle
sockets, charging stations, or a wallbox. This will — Current capacity of the charging connector
allow you to achieve higher efficiency and a con- — Whether the ignition is on or off
siderably shorter charging time when compared
to charging with a household socket. Important safety precautions
Only charge at household sockets with the Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
Audi e-tron compact charging system under spe-

cial circumstances when it is not possible to Z\ WARNING
charge at an industrial alternating current (AC) Short circuiting, electric shock, explosions,
socket or at a public alternating current (AC) fire, and severe burns can result from charg-
charging station. ing the battery incorrectly (for example by
disregarding general safety precautions, using
High-voltage batteries age over time, which re-
unsuitable or damaged sockets and charging
duces the available range. High-voltage batteries
cables, or charging with unsuitable electrical
can also age because of how they are used: fre-
equipment) and can lead to serious and fatal
quently charging the high-voltage battery com-
injuries.
pletely accelerates the aging of the battery and
reduces the available range. — Do not charge using sockets/electrical
equipment that is clearly damaged or instal-
Charging time led incorrectly.
The duration of the charging process may vary — Never use charging equipment that is clearly
based on the following factors: damaged and/or dirty. Check the charging
equipment for damage before every use.
— Sockets being used (household or industrial — Never modify or repair any electrical compo-
sockets) nents, especially the high-voltage system.
— Country-specific system voltage, current — Never charge in areas at risk for explosions.
strength and number of available phases The components in the charging equipment
— Household connection can trigger sparks, which can cause flamma-
—The value set for the charging power level on ble or explosive fumes to ignite. To reduce
the Audi charging system control unit the risk of explosions, especially in garages,
— Fluctuations in the system voltage make sure the Audi e-tron charging system
— The temperature outside the vehicle control unit is at least 19 inches (50 cm)
— The temperature of the high-voltage battery
80B012721BA
above the floor when charging.

and the Audi charging system control unit. — Never use the charging equipment with an
extension cord, a cable reel, a power strip,
123
High-voltage system
or an adapter, for example, a travel adapter not be used with non-grounded power net-
or timer. works (such as IT networks).
— Do not touch the contacts on the vehicle — When charging the high-voltage battery us-
charging port or charging equipment. ing household/industrial sockets, the elec-
— Do not insert any objects in the vehicle trical installation can be used at full capaci-
charging port or in the charging equipment. ty. Having a qualified electrician regularly in-
— Always protect the sockets and connections spect the electrical installations that are
from water, moisture and other fluids. used for charging is recommended.
— Only use the charging equipment provided - If possible, disconnect Audi charging sys-
by the factory or the charging station cable. tems from the power network during a
thunderstorm.
ZA\ WARNING — Never submerge the Audi charging systems
Applies to: Audi charging systems or the connectors in water.
Sockets that are installed incorrectly can — Audi charging systems must only be cleaned
cause electric shock or fire when charging the when the control unit is completely discon-
high-voltage battery using the vehicle charg- nected from the power supply and from the
ing connection. vehicle. Use a dry towel to clean.
— Read all information and safety precautions — Audi charging systems are only intended for
for Audi charging systems before using use on Audi vehicles and vehicles within the
them. Volkswagen Group. Using the devices on
— Monitor the Audi charging system if it is be- vehicles made by another manufacturer is
ing used near children. not authorized.
— Installation and setup of the household con-
@) Note
nection for Audi charging systems may only
be performed by a qualified electrician. The — Severely draining the high-voltage battery
qualified electrician is thereby responsible can damage it. Once a O mi (0 km) electric
for adhering to applicable standards and range is displayed, charge the high-voltage
regulations. battery within two months. If the stationary
— Make sure that the household socket is time is unknown with the electric range at 0
grounded and shielded from water. mi (0 km), charge the high-voltage battery
— If Audi charging systems do not function ac- immediately. Even if the vehicle is not used,
cording to the specifications in the operat- the high-voltage battery charge level will
ing manual, they must not be used. Contact naturally reduce over time. To avoid a total
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized battery drain during long periods without
Audi Service Facility. use (more than one year), charge the high-
— Audi charging systems are intended for use voltage battery to the highest level possible
in private and semi-private areas (for exam- before discontinuing driving it.
ple, private property and company parking — Make sure that you always use the correct
lots). Depending on the country where the charging equipment for the country in
vehicle is operated, charging with a mode 2 which it is being used. Contact an author-
charging cable (meaning charging with the ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Audi charging system) may be prohibited in Facility for more information.
public areas. Contact an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for (i) Tips
more information. — Your vehicle can only be charged at charging
— Operate the Audi charging systems in power stations that meet the requirements in the
networks that are properly grounded. It can- respective country and meet the following
standards, at a minimum:
124
High-voltage system
— GB/T 18487.1 and GB/T 20234 (China)

— IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (Europe)
— SAE J1772 (North America, Japan)
— You can use your Audi charging system if
there is a household or industrial connec-
tion available at the charging station.
@ Tips
Applies to: Audi charging systems
— For an uninterrupted charging process, we Fig. 102 Charging unit: charging port and buttons/LED
recommend only charging using sockets

Connecting the charging cable
that are connected to a separately protected
circuit. If you charge your vehicle at a charging station,
— It is recommended to use Audi charging sys- the following sequence of steps may vary. Follow
tems in the wall mount clip* during opera- the manufacturer guidelines and operating in-
tion. If this is not possible, always position structions for the charging station.
Audi charging systems on a secure surface
Requirement: the “P” gear must be selected, the
during the charging process > A\.
parking brake must be set, and drive ready mode
—To reduce the risk of overheating during op- must have ended.
eration, do not place Audi charging systems
in direct sunlight for long periods of time. If — If necessary, remove the charging cable from
the control unit is overheated, the charging the vehicle > page 130, Transport.
process is automatically paused until the — Remove the cap from the charging cable if nec-
temperature has lowered back within the essary.
normal range. — First connect the charging cable to the power
supply, or remove it from the charging station.
Charging — Unwind the charging cable completely.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive — Unlock the vehicle.
— To open the charging port door, press on the
right side of the door > fig. 101.
— Remove the cap from the vehicle charging port
and place it on the holder on the charging port
door.
— Plug the charging connector into the vehicle
charging port.
Starting to charge automatically (immediate

charging)
Fig. 101 Left rear side of the vehicle: opening the high- If charging is not delayed with a timer, the charg-
voltage charging port door
ing process will begin immediately. If necessary,
the charging station may need to be activated.
Follow the manufacturer guidelines and operat-
ing instructions for the charging station.
While charging
The charging display on the charging unit @) will
80B012721BA
pulse green while charging. It will pulse|<} in

the instrument cluster. You can find the meaning >
125
High-voltage system
of the possible charging display colors under again at the charging station and then try again
=> page 127. to disconnect the charging connector. If you still
cannot disconnect the charging connector from
The charging connector is locked while charging
the charging station, contact the charging sta-
and cannot be removed.
tion operator.
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition is
switched off, the current battery charge level and ZA WARNING
the high-voltage battery range will be displayed — Do not disconnect the charging cable from
in the instrument cluster. If charging is in prog- the socket or the vehicle charging port while
ress, the remaining charging time will also be the vehicle is charging. End the charging
displayed. process before removing the charging cable
Immediate charging and timer charging from the socket in order to reduce the risk of
damaging the connector contacts from
You can switch between the immediate charging sparks.
@ and charging timer @ options during the —If the charging unit is damaged, do not
charging process ifa charging timer is set charge using the charging port to reduce the
= page 127. Press the corresponding button to risk of injury.
do this.
— If the charging unit is damaged or the
Ending the charging process charging port door cannot close or is miss-
ing, drive immediately to an authorized Audi
You can interrupt the charging process at any
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
time.
and have the malfunction corrected to re-
— Unlock the vehicle or press the @/@) button duce the risk of injury.
when the vehicle is unlocked, and the LED will
turn on. C) Note
— Remove the charging connector. If the charging If you drive with the charging unit open, both
connector is not removed within 30 seconds, it the charging port door and the electronics in-
will automatically relock and the charging proc- stalled behind it could be damaged. Check
ess may continue. each time after charging if the port door is
— Put the cap back on the charging port. locked before you start driving the vehicle.
— Close the charging port door.
— Disconnect the charging cable from the power @ Tips
supply if necessary or return it securely to the — If the parking brake is set, it could create
charging station. noises when the charging connector is con-
— Install the protective caps on the charging ca- nected.
ble again. — Remove ice and snow in the charging unit
— Ifyou are transporting the charging cable in using a hand brush and solvent-free deicing
the vehicle, store it securely > page 130. spray.
If the charging connector cannot be removed, — The vehicle radio and TV systems may have
you must unlock it manually > page 128. limited reception when charging the vehicle.
If you cannot disconnect the charging connector

from the charging station, authenticate yourself
126
High-voltage system
Charging display
The charging display is an LED light on the charg- the charging status. The key for the LED light is
ing unit@) page 125, fig. 102 that indicates explained in the following table.
LED on the charging unit Meaning

Vehicle charging system is in sleep mode. A timer may be active,
Off but charging has not started yet.
Charging process is interrupted.
Pulsing The high-voltage battery is charging.
Green Flashing A timer is active, but charging has not started yet.
On High-voltage battery charging process is completed.
When using the Audi charging system, make sure the power
plug is inserted in the power socket > page 131. No power sup-
ply was recognized even though the charging cable is plugged
On in. Have the power supply or power supply system inspected.
When using the Audi charging system, check the status displays
Yellow on the unit > table on page 132. See an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance if necessary.
The vehicle is not secured from rolling away. Check if “P” is se-
lected and the parking brake is set. If the LED continues to
Flashing
flash, see an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility for assistance.
The charging connector may not be able to lock correctly in the
vehicle charging port. Check if the charging connector is insert-
ed correctly. Remove the charging connector and plug it in the
charging port again, or use a different charging station. If the
Red On LED stays turned on, there is a malfunction either in the vehicle
charging system or at the power source. See an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance if neces-
sary.
The outside temperature is too low or too high.
@ Tips climate control system. You can turn on multiple

timers at the same time.
The operation status indicated by the LED on
the charging unit are is displayed in the in-
strument cluster Eg. VEHICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Charging.
Multiple timers are displayed that you can set
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive > To set a timer, select > in the line for the de-
sired timer.
Use a timer to set at what departure time your
> If the timer should be set one time, select Indi-
vehicle should be fully charged. A timer can ei-
vidual timer. If the timer should be set to re-
ther be set one time or to repeat at the selected
80B012721BA
peat, select Repeat timer.

times. You can also specify if your vehicle should
> Set a preferred charging time if desired, for ex-
be heated or cooled to the temperature set in the
ample to use off-peak power rates. >
127
High-voltage system
> To also activate the climate control with a tim- > Turn the cap counterclockwise and fold the cov-
er, select CD. er > fig. 103 upward.
> Select Next and follow the instructions in the > Loosen the red loop @) > fig. 104 from the re-
menu. tainer and then pull on the loop carefully >@.
> To turn ona timer, select CD. > To open the charging port door, press on the
> To activate an enabled timer, select s+ until the right side of the door > page 125, fig. 101.
Timer charging mode is displayed. » After releasing manually, secure the loop on
the retainer and close the cover.
If the set departure time on the timer is too
> Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
close, it may not be possible to charge the vehicle
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
fully.
Manually releasing the charging connector

It is not possible to charge using the timer at If you are not able to pull the charging connector
some charging stations. out of the vehicle charging port, there may bea
malfunction. You must use the emergency re-
Emergency release lease to release the vehicle charging connector.
Requirement: the “P” gear must be selected and
In case of malfunction, you can manually release the vehicle must be unlocked.
the charging port door or the charging connec-
> End the charging process > page 126, Ending
tor.
the charging process.
> Turn the cap counterclockwise and fold the cov-
er > fig. 103 upward.
> Loosen the yellow loop (2) from the retainer
and then pull on the loop carefully >@®.
> Remove the charging connector.
>» After releasing manually, secure the loop on
the retainer and close the cover.
> Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Fig. 103 Left side of luggage compartment: emergency re- ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
lease cover the malfunction corrected.
If the charging connector still cannot be removed

[RAz-0716]
after using the emergency release, see an author-

ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty for assistance.
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance.

You will not hear it release. If you continue to
pull, you could damage the emergency re-
Fig. 104 Left side of the luggage compartment: emergen- lease mechanism.
cy release
Manually releasing the charging port door

128
High-voltage system
Messages — Only operate the Audi charging system ina

Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive power supply system with a frequency of
50 Hz/60 Hz.
If the ai indicator light turns on, then the range
— Only operate or store the Audi charging system
is low or very low. Charge the high-voltage bat-
at a humidity level between 5% and 95% (no
tery.
condensation).
EBac charging system: malfunction! Please — The Audi charging system is protected against
contact Service dust and splashing water (IP55 (USA: Enclosure
3)).
This message appears if there is a malfunction in
the charging system. Drive to an authorized Audi Depending on the country, different warnings
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi- may be on the charging equipment.
ately.
Symbol Meaning
Incompatible charging system. Please check
a
Operate or store the Audi charging
charging system
system at a temperature range of
This message appears when the charging system -22 °F (-30 °C) to +122 °F (+50 °C).
is incompatible. Only charge using the Audi Operate or store the Audi charging
charging system that is designed for your vehicle. system at a temperature range of
BS Charging system: malfunction -22 °F (-30 °C) to +122 °F (+50 °C).
This message appears if there is a malfunction in

the vehicle charging infrastructure or the charg-
Le
‘=4000m
system at a maximum elevation of
13,000 ft (4,000 m) above sea lev-
ing station. Use a different charging station. If
el.
this message does not turn off, contact an au-
Facility.
Li system at a maximum elevation of
E 3
16,400 ft (5,000 m) above sea lev-

el.
Charging equipment
The Audi charging system is not
equipped with a connected ground
©
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive conductor.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Audi e- The Audi charging system is equip-
ped with a connected ground con-
©
tron compact charging system may be available.

ductor.
Using the charging equipment Do not operate the Audi charging
Pay attention to the following information for system in power networks that are
&
safe handling of the charging equipment: not grounded (such as IT networks).

Only operate the Audi charging sys-
— Secure the charging equipment against any
tem in grounded power networks.
strain, such as being run over, falling, pulling,
bending, and crushing. Surfaces can become very hot when
— Do not submerge the charging equipment in in direct sunlight.
©>
water and do not cover it with snow or ice.

— When you remove the charging cable from the
vehicle and from the power supply, only pull at Incorrect use increases the risk of
the connectors and not at the cable. electric shock.
80B012721BA
— Put the cap on after using the charging cable.
129
High-voltage system
Symbol Meaning
Pay attention to the applicable own-
er's manual, particularly the safety
precautions.
Pay attention to all applicable dis-

a posal regulations when disposing.
Do not use any extensions cords or
cable reels.
Do not use any travel adapters.
Fig. 105 Luggage compartment: transport bag

Do not use any power strips.
Always store the charging equipment securely
‘ Do not use any charging cables with before transporting.
KO, damage to the electronics or the
> Open the luggage compartment lid > page 41.
connecting wires.
> Stow the charging equipment in the transport
@ Operate the Audi charging system bag.
in single-phase power supplies. > Always position the bag on the left side of the
luggage compartment > page 88.
Grounding instructions
> Secure a carabiner hook at the tie-down near
Audi charging systems must be grounded. If it the edge of the cargo floor.
should malfunction or break down, grounding > Secure the other carabiner hook at the tie-down
provides a path of least resistance for electric near the rear seat backrest.
current to reduce the risk of electric shock. Audi
charging systems are equipped with a cord hav- Z\ WARNING
ing an equipment grounding conductor and a
If the charging equipment is not secured or
grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into
positioned correctly, it can slide out of place
an appropriate outlet that is properly installed
and endanger vehicle occupants when brak-
and grounded in accordance with all local codes
ing, when changing directions, or in a colli-
and ordinances.
sion.
Z\ WARNING — Only transport charging equipment in the

transport bag in the luggage compartment
Improper connection of the equipment-
and never unsecured or in the passenger
grounding conductor is able to result in a risk compartment.
of electric shock. Check with a qualified elec-
trician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to
@) Note
whether the product is properly grounded. Do
not modify the plug provided with the product Always lift or carry the Audi charging system
- if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper out- as one unit and never by the cables.
let installed by a qualified electrician.
130
High-voltage system
Audi e-tron compact charging system

Applies to: vehicles with Audi e-tron compact charging system
m=)
[RAZ-0726|
a |
72
Fig. 106 Audi e-tron compact charging system: compo- Fig. 107 Audi e-tron compact charging system: control
nents (example) unit
The Audi e-tron compact charging system can be Requirement: the correct power plug must be in-
used for charging with a household or industrial stalled > page 135.
socket. Depending on the country and the vehicle — Insert the plug into the socket.
equipment, the following accessories may be — Plug the vehicle charging connector into the ve-
available: hicle charging port.
@ Control unit — The charging process e will start automatically.
— Once the charging process has completed, un-
@ Vehicle cable with vehicle charging connector lock the vehicle and remove the vehicle charg-
@®) Power cable with power plug for household ing connector from the vehicle charging port.
sockets
Adjusting the charging power level
@ Power cable with power plug for industrial
The control unit automatically recognizes the
sockets
voltage and the available current strength. You
The vehicle cable is securely connected to the can set whether you would like to charge with full
control unit. The power cable is plugged into the or reduced charging power. The last setting that
upper end of the control unit and can be switched was selected will be saved and used again the
=> page 135. next time the vehicle is charged. If multiple
items are connected to the power circuit, the
Control unit overview
charging current may be reduced when charging
© | On/Off button @, charging power lev- at a power outlet. This can help to prevent the
el and LED electrical equipment from overheating.
© _ |Status LED: Before charging, always check if the charging

a Power supply/household power setting that was selected last is still suita-
connection ble.
& | Vehicle —To set the charging power level, press and hold
the ® button © © fig. 107 for at least two sec-
0 Control panel
onds.
® 9 Reset
After the charging power level is set, the status
Charging LEDs (, {and [| will flash green one time. The
Note the instructions for charging > page 125. selected value (50% or 100%) is displayed on the
80B012721BA
left or right side of the ® button. >
131
High-voltage system
Control unit: status and malfunction indicators
Indicator lights Meaning Solution

& Green The charger is ready to charge, | Starting the charging process
O 0 Off but is not charging. =>page 125.
O & Off
O 0 of
9 Off
O Flashing green __| The vehicle is being charged
O 0 Off with the ground conductor
O Bot monitor activated.
O 0 of
9 Off
Flashing green | The power cable has overheat- | After the cable cools down, the malfunc-
© a Yellow ed. Possible cause of the mal- | tion will be automatically cleared. Until it
O B& otf function: a multi-phase socket | cools down, charging performance will be
O 0 of is being used in single-phase | reduced. If the malfunction continues,
mode. The charging perform- | have the power supply/household con-
9° Off ance will be reduced. nection checked by a qualified electrician.
O Flashing green |The control unit has overheat- | After the control unit cools down, the
O Q Off ed. The charging performance | malfunction will be automatically
O Bor will be reduced. cleared. Never leave the control panel in
@ 8 Yellow direct sunlight for long periods or time.
Until it cools down, charging perform-
© Off ance will be reduced. If the malfunction
continues, have the control unit checked
by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
O Red The power cable has overheat- | After the cable cools down, the malfunc-
© © Yellow ed. The charging process has __| tion will be automatically cleared and the
O B otf been interrupted. charging process will resume. If the mal-
function continues, have the control unit
O 0 off checked by an authorized Audi dealer or
© Off authorized Audi Service Facility, or have
the power supply/household connection
checked by a qualified electrician.
O Red The control unit has overheat- | After the control unit cools down, the
O O off ed. The charging process has_ | malfunction will be automatically cleared
O Bor been interrupted. and the charging process will resume.
@ 0 Yeltow Never leave the control panel in direct
© -_ sunlight for long periods or time. If the
malfunction continues, have the control
unit checked by an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility.
132
High-voltage system

© Red The charging infrastructure of | After the power supply/household con-
© @ Flashing yellow |the power supply/household | nection stabilizes, the malfunction will be
O Bor connection is restricted. Possi- | automatically cleared and the charging
O 6 off ble cause of the malfunction: | process will resume. If the malfunction
low voltage or poor power fre- | continues, have the power supply/house-
© Off quency. The charging process | hold connection checked by a qualified
has been interrupted. electrician.
O Red There is a malfunction inthe | After the vehicle charging system stabiliz-
O Q Off vehicle charging system. The es, the malfunction will be automatically
© & Flashing yellow charging process has been in- | cleared and the charging process will re-
O 6 off terrupted. sume. If the malfunction continues, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized Audi
9 Off dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
© Red The power cable or vehicle ca- | Have the power or vehicle cable replaced
O 0 Off ble is faulty. Possible cause of | by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
O Bot the malfunction: the coding _| ized Audi Service Facility.
© 0 Flashi ll resistance of the power or ve-
asning YeNow | hicle cable is not compatible.
9 Off The charging process has been
interrupted.
O Red There is a malfunction in the | End the charging process at the vehicle
O 0 off vehicle charging system. The | and remove the vehicle cable from the ve-
@ E& Red charging process has been in- | hicle charging port. Disconnect the charg-
O 6 of terrupted. er from the power supply and reconnect it
after 60 seconds. Restart the charging
© Off process > page 125. If the malfunction
continues, have the vehicle checked by an
Service Facility.
© Red There is an overvoltage inthe | Disconnect the charger from the power
© CQ Flashing red charging infrastructure of the | supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.
O Bot power supply/household con- | If the malfunction continues, have the
O 6 of nection. The charging process | power supply/household connection
© has been interrupted. checked by a qualified electrician.
Off
©) Red The control unit has atechni- | Disconnect the charger from the power
O 0 Off cal malfunction. The charging | supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.
process has been interrupted. | If the malfunction continues, have the
O & off
@ 8 Red control unit checked by an authorized
© e Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
Off cility.
80B012721BA
133
High-voltage system

O Rede Th e control Lunit
unit h has hni-
a techni- | Di isconnect he the charger
ch from from theth power
O 0 off cal malfunction (self-test supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.
O Bor failed). The charging process _ | If the malfunction continues, have the
© 6 Flashi d has been interrupted. control unit checked by an authorized
ashing re Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
9° Off cility.
O Rede The e charging
charging inf
infrastructure o f Have
| ave theth control Lunit
unitchecked
checked b'
by an au-
@ CX Red the power supply/household | thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
@ EB Red ion is is insufficient:
connection insuffici he | Service
the ervice Facili
Facility, and dh have the
h power sup-
O 6 of ground conductor is interrupt- | ply/household connection checked by a
ed or not present. The ground | qualified electrician. Do not use the pow-
© Off conductor monitor has inter- | er supply/household connector until the
rupted the charging process. | malfunction is corrected.
O Rede The e indi
indicator light
light inin th
the reset | Have Have theth control Lunit
unit replaced
replaced b by an au-
@ CX Red button on the control unit is | thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
@ & Red faulty. The charging process _| Service Facility.
@ 0 Red has been interrupted.
e
9 Off
O Rede Th e control Lunit
unit has
has d detecte d |P ress and d hold
hold the
the © b utton for for atat l least
@ X Red residual current. The charging | two seconds. If the malfunction contin-
@ Bred p rocess hashas been
been iinterrupted.
pted | ues, h have the
h control lLunit
unit checked
checke by an
@ 8 Red authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
. ; Service Facility, and have the power sup-
9 Flashing red ply/household connection checked by a
qualified electrician.
O Red The charging infrastructure is | Disconnect the charger from the power
© © Flashing red wired incorrectly. The charging | supply. Have the power supply/household
© & Flashing red process has been interrupted. | connection checked by a qualified electri-
cian.
© 46 Flashing red 7
9 Off
©O Red The control unit has atechni- | Disconnect the charger from the power
@ CX Red cal malfunction. Possible supply and reconnect it after 60 seconds.
@ E& Re cause of the malfunction: If the malfunction continues, have the
@ 0 Red software error or the load re- | control unit checked by an authorized
C lay has been switched incor- _| Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
9 Red rectly. The charging process cility, and have the power supply/house-
has been interrupted. hold connection checked by a qualified
electrician.
O Flashing red The control unit has a serious | Have the control unit replaced by an au-
O 0 off malfunction. The charging thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
O B or process has been interrupted. | Service Facility.
@ &§ Red
9 Off
134
High-voltage system

O Off The indicator light in the Have the control unit replaced by an au-
@ X Red On/Off button on the control | thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
@ B Red unit is faulty. The charging Service Facility.
@ © Red process has been interrupted.
© Red
Technical Data
Output 9.6 kw
Current rating 40 A single phase
System voltage 120V-240V
Power frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz
Overvoltage category (IEC 60664) ‘| II
Short-time current rating (EN <10 kA eff.
61439-1)
Power plug versions NEMA 6-30; NEMA 6-50; NEMA 14-30; NEMA 14-50; NEMA
5-15
Integrated residual-current device AC: 20 mA; DC: 56 mA
Vehicle charging connector Type l
Protection class I
IP Code 55 (USA: Enclosure 3)
Control unit mass 5.3 lbs- 7.7 lbs (2.4- 3.5 kg)
Control unit dimensions (height x 12.2 in x 4.1 in x 2.8 in (310 mm x 105 mm x 72 mm)
width x depth)
@) Tips Changing or attaching the cable

Applies to: vehicles with Audi charging system
— The device runs a self test after power has
been restored to the control unit. If a self
B4G-0681
test is successful, all indicator lights will il-
luminate green for two seconds.
— The Audi e-tron compact charging system is
designed for charging at sockets with a volt-
age of 120 V/240 V. If your socket has a dif-
ferent voltage, contact and authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
— If your Audi e-tron compact charging sys-
tem has a fixed connection, meaning can be Fig. 108 Control unit: removing and attaching the cable
connected directly to the power supply
without a power cable, contact a qualified Requirements:
electrician or an authorized Audi dealer or > The charging process for the high-voltage bat-
authorized Audi Service Facility. tery must be ended > page 126.
— The system complies with United States FCC > The vehicle charging connector must be re-
80B012721BA
regulations and ISED regulations moved from the vehicle charging port.
> page 312.
135
High-voltage system
> The power cable must be removed from the available phases may affect the available
socket. charging power.
Loosening the cable

> If necessary, loosen the screw (8) using the Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive and wall mount
screwdriver provided. clip
> Lift the lever @ all the way up.
RAZ-0638,
> Pull the connector (2) out just until you feel re-
sistance.
> Close the lever @ until it is resting on the con-
nector @).
> Remove the connector (2) completely.
Attaching the cable

> Lift the lever @ up slightly.
> Insert the connector @) into the control unit
Fig. 109 Wall mount clip: securing the Audi charging sys-
just until you feel resistance.
tem
> Lift the lever @ all the way up.
> Insert the connector (2) all the way into the Securing the Audi charging system
control unit.
> First insert the control unit in the bottom tabs
> Close the lever @).
on the wall mount clip and then into the upper
> Tighten the screw @) using the screwdriver pro-
tabs.
vided.
> Push the control unit in the direction of the ar-
Z\ WARNING row toward the rear > fig. 109 and let it lock in-
to place.
— Note the warnings for charging > A\ in > Wrap the excess length of cable around the
Charging on page 126. charging connector mount @ when you are not
— Before switching a cable, always unplug the charging the high-voltage battery.
power cable from the socket. > Plug the power cable into the socket @).
— Only change cables in a dry environment. > After charging, you can hook the vehicle charg-
— The Audi charging system may only be used ing connector to the charging connector mount
as a complete unit consisting of the power ©.
cables, the control unit, and the vehicle ca-
ble. Depending on the country, the total Locking and unlocking the Audi charging
system
length of the power cable, control panel and
vehicle cable may be restricted, for example > You can lock or unlock the Audi charging sys-
to 24.6 ft (7.5 m) in the USA. Audi recom- tem using the key provided by turning it to the
mends using only cables approved by Audi. lock position @) or the unlock position ().
Removing the Audi charging system
@) Tips
> Remove the power cable connector from the
The power cable with the power connector for
industrial sockets and the Audi charging sys-
socket (2).
> Unwind the cable from the charging connector
tem control unit are designed to work togeth-
er. Changing the power cable to another con-
mount (4).
> To loosen the control unit from the bracket,
nector type may reduce the available charging
push the locking mechanism @) upward.
power of the entire system. Limitations on
the ability to transfer power (current capacity)
depending on the phase and the number of
136
High-voltage system
Observe the safety precautions in the assem-

bly instructions for the wall mount clip.
80B012721BA
137
Trailer towing
Trailer towing ZA\ WARNING

Driving with a trailer — Never mount a "weight-distributing" or
"load-balancing" trailer coupler as the trailer
er else) hitch. The vehicle was not designed for
these types of trailer hitches. The trailer
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transport-
ing people and luggage. However, if you drive hitch can malfunction and the trailer can
break off from the vehicle.
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements,
the operation and driving tips, and the legal reg- — If the trailer is equipped with electronic
ulations. brakes, these brakes cannot be activated by
a factory-installed control system, which in-
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's energy creases the risk of an accident.
usage, performance, and wear. It also requires —To reduce the risk of injury, always remove
higher concentration from the driver. the ball hitch mount if no trailer is mount-
ed
ZA\ WARNING
Do not transport any people in a trailer due to @) Note
the risk of fatal injury.
Longer inclines cannot be driven without a
suitable cooling system, especially if the out-
Technical requirements side temperatures are high. Otherwise, this
increases the risk of engine damage.
Trailer hitch
Only use a trailer hitch with a removable ball ey emia aCe
hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must
be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the Towing capacity
permitted total weight of the trailer being The permitted towing capacity must not be ex-
pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely ceeded under any circumstances > page 314.
attached to the vehicle trailer.
You can drive up larger inclines if you are not us-
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The ing the maximum towing capacity.
trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does
not impair the function of the bumper. Do not The specified towing weights only apply at eleva-
make any changes to the exhaust system and the tions up to 3,200 feet (1,000 m) above sea level.
brake system. As the elevation increases, the engine power de-
creases due to the decreasing air pressure. This
Check regularly if the trailer hitch is securely reduces the hill climbing ability and towing ca-
mounted. Always follow the instructions given by pacity. For every additional 3,200 ft (1,000 m),
the trailer hitch manufacturer. the maximum permitted towing weight must be
Trailer brakes reduced by approximately 10%. The permitted
towing weight is the combined weight of the
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol- (loaded) vehicle and the (loaded) trailer.
low the manufacturer specifications. However,
the brake system on the trailer must never be Tongue weight
connected to the vehicle brake system. The maximum permitted tongue weight of the
Engine cooling system trailer drawbar on the trailer hitch ball head must
not be exceeded.
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the
engine and the cooling system. The cooling sys- For driving safety, Audi recommends always us-
tem must be designed for additional load and ing the maximum permitted tongue weight, but
contain enough coolant > @. do not exceed this weight. Distributing the cargo >
138
Trailer towing
in the trailer correctly will help to achieve this ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
weight. Having the tongue weight too low affects ty for more information.
the vehicle's handling.
Before you start driving, check all lighting equip-
You can determine the tongue weight using a ment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehi-
tongue weight scale, a bathroom scale, or a pub- cle.
lic weigh station, for example.
The headlight range control automatically ad-
The permitted tongue weight of your vehicle can justs the light range of the headlights.
be found in the vehicle documentation or in
When the B indicator light blinks, then the turn
=> page 314.
signals are activated in trailer mode. If a turn sig-
Load distribution nal on the trailer or on the vehicle fails while in
trailer mode, the indicator light will not blink
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively
twice as fast to indicate this.
impact vehicle handling. Load the trailer based
on the following criteria as much as possible: Safety chains
— Store objects in the vehicle luggage compart- Make sure the safety chains are correctly applied
ment, if possible. The vehicle should always when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang
carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer enough so that the trailer can drive around
should have the lightest possible load. curves. However, they must not touch the
— Distribute the load in the trailer so that the ground.
heavy objects are as close to the axle as possi-
Air suspension
ble.
— Secure objects so that they do not slide.
— Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight The Audi drive select* Comfort mode > page 115
if possible. must be selected before you adjust the tongue
weight on the trailer and hitch the trailer >@,
Tires => page 116.
Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a “full The air suspension trailer mode must be switched
load”; see the tire pressure sticker > page 271. If on.
necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the
Applies to MMI: select on the home screen: VE-
trailer according to the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
HICLE > Settings & Service > Air suspension:
trailer.
The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped
with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-
Switch trailer mode off again when you are no
longer towing a trailer.
tures.
For vehicles with a factory-installed trailer hitch,
Outside mirrors
the air suspension trailer mode will automatically
If you cannot see the traffic behind the trailer switch on if you connect the trailer cable to the
with the standard exterior mirrors, then you socket.
must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust
When using carrier systems that are mounted di-
them so you have a sufficient visibility behind
rectly on the trailer hitch ball head, you can also
you.
switch trailer mode off manually.
Exterior lighting
If you must drive on roads that are in poor condi-
Follow the legal regulations for lighting on your tion, you can raise the vehicle again after hitching
80B012721BA
trailer that are applicable in the country where the trailer or after adjusting the tongue weight
you are operating the vehicle. Contact an author- > page 116.
139
Trailer towing
You can also increase ground clearance by select- already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by
ing the Audi drive select* Offroad or allroad firmly braking immediately. Never attempt to
modes > page 115. “straighten out” the trailer by accelerating.
Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the en-

@) Note
gine braking effect > A\.
— Changes in temperature or load can affect Brakes

the height of the vehicle. When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
— If the standard vehicle height is not used, brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of
the tongue weight specification is no longer jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
applicable.
Engine coolant temperature
©) Note Pay attention specifically to the coolant tempera-
Attachments retrofitted on the vehicle may ture display when there are high outside temper-
cause damage, especially on the trailer hitch atures, and when driving on long inclines
ball head. In cases of damage, have the func- = page 14. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
tion checked by an authorized Audi dealer or ner.
authorized Audi Service Facility.

Z\ WARNING
@) Tips Constant braking causes the brakes to over-
— Block the wheels with chocks when parking heat and can substantially reduce braking per-
on inclines if the trailer is loaded. formance, increase braking distance, or cause
— Audi recommends having the vehicle incomplete failure of the brake system.
spected between the inspection intervals if
you tow a trailer frequently.
— Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehi-
cle break-in period.
PTL RR CT Coe
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhere to the legal speed limits. Follow the legal
regulations that are applicable in the country
where you are operating the vehicle.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of

the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not
exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
conditions. This especially applies when driving
downhill.
Hill
When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers
may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona
level surface. If small swaying movements have
140
Assist systems
Assist systems System limitations
General information ZA\ WARNING

Sra eel delay —The use of an assist system cannot over-
come the natural laws of physics. A collision
ZA\ WARNING cannot be prevented in certain circumstan-
— As the driver, you are always completely re- ces.
sponsible for all driving tasks. The assist — Warnings, messages, or indicator lights may
systems cannot replace the driver's atten- not be displayed or initiated on time or cor-
tion. Give your full attention to driving the rectly, for example, if vehicles are approach-
vehicle, and be ready to intervene in the ing very fast.
traffic situation at all times. — Corrective interventions by the assist sys-
— Activate the assist systems only if the sur- tems, such as steering or braking interven-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt tions, may not be sufficient or they may not
your driving style to the current visual, occur. Always be ready to intervene.
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- @) Tips
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — Due to the system limitations when detect-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of ing the surrounding area, the systems may
an accident. Store objects securely while warn or intervene unexpectedly or too late
driving. in certain situations. The assist systems may
— For the assist systems to be able to react also interpret a driving maneuver incorrectly
correctly, the function of the sensors and and then warn the driver unexpectedly.
cameras must not be restricted. Note the in- — The systems may not function as expected
formation on sensors and cameras in unusual driving situations, such as driving
=> page 142. offroad, on unpaved roads, on loose ground,
on inclines, or on grooves in the road.
@ Tips — The systems may not function correctly in
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations unclear traffic situations, such as turning
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for lanes, exit ramps, construction zones, rises
emergency vehicles, vehicle distance, speed, or dips that obstruct visibility, intersections,
parking location, wheel placement, etc. The toll stations, or city traffic.
driver is always responsible for following — The detection of the surrounding area can
the laws that are applicable in the location be limited, for example by vehicles driving
where the vehicle is being operated. ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray, or light
— You can cancel a steering or braking inter- shining into the camera.
vention by the system, by braking or accel- —In trailer mode, some assist systems may be
erating noticeably, steering, or deactivating limited, may not react as usual, or may be
the respective assist system. unavailable. Please refer to the instructions
— Always check the assist systems settings be- for towing a trailer located in > page 138.
fore driving. The settings could have been — The steering wheel touch recognition may
changed, for example by other drivers. be limited when you wear gloves. Steering
intervention requests from the steering as-
sist systems may occur more frequently.
— If accessories have been mounted on the
80B012721BA
steering wheel, the steering assist systems

may be limited. The frequency of steering >
141
Assist systems
intervention requests from the steering as- Radar sensors

sist systems may vary as well.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
surrounding the entire vehicle may be detected
Surrounding area > fig. 110.
detection The wheel sensors on the rear corners of the vehi-
Sensor and camera coverage areas cle are positioned so that the adjacent lanes to
the left and right are detected on roads with a
normal lane width.
RAZ-1071
Ultrasonic sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, various areas

may be displayed in the MMI using the ultrasonic
sensors > fig. 110.
The range of the displays depends on the location

of the ultrasonic sensors:
@ Approximately 4 ft (1.20 m)
® Approximately 3 ft (0.90 m)
@® Approximately 5.2 ft (1.60 m)
©® Approximately 3 ft (0.90 m)
© Approximately 3 ft (0.90 m)
The side area ©) is detected and evaluated when
passing. There may have been changes to the sur-
rounding area after switching the ignition off and
on again, after opening the doors, or if the vehi-
cle is left stationary for a period of time. In this
case, the area will appear black until the area has
been detected and evaluated.
Cameras
Use the camera image on the display to assist you
only if it shows a good, clear picture. Keep in
mind that the image in the display is enlarged
and distorted. Under certain circumstances, ob-
jects may appear different and unclear on the dis-
play.
Fig. 111 Rearview camera coverage area
The rearview camera can only detect the area
The assist systems analyze the data from various marked in red > fig. 111. Only this area is dis-
sensors and cameras installed in the vehicle. Do played on the center display. > A\.
not use any assist systems if there is damage in
there area of the sensors and cameras or on the ZX WARNING
vehicle underbody. Damage can impair the func- Sensors and cameras have spots in which the
tion of the sensors and cameras or cause mal- surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects,
functions. Have an authorized Audi dealer or au- animals, and people may only be detected
thorized Audi Service Facility check their func- with limitations may not be detected at all.
tion. Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's >
142
Assist systems
surroundings directly and do not become dis- — External ultrasonic sensors, such as those in
tracted. other vehicles, can interfere with the sen-
sors.
() Note — The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 110
and cameras > fig. 111 are diagrams and do
— Obstacles may disappear from the measure-
not represent a true-to-scale image of the
ment range when approaching them, even if
sensor ranges.
they were already detected.
—Insome situations, the ability of the sen-
regulations and ISED regulations
sors and cameras to detect and display cer-
=> page 311.
tain objects may be limited.
— Objects located above the coverage area,
Locations of the sensors and cameras
such as bumpers on parked cars, garage
doors that are partially open, or objects
[RAZ-1069
that are hanging
— Low obstacles
— Narrow objects, such as barrier chains, fo-
liage, poles, or fences
— Projecting objects, such as trailer draw
bars
— Objects with certain surfaces and struc-
tures, such as fabric
@) Tips
— The sensors and cameras and the areas
around them must not be obstructed be-
cause this can impair the function of the
systems that depend on them. Make sure
that the sensors and cameras are free of
snow, ice, and other deposits. Do not use
any accessories, stickers, or other objects
that extend into the range of the sensors
and cameras.
Fig. 113 Rear area: sensors and cameras
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- Front area
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
of the same material. Do not install any li- ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles — Camera behind the windshield
that do not have factory-installed brackets. — Peripheral cameras on the exterior mirrors
Otherwise, the function of the system could — Front peripheral camera in the radiator grille
be impaired. — Front and side ultrasonic sensors
— The function of the sensors and cameras — Front radar sensors at the corners of the bump-
may be limited when light and visibility con- er >
ditions are poor, for example when driving
into a tunnel, when there is glare, or when
80B012721BA
there are reflective objects.
143
Assist systems
Rear area

ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
— Rearview camera in the luggage compartment
lid
— Radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle
— Rear and side ultrasonic sensors
@ Tips
— The locations of the sensors may differ
slightly depending on vehicle equipment.
— Some sensors are installed under vehicle
components and cannot be seen from the
outside.
144
Driving information
Driving information Camera-based traffic

Speed warning system sign recognition
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps the driver to

stay below a specified maximum speed. A warn-
ing threshold can be set in the MMI for this pur-
pose.
Once the speed slightly exceeds the stored
threshold, the speed warning system will alert
the driver with an indicator in the instrument
cluster and a warning tone. Once the speed drops
below the stored maximum speed, the indicator Fig. 114 Instrument cluster: traffic sign recognition
will turn off.
The traffic sign recognition shows the traffic
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would
signs detected by the front camera in the instru-
like to be reminded when you reach a certain
ment cluster display and in the head-up display”.
maximum speed. Situations where you may want
Data from the navigation system is also included
to do so include driving in a country with a gener-
in the display. Up to three traffic signs can be dis-
al speed limit or if there is a specified maximum
played in the instrument cluster at once. The
speed for winter tires.
speed limit that is currently applicable is dis-
@) Tips played in the status line. If necessary, it will be
hidden if the system detects that turning right is
Regardless of the speed warning system, you
prohibited at a red light. The display in the head-
should always monitor your speed using the
up display* can be switched off > page 26.
speedometer and make sure you are adhering
to the legal speed limit. Within the limits of the system and depending
on the market, speed limit restrictions @ in
school zones, highways, construction zones, or at
Setting the warning threshold
night may be displayed.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Limitations

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Speed warning. The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain
system limitations and may be unavailable or on-
Messages ly partially available in the following situations:
— When visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
iol Manually set speed limit XX mph fog, or heavy spray
(km/h) exceeded — When there is glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun
The stored speed was exceeded.
— At high speeds
— If the camera's visual field > page 142 is cov-
ered, for example by dirt or stickers. For infor-
mation on cleaning, see > page 282.
80B012721BA
— If the traffic signs are completely or partially

covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or
other vehicles
145
Driving information
— If traffic signs do not conform to the standard IY ett

Tel -1
format Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
— If traffic signs are damaged or bent
Traffic sign recognition: unavailable. Camera
— If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
view limited due to environm. conditions
with electronic signs
— If the traffic signs or the roadways have The camera’s visual field is covered. Clean the
changed, and the navigation data is no longer windshield.
up-to-date
Traffic sign recognition: currently limited.
See owner's manual
Z\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the This message appears if navigation system data
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and is not available, for example on newly-construct-
cameras > page 141.
ed roads. The speed limit display will be tempo-
rarily limited, which increases the risk of an incor-
— Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
rect display. If this message continues to appear,
ognition may not detect traffic signs correct-
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
ly or detect them at all. As a result, the sys-
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
tem may not display the correct speed limit
function repaired.
or any speed limit.
No traffic sign information available
@) Tips
Depending on the area, there is no valid naviga-
— Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your tion data and no speed limits were detected. This
vehicle's speed to match the speed Limit. may also appear if there is a recommended
— The display in the instrument cluster is speed, but no speed limit (for example when
based on the units of measurement used for driving on and off the expressway).
speed in the country where the vehicle is be-
Malfunction! See owner's manual
ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
the instrument cluster can mean either mph The system may not function correctly so it has
or km/h, depending on the country. been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Function currently unavailable. See owner's

Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
manual
Accessing traffic sign recognition If this message appears on vehicles without cam-
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- era-based traffic sign recognition, then the traffic
tions tab > Traffic signs. light information function is currently unavaila-
ble. See > page 148.
Setting a traffic sign based speed warning
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Speed warning.
You can select a warning threshold. If you exceed

this, then the current detected speed limit will be
shown in the display with an exclamation point
for the duration that it is exceeded and it will
blink for a short time.
146
Driving information
Traffic light information — If data transmission is deactivated in the priva-

cy settings
— If the subscription has expired
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
If this is the case, the menu item will be grayed-
out or it will not be possible to select it.
ZX WARNING
— When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
tion, the distance to other vehicles, and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always
responsible for assessing the traffic situa-
tion.
Fig. 115 Instrument cluster: traffic light information dis-
— Always adapt your speed to the current
play
weather, road and traffic conditions. The dis
The traffic light information gives you a speed played information must never cause you to
recommendation in order to reach the next traffic ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a
light when it is green @, or it informs you of the safety risk.
wait time at the next red light 2). Once traffic — Regardless of the traffic light information,
light data is received, the traffic light information you should always monitor your speed using
will be displayed in the instrument cluster and in the speedometer and make sure you are ad-
the head-up display*. If the vehicle is in an area hering to the legal speed limit.
with traffic light information but cannot receive a — The traffic light information does not adjust
traffic light signal, then a gray traffic light sym- your vehicle's speed to the speed recom-
bol will be displayed @). mendation shown in the display.
General information limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
The traffic light information is subject to system cameras > page 141.
limitations and may be unavailable or only parti-
ally available in the following situations: (i) Tips
—If the permitted speed limit is exceeded — Traffic light information was only available
— If driving below a certain speed limit in select cities at the time this manual was
printed.
— If the next traffic light is less than approxi-
— Traffic light information is not available na-
mately 100 feet (30 m) away
tionwide.
—If the estimated wait time at a red light is less
than four seconds
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica-
— If there is no traffic light data available
tion by the traffic sign recognition*.
— If emergency response vehicles or public transit
— Incorrect values from the camera-based
systems are active
traffic sign recognition* or outdated naviga-
— If traffic lights are in construction zones or be-
tion system* map data can result in missing
ing serviced
or incorrect display images.
— If there are warnings from the camera-based
— Certain traffic lights can automatically ad-
traffic sign recognition*
just to the current traffic situation. If this
— If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is
occurs, the display of traffic light informa-
80B012721BA
malfunctioning or not available

tion can change suddenly.
—If the data connection has been interrupted
147
Driving information
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- — The vehicle is not equipped with traffic sign rec-
ority over the display. The driver is always ognition.
responsible for adhering to the regulations — There is no valid license
applicable in the country where the vehicle — Traffic light information is not available in that
is being operated. area
— Units of measurement and language set-
tings are displayed based on how they were Lap timer
set in the MMI system settings > page 236.
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information You can record and evaluate lap times with the
Switching traffic light information on and lap timer. You can operate the lap timer using the
off multifunction steering wheel > page 13.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Opening the lap timer
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Traffic light in-
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
formation.
tions tab > [| button > Lap times.
Accessing traffic light information An additional indicator appears in the head-up
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- display*.
tions tab > Traffic signs.
ZA\ WARNING
@® Tips Your focus should always be on driving your
If another tab or another function is selected vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
in the instrument cluster, the traffic light in- plete responsibility for safety in traffic. To re-
formation will appear in the status bar on the duce the risk of an accident, only use the lap
instrument cluster. timer functions in such a way that you always
maintain complete control over your vehicle in
all traffic situations.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
G) Tips
Malfunction! See owner's manual
You can retrieve information from the trip
The system could not be configured, for example computer while the lap timer stopwatch is
due to a network malfunction. Switch the igni- running.
tion off and shut down the vehicle to restart the
system. Wait several minutes until the vehicle ey sae |
has shut down completely and then switch the Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
ignition back on.
Requirement: the lap timer must be open
Function currently unavailable. See owner's => page 148.
manual
Timing laps
There is a temporary system malfunction. Check
if one or more of the following situations applies > To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in
and correct the issue if necessary: the menu.
> To start timing automatically as soon as you be-
— Traffic light information is switched off gin to drive, select Start lap 1 by driving off or
— Data transmission is deactivated Start by driving off in the menu.
148
Driving information
> To start timing a new lap after driving a lap, se- Resetting lap statistics
lect New lap in the menu. This starts timing Requirement: the lap statistics menu must be
the next lap at the same time. displayed.
After completing a lap, the difference between > To reset the lap statistics, press and hold the
the last lap and the previous best lap time will be left thumbwheel until the message No lap
indicated witha won“~” or an“+”.
times have been recorded yet. appears.
Pausing timing and displaying a split time
@) Tips
> To insert a pause @ select Pause in the menu.
> To resume timing, select Resume in the menu. The lap statistics list the lap times for the last
> To display a split time, select Split time in the 30 laps. The fastest and slowest lap times out
menu. The split time appears for approxi- of up to 99 measured laps are also displayed.
mately ten seconds in the instrument cluster.
The current lap timing will continue running. Integrated Toll Module
Canceling lap timing
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
The timing of the current lap will stop. The lap
time will be erased and will not be included in the Depending on the region, you can pay toll fees in
statistics. certain countries using the Integrated Toll Mod-
ule (ITM). It replaces a separate transponder for
> Select Cancel lap in the menu.
detecting toll fees. The system electronics are in-
Resetting the time tegrated in the rearview mirror housing.
> Select Reset lap times in the menu.
Gi) Tips
G) Tips The system complies with United States FCC
regulations and ISED regulations > page 311.
— A maximum of 99 lap times can be meas-
ured.
— If timing is paused, you can continue it later
even if you switch the ignition off.
— Saved lap times cannot be individually de- To use the ITM in toll zones, you must register
leted from the total results. and activate it.
— The saved lap timer values will remain after
switching the ignition off. Registration
yo e-) a(t) HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa-
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer tion Toll module.
> Note the Integrated Toll Module ID.
Displaying lap statistics
> To register the ITM, go to the displayed web ad-
You can display the number of laps driven dress and follow the instructions.
the fastest lap “+”, the slowest lap “-”, and the
average time “®” in the instrument cluster. Activation
> To activate the ITM, press CD in the MMI.

> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
tions tab > E] button > Lap statistics. Entering the number of passengers
> Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the
80B012721BA
Depending on the number of passengers and the

individual lap times.
region, a lower toll fee may be charged. You must
> To return to the lap timing that was started, se-
either enter the number of passengers or >
lect the [I button > Lap times.
149
Driving information
deactivate the ITM based on the laws applicable

in the area where you are driving.
> To enter the number of passengers, select the

appropriate button in the MMI.
> To deactivate the ITM, press © in the MMI.
@) Tips
— The driver is responsible for specifying the
correct number of passengers and activat-
ing or deactivating the ITM.
— Malfunctions can occur when detecting tolls
if both the ITM and transponder are activat-
ed. Deactivate the system not being used or
remove it as necessary.
—Ifa rearview mirror is replaced, you must
register the new ITM and remove the old
ITM from the account.
Display
The selected number of passengers is displayed

in the MMI status bar > page 23.
The i symbol in the status bar and a notifica-

tion in the MMI will indicate if there is a faulty
connection between the ITM and the MMI or if
the ITM is faulty. If the connection interference
continues or the ITM is faulty, drive immediately
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
150
Driver assistance
Driver assistance Switching the system on

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Cruise control system
BFV-0220
The cruise control system assists the driver in

maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
ZA WARNING
Fig. 116 Operating lever: switching the system on
— Always pay attention to the traffic around
your vehicle when the cruise control system
is in operation. As the driver, you are always
responsible for controlling your vehicle > To switch the system on, pull the lever toward
speed and the distance between your vehicle you to position ©.
and other vehicles.
The Gia or i$) indicator light and the corre-
— For safety reasons, cruise control should not sponding message will appear in the instrument
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on cluster.
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain,
and conditions that could lead to hydroplan-
ZA\ WARNING
ing), because this increases the risk of an ac- If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example,
cident. overheating) while the cruise control system
— Switch the cruise control off temporarily is switched on, the regulating functions may
shut off automatically.
when driving in turning lanes, highway exits,
or in construction zones.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you should Preselecting or activating a cruise con
only resume the stored speed if it is suitable speed
for the current traffic conditions. Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect

() Note the cruise control speed or activate the speed
— Conventional drive system:Before driving while driving.
downhill a long distance on a steep hill, de-
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
crease your speed and select a lower gear.
This makes use of the engine braking effect > To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
and reduces the load placed on the brakes. hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
— Plug-in hybrid drive: Before driving downhill =>page 151, fig. 116.
a long distance on a steep hill, decrease > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
your speed and use the recuperation braking lever toward position @ while driving.
effect > page 104. This reduces the load on > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
the brakes. control speed, press the button @) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with

@ Tips
the Gg or kl indicator light in the instrument
80B012721BA
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are cluster.

applied automatically.
151
Driver assistance
An additional indicator appears in the head-up

display*.
ZA WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. This will pre-
Changing the cruise control speed
vent braking interventions by the system.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.

See me Lai
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
in small increments, tap the lever up to the

When you switch the system off, the cruise con-
first level toward @)/G) > page 151, fig. 116.
trol speed will be erased.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
in larger increments, tap the lever up to the Requirement: the system must be switched on.
second level toward @)/G). > To switch the system off, press the lever toward
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed @ (locked into place) > page 151, fig. 116, or
continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first > Switch the ignition off.
or second level toward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system Gir / 3) Speed control system: currently un-
available. See owner's manual
You can override or deactivate the cruise control
system. When you deactivate the system, your If the indicator light turns on and this message
cruise control speed will be stored and you can appears, the cruise control system has been deac-
resume that speed. tivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for ex-
ample the brakes are overheating. Switch the
Requirement: the system must be switched on
cruise control system on again later.
and the regulated speed must be activated.
Overriding Efficiency assist

> To temporarily override the cruise control
speed, press the accelerator pedal. Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
> To resume the stored regulated speed, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Efficiency assist can assist the driver with predic-
tive information in order to reduce fuel consump-
If you override the cruise control system for a tion. Depending on vehicle equipment, the sys-
long period of time, the cruise control system tem may access data from the navigation system,
will be deactivated. The [Ud or [RM indicator the camera behind the windshield, and the radar
light will be displayed and the cruise control sensors.
speed will be saved.
Adjusting the efficiency assist
Deactivating
You can adjust efficiency assist functions individ-
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press ually. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
the lever toward @) (not locked into place) ment.
=> page 151, fig. 116, or
> Press the brake pedal. — Predictive messages > page 153.
— Accelerator pedal feedback > page 101.
— Interactive accelerator > page 101.
— Predictive control > page 157.
152
Driver assistance
Situation symbols speed in the country where the vehicle is be-

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
symbols may be shown. The symbols indicate the the instrument cluster can mean either
situation to which the efficiency assist is respond- km/h or mph, depending on the country.
ing. — Except for the road network, which is re-
corded in the navigation system’s map infor-
Some symbols only appear if Predictive messag- mation, certain functions may not be availa-
es are switched on, and some symbols only ap- ble.
pear if Predictive control is switched on and Audi — Certain settings are automatically stored
adaptive cruise control” is actively regulating the and assigned to the remote control key be-
vehicle. ing used.
Symbol |Description
Predictive messages
Slow down
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
(predictive messages only)
Adjustment to curves along route The symbol BS appears in the instrument cluster
(predictive control only) Additional display if efficiency assist recommends removing
symbols are shown in the Driver as- your foot from the accelerator pedal.
sistance display. Additional symbols that indicate the situation to
Speed limit which the efficiency assist is reacting are shown
Speed limit in the Driver assistance display > page 153, Sit-
uation symbols.
Exit ahead
Requirements
Intersection ahead — The cruise control system* or Audi adaptive

cruise control* must not be actively regulating.
— The vehicle speed must be at least 20 mph
Traffic circle ahead
(30 km/h).
(predictive control only) If the indica- — The remaining distance until the situation is
tor light turns on in green and red, it reached must be large enough to allow the sys-
is indicating that there is a difference tem to react to the situation.
between the speed limit and the set — The automatic transmission is not in the “S”
speed. driving program.
ZA WARNING Switching messages on and off

You can switch the system off or on. The adjust-
Observe the safety precautions and note the
ment options depend on the vehicle equipment.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 141. Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > (Charging & Efficiency) > Efficiency as-
@ Tips sist > Predictive messages.
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica- Z\ WARNING
tion by the traffic sign recognition*. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The system only detects traffic signs that limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
specify a speed limit. cameras > page 141.
80B012721BA
— The display in the instrument cluster is — Pay attention to traffic and the area around
based on the units of measurement used for your vehicle when efficiency assist is >
153
Driver assistance
switched on. The driver is always responsible jam assist can assist the driver to stay within the
for assessing the traffic situation. lane detected by the system > page 162.
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic-

@ Tips tive control can adjust the set speed based on
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- traffic and road conditions > page 157.
ority over the display. The driver is always
responsible for adhering to the regulations Z\ WARNING
applicable in the country where the vehicle Observe the safety precautions and note the
is being operated. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
— When a route is planned using the naviga- cameras > page 141.
tion system*, then system displays messag-
es based on an assumed route. Without @) Tips
route guidance, the system displays mes-
The system complies with United States FCC
sages based on an assumed route.
— The wording of the message may vary de-
pending on the selected Audi drive select*
mode and the selected gear.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Audi adaptive cruise

control
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, Audi adaptive

cruise control may consist of the following func-
tions:
Within the limits of the system, the adaptive Fig. 117 Example: driving into a curve
speed and distance control assists the driver in
controlling the speed and the set distance to the In some situations, the adaptive cruise control
vehicle driving ahead. If the system detects a ve- function is limited and you must assume control
hicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control of the vehicle when necessary, for example by ap-
can brake and accelerate your vehicle within the plying the brakes.
limits of the system. On open roads with no traf-
— When driving into a curve > fig. 117 and out of
fic, it functions like a cruise control system. The
a curve, the system may react to a vehicle in the
stored speed is maintained. When approaching a
neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can
vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive cruise control
override the system by pressing the accelerator
system automatically brakes to match that vehi-
pedal briefly.
cle's speed and then maintains the set distance
— The system works with the various sensors and
as much as possible. As soon as the system does
cameras in the vehicle. Vehicles can only be de-
not detect a vehicle driving ahead, adaptive
tected once they are within the area and range
cruise control accelerates up to the stored speed.
covered by the sensors > page 142, fig. 110.
In stop-and-go traffic, the vehicle may brake to a — When driving around tight curves, a vehicle
full stop and then may also start driving again driving ahead that was previously detected may
automatically under certain conditions. no longer be detected, and the system may ac-
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist: In celerate unexpectedly.
traffic jams or in stop-and-go traffic, the traffic
154
Driver assistance
— The system does not react to a stationary vehi- @ - @, you can find more detailed information
cle in the same lane if it expects that you can about the system. The displays depend on the
easily drive around the stationary vehicle by country and equipment.
turning the steering wheel.
— The system cannot react to stationary objects, Display th thespeedsmeter
such as vehicles at the end of a traffic jam, es- @ Marking for the set speed
pecially when traveling at high speeds. @ Current vehicle speed
— The system has a limited ability to detect © Available speed range for the adaptive cruise
vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to control (example)
the side of your vehicle, or moving into your
iane: Image in the Driver assistance display
— Objects that are difficult to detect, such as mo- The display only appears when the Driver assis-
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance, tance display is open in the on-board computer
or vehicles with an overhanging load, may be > page 17.
detected late or not detected at all. Messages and settings
— The system does not respond to people, ani-
COG®
Detected vehicle driving ahead
mals, or objects that are crossing or approach-
Set target distance
ing from the opposite direction.
If you fall below the set distance, the dis-
ZA WARNING tance bars turn red from the bottom upward.
Your vehicle
©O©©OQ®
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Availability of Audi active lane assist
cameras > page 141. Availability of traffic jam assist
Indicator lights
BI alo A - The speed/distance control is active. No
vehicles were detected ahead. The stored speed
is maintained.
RAZ-0205.
a - The speed/distance control is active. A vehi-

cle was detected ahead. The system controls the
speed and distance from the vehicle driving
ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically.
A - The speed/distance control is active but the

vehicle is not ready to drive. A vehicle was de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
BI3 not start driving automatically.
9)
nN|
fac B - The speed/distance control is active but the
vehicle is not ready to drive. No vehicles were de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
not start driving automatically.
aA - The automatic braking is not enough to

maintain a sufficient distance from a vehicle driv-
Fig. 119 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display ing ahead. You must intervene > page 161, Driv-
er intervention request. >

80B012721BA
Indicator lights and messages in the speedome-

ter @ -@ inform you about the driving situation
and the settings. In the Driver assistance display
155
Driver assistance
ZA\ WARNING You can set any speed between 15 mph

(20 km/h)» and the maximum possible speed
Observe the safety precautions and note the range @)?) > page 155, fig. 118.
cameras > page 141. Pausing cruise control
The control can be stopped at any time:
Operating Audi adaptive cruise control > While driving or when the vehicle is stationary:
Press the lever away from you in the direction
of the arrow. Or
RAZ-0096
» While driving: Press the brake pedal.
The Ba indicator light turns off.
Resuming regulation
The previously set speed can be resumed at any
time after a pause.
> To resume cruise control while driving, pull the

lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
> To resume cruise control when stationary, pull
the lever toward you in the direction of the ar-
B4M-0232
row while pressing the brake pedal.
Changing the speed

> To increase or decrease the set speed in smaller
increments, briefly tap the lever toward G) or
© to the first level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed in larger
increments, briefly tap the lever toward () or
Fig. 121 Operating lever: changing the speed © to the second level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed quickly,
Switching on hold the lever toward @) or () until the mark-
> To switch on the adaptive cruise control, pull ing in the speedometer @) > page 155, fig. 118
the lever up to position @ until it engages. has reached the desired speed.
Storing the speed and activating regulation Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic-
tive control can automatically adjust the set
If you have switched the system on, you can set
speed based on traffic and road condi-
the current speed as the “regulated speed” and
tions > page 157.
activate regulation:
Preselecting a speed
> Press the [SET] button (2). The set speed is indi-
cated with a marking in the speedometer (@) You can also preselect the speed when adaptive
=> page 155, fig. 118 and shown in the instru- cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
ment cluster > A\. the desired direction @)/@). Activate the previ-
> To save the speed while the vehicle is station- ously selected speed by pulling the lever toward
ary, also hold the brake pedal down. you in the direction of the arrow.
D_ Analog instrument cluster: 20 mph (30 km/h)

2) Depends on the country and engine
156
Driver assistance
Switching off — If you switch the ignition or the adaptive

If you do not want to use the adaptive cruise con- cruise control system off, the set speed is
trol for a long period of time, you can switch it erased for safety reasons.
off. — When adaptive cruise control is switched
on, the ESC and ASR automatically switch
> Push the lever away from you into position @) on.
until it clicks into place. — The system cannot be switched off or it may
The indicator light and the set speed will turn off. be interrupted if the road exceeds the maxi-
mum possible grade for safe operation.
Z\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Predictive control
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and effi-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and ciency assist
cameras > page 141.
— The activated adaptive cruise control is only With predictive control, efficiency assist adapts
an assist system, and the driver is still re- the set speed in adaptive cruise control @
sponsible for controlling the vehicle. The => page 155 based on detected speed limits and
driver is especially responsible for braking, the upcoming route. Once the system no longer
steering, starting to drive, and controlling detects any incidents ahead, adaptive cruise con-
the speed and the distance from other trol will accelerate back up to the last speed that
vehicles. the driver set. After switching on the ignition, the
— Turn on the adaptive cruise control only if availability of predictive control is indicated by a
the surrounding conditions permit it. Always message when the adaptive cruise control is first
adapt your driving style to the current visu- activated.
al, weather, road, and traffic conditions. Incident symbols indicate the situation to which
— Switch adaptive cruise control off temporari- predictive control is reacting > page 153, Situa-
ly when driving in turning lanes, on express- tion symbols.
way exits or in construction zones. This pre-
vents the vehicle from accelerating to the Requirements
stored speed when in these situations. — Predictive control is switched on in the MMI
— If you press the [SET] button @) when driv- => page 161.
ing at speeds below 15 mph (20 km/h)», — Adaptive cruise control is actively regulating
the minimum possible speed that the sys- => page 156.
tem can maintain will be set. If no vehicle is — The system can only react to speed limits that
detected ahead of you, the vehicle will accel- are 15 mph (20 km/h)” or higher.
erate up to that speed.
Overriding control
(i) Tips The driver can override the predictive control to
— Always keep your hands on the steering the route ahead at any time by pressing the ac-
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any celerator or brake pedal. If the system changes
time. The driver is always responsible for the vehicle speed to adapt to speed limits, you
adhering to the regulations applicable in can change the speed using the lever
the country where the vehicle is being oper- => page 156, fig. 121.
ated.
80B012721BA
) Analog instrument cluster: 20 mph (30 km/h)
157
Driver assistance
Messages applicable in the country where the vehicle

If and a message with Predictive control is is being operated.
displayed when there is a malfunction, the effi- — Ifa speed limit is detected, the marking @
ciency assist functions are unavailable or limited. = page 155 of the set speed limit will be ad-
justed even if Audi adaptive cruise control is
A message that indicates the cause and possible not actively regulating.
solution may appear with some displays. The — Control by the system depends on which
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor adaptive cruise control driving program is
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the set or on the selected Audi drive select*
sensors > page 143 and try to turn on the sys- mode.
tems again later. — After switching on the ignition and first
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- driving onto a freeway or similar road with-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- out a speed limit, the system will regulate
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- the speed to 80 mph (130 km/h). Then
ed. the system adjusts to the last speed set by
the driver.
ZA WARNING — There is no adaptation to speed limits when
— Observe the safety precautions and note the driving through highway interchanges and
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and when driving on or off the expressway.
cameras > page 141. — The system can fail to provide control or the
— Pay attention to traffic and the area around control may be faulty if the values from the
your vehicle when predictive control is camera-based traffic sign recognition* are
switched on. The driver is always responsible incorrect or the navigation system map data
for assessing the traffic situation. is outdated.
— The system does not consider “right of way” — When route guidance is switched on, the
rules and does not respond to traffic lights, system adapts to the route provided by the
so lack of driver attention in these situations navigation system. Driving without route
can increase the risk of an accident. guidance or leaving a route can result in
— The speed when driving through curves may faulty control.
be different from what you as a driver would
do or may not be suitable for the weather Setting the distance
and road conditions. If necessary, apply the Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
brakes and reduce the selected speed to be

B4M-0234
maintained in the Adjustment to curves

along route setting to reduce the risk of an
accident.
@ Tips
— Predictive control can exceed or drop below
the maximum permitted speed. The driver
is responsible for adhering to the permitted
speed limit. Fig. 122 Operating lever: setting the distance
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri-
ority over the display. The driver is always If you adjust the speed, you must also change the
responsible for adhering to the regulations time gap to the vehicle driving ahead. The higher >
D_ In certain countries
158
Driver assistance
the speed, the greater the distance that is need- Sym- Meaning
ed. bol
> Tap the rocker switch to display the distance The time between is approximately 2.4
that is currently set. seconds. This setting corresponds toa
> To increase or decrease the distance in incre- distance of approximately 219 ft
ments, tap the switch again toward @) or (). (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
D
(67 m/h).
The newly-set distance will be shown briefly, for
example with the [eg indicator light. In the Driv- The time between is approximately 3.6
er assistance display, a graphic display is shown seconds. This setting corresponds toa
instead of the indicator lights > page 155,
distance of approximately 328 ft
1D
fig. 119. The display matches the functions of (100 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
the indicator lights. km/h).
When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the Z\ WARNING

adaptive cruise control system brakes to match Observe the safety precautions and note the
that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, cameras > page 141.
then the adaptive cruise control will accelerate
up to the speed that you have set. (i) Tips
The following distances can be set: — When setting the distance, the driver is re-
sponsible for adhering to any applicable le-
Meaning
gal regulations.
— Depending on the selected driving program
The time between is approximately 1 and distance, driving behavior when acceler-
second. This setting corresponds toa ating may vary from moderate to sporty
distance of approximately 92 ft => page 161, Adjusting adaptive cruise con-
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
trol.
(28 m/h). — The distances provided are specified values.
The time between is approximately 1.3 Depending on the driving situation and how
seconds. This setting corresponds toa the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual dis-
distance of approximately 118 ft tance may be more or less than these target
nD
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph distances.

(36 m/h).
The time between is approximately 1.8 Overriding control
seconds. This setting meets the general Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
recommendation of “half the speed
[RAZ-0096
shown on the speedometer”. This cor-

responds to a distance of approximate-
ly 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at
62 mph (100 km/h).
80B012721BA
Fig. 123 Operating lever: decreasing the distance
159
Driver assistance
Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be Driving in stop-and-go traffi

switched on. Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Overriding control
You can completely override the control, for ex-
ample when passing or if you would like to accel-
erate more quickly.
> To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward

you in the direction of the arrow and hold it
there, or press the accelerator pedal.
Applies to: vehicles with safe start monitor
> To resume the usual cruise control, release the
Fig. 124 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor
lever or remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. Stopping with adaptive cruise control
When you are in the Driver assistance display, The adaptive cruise control system also assists
the message Overridden will appear. you in stop-and-go traffic!). Within the limits of
the system, your vehicle may brake and remain at
Decreasing the distance
a stop ifa vehicle driving ahead stops.
The function decreases the set distance and pro-
vides assistance, for example when merging Starting to drive with adaptive cruise control
when a lane is ending. As long as the message a ready to drive and A
> To further reduce the distance to the vehicle is displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when
ahead temporarily, pull the lever toward your- the vehicle ahead starts to move > /\.
self in the direction of the arrow and hold it in If you are stopped for several seconds, your vehi-
that position. cle will no longer drive autonomously for safety
> To resume the system control, release the lever. reasons, and the message will turn off.
The adaptive cruise control reduces the distance > To extend B ready to drive mode for several
and, if necessary, accelerates the vehicle above seconds or reactivate, pull the lever briefly to-
the set speed. wards you in the direction of the arrow
=> page 159, fig. 123.
ZA WARNING > To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap
— Observe the safety precautions and note the the accelerator pedal.
Safe start monitor
cameras © page 141. Applies to: vehicles with safe start monitor
— Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
The vehicle can still start to drive even if certain
could override the cruise control. Braking in-
obstacles are detected when starting to drive
terventions and corrective actions by the
=> /\. If the surrounding area detection detects
system may not occur.
an obstacle, you will be alerted to the danger by
the A indicator light.
If you are in the Driver assistance display, the

display @) © fig. 124 and the message Warning!
will also appear. An audio signal will also sound.
Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. >
)) Depending on the engine
160
Driver assistance
This may also occur in some situations when The display @ only appears when the Driver as-
there is no apparent obstacle. sistance display is open in the on-board comput-
er > page 17.
> Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
down.
ZA WARNING
ZA WARNING Observe the safety precautions and note the
— Observe the safety precautions and note the cameras > page 141.
cameras > page 141.
— If the message B& ready to drive!) appears, Adjusting adaptive cruise control
your vehicle will start driving even if there is
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve- You can adjust the system individually. The set-
hicle ahead. To reduce the risk of an acci- tings depend on the vehicle equipment.
dent, always make sure there are no obsta-
cles between your vehicle and the vehicle
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Audi adaptive
driving ahead.
cruise control.
@ Tips Possible settings:
For safety reasons, the adaptive cruise control
Applies to: vehicles without Audi drive select
will only be active if
Driving program - Depending on the selected
—The driver's safety belt is fastened
driving program and distance, the vehicle han-
— All doors and the hood are closed dling will be adjusted from Sport to Moderate.
— Your vehicle is not stopped for a long period
of time
Vehicle handling will be adjusted based on the

Driver intervention request set distance and the selected Audi drive select
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control mode > page 115.
al3
3
S||
S|ee| Store last distance - The last distance that was
set will be stored after the ignition is switched
off. If the distance is not stored, distance B
(time distance of approximately 1.8 seconds) is
automatically preset every time the ignition is
switched on.
Fig. 125 Instrument cluster: request for driver interven-

Predictive control > Set speed limit - adaptation
tion to speed limits can be switched On or Off. Regu-
lation With tolerance can also be selected, if de-
The request for driver intervention instructs you sired. In this scenario, you may fall below or ex-
to take over if the adaptive cruise control braking ceed the set speed in favor of increased efficien-
function is not able to maintain a sufficient dis- cy.
tance to the vehicle driving ahead. The system
Predictive control > Adjustment to curves along
will warn you of the hazard with the A indicator
route - Adjustment based on the road ahead can
light and the message Distance!. An audio signal
be adjusted. The setting influences vehicle
will also sound.
80B012721BA
D_ This is not available in some countries.
161
Driver assistance
handling with predictive control, for example the Traffic jam assist supports the driver when driv-
speed for driving through curves. ing in traffic jams or in heavy traffic.
@) Tips In a speed range under 40 mph (65 km/h), the

system can help to keep the vehicle within a lane
Certain settings are automatically stored and calculated by the system. Within the limits of the
assigned to the remote control key being system, the system controls the steering auto-
used. matically when adaptive cruise control is switch-
ed on. Since traffic jam assist is only an assist
system, the driver must always keep his or her
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control hands on the steering wheel and be ready to
steer. The driver can override the control at any
If or is displayed when there is a mal-
time by actively steering.
function, the adaptive cruise control or traffic
jam assist functions may be unavailable or may The system is designed for driving on express-
be limited. ways and highways.
A message that indicates the cause and possible Requirements for using traffic jam assist:
solution may appear with some displays. The
> The traffic jam assist is preselected in the MMI
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
settings: Select on the home screen: VEHICLE >
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
Driver assistance > Traffic jam assist.
sensors > page 143 and try to turn on the sys-
> Adaptive cruise control must be switched on
tems again later.
and active > page 156.
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
If you open the Driver assist display in the on-
board computer = page 17, the indicator
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
light and the message Traffic jam assist will turn
ed.
on when a traffic jam is detected.
Please take over!
Activating or deactivating traffic jam assist
This message appears if the vehicle rolls back
> To activate or deactivate traffic jam assist,
when starting on a slight incline, even though the
press the > fig. 126 button.
systems are active. Press the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling or starting to move. Always switch off traffic jam assist in the
following situations:
Traffic jam assist — When increased attention is needed from the
driver
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist — In construction zones

— In city driving
— On stretches of road with curves
B8V-0692
—In unclear traffic situations such as at intersec-

tions or toll stations
— The turn signal was activated.
Indicator lights
Traffic jam assist is available.
B and B - Traffic jam assist is switched on.

Fig. 126 Turn signal lever: button for traffic jam assist and Vehicles driving ahead were detected. Your vehi-
Audi active lane assist cle adapts while driving.
162
Driver assistance
B - Traffic jam assist switches off if the driver responsible for following the laws that are
does not take over steering after multiple driver applicable in the location where the vehicle
intervention requests. The system brakes the ve- is being operated.
hicle until it is stationary. — If traffic jam assist was deactivated through
the MMI, you can continue operating the
Audi active lane assist using the > fig. 126
If no steering activity is detected or the steering button > page 165. The traffic jam assist
power from the system is not sufficient, the driv- functions are no longer available.
er steering intervention request will alert the — You are not necessarily guided to the center
driver using audio and visual signals, such as of your lane.
or E. Take over the steering and keep your
hands on the steering wheel so that you will be Messages
ready to steer at any time. Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
If the driver does not take over steering, adaptive if &. or |i is displayed when there is a mal-
cruise control (with traffic jam assist) will be function, the traffic jam assist functions may be
switched off. The system brakes the vehicle until
unavailable or may be limited.
it is stationary.*
A message that indicates the cause and possible
ZA WARNING solution may appear with some displays. The
cameras © page 141.
tems again later.
— The activated traffic jam assist is only an as-
sist system, and the driver is still responsi- If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
ble for controlling the vehicle. The driver is ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
especially responsible for braking, steering, ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
starting to drive, and controlling the speed ed.
and the distance from other vehicles.
— Turn on the traffic jam assist only if the sur-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt
your driving style to the current visual,
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Switch the traffic jam assist off temporarily
when driving in turning lanes or highway ex-
its. This prevents the vehicle from accelerat-
ing to the stored speed when in these situa-
tions.
@) Tips
— Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel. The driver is always responsible for
adhering to the regulations applicable in
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations
80B012721BA
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for

emergency vehicles, etc. The driver is always
163
Driver assistance
Distance warning @ The actual distance is smaller than the set

distance and you will be informed about the
danger.
Applies to: vehicles with distance warning
Adjusting the distance warning
S|iS
9]nN
‘|ja The system can be switched off or on in the MMI
and you can customize the distance warning
threshold. The settings depend on the vehicle
equipment.
— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Distance warn-
ing.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise control:
Fig. 127 Instrument cluster: display of the current dis- Messages
tance
1f Bo is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the distance warning functions may be un-
RAZ-0400
available or may be limited.

sensors > page 143 and try to turn the system on
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control again later.
Fig. 128 Instrument cluster: distance warning
General information ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
km/h), this function measures the distance to the ed.
vehicle ahead as time. If the distance falls below

the warning threshold and remains there, the
ZA\ WARNING
system will warn you of the hazard with the & Observe the safety precautions and note the
indicator light. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 141.
Image in the Driver assistance display
Gi) Tips
The display only appears if the Driver assistance
— The driver is always responsible for adhering
display is selected in the on-board computer
to the regulations applicable in the country
= page 17 and the adaptive cruise control is not
where the vehicle is being operated.
actively controlling the vehicle.
— You may fall below the warning threshold
@ Detected vehicle driving ahead briefly when passing or when quickly ap-
@ Use the markings to help you estimate the proaching a vehicle driving ahead. There is
distance to an obstacle. Each marking repre- no warning in this scenario. A warning is giv-
sents approximately one second. en only if you fall below the warning thresh-
@® Set warning threshold. Depending on the set- old for an extended period of time.
tings, the display will be colored in from the
bottom to the top.
164
Driver assistance
Audi active lane assist/ The system functions in the speed range of ap-
lane departure warning OMe mph 155 imph (65 kmzh -
m. #
General information . ; -
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control and traf-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist fic jam assist
The active lane assist/lane departure warning If the conditions are met, traffic jam assist
(called only active lane assist in the vehicle dis- switches on at speeds under approximately
plays and in the information that follows in this 40 mph (65 km/h) > page 162.
Owner's Manual) can detect lane marker lines AK WARNING
within the limits of the system. If you are ap-
proaching a detected lane marker and it appears Observe the safety precautions and note the
likely that you will leave the lane, the system can limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
warn you with corrective steering and a steering cameras > page 141.
wheel vibration, if necessary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
Display and warning

The availability, readiness to provide warnings,
and the warnings are indicated with indicator
lights. Active lane assist is ready to provide warn-
ings if an object is detected on at least one side
of the lane where your vehicle is traveling.
Fig. 129 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display
Driver assistance Indicator lights Meaning

display Audi virtual | Instrument
cockpit cluster (analog)
@ White 71% 7% Active lane assist is activated, but is not ready to
lines provide warnings.
@ Green ex 7\ Active lane assist is activated and ready to provide
line(s) warnings.
@ Red 7X 7 \ Blinking The active lane assist will warn you with corrective
line steering before exiting the lane. If the active lane
assist must intervene for a long period of time, a
message will request the driver to drive in the
center of the lane. The steering wheel will also vi-
brate lightly when exiting the lane.
If the system is switchedon but is not ready to or because the lines are obstructed by snow,
provide warnings, one of the following systems dirt, water, or lighting)
limits or situations couldbe the cause: — The speed is below the activation speed
— There is no lane marker line — The lane is too narrow or too wide
80B012721BA
— The necessary lane marker lines have not been — The curve is too narrow
detected (for example, in a construction zone — The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel
165
Driver assistance
— Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip. the country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
— The system does not provide any corrective
If the active lane assist intervenes multiple times steering or steering wheel vibrations if it de-
when no steering activity is detected, the steer- tects that you are passing another vehicle.
ing intervention request will provide a warning — The image in the Driver assistance display
using audio and visual signals, such as EE. Take only appears if it was opened in the on-
over the steering and keep your hands on the board computer > page 17.
steering wheel so that you will be ready to steer
at any time. The system may no longer be ready See moll
to provide warnings after a short time, and it will Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
only become active again later.
B8V-0692
If the driver does not take over steering, active
lane assist will be switched off.
Behavior when a turn signal is active

Applies to: vehicles with side assist: The system
will not warn you if you activate a turn signal be-
fore crossing the lane marker line. In this case, it
assumes that you are changing lanes intentional-
ly.
Fig. 130 Turn signal lever: button for Audi active lane as-
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: If the turn sist
signal is activated, lane assist is ready, and a lane

change has been classified as critical by lane as- > To switch the system on or off, press the button
sist due to vehicles traveling beside you or due to on the turn signal lever > fig. 130. The respec-
approaching vehicles, then a noticeable corrective indicator light in the instrument cluster
tive steering movement will occur briefly before will turn off or on.
exiting the lane. This will attempt to keep your
vehicle in the lane. Z\ WARNING
Z\ WARNING limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
— Observe the safety precautions and note the cameras > page 141.
cameras > page 141. Adjusting Audi active lane assist
— The system warns the driver that the vehicle Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
is leaving the lane using corrective steering.
The driver is always responsible for keeping You can adjust active lane assist individually. The
the vehicle within the lane. settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
— Corrective steering may not occur at all in » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
certain situations, such as during heavy VEHICLE > Driver assistance. > Audi active
braking. Always be ready to intervene. lane assist/Lane departure warning.
@) Tips Possible settings:
— Always keep your hands on the steering — Steering correction - In the Late setting, the
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any steering correction will only occur shortly be-
time. The driver is always responsible for fore a wheel crosses a detected lane marker
adhering to the regulations applicable in line. In the Early setting, steering correction >
166
Driver assistance
occurs continuously in order to help the driver preemptive safety measures for the vehicle oc-
keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. If the cupants.
steering correction cannot be set, the steering — Audi pre sense rear monitors the rear traffic
correction will function in the Late setting. behind your vehicle and can react to an impend-
— Vibration warning - You can select if you would ing rear impact.
also like to be warned using a vibration in the — The swerve assist can help you to steer the ve-
steering wheel. hicle around an obstacle during an evasive ma-
neuver that is detected as critical.
@) Tips — The turn assist can detect vehicles in the oppo-
Certain settings are automatically stored and site lane as critical during a turning maneuver
assigned to the remote control key being and react with braking maneuvers.
used.
PNM eA ELT)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist

Depending on the vehicle speed and the vehicle
iri or is displayed when there is a malfunc- equipment, the following functions may be initi-
tion, the active lane assist functions may be un- ated in certain situations:
available or limited.
— Visual and audio warnings
A message that indicates the cause and possible — Reversible tensioning of safety belts
solution may appear with some displays. The — Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof
weather conditions may be too poor or the cam- — Adjusting the seats
era may be covered. Clean the area in front of the — Other preemptive safety measures by individual
camera > page 143 and try to turn on the sys- systems
tems again later.

Z\ WARNING
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Observe the safety precautions and note the
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
ed. cameras > page 141.
Audi pre sense @) Tips

— Depending on the risk situation that is de-
Introduction tected and the selected Audi drive select*
mode, not all preemptive safety measures
Within the limits of the system, the Audi pre may be initiated under certain circumstan-
sense functions can initiate measures in certain ces. Certain functions can be adjusted or
driving situations to protect the vehicle occu- skipped if necessary.
pants and other road users. Depending on the ve- — Audi pre sense may be restricted or unavail-
hicle equipment, various Audi pre sense systems able under certain circumstances, for exam-
may be installed: ple if:
— There are passengers with unfastened
— Audi pre sense basic can react during emergen-
safety belts
cy and dangerous braking maneuvers and un-
— After turning on the ignition, as long as
stable driving situations (such as oversteering
the [BJ or indicator light is on.
or understeering).
— When driving in reverse
80B012721BA
— Audi pre sense city and Audi pre sense front

can detect an impending frontal impact and re- — The front passenger's airbag is switched
off
act with warnings, braking interventions, and
167
Driver assistance
— There is an airbag control module mal- Up to speeds of approximately 155 mph

function (250 km/h), the system may react to the follow-
— System functions may not be available if ing situations:
the ESC is limited or switched off, or if —Avehicle driving ahead clearly applies the
there is a malfunction. brakes
— When approaching a vehicle ahead that is clear-
Audi pre sense basic ly traveling more slowly
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic
Prewarning
Audi pre sense basic is automatically active at
To warn about detected dangers, Audi pre
speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and
sense © / {@) will appear in the instrument clus-
higher. Audi pre sense basic can trigger preemp-
ter and an audio signal will sound.
tive safety measures during emergency braking
and dangerous braking maneuvers as well as in A brief application of the brakes
unstable driving situations, such as oversteering
Ifa collision is imminent, there may be an acute
or understeering > page 167, Audi pre sense
warning using a brief application of the brakes.
safety measures.
You will also be warned about the danger by an
The message Audi pre sense oa /{@) will warn indicator in the instrument cluster display. You
you about the danger. may only be able to avoid a collision by swerving
or braking strongly.
ZA\ WARNING
Automatic braking force increase
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and If there is an impending collision and you are not
cameras > page 141. applying the brakes enough, the braking force
may be increased, depending on the situation.
PNUCe ema ial Automatic braking

Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense city
If you do not react to the acute warning, the sys-
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense tem may apply the brakes with strong braking
city can warn about an impending front end colli- force within the limits of the system in order to
sion and brake the vehicle strongly, if necessary. reduce the speed of impact in the event of a colli-
The system uses the camera behind the wind- sion.
shield and is available at speeds above approxi- If the brakes are applied until the vehicle is sta-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). tionary, © / Please take over! will appear in
Driving situations the instrument cluster and you must take over
control of the vehicle.
The situations to which the system reacts de-
pends on the vehicle speed. ZA, WARNING
Automatic braking interventions are available at — Observe the safety precautions and note the
vehicle speeds up to approximately 50 mph limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
(85 km/h). cameras > page 141.
Up to speeds of approximately 50 mph — Audi pre sense cannot overcome natural

(85 km/h), the system may react to the following physical laws. It is a system designed to as-
situations: sist and it cannot prevent a collision in every
circumstance. The driver must always inter-
— Pedestrians are moving inside your lane
vene. The driver is always responsible for
— When approaching a stationary vehicle
braking at the correct time. Do not let the
increased safety provided tempt you into >
168
Driver assistance
taking risks. This could increase your risk of — Audi pre sense front does not react to cer-
a collision. tain objects, such as pedestrians, animals,
— Audi pre sense city does not react to certain crossing or oncoming vehicles, bars, railings,
objects, such as animals, crossing or oncom- or railcars.
ing vehicles, bars, railings, or railcars.
— Audi pre sense may be limited or unavailable Audi pre sense rear
in curves or when it is dark. Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense rear
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of rear uses data from radar sensors at the rear cor-
an accident. Store objects securely while ners of the vehicle and calculates the probability
driving. of a rear-end collision with the vehicle behind
— In trailer mode, the braking behavior of the

you.
trailer can be different than usual during au- Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures can
tomatic braking. be initiated if the risk of a collision with the vehi-
cle behind you is detected.
@) Tips
Certain system functions may not be available Z\ WARNING
if the ESC is limited or switched off — Observe the safety precautions and note the
=> page 120, if there is a malfunction, or if the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
hill hold assist* is switched on > page 114. cameras > page 141.
— Audi pre sense rear does not react to pedes-
Audi pre sense front trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front jects not detected as vehicles.
Audi pre sense front provides the same scope of @) Tips

functions as Audi pre sense city, with a few ex-
— Audi pre sense rear functions switch off
ceptions > page 168. The system has an exten-
sive field of view due to additional sensors that when trailer mode is detected. There is no
guarantee the functions will switch off
are installed. Because of this, vehicles that are
when using a retrofitted trailer hitch.
braking or traveling significantly more slowly can
be detected earlier and more clearly, depending — Audi pre sense rear functions may also
on the limits of the system. switch off if there is a malfunction in the
side assist system.
The following features apply to Audi pre sense
front:
ai
— Automatic braking interventions are available Applies to: vehicles with swerve assist
at vehicle speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehi-
— The system does not detect pedestrians cle around an obstacle detected in a critical area.
If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning,
Z\ WARNING then the swerve assist assists you by applying
slight steering adjustment to correct your steer-
— Observe the safety precautions > A\ in Audi
ing wheel angle as long as you are actively steer-
pre sense city on page 168.
ing. Swerve assist is available at speeds between
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 90 mph
80B012721BA
(150 km/h).
cameras > page 141.
169
Driver assistance
ZA\ WARNING Adjusting Audi pre sense

limits of the assist systems, sensors, and You can switch Audi pre sense and the associated
cameras > page 141. systems on or off, or adjust them individually.
— Swerve assist does not react to pedestrians, The adjustment options depend on the vehicle
animals, crossing objects, and objects not equipment.
detected as vehicles. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Driver assistance > Audi pre sense.
@) Tips
Setting the prewarning
— System functions may not be available if the
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a You can adjust the warning time for the prewarn-
malfunction. ing2) individually (Early/Medium/Late) or switch
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will the prewarning off.
inform you when there is an intervention.
Set the warning time for the early warning to
Early at first. If you feel that the prewarnings ap-
seg pear too early, then set the warning time to Me-
Applies to: vehicles with turn assist dium. The Late warning time should only be set
When turning left), turn assist can help to rein special circumstances.
duce the risk of a collision with an oncoming ve-
hicle by using braking action to keep your vehicle
G) Tips
in its lane. The function is only available when — If Audi pre sense is switched off, it switches
the turn signal is turned on and at speeds up to on again automatically once the ignition is
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). switched on again2).
— Switch Audi pre sense off when you are not
ZA\ WARNING using public streets, when loading the vehi-
— Observe the safety precautions and note the cle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or oth-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and er type of transportation, or when towing
cameras > page 141. the vehicle. This can help to prevent an un-
— The turn assist does not react to pedes- desired intervention from the Audi pre
sense system.
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob-
jects not detected as vehicles. — Certain settings are automatically stored
and assigned to the remote control key be-
@ Tips ing used.

Messages
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
malfunction.
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will rs or is displayed when there is a malfunc-
inform you when there is an intervention. tion, the Audi pre sense functions may be un-
available or may be limited.

weather conditions may be too poor orasensor >
2) When making a right turn in countries with left-hand drive

vehicles.
2) Incertain countries
170
Driver assistance
may be covered. Bring the vehicle to a full stop, sooner the display in the outside mirror will
switch the ignition off, and clean the area in front turn on.
of the sensors > page 143. @® There are vehicles traveling in the same direc-
If the message still appears after switching the tion as you in a lane adjacent to yours. The
ignition on again, have an authorized repair facili- display in the exterior mirror will turn on
ty correct the malfunction as soon as possible. when the detected object is in the “blind
spot”, at the latest.
@ You are slowly passing another vehicle. If the
Side assist
difference in speed between the two vehicles
Description is less than 9 mph (15 km/h), the display in
Applies to: vehicles with side assist the exterior mirror will turn on.
a3
SN Information stage
q@
If you do not activate a turn signal, the system
will inform you about objects classified as critical
by turning on the display in the respective exteri-
or mirror. The display remains dim in the infor-
mation stage so that you are not distracted while
looking forward.
Warning stage
Once you activate a turn signal, the system will
inform you about objects classified as critical by
turning on the display in the respective exterior
mirror.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the display

may also provide a warning when the turn signal
is not activated: if driver assist systems detect
that your vehicle is about to leave a lane, the dis-
play will blink to warn you about objects classi-
Fig. 131 Driving situations and exterior mirror display fied as critical. You can also be warned with cor-
rective steering > page 165, Audi active lane as-
General information sist/lane departure warning.
Side assist monitors the blind spot and traffic be- System limitations
hind your vehicle and provides assistance when
you are changing lanes. If the system detects an The system uses the data from the radar sensors
object approaching and classifies it as critical, the at the rear corners of the vehicle > page 143,
display @ in the exterior mirror on that side of fig. 113. They are designed to detect the left and
the vehicle will turn on, right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are the
normal width. In some situations, the system
Driving situations may react to vehicles in your own lane or lanes
The side assist warning is active at speeds above that are not directly adjacent to yours, or to ob-
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) and can help in jects on the side of the road. In this case, the dis-
situations such as the following: play will turn on even though there is no vehicle
in the critical area. These situations may include:
@ Your vehicle is being passed. The faster an-
80B012721BA
other vehicle approaches from behind, the — Driving on the edge of your own lane
— Narrow lanes
171
Driver assistance
— Curves
G) Tips
— High barriers on the side of the road
— If you switch side assist on or off, the exit
ZA\ WARNING warning will also switch on or off.
— Certain settings are automatically stored
and assigned to the remote control key be-
ing used.
cameras © page 141.
— The display may not appear on time when
vehicles are approaching or being passed Messages
Applies to: vehicles with side assist
very quickly.
fg ° is displayed when there is a malfunc-
@) Tips tion, the side assist and exit warning system
— If the window glass in the driver's door or functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
front passenger's door has been tinted, the A message that indicates the cause and possible
display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
rect. weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
— The system is not available when towing a may be covered. Clean the sensor area at the rear
trailer. There is no guarantee the system corners of the vehicle > page 143, fig. 113 and
will switch off when using a retrofitted trail- try to turn the systems on again later.
er hitch. Do not use these functions when
towing a trailer. If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
— The system complies with United States FCC ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
regulations and ISED regulations ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
=> page 311. ed.
Adjusting side assist

Applies to: vehicles with side assist
You can adjust the side assist to your preferences.


VEHICLE > Driver assistance > Side assist.
Possible settings:
The system can be switched on and off. If the sys-

tem is switched on, the displays in the exterior
mirrors will turn on briefly each time the ignition
is switched on.
Brightness - Change the brightness only when

side assist is switched on, so that the selected
setting can be checked in the exterior mirror dis-
plays. Adjust the brightness to a level where the
display will not interfere with your view ahead.
Because the display brightness automatically
adapts to the ambient light, it may have already
been adjusted to the highest or lowest setting
during the automatic adaptation.
172
Driver assistance
Exit warning ZX WARNING

Applies to: vehicles with exit warning system limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 141.
— Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning
system does not replace the attention of the
vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are
always responsible for opening the doors
and exiting the vehicle.
— The exit warning system does not respond
to people and cannot warn you about every
type of approaching objects, such as cyclists.
Always monitor the traffic as well as the ve-
hicle's surroundings with direct eye contact.
— The display may not appear in time when
vehicles are approaching very quickly.
— The exit warning system does not react to
stationary objects or pedestrians.
— The exit warning system will not provide
alerts if your vehicle is pulled too far into
the parking space so that it is hidden by ad-
jacent vehicles.
Fig. 133 Front door: exit warning
iG) Tips
General information
— The exit warning is switched on or off by the
Within system limits, the exit warning system side assist warning > page 172.
can detect traffic approaching from behind such — The exit warning system can be available for
as vehicles, and provide assistance based on this up to approximately three minutes after un-
information when you are exiting the vehicle locking the vehicle and opening the door as
=> fig. 132. The system uses the data from the ra- well as after switching off the ignition. Then
dar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle. the displays flash briefly and the system
switches off.
Displays and warnings
— The system is not available when towing a
If a door is opened while the vehicle is stationary, trailer. There is no guarantee the system
the warning strip @ on that door and the display will switch off when using a retrofitted trail-
@ on that side of the vehicle will blink if another er hitch. Do not use these functions when
road user is detected in a critical situation, If an- towing a trailer.
other road user that is classified as critical is ap- — The display brightness for the exit warning
proaching while a door is already open, the dis- system cannot be adjusted.
plays on that door will turn on.
The same messages apply for the exit warning regulations and ISED regulations
system and side assist > page 172. => page 311.
80B012721BA
173
Parking and maneuvering
Parking and ZA WARNING

maneuvering Observe the safety precautions and note the
Introduction
cameras > page 141.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various
parking aids will help you when parking and ma- @ Tips
neuvering. Practicing parking in a traffic-free location or
Parking aid parking lot to become familiar with the sys-
tems is recommended. Practice parking in
The parking aid plus assists you while parking good light and weather conditions.
using audio and visual signals to warn you about
objects detected in front of, behind, and next to*
Parking aid plus
the vehicle > page 174.
The rearview camera shows the area behind the Ne ELS EUR
Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
vehicle in the center display. The lines in the rear-
view camera image help you to park and maneu-
B8W-0164
ver > page 176.
The peripheral cameras are an addition to the

rearview camera and help you to see various
areas around the vehicle while parking and ma-
neuvering > page 176.
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn you of ap-

proaching cross traffic when driving in reverse or
exiting a parking space > page 180.
Fig. 134 Center console: parking aid button
Assisted parking
General information
Park assist helps you to locate suitable parking
The parking aid assists when parking and maneu-
spaces and to park in them and exit them. Park
vering by providing warnings about obstacles. If
assist controls the steering movements when
the ultrasonic sensors on the vehicle > page 143
parking in free parking spaces. The driver is still
detect an obstacle, the system will provide audio
responsible for accelerating, braking, and shift-
and visual warnings.
ing gears. The driver must always monitor the
area around the vehicle and supervise the parking Activating and deactivating
procedure > page 181.
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
Settings options approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
You can adjust parking aid functions individually. > Press the P” button in the center console.
The adjustment options depend on the vehicle When activating, a brief tone will sound and
equipment. the LED in the button will turn on.
— Automatic activation > page 174
Automatic activation
— Front and rear volume > page 175
— Entertainment fader > page 175. > The system activates automatically when re-
— Clean rearview camera > page 177 verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
— Trailer view > page 178 ning. A brief tone will sound.
— View > page 179 If Automatic activation is switched on in the
— Rear cross-traffic assist > page 180 MMI and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle at >
174
speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), If the sensors detect an obstacle, audible and vis-
the parking aid will switch on automatically. Au- ual signals will warn you.
dible signals will sound once the obstacle is with-
Visual warnings
in the sensor detection area.
» Applies to: MMI: To switch Automatic activa- The visual warnings in the center display help you
tion on or off, select on the home screen: VEHI- to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate
CLE > Parking aid > Automatic activation. the distance to an obstacle.
Automatic deactivation Red segments (@) show detected obstacles that

are in your vehicle's path. The red lines @) mark
The distance indicator for the parking aid plus
the expected direction of travel based on the
will deactivate automatically when driving for-
steering angle. A white segment (3) indicates a
ward faster than approximately 6 mph (10
detected obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's
km/h).
path. The closer your vehicle comes to the obsta-
cle, the closer the segments will move to the ve-
ZA\ WARNING hicle. The collision area has been reached when
Observe the safety precautions and note the the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and in the collision area, including those outside of
cameras > page 141. the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not con-
tinue driving farther.
©) Note
Audio signals
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid
damage to the rims. The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta-
cle, the shorter the time between the audible sig-
@ Tips nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle
is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away
— If the parking aid is switched off, it can only
from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continu-
be reactivated automatically when one of
ous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than
the following conditions is met:
approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the
— The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)
sides* of the vehicle. Do not continue driving for-
— The ignition was switched off and back on
ward or in reverse >@).
again
— The parking brake was set and then released > To deactivate audio signals while parking, press
— The “P” gear was engaged and released «Jin the center display. The audio signals will
again be automatically activated again the next time
the parking aid is activated.
Adjusting the volume

Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
You can adjust the volume to your preferences.

HICLE > Parking aid. Or:
> Press|] in the center display when the parking
aid is active.
Possible settings:
Fig. 135 Center display: distance display Front volume - Volume for the front and side*
80B012721BA
area.
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area.
175
Entertainment fader - The volume of the audio/

G) Tips
video source is Lowered when the parking aid is
activated. — The segments in the side area* are detected
and analyzed when passing. If you switch
The new level is demonstrated briefly* when the the ignition off and on again or open the
volume is adjusted. door, or if the vehicle is stationary for a peri-
Error messages od of time, the surrounding area may have
changed in the meantime. In this scenario,
If P4 appears, the sensor in the respective area the side area* will appear black until the
or the speaker is faulty. Drive immediately to an area has been detected and evaluated.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service — If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
Facility to have the malfunction repaired. stant, the volume of the distance warning
iffy or is displayed when there is a malfunc- gradually lowers after a few seconds until it
tion, the parking aid functions may be unavaila- is muted (this does not apply to the continu-
ble or may be limited. ous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
it was before the sound was muted, the
tone will sound again. If the obstacle be-
comes farther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
attention to the vehicle's surroundings
when you start to drive.
tems again later.
— There is no distance warning for the rear
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- and the sides* when trailer towing mode is
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- detected. The front sensors remain activat-
ty immediately to have the malfunction corrected. There is no guarantee the functions will
ed. be deactivated when using a retrofitted
trailer hitch.
ZA\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Rearview camera and
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and peripheral cameras
cameras > page 141.
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which Introduction
the surrounding area cannot be detected. Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
Objects, animals, and people may only be

B8V-0629
detected with limitations may not be detect-

ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
become distracted.
@) Note
— Keep enough distance from the curb to
avoid damage to the rims.
— Applies to: vehicles with park assist: If you Fig. 136 Orientation line display when parking
park in short parking spaces using park as-
sist, a continuous tone sounds from the Depending on the vehicle equipment, a rearview
parking aid when the distance to an object is camera or multiple peripheral cameras may be
less than approximately 0.7 ft (0.20 m). Do available.
not continue driving farther.
176
The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-

ver using the orientation lines.
ZX WARNING
The peripheral cameras expand the vehicle over- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
view to include various views around the vehicle cameras > page 141.
that can be selected.
Z\ WARNING (eT Tada Len)

Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and You can manually start the cleaning of the rear-
cameras > page 141. view camera.
> Move the window wiper lever S7 into the posi-

Activating and deactivating tion for cleaning the rear window © > page 57.
Z\ WARNING
B8W-0164
cameras > page 141.
Warnings
Fig. 137 Center console: parking aid button
Activating and deactivating

> Press the Pa button in the center console.
When activating, a brief tone will sound and
the LED in the button will turn on. Or
> Press bin the center display if the visual dis-
tance indicator is shown > page 175, fig. 135.
The system can be activated at low speeds, such

when maneuvering.
Automatic activation
The system activates automatically when reverse
gear is engaged while the engine is running. A
brief tone will sound.
Applies to: vehicles with trailer view
Fig. 139 Center display: trailer view
Automatic deactivation
The system will deactivate automatically once When parking with the rearview camera or pe-
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed while driving ripheral camera, the parking aid plus audio and
forward. visual warnings* will also assist you > page 175.
Visual orientation lines

80B012721BA
@ The orange orientation lines show the vehi-

cle's direction of travel > @. Turn the
177
steering wheel until the orange orientation authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
lines align with the parking space. function repaired.
@ You can use the horizontal blue markings to
help you estimate the distance to an obsta- ZA\ WARNING
cle. Each marking represents approximately 3 — Observe the safety precautions and note the
feet (1 meter). The blue area represents an limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
extension of the vehicle's outline by approxi- cameras > page 141.
mately 16 feet (5 meters) to the rear. — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
@® You can recognize the rear bumper in the the surrounding area cannot be detected.
lower display. Objects, animals, and people may only be
@ You should stop driving in reverse when the detected with limitations may not be detect-
red orientation line touches the edge of an ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
object, at the latest. vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
become distracted.
Trailer view
Applies to: vehicles with trailer view
@) Note
The trailer view > fig. 139 assists you in position- — The orange orientation lines @ show the di-
ing the vehicle in front of a trailer. rection the rear of the vehicle will be travel-
— Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras: ing, based on the steering wheel angle. The
Switch to the Rear view > page 179, fig. 140. front of the vehicle swings out more than
— Select -| > Trailer view in the center display the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
when the parking system is active. distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
Now you can position your vehicle in front of the obstacles.
trailer. The orange orientation line ©) > fig. 139
— Keep enough distance from the curb to
indicates the expected path toward the trailer
avoid damage to the rims.
hitch. Use the blue markings ©) to help you esti-
— Only use the images provided by the camera
mate the distance to the trailer hitch. Each mark-
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
ing represents approximately 1 foot (0.30 me-
compartment lid is completely closed. Make
ters). The width of the blue surface represents
sure any objects you may have mounted on
the maximum steering wheel angle.
the luggage compartment lid do not block
Symbols the rearview camera.
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
G) Tips
If $2/&®/< is displayed and the display area
represented by that symbol is not available, then — Applies to vehicles with air suspension: The
the camera on the that side is not available. The accuracy of the orientation lines and blue
power exterior mirrors may have been folded in surfaces on the camera display decreases
or a door or the luggage compartment lid may when the vehicle is raised or lowered with
have been opened. the air suspension.
— There is no distance warning for the rear
If # is displayed, there is a system malfunction
and the sides* when trailer towing mode is
and the display area represented by that symbol
detected. The front sensors remain activat-
is not available. The camera is not working in this
ed. The visual display switches to trailer
area. mode. There is no guarantee the functions
If one of the symbols continues to be displayed, will be deactivated when using a retrofitted
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or trailer hitch.
178
Operating the peripheral cameras

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
> To select a view, press (4) - %) in the center dis-

play or tap in an area to show the vehicle in the
side view ).
Selecting a view in the side area
The vehicle surroundings are shown in the side
area of the display. You can switch between a vis-
ual display (Graphic) and the vehicle surround-
Fig. 140 Center display: peripheral cameras.
ings (Camera).
On vehicles with peripheral cameras, you can se- > Select |- -| > View in the center display when the
lect among different views. parking aid is active.
Selecting the views

> To display the entire selection bar, tap the cur-
rent view (a) or swipe at the edge of the selec-
tion bar from left to right.
Symbol/Descrip-
Description
tion
Front corner This view makes it easier to drive out of tight parking spaces or areas and
or Display selection intersections with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view
©
bar in front of the vehicle.

This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering in front of the
© |0)
Front
vehicle.
This view helps you to maneuver and position the vehicle more precisely.
Surroundings The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehi-
cle image is shown by the system > A\.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering behind the ve-
© |S}
Rear
hicle. This is the rearview camera image.
This view can assist you when driving out of tight parking spaces or areas
Rear corner with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view behind the
vehicle.
This view helps you to see the distance between the front tires and the
©G/O@}]
Front tires
curb and the steering wheel angle when parking.
This view helps you to detect the distance between the rear wheels and
Rear tires
the curb when parking.
Steering wheel an- The red lines represent the estimated direction of travel based on the
gle steering wheel angle >@.
©
80B012721BA
D Requirement: The vehicle surroundings (Camera) must be

selected in the View in the side area.
179
A WARNING
cameras > page 141.
— The Surroundings view is created from the
individual camera images. The vehicle image
is shown by the system. Objects and obsta-
cles above the camera are not displayed. Fig. 142 Center display: rear cross-traffic assist display
General information
@® _ Note
— Only use the images provided by the camera The rear cross-traffic assist monitors the area be-
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage hind and next to the vehicle using radar sensors
compartment lid is completely closed. Make at the rear corners of the vehicle. The system can
sure any objects you may have mounted on detect moving objects that are approaching, such
the luggage compartment lid do not block as vehicles > fig. 141. A display in the MMI and
the rearview camera. various warnings provide assistance when exiting
a parking space.
— The front of the vehicle swings out more
than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty Requirements
of distance so that an exterior mirror or a
— The parking aid is switched on > page 174 or
corner of the vehicle does not collide with
reverse gear is selected.
any obstacles.
— The speed when driving in reverse must not be
Gy Tips higher than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
— Depending on the selected gear, it will auto- Displays, warnings, and braking
matically switch between the Front and
— Display: the display @ appears only when the
Rear views. If you switch the view manually,
parking aid is active. For vehicles with peripher-
the automatic front/rear camera change will
al cameras, this only happens in the Rear and
be temporarily deactivated.
Rear corner camera views. Arrows show the di-
— When first activated while a forward gear is
rection from which the cross traffic is approach-
engaged, the Front corner is displayed.
ing.
— Audible warnings: a continuous tone may
Rear cross-traffic assist sound as an additional warning when driving in
reverse.
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist — Automatic brake activation: if you do not react
to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
warn you of a potential collision with an ap-
proaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic

brake activation occur only when driving in re-
verse.

— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Parking aid > Rear cross-traffic assist.
Fig. 141 Sensor detection range for rear cross-traffic assist
Or:
180
— Select L..-| > Rear cross-traffic assist in the cen- about detected obstacles under certain cir-
ter display when the parking system is active. cumstances.
— The system is not available when the vehicle
Messages
detects that you are towing a trailer. There
rie or > is displayed when there is a mal- is no guarantee the functions will switch off
function, the rear cross traffic assist functions when using a retrofitted trailer hitch. Do not
may be unavailable or may be limited. use these functions when towing a trailer.
solution may appear with some displays. The regulations and ISED regulations
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor => page 311.
may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve- —The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 141
hicle rear and try to turn the systems on again are diagrams and do not represent a true-
later. to-scale image of the sensor ranges.

Assisted parking
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- General information
ed. Applies to: vehicles with park assist
Z\ WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with park assist, this

system helps you find suitable parking spaces.
— Observe the safety precautions and note the Parking spaces are measured using ultrasonic
sensors on the sides of the vehicle.
cameras > page 141.
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide The system helps you to park while the driver
alerts about people and cannot warn you monitors the vehicle's surroundings with the
about every type of approaching objects, parking aids, cameras*, and direct eye contact.
such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic The vehicle moves the steering wheel autono-
as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di- mously.
rect eye contact.
— The system may not react if objects are ap-
Z\ WARNING
proaching very quickly. Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
alerts if your vehicle is parallel or diagonally cameras > page 141.
parked or if your vehicle is pulled too far in-
to the parking space so that it is hidden by
adjacent vehicles.
@) Tips
— Once an automatic brake activation occurs,
the system cannot initiate another activa-
tion for several seconds.
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
malfunction.
—If there is an audio warning signal from the
80B012721BA
rear cross-traffic assist, then the parking aid

may not be able to provide audio warnings
181
a
Ss
g
=&
a
Fig. 144 Center console: park assist button
RAZ-0339
an
(1 Y
4
Fig. 145 Center display: activated parking space search

Fig. 143 Parking options overview
Activating the parking space search
Parking options
> To activate the parking space search, press the
@ Backing into parallel parking spaces Pe button in the center console, or
Backing into perpendicular parking spaces > To activate the parking space search when the
Driving forward into perpendicular parking parking aid is switched on, select Pe in the cen-
spaces that you have already driven past ter display.
Driving forward into perpendicular parking The LED in the button will turn on and the display
spaces if you have already driven to the space for finding a parking space will appear in the cen-
yourself and the front of the vehicle is alter display > fig. 145.
ready in the space
Searching for parking spaces
Options for exiting parking spaces
> Drive forward to the row of parking spaces at a
Exiting parallel parking spaces low speed. For the best parking results, the ve-
hicle should be approximately 3 feet (1 m) from
@ Tips the row of parking spaces.
You can also drive into a perpendicular park- > The parking space search is first done on the
ing space yourself and then activate the sys- side of your lane. To switch the side for the
tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi- parking space search, activate the turn signal
cle should already be in the space @) so that for that side. Depending on vehicle equipment,
the sensors can measure the space. you may also be able to press on the side next
to your vehicle in the center display.
Selecting the parking space

If the system finds a parking space that could be
suitable for the vehicle length and width, it will >
182
be displayed. The system automatically suggests The driver must decide if the parking space
a parking option @. displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
— Certain conditions near the parking space
If the parking space allows different parking op-
may cause the parking process to fail, such
tions, they can be selected manually. Press one of
as if the parking space is near trees or posts,
the suggested parking options @ in the center
or if the ground is covered, for example,
display.
with gravel, snow, or ice.
Starting the parking process
As soon as the vehicle has reached the correct po-
(i) Tips
sition, a P will appear in the center display above — If you did not drive past a suitable parking
the selected parking space @). The roof in the space too quickly, the parking space search
parking aid display @) may show the required can also be activated afterward by pressing
braking or driving direction. Pe.
—The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
> Keep the vehicle as parallel as possible to the
must not be switched off during the parking
parked vehicles or to the side of the road.
process. If the ESC intervenes, the parking
> Make sure that the parking space is suitable for
process will be canceled.
your vehicle >@.
— You can also drive into a perpendicular park-
> Start the assisted parking process > page 184.
ing space yourself and then activate the sys-
Maneuvering area tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi-
cle should already be in the space @)
The vehicle can go off course during the parking
=> page 182, fig. 143 so that the sensors
process > A\. If there are obstacles within the
can measure the space.
maneuvering area that block or endanger the
— You cannot park with the parking assist sys-
parking process, for example on the opposite
tems when you are towing a trailer or have
side of the street, a message may appear. You
the connector inserted in the trailer socket.
may need to drive farther forward and stay closer
— The system is not available when certain as-
to the row of parking spaces.
sist systems are switched on.
ZA WARNING —If there are suitable parking spaces on both
sides of the street, for example on a one-
way street, you can change the side where
the system is searching for parking spaces
cameras > page 141.
by activating the turn signal for the other
— The driver is always responsible when enter- side or by pressing on that side in the center
ing or exiting a parking space and during display.
similar maneuvers.
— The park systems do not provide support for
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which assisted parking on tight curves.
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
Park assist
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the General information
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not Applies to: vehicles with park assist
become distracted.
The park assist helps you when parking and exit-
ing parking spaces after the parking space
@) Note
search. The park assist takes over the steering of
— Parking spaces classified as suitable by the
80B012721BA
the vehicle while the driver accelerates, brakes,

system may have been detected incorrectly. and monitors the vehicle's surroundings. Park as-
sist can be interrupted at any time. >
183
ZA\ WARNING tomatically steers the vehicle into the parking

space while the driver presses the pedals.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and > After stopping the vehicle briefly, make sure
cameras > page 141. the actual direction the vehicle is traveling
— The driver is always responsible when enter- matches the direction indicated by the park as-
ing or exiting a parking space and during sist.
similar maneuvers. > Remove your hands from the steering wheel.
>» Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
— Do not use this function if the vehicle cannot
move freely, for example when on a vehicle traffic situation permits, accelerate carefully
> AX. The maximum parking speed is approxi-
jack.
mately 4 mph (7 km/h).
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
> Follow the visual instructions in the center dis-
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
play and the warning tones until the parking
process has ended.
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not Z\ WARNING
become distracted. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
@) Note cameras > page 141.
— Do not use the park assist systems when — The park assist is an assist system. The driv-
transporting cargo that extends out of the er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
vehicle, when snow chains are mounted, or hicle's surroundings and preventing colli-
when the parking space is on a hill or in- sions when using the system.
cline. — When using park assist to drive into or out
— Park assist guides the vehicle either away of a parking space, the steering wheel turns
from curbs or onto them if other vehicles quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-
are parked on the curb. Make sure that your ing wheel spokes while this is happening can
vehicle's tires and rims are not damaged. result in injury.
Resume control of the vehicle in time or
stop the parking process if needed to pre- G) Tips
vent damage. You can also cancel the driving direction set
by the system by shifting between a forward
G) Tips gear and reverse gear. Based on the position
Follow the legal regulations in the country of the vehicle, the system then calculates the
where you are located when using Park assist. additional steering and driving directions for
maneuvering.
dem Re eee
Applies to: vehicles with park assist ten Lei ek ace
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
Requirement: a suitable parking space must be
found and selected > page 181. The vehicle must If you parked the vehicle in a parallel parking
initially be stationary. space, park assist can help you drive out of it.
Park assist automatically steers the vehicle out of
In the center display, arrows and symbols on the the parking space while the driver presses the
vehicle roof @) > page 182, fig. 145 indicate pedals.
what action is needed, such as applying the
brakes or changing the direction. Park assist au- » Start the engine.
> Press the Pe button in the center console.
184
> Wait until a message appears in the center dis- Interrupting the park assists
play that specifies the direction of travel re- Applies to: vehicles with park assist
quired to exit the parking space.
> Activate the turn signal on the desired side or Park assist will be canceled automatically in the
press that side next to the vehicle in the center following scenarios:
display. — You switch the system off.
» Make sure the actual direction the vehicle is — You start steering.
traveling matches the direction indicated by the — The speed is too high.
park assist. In the center display, arrows and —The time limit is exceeded.
symbols on the vehicle roof (2) > page 182, — An obstacle is detected.
fig. 145 indicate what action is needed, such as — ESC intervenes.
applying the brakes or changing the direction.
» Remove your hands from the steering wheel. Resume control of the vehicle, end the parking
>» Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the process manually, or:
traffic situation permits, accelerate carefully — You can resume the parking process in some sit-
> AX. The maximum speed for exiting a parking uations. Press the Pe button in the center con-
space is 3 mph (5 km/h). sole.
> Follow the visual instructions in the display and — To continue exiting the parking space, switch
the warning tones until the vehicle has finished the engine off and on. Press the Pe button.
exiting the parking space.
> The process of exiting the parking space has Z\ WARNING
ended if additional corrective movements are Observe the safety precautions and note the
no longer necessary and the specified steering limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
wheel angle is sufficient to drive out of the cameras > page 141.
parking space. Resume control of the steering
wheel >@).
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with park assist
Z\ WARNING
If the prof i Pg Pa| indicator light turns on, the
park assist is not available or was interrupted.
cameras > page 141. A message that indicates the cause and possible
— The park assist is an assist system. The driv- solution may appear with some displays. The
er is still responsible for monitoring the ve- weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli- may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
sions when using the system. sensors > page 143 and try to turn on the sys-
— When using park assist to drive into or out tems again later.
of a parking space, the steering wheel turns
quickly on its own. Reaching into the steer-
ing wheel spokes while this is happening can
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
result in injury.
ed.
@) Note
Resume steering immediately after the last
corrective movement and the takeover
prompt, so that the specified steering wheel
80B012721BA
angle is not recentered.
185
Telephone
Telephone @) Note
Introduction Read the information about Audi connect, and
Applies to: vehicles with telephone be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 197.
You can operate various telephone functions easi-
ly through the MMI in your vehicle. @) Tips
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — The Bluetooth connection range is limited
ment, the following options may be available: to inside the vehicle.
— Connecting a cell phone with Bluetooth —Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices
— Using two telephones can be found in the database for tested mo-
— Using the Audi phone box bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
ZX WARNING Setup
— Medical experts warn that mobile devices
Connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth
can interfere with the function of pacemak-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ers. Always maintain a minimum distance of
about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mo- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
bile device antennas and the pacemaker. the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
— Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
directly over the pacemaker when the ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
phone is switched on. connected must not be actively connected to any
— Switch the mobile device off immediately other Bluetooth device. The MMI must only be
if you suspect it may be interfering with connected to one mobile device.
the pacemaker. > Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
— Do not use the voice recognition system* the MMI => page 237 and the mobile phone.
=> page 27 in emergencies because your > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
voice may change in stressful situations. The PHONE.
system may take longer to dial the number > Follow the system instructions. The available
or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
emergency number manually. al seconds.
— Switch your mobile device off in areas where > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
there is a risk of an explosion. These loca- displayed Bluetooth devices.
tions are not always clearly marked. This > To update the list, press OQ.
may include gas stations, fuel and chemical
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo-
cations where fuel vapors (such as propane generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings),
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti- > Follow the system instructions.
> Pay attention to any other system prompts on
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
be present in the air. This also applies to all the MMI and on your cell phone.
other locations where you would normally After connecting successfully
turn your vehicle motor off.
The cell phone contacts are automatically loaded
— The demands of traffic require your full at-
in the MMI. This process can take several mi-
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20,
nutes, depending on the number of contacts.
Traffic safety information.
Depending on your cell phone and the connection
type, you can use the following functions:
186
Telephone
Handsfree Applies to: mobile devices with Bluetooth Mes-

Requirement: your cell phone must be connected sage Access Profile (MAP): You can send and re-
to the MMI via a Bluetooth Hands Free Profile
ceive messages with both mobile devices
=> page 194.
(Bluetooth HFP).
You can use the hands-free system. You can make Connecting another mobile device
calls using the antenna on your mobile device. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI. The vehicle must be stationary and
Sending and receiving messages
the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
See > page 194. settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
@ Tips connected must not be actively connected to any
— Pay attention to any system prompts dis- other Bluetooth device.
played on your mobile device or the MMI,
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
for example if the system should connect
the MMI = page 237 and the mobile phone.
automatically in the future. Depending on
the mobile device, you may need to down-
PHONE > (°, or
load contacts and confirm access to your
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
messages separately.
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Telephone 1
— You can also search for the MMI on your mo-
or Telephone 2 > New connection.
bile device using the Bluetooth device
> Follow the system instructions. The available
search.
Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
— You only have to pair your device one time. al seconds.
Bluetooth devices that are already paired
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
automatically connect to the MMI when the
displayed Bluetooth devices.
Bluetooth function is switched on, when > To update the list, press O.
they are within range, and when the ignition
is switched on. The last connected mobile A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
device is given first priority. generated.
— You can manage additional settings for con- > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
nected mobile devices in the Connected de- > Follow the system instructions.
vices menu > page 238. > Pay attention to any other system prompts on
— When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth the MMI and on your cell phone.
connection to the mobile device will auto- After connecting successfully
matically disconnect. Depending on your
mobile device, phone calls in progress may See > page 186, After connecting successfully.
be automatically redirected from the MMI Switching between two mobile devices
to your mobile device so that you can con-
tinue the call on your phone. Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
nected to the MMI.
Using two telephones > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with telephone, and Audi phone box PHONE > <1.
You can connect two mobile phones to the MMI
@) Note
at the same time using the Bluetooth HFP, for ex-
ample a business phone and a private phone. You Read the information about Audi connect, and
80B012721BA
can be reached in your vehicle through both mo- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
bile phones. => page 197.
187
Telephone
Disconnecting a mobile device AN WARNING

Loose objects can be thrown around the vehi-
> To disconnect a Bluetooth device from the MMI, cle interior during sudden driving or braking
use the Connected devices menu > page 238. maneuvers, which increases the risk of an ac-
cident. Store objects securely while driving.
Using the Audi phone
box G) Tips
ere Ly
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
Making phone calls using the exterior
{ RAZ-1089)
Yaar)
With the Audi phone box, you can make calls us-
ing the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the
external antenna helps when there is a low signal
and also provides better reception quality.

Fig. 146 Front center console: Audi phone box with con-
> To make phone calls through the vehicle's exte-
nections
rior antenna using your mobile device, lay your
You can slide the Audi phone box forward over device on the phone symbol @) > page 188,
fig. 146 in the center of the Audi phone box
the cup holder or back under the center armrest.
with the display facing up.
Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be
able to use the following functions with the Audi
(Geel w eae ae ma Meh)se ialeltie
phone box:
— Make phone calls using the vehicle’s exterior
antenna You can charge your mobile device using a special
— Charge a mobile device using the USB input USB adapter with the Audi phone box
=> page 226.
— Charge a mobile device wirelessly
— Reminder signal Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Limitations > To charge your mobile device via USB, connect it

to the USB input
@ ° page 188, fig. 146.
In some situations, the functions of the Audi
phone box may be limited or temporarily unavail-
G) Tips
able. For example, this may happen if
— There is one more than mobile device in the — You can purchase a USB adapter from an au-
Audi phone box thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
— The mobile device is located in a bag or a pro- Service Facility, or at specialty stores.
tective case — Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Ac-
— There are objects between the Audi phone box cessories. Audi has verified their reliability,
and the mobile device safety, and suitability.
— The mobile device is not positioned in the cen-
ter of the Audi phone box
188
Telephone
Charging a mobile device wirelessly CG) Note

Applicable to U.S.A.
You can charge your mobile device wirelessly us- Operation of the Audi phone box is subject to
ing the Audi phone box. the following requirements of the Federal
Communications Commission:
Your mobile device must meet the Qi standard. —This is a CONSUMER device.
— BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
> Make sure that the wireless charging function is VICE with your wireless provider and have
switched on: your provider’s consent. Most wireless pro-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: viders consent to the use of signal boosters.
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and Some providers may not consent to the use
mobile device charging. of this device on their network. If you are
> Switch the Mobile device wireless charging unsure, contact your service provider.
function on. — You MUST operate this device with approved
> To charge your mobile device wirelessly, lay it antennas and cables as specified by the
on the @ symbol @ © page 188, fig. 146 in the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed
center of the Audi phone box with the display at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person.
facing up.
— You MUST cease operating this device im-
mediately if requested by the FCC or a li-
ZA\ WARNING censed wireless service provider.
— The mobile device may become hot during — WARNING: E911 location information may
wireless charging. Pay attention to the tem- not be provided or may be inaccurate for
perature of your mobile device and be care- calls served by using this device.
ful when removing it from the Audi phone
box. @) Note
— An alternating magnetic field is used for Applicable to Canada
wireless charging. Maintain a minimum dis- In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,
tance of approximately 2.4 in (6 cm) to the such as an Audi Phone Box, is subject to the
Audi phone box charging plate. The thresh- following requirements of the Innovation,
olds for prolonged exposure at this distance Science and Economic Development Canada
comply with ICNIRP1998. Therefore, inter- (ISED):
actions such as irritation of sensory organs, —This is a CONSUMER device.
malfunctions of active implants (such as — BEFORE USE, you MUST meet all require-
pacemakers, infusion pumps, or neurosti- ments set out in CPC-2-1-05.
mulators) or effects on passive implants — You MUST operate this device with approved
(such as prosthetic limbs) is highly unlikely.
antennas and cables as specified by the
If you have an implant, consult a medical manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOT be in-
specialist if you have any questions. You can stalled within 20 cm of any person.
also switch the function for wireless charg-
— You MUST cease operating this device im-
ing in the Audi phone box on and off. You
mediately if requested by ISED or a licensed
can continue to charge your mobile device
wireless service provider.
using a cable connection.
— WARNING: £911 location information may
not be provided or may be inaccurate for
calls served by using this device.
80B012721BA
(i) Tips
—The maximum charging output is 5 W.
189
Telephone
— The charging time and temperature will vary Using the telephone
depending on the mobile device being used.
— At the time of printing this manual, the Accessing the telephone functions
CPC-2-1-05 was available at the following
web page http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/
smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf08942.html cd
Mobile device reminder signal ers.

ee Calltist
= far P;)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box/Audi phone box light bet
Peter
When the device reminder signal is switched on, Contacts eee re
you will be notified that your mobile device is still
Fig. 147 Center display: selection menu
in the Audi phone box when you leave the vehicle.
Requirement: your mobile device must be located Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
in the Audi phone box (if Qi-capable) or connect- to the MMI.
ed to the Audi music interface with a USB adapt- > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
er, and the Audi smartphone interface must be PHONE.
active or your iPhone must be connected to the
MMI via Bluetooth and charging using a USB The following phone functions will be available:
adapter connected to the Audi music interface. @ Search
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: @ Calllist ......0.0.0.0.0.0.0000. 190
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and @® Favorites .................000. 191
mobile device charging. a)? Contacts «5 x sews s x ww sees cs 191
©® Voicemail .................... 192
The following settings may be available, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment:
© Dial phone number ............ 192
@ Switch telephones ............. 194
— Signal tone
— Off Managing call lists
Spoken cue
this setting is switched on at the factory. DP | catttist
Smith, John “—@
Mobile device notes: reminder, charge level eran.
CN Tee ed)
When this function is switched on, the charge Crem aL eoEy |
PILE laa ea
status of your mobile device is displayed. You will Mobile 001712345678
also be reminded not to forget your mobile de- 001718765432 (1)
vice when leaving the vehicle.

Fig. 148 Center display: call list
Opening call lists using the MMI

PHONE > Call list.
Opening call lists using the multifunction

steering wheel
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab
> ) button > Call list.
190
Telephone
Possible call list symbols: > Press Store as favorite in the options
Missed calls => page 190.
QOOCOLO
Dialed numbers Deleting favorites
Accepted calls
> Press We > page 192 in the business card, or
Editing a telephone number
> Select: Favorites > Z > one or multiple favor-
Display business card ........... 192 ites or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Number of interactions with a con-
tact @) Tips
If more than one interaction with a contact or The favorites can only be edited via the MMI.
number has taken place, the last one is displayed
in the form of an arrow (a), Q), or @). Managing the directory
Press and hold a contact or a phone number in Applies to: vehicles with telephone
the list until the Options menu appears. You can manage up to four directories in the
Depending on your mobile device, the following MMI.
options may be available: Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
— Store as favorite > page 191. to the MMI.
— Send text message > page 194.
— Send e-mail > page 195. Opening the directory
Edit number
PHONE > Contacts.
Edit a phone number before dialing it.
The contacts will be displayed. You can change
Show history the sort order > page 194, Sort order.
Requirement: you must have had more than one Deleting imported contacts
interaction with a contact.
Requirement: you must have imported at least
All interactions with a contact or a number are one contact > page 194.
displayed.
> Select: Contacts > Z > one or more text mes-
sages > Delete > (Done). The imported contacts
Managing favorites are deleted.
Directory options
You can store contacts for all connected mobile
devices as shortcuts in the favorites list. > Press and hold a contact in the directory until
the Options menu appears.
Selecting favorites using the MMI
Depending on your mobile device, the following
options may be available:
PHONE > Favorites.
— Store as favorite > page 191
Opening favorites using the multifunction
steering wheel — Send contact: you can select Text message or
E-mail > page 194.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab — Send text message > page 194.
> EE] button > Favorites.
— Send e-mail > page 195.
Storing favorites
80B012721BA
> Press YY > page 192 in the business card, or
191
Telephone
Requirement: there must be no voicemail num-

@ Tips
ber stored.
— Pay attention to any synchronization > Entering the voicemail number: enter the de-
prompts on your mobile device when down- sired number. Press OK.
loading contacts.
— The contacts from the mobile device may Requirement: a voicemail number must be stor-
not be transferred in alphabetical order. If ed.
there are too many entries, contacts with > Dialing the voicemail number: press Voice-
different first letters may be missing in the mail. The call begins immediately.
MMI.
— Only the contacts from the active connected G) Tips
mobile device are displayed. This service must be set up and activated by
— The contacts in the local MMI memory are the mobile phone service provider.
always visible and can be accessed by other
users. Dialing a telephone number
— After switching off the ignition and exiting Applies to: vehicles with telephone
the vehicle, the mobile device directory will
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
be loaded when the MMI is started again if
have the following options for dialing a phone
the mobile device is within range and the
number:
Bluetooth function is switched on in the mo-
bile device and the MMI. — Using text input in the MMI > page 24.
— Only the contacts in the local MMI memory — Using voice operation > page 27.
can be deleted.
Call options
Opening business cards Applies to: vehicles with telephone
> To accept or end a call, press the @ button on
The business card shows you details about a con- the multifunction steering wheel. Operating
tact. => page 13 and > page 30.
> To open a business card, press ona contact in Depending on your mobile device, the following
the directory, or options may be available in the MMI when there
> Press © in the call list ©) > page 190, fig. 148. is an incoming call:
Possible options in the business card: — Answer
> Call: press on a phone number.
— Decline
> Storing a favorite: press Wy.
— Message
> Deleting a favorite: press Ww.
> Sending a text message: press {1 If you exit the vehicle during a phone call, the
> Starting navigation: press on an address. Bluetooth connection will be disconnected. De-
> Sending an e-mail: press on an e-mail address. pending on your mobile device, phone calls in
> Send contact: you can select Text message or progress may be automatically transferred from
E-mail > page 194. the MMI to your mobile device.
Listening to voicemail
(i) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with telephone The radio or media playback is muted during a
phone call.
PHONE > Voicemail.
192
Telephone
During a phone call Transfer call to mobile device

Applies to: vehicles with telephone Transfer the current call to your mobile device or
Depending on your mobile device and the type of Bluetooth headset*.
connection, the following options may be availa- Switch to hands-free
ble during a call:
Transfer the current call from your mobile device
— End call... to the MMI.
— Mute
Add call
Sending a tone sequence
You can start a new call. The current call will be
Press Numbers. You can enter tone sequences put on hold.
(DTMF) and send them to the other party on the
call. Remove conference member
You can remove conference call members individ-
Hold
ually when a conference call is active.
Puts the current call on hold. To resume the call,
press Resume. Microph. input
You can adjust the input level of the microphone
Answering an incoming call
using the slider.
One of these options will be available, depending
on the mobile phone service provider: G) Tips
— Answer: the current phone call will be put on The call waiting function must be activated in
hold. The incoming call will be answered. your mobile device to be alerted about an in-
— Replace: the active call will be replaced with coming call during an active call.
the incoming call.
Declining an incoming call Making an emergency call

If you select Decline, the incoming call will be de-
clined. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI.
Conference
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog-
PHONE > Dial number > the local emergency
ress.
call number (for example, 911) > Dial.
Depending on your mobile phone service provid-
er, you can add a call on hold and up to five active ZX WARNING
callers to a conference call. — Because your phone works with radio sig-
Swap call nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-
der all circumstances. Do not rely on only
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog-
your phone when it comes to essential com-
ress. munication (such as during a medical emer-
You can alternate between two phone calls. gency).
— Always follow the instructions given by the
Additional call options emergency personnel during an emergency
Press More. call and only end the call when they instruct
you to do so.
80B012721BA
Depending on the mobile device being used and

the type of connection, the following options
may be available:
193
Telephone
Settings Hide grayed-out contacts

When this function is switched on, contacts that
Phone settings
have no phone numbers stored for them will be
hidden.
PHONE > ©}. Sort order
You can sort the contacts by Last name or First
The following options may be possible, depend-
name.
ing on your mobile device:
Download contacts
— Decline with text message
— Edit voicemail number Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI.
Switching between two mobile devices
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man-
Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
ually download your mobile device contacts. De-
nected to the MMI. pending on the mobile device, you may need to
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connec-
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch tion to update the contacts.
the phone by pressing the button.
Importing contacts
Ringtone and volume settings Requirement: a USB storage device must be con-
— Ringtone and message volume: you can adjust nected to the Audi music interface > page 226.
the volume using the slider. The USB storage device contains contacts in the
— Ringtone: select a ringtone from the list. vCard format (.vcf). They must not be located in
— Microphone input level: you can adjust the in- sub-folders.
put level of the microphone using the slider. Applies to MMI: Select: Import contacts > Search
Data module serial number (IMEI) for import data > USB device 1/USB device 2 >
Applies to: vehicles with data module desired contacts or Select all contacts > Start
import.
The serial number (IMEI) will be displayed.
Gi) Tips
Directory settings
— The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
cal MMI memory.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — There should be no other files or folders on
PHONE > Contacts > (>. the storage medium containing the contacts
to be imported.
Switching between two mobile devices
— Apple devices and MTP devices (such as
Requirement: telephone 1 and telephone 2 must smartphones) are not recognized as USB
be connected. storage devices.
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail-

able mobile device is displayed. You can switch Messages
the phone by pressing the button. Nam tle[
The directory for the selected phone will be dis- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
played.
Requirement: your mobile device must be con-
nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access
Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
194
Telephone

MESSAGES > (©) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail Applies to: vehicles with telephone
(phone 2)*.
Requirement: your mobile device must be con-
The following functions are available: nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access
Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
— New text message*
— Inbox > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Sent MESSAGES > (:=) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail
— Outbox*
(phone 2)*.
— Drafts* The following functions are available:
— Deleted
— New e-mail
User defined*
— Inbox
If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied — Sent
to your mobile device. — Outbox
— Drafts*
Message options
— Deleted*
Press ona text message.
User defined*
Depending on the country, the following options
If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied
may be available:
to your mobile device.
— Read out
— Reply Message options
— Forward
Press on an e-mail.
— More
Depending on the country, the following options
To switch between messages, press < or >. may be available:
Press More. Depending on your mobile device — Read out
and the selected mailbox, additional options may — Reply
be available: — Reply to all
— Call — Forward
— Forward — More
— Navigate
To switch between messages, press < or >.
— Extract numbers
— Send again Press More. Depending on your mobile device
and the selected mailbox, additional options may
Settings be available:
Press 2}. — Call
— Forward
New text message notification
— Extract e-mail
When the function is switched on, an envelope M — Navigate
in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is — Extract numbers
a new text message. — Show all recipients
— Send again
G) Tips
Settings
80B012721BA
Only new received messages may be displayed

depending on your mobile device. Press ©}.
195
Telephone
New e-mail notification

C@) Note
When the function is switched on, an envelope M
Read the information about Audi connect, and
in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is
a new e-mail.
=> page 197.
Do It Yourself
The information that follows lists some trouble-

shooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.
Problem Solution
Pairing the mobile device to the Make sure the requirements for connecting a mobile phone have
MMI failed. been met > page 186, or
make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establishing
a connection on your mobile phone. If necessary, repeat the pair-
ing process > page 186.
After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names.
no contacts have been loaded in- Avoid using contact groups on your mobile device.
to the MMI. Check for prompts on your mobile device when connecting via
Bluetooth.
Certain telephone functions are The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service pro-
grayed out or not available. vider and the mobile device you are using.
Some telephone functions may Check if the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone are limited or
be switched off or not available, individual Bluetooth settings are deactivated. This may be the
even though the mobile device is case with business cell phones.
supported.
The MESSAGES menu is not avail- Make sure your mobile device has an option to show messages op-
able. tion and that it is enabled.
Wireless cell phone charging is Check if wireless charging with the Audi phone box is switched on.
not working or is interrupted. Check if your mobile device is Qi-capable.
Make sure your mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi
phone box > page 188 and that there are no objects located be-
tween the phone box and the phone.
196
Audi connect
Audi connect rate data plan is strongly recommended. For

more information, contact your cell phone
General information service provider or refer to the owner's man-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect ual for your Wi-Fi device.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — You are responsible for all precautions taken
for data protection, anti-virus protection,
ment, the following functions may be available:
and protection against loss of data on mo-
— Audi connect Infotainment bile devices that are used, for example, to
— Audi connect vehicle control access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
ZA WARNING — In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only use the coverage range of the respective cell
Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot phone service provider, some functions
only if the traffic situation permits it. Read and/or services may not be available, it may
and follow the guidelines provided in not be possible to send or receive data, or
= page 20, Traffic safety information. functionality may be limited.
— It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
devices and other similar devices when the @) Tips
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose — The availability of services depends on the
objects, they could be thrown around the in- subscription.
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri- — Audi merely provides access to third party
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se- services through the MMI and does not as-
curely while driving. Also read the warnings sume any responsibility for the content and
in the chapter > page 71. availability of these services.
— Use of the most up-to-date mobile network
() Note standard is not available in every country.
— The connection costs of Audi connect Info- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
tainment services are included in the price thorized Audi Service Facility or your cell
of Audi connect Infotainment during the phone service provider for additional infor-
subscription period with some exceptions. mation.
Please note that there may be additional — Availability, scope, providers, screen display,
charges when using some services. For ex- and costs of services may vary depending on
ample, this applies to online radio/ the country, model, model year, end device
podcasts, additional online data, or for In- and rates.
ternet connections and services that use the — All services can be modified, activated/deac-
Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the country, tivated, renamed, and enhanced without
data plans may need to be purchased for further notification.
these Internet connections and services
= page 201. For additional information, see Audi connect
my.audi.com.
Infotainment
— In certain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data
connection may be established as a replace-
ment for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
This feature depends on the configuration
With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
This could result in fees depending on your
80B012721BA
cell phone service provider, especially if you An Internet connection is required to use Audi
are using this feature while abroad. A flat connect Infotainment. Depending on the country >
197
Audi connect
and vehicle equipment, the Internet connection > Follow any additional system prompts on your
may be established using an embedded SIM card Wi-Fi device if necessary.
(eSIM).
Your device is successfully connected with the
ZA WARNING MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Always follow the information found in > A\

Z\ WARNING
in General information on page 197.
Always follow the information found in > AV
@) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in C) Note
General information on page 197.
Always follow the information found in © in
Embedded SIM card
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an
embedded SIM card
@ Tips
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain-
ment services is made through an embedded SIM
card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle.
You can use the Audi connect Infotainment serv-
Audi connect
ices immediately. Infotainment services
@) Note
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Always follow the information found in >@ in
General information on page 197. Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
count at my.audi.com before using them for the
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot
first time.
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
You can connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices (such G) Tips

as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If —A myAudi user must be logged in for some
the MMI is connected to the Internet Audi connect Infotainment services.
= page 197, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also — Some Audi connect Infotainment services
use the MMI’s Internet connection. must be activated at my.audi.com.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. A — Depending on the country, you may be able
data plan must be available > page 201. to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
— For detailed information on configuration,
visit my.audi.com.
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot.
Services
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi > Wi-
Fi hotspot settings. The access data for the Wi- Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
Fi hotspot is displayed. Switch on the visibility ment, the following services may be available:
of the Wi-Fi hotspot if necessary.
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de- Weather information
Applies to: MMI
vice and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
using the authentication data that is shown. > Press WEATHER on the home screen.
198
Audi connect
Editing settings: Select: WEATHER > Ga. Functions on demand

> To display the weather for a location, press ona
location in the list. Displaying purchased functions
> To display the weather for your current loca- Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
tion, press on the location that is marked with Depending on the country and vehicle equip-
the crosshairs. ment, you can purchase functions on demand
Requirement: route guidance must be active. through a myAudi account in the myAudi app at
> To display the weather at your destination, any time.
press on the location that is marked with the The following options are available for displaying
flag FB. purchased functions in the vehicle.
Adding a location: select: WEATHER > G4 > Ina > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
new city > a location. PURCHASES.
Removing a location: select: WEATHER > 44 > Z
> one or more locations or Select all > Delete. @ Tips
— Equipment installed at the factory may be
Online news
displayed as purchased functions.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — The availability of functions in the myAudi
NEWS. app varies depending on the country. For
Access to the calendar additional information, visit my.audi.com.
— At the time this manual was printed, func-
Requirement: the myAudi app must be installed tions on demand was a planned function.
and open on your mobile device. Access to your Functions on demand is not available in your
calendar must be enabled on your mobile device. vehicle.
You must be logged into the myAudi app with
your myAudi login data and you must have select-
Messages
ed your vehicle. The Wi-Fi function on your mo-
Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
bile device and the MMI must be enabled and
your mobile device must be paired to the MMI Ifa message about a function that requires a li-
Wi-Fi hotspot > page 200, Wi-Fi. cense is displayed, the function is no longer avail-
able. Check the MMI Purchases menu to see if
You can display the your mobile device calendar
you have a license for this function or if the Li-
on the MMI.
cense has expired. Purchase the function if neces-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: sary using functions on demand.
CALENDAR.
Audi connect vehicle
Z\ WARNING control services
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
@) Note Using Audi connect vehicle control services, you

Always follow the information found in >@ in can perform tasks such as viewing data about
General information on page 197. your vehicle or control vehicle functions remote-
ly.
You can view and use services available for your

80B012721BA
vehicle at my.audi.com or through the myAudi

app.
199
Audi connect
Information about the services and the corre- Settings

sponding app was accurate at the time this man-
ual was printed. The scope of services depends
on the country and equipment. There may be Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
changes over the service life of the vehicle. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ZA WARNING > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
— Always follow the information found in > AA
in General information on page 197. Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
— Driver messages, text messages, and illumi- ment, the following functions may be available:
nated warning and indicator lights in the ve-
hicle always take priority over information Wi-Fi
from the Audi connect services. The infor- When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
mation displayed by the Audi connect serv- Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be con-
ices should not cause you to take safety nected to the hotspot.
risks. This can result in the vehicle breaking
down in traffic and to serious injuries or ac- Wi-Fi hotspot settings
cidents. The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your
Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the fol-
G) Tips lowing information if needed.
— Accessing specific data or controlling func- — Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi hot-
tions remotely depends on the charge level spot.
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these — Password: an initial password was set at the
functions only have limited availability after factory in the MMI. Audi recommends changing
switching off the ignition. the initial password. Only use secure passwords
— An eSIM card establishes the Internet con- that conform to the general guidelines for se-
nection for Audi connect vehicle control cure passwords. For more information, refer to
services. The costs for this are included in reputable and current sources on password se-
the price of Audi connect vehicle control curity.
services. The cell phone network, for exam-
ple, must be available to use these services. Allow data connection through Wi-Fi
When the function is switched on, mobile devices
can use the Internet connection through the Wi-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control Fi hotspot. A data plan is needed to do this.
Create a myAudi account by registering in the

myAudi app or at my.audi.com, depending on
ZA\ WARNING
your country. Always follow the information found in > A\
>» Set the key user > page 31.
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device @) Note
and log in with your access information.
@ Tips
Some services require you to enter a 4-digit
PIN that you set up during registration.
200
Audi connect
Data plans!)
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
Data plans must be purchased in order to use cer- to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
tain services >(@) in General information on — Depending on the country, there may be re-
page 197. strictions on the use of data plans (such as
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com. mobile phone service providers) when driv-
ing in other countries.
— If selling your vehicle, you should delete the
vehicle from the customer portal for the cell
phone service provider to avoid being charg-
ed for additional purchases.

Do It Yourself

ment.
Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or
ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using
tainment services are grayed out or | them for the first time. You can find detailed information online
not available. at my.audi.com.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 200.
connect through Wi-Fi. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.
80B012721BA
D_ Not available in every market.
201
Emergency call
Emergency call work coverage area for the mobile phone service
provider selected by Audi.
Overview
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function @ Tips
An emergency call is a combination of data trans- — The emergency call function cannot be deac-
mission and a phone call. The data transmission tivated in the Infotainment system settings.
from your vehicle forwards important informa- — The availability of the TPS emergency call is
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the limited to certain times.
emergency call center. —The costs for call and data connections for
TPS emergency calls is included in the price
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
of the services.
ment, the following functions may be available:
With the emergency call, you can call for help in Functions
dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
this function when emergency help is needed
=> page 202. A TPS emergency call can be made manually or
automatically > page 202.
— Audi connect emergency call (TPS emergency
call). This eCall system uses emergency call
centers operated by third party providers. Making an emergency call
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
With online roadside assistance, you can request
assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor acci-
dent > page 203.
A WARNING
In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
the coverage range of the respective cell
phone service provider, some functions and/or
i l
services may not be available, it may not be
possible to send or receive data, or functional-
ity may be limited. Fig. 149 Front headliner: cover for the emergency call but-
ton
iG) Tips Manual emergency call

To see which data can be transmitted, visit
your Audi country or sales region website at
www.audi.com. > Tap the cover (J) to open it.
> Press and hold the emergency call button until
Emergency call the LED @) blinks. The emergency call will be
made.
> If the emergency call button is pressed by mis-
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function take, then press it again immediately and hold
it until the LED stays on. The emergency call
The services are provided through a SIM card in-
will be canceled.
stalled in the vehicle. Services are provided as-
suming that the cell phone network required for Automatic emergency call
the installed SIM card is functioning and availa-
The vehicle electrical system initiates an auto-
ble for use. The services made availably by Audi
matic emergency call under certain circumstan-
are only available within the mobile phone net-
ces, for example if an airbag deploys. The LEDin >
202
Emergency call
the emergency call button (2) will blink. The Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
emergency call will be made. The emergency call malfunction corrected.
cannot be canceled.
LED status
Online roadside
assistance
— Green - The emergency call function is availa-
ble.
— Red - There is a malfunction in the emergency Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer

An online roadside assistance call )) is a combina-
or authorized Audi Service Facility. Note the
tion of data transmission and a phone call. The
messages about the availability of the emer-
data transmission from your vehicle forwards im-
gency function > page 203.
portant information to the Audi service center,
— Off - The emergency call function is not availa-
such as the vehicle and position data.
ble, perhaps because no network is available.
Warnings Cee Te Re tee cary

Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
If there is a critical system failure in the emer-
gency call systems, the vehicle occupants will re-
RAZ-0443
ceive the following warning: see > page 203, LED
status and > page 203, Messages.
@) Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due toa
poor connection, then the system automati-
cally tries to connect again.
Messages Fig. 150 Front headliner: online roadside assistance but-

ton
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
& Emergency call function: malfunction! Lim- Calling online roadside assistance
ited availability. Please contact Service
> Press the button (@). The LED in the button
If this indicator light turns on and this message turns red. The online roadside assistance call
appears, the emergency call function is restrict- will be made.
ed. For example, you cannot call the emergency > If you press the button () by mistake, then
call center, but data may still be transmitted un- press it again.
der certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized
Audi incident assistance
mediately to have the malfunction corrected. A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle
electrical system. You are able to select between
&S Emergency call function: malfunction! Func-
online roadside assistance and an emergency call
tion unavailable. Please contact Service
in the MMI. >
If this indicator light turns on and this message
appears, you cannot make an emergency call.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
80B012721BA
)) The availability of the services offered depends on the

country and may change in the future.
203
Emergency call
If the roadside assistance call is canceled due

to a poor connection, then the call must be
made again.
204
Navigation
Navigation the traffic regulations that are applicable in

the country where you are operating the ve-
Opening navigation hicle. In the event that the driving directions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
contradict traffic regulations, always follow
the traffic regulations applicable in the
country where you are operating the vehicle
to reduce the risk of an accident.
() Note
Fig. 151 Route guidance not started =@ in General information on page 197.
The navigation system directs you to your desti- (i) Tips

nation, around traffic incidents, and on alterna-
— Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna
tive routes, if desired.
or trees and large buildings can impair sat-
Opening navigation ellite reception and affect the system's abil-
ity to determine the vehicle position. Sever-
» Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the
al deactivated or malfunctioning satellites
home screen.
can also interrupt GPS reception and affect
After accessing the navigation for the first time, the system's ability to determine the vehicle
the map is displayed. position.
— Because street names sometimes change,
Opening navigation using the multifunction
steering wheel the names stored in the MMI may in rare
cases differ from the actual street name.
> Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
the Navigation tab in the instrument cluster. Depending on the selected function, opera-
> To display navigation when route guidance has tion through the center display may be re-
started, select in the instrument cluster: the quired.
button > Map.
— Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Info-
The following functions are available in the MMI: tainment: Depending on the country and ve-
hicle equipment, additional services may be
@ Open the Select destination menu
available.
=> page 207, fig. 152.
— An additional indicator will appear in the
@ Open the intelligent search > page 206.
head-up display.
@ Switch between the map and the menu:
press A repeatedly until the desired function
is displayed.
myAudi navigation
You can find additional information about the
MMI navigation works seamlessly with the myAu-
map update at > page 210, Map operation.
di app.
ZA WARNING Your destinations (favorites, last destinations)
— The demands of traffic require your full at- are synchronized through your myAudi account.
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20, All important destinations can be displayed in
Traffic safety information. the vehicle and in the myAudi app.
80B012721BA
— The route calculated by the navigation sys-

tem is a driving recommendation. Follow
205
Navigation
To load destinations in the vehicle automatically, > To display all categories and search for a POI,
logging into the vehicle with a myAudi user is select: |---| > a category (such as restaurants) >
recommended © page 31. a POI.
myAudi navigation functions: Change search area
— You can send destinations and routes from the Requirement: route guidance must be active.
myAudi app to the vehicle > page 208. >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Active route guidance in the myAudi app can be NAVIGATION > &.
continued in the MMI. > To change the search area, press (a) / 29 /Pre-
— Depending on the situation, it may be possible peatedly until the desired search area is select-
to continue active route guidance from the MMI ed.
in the myAudi app to continue navigating to the
destination after leaving the vehicle. Online search)
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online search
Entering a destination You can use the results from a search engine pro-
vider to find a navigation destination.
Intelligent search for navigation
CEC Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 197, Audi connect.
Using the intelligent search, you can enter the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
data for a navigation destination in any order all NAVIGATION > © >G.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input
at once (for example, 5th Avenue New York).
Likewise, you can search for points of interest, field.
contacts, previous destinations, or favorites in or-
> The search engine provider shows suggestions
£ to narrow down the search.
der to navigate to the desired destination.
> Press on suggestions until the desired destina-
Opening a menu tion appears in the results list. If necessary, use
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: one finger to swipe upward or downward until
NAVIGATION > 2. the suggestions £ or destinations 9 appear.
> Press on the desired destination 9. The Details
Intelligent search menu will be displayed.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input » Press Start.
field. See > page 24, Text input. Route guidance will be activated and the map will
>» Press on the desired destination in the results be displayed > page 209, fig. 154.
list. The Details menu will be displayed.
> Press Start. Route guidance will be activated G) Tips
and the map will be displayed > page 209,
— The MMI input suggestions depend on the
fig. 154.
last navigated destinations.
Online Points of Interest — The navigation system always searches for
the fastest route. You can have alternative
> Searching for points of interest: enter the
routes displayed if necessary > page 211.
name of a POI.
> Select: a symbol for a POI category (such as — If the destination cannot be found, it may
not be stored in the navigation database. >
i >a POI, or
)) Audi provides access to services from third party provid-

ers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because
that depends on the third party provider.
206
Navigation
Check the spelling of the term that was Accessing previous destinations
searched or check the search area > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
=> page 206.
NAVIGATION > (8) > Last destinations > select
— Distances to points of interest are displayed a destination > Start.
as a straight-line distance from your current > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
location. The actual distance from your cur- in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
rent location to the point of interest is up- button > Last destinations > a destination.
dated automatically. The list of points of in-
terest that were found is not resorted when Deleting previous destinations
this happens. >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (85) > Last destinations > Z >
Select destination select one or more entries or Select all > Delete
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system > (Done).
Gi) Tips
RAX-0146
| perce cae a
A
D || w
Last
9
Cea a
The last route will be automatically deleted
from the list if you start a new route guidance
| Cesare Pics
after canceling the route.
Setting a favorite as the destination

Fig. 152 Menu: select destination Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Opening a menu You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

Applies to: MMI ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen. ance using the home address or business address
> If the map is displayed, press 88 @) > page 205, function.
fig. 151. Requirement: a favorite must be stored
=>page 211.
The following functions are available > fig. 152:
@ Last destinations e 207 > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Q), FaVOrites was scenes
sy ones es eras 207 NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Favorites > select a desti-
nation > Start.
@ Contacts ...................., 207
@ Received destns. & routes ....... 208
in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
button > Favorites > a destination.
Loading previous destinations
SY lad dled ee Cully
Your last destinations and routes can be loaded Applies to: vehicles with MMI and navigation system
directly as a navigation destination.

You can navigate directly to contacts.
As soon as you start route guidance, the destina-
Requirement: a contact must have an address
tion is automatically saved in the last destina-
stored.
tions. Your previous destinations are marked with
the © symbol. » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (5) > Contacts > a contact.
If you use myAudi navigation, your previous des-
> Press on the address for a contact.
80B012721BA
tinations will be synchronized with your myAudi

> Press on a suggested address. The Details
account > page 205.
menu will be displayed.
> Press Start.
207
Navigation
@ Map preview: to zoom in on the map pre-

@) Tips
view, press on the map.
— Ifa contact is grayed out, there is no ad-
@ Route criteria: see > page 216.
dress stored for that contact.
® More: additional functions.
— Navigation to geographic coordinates for a
@ Weather: Requirement: the MMI must be
contact is not possible.
connected to the Internet > page 197, Audi
connect. Also see > page 198.
Loading received destinations and routes
© Applies to: MMI and telephone
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
nect Infotainment Call: Requirement: a mobile device must be
connected to the MMI > page 186. You will
You can search for destinations or routes in the
make a direct call to the phone number that
myAudi app and send to the vehicle.
is stored for the destination.
Requirement: the MMI and the mobile device © Start: starts navigation to the displayed des-
must be connected to the Internet > page 197, tination directly. The map will be displayed
Audi connect. You must have the myAudi app in- => page 210, Map operation.
stalled on your mobile device. @) Parking: press Parking to search for a park-
> Send a destination or route in the myAudi app ing space at the destination. You can use the
to the vehicle. parking space as the destination or stopover.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Details: Requirement: the MMI must be con-
NAVIGATION > (5) > Received destns. & nected to the Internet > page 197, Audi con-
routes. nect.
> Make sure you are logged into the vehicle and ©) Display of distance/driving time to the des-
the myAudi app with the same myAudi account. tination
The received destination and routes will be @® Weather at the destination: Requirement:
loaded automatically. the MMI must be connected to the Internet
> Navigating to a destination: press on a desti- = page 197, Audi connect.
nation.
> Deleting destinations: select: Z > one or more
Selecting a destination from the map
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
A point on the map can be used as the destina-

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system tion.
Opening the map

eee Applies to: MMI
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.

> If necessary, press A to display the map.
Adjusting the scale

ZeScu &
ene Orn rae
> Select: 9/ > select a scale.
Fig. 153 Details
Marking the destination
After you have selected a destination, the details > Press and hold a point on the map until a mark-
will be displayed. Route guidance is will not be ing appears or the address for the selected des-
active yet. tination is shown.
The functions depend on the vehicle equipment

and the selected destination.
208
Navigation
Selecting map content (such as POIs) as the Map

destination
Map functions
Requirement: map content must be displayed
=>page 215.
> Press on map content on the map (for example,

ii).
Selecting the destination
> Select: 4 > Start.
Route guidance will be activated and the map will

be displayed > page 209, fig. 154.
eee)
Pn ae
ST) ee mee EL
You can enter additional destinations during ac-

tive route guidance.
Entering a stopover ie ie [Mena

Fig. 155 Marked map object
Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Enter a destination > page 206. Opening the map

Applies to: MMI
Displaying stopovers or the route plan
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
All destinations are listed in the route plan. > If necessary, press /\ to display the map.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map
The following list gives an overview of the infor-
=> page 209, fig. 154.
mation displayed on the map. Press on any func-
Editing stopovers tion (for example, alternative routes) to show ad-
ditional options.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map
=> page 209, fig. 154. Select destination > page 207
OO
> Adding a stopover: Select: Add destination > Enter a destination using intelligent search
select a destination > Add to route. => page 206
> Moving a stopover: press Z. Touch the > sym- Cancel route guidance > page 209
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Current route
COOH
Press Done.
Request spoken prompt
> Deleting a stopover: Select: Z > one or more
Alternative routes > page 211
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Display active destinations, stopovers, or
route plan > page 209. The distance to the
Stopping route guidance
destination including the calculated arrival
time is displayed.
Requirement: route guidance must be active and Online traffic information > page 214
©®
the map must be displayed. Altitude

> Applies to: MMI: Press BX 2 page 209, fig. 154.
80B012721BA

button > Cancel route guidance.
209
Navigation
@) Displays the maximum permitted speed): Symbol Description

within city limits, on expressways, and on
* Favorites > page 211
highways.
x Previous destinations display
Current vehicle position
O88
Route information > page 216 Traffic information

Name of the street on which you are current- — Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents
ly driving ahead that are on your route.
Start route guidance for a marked destina- — Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
®
tion > page 208, Selecting a destination that are not on your route.
from the map — All traffic incidents will display in color when
Display details for the destination route guidance is inactive.
©
=> page 208 — Warning symbols with arrow: traffic incident

Intelligent search nearby that you have been routed around, for example
OO
Adjust the map orientation. See also @.

=>page 215
Navigation settings > page 215 Map operation
©®

Adjust the scale. Set scale. Or: press the
magnifying glass to switch automatic zoom You can operate the map > page 209, fig. 154
=> page 215 on or off directly on the map. The with the movements described in the following
® symbol appears when this function is information.
switched on.
Marked destination. See > page 208, Select- Moving the map
®
ing a destination from the map > Drag your finger across the map in the desired
Map contents (points of interest, favorites). direction.
®
When there are multiple map contents in the

Moving the map quickly
immediate vicinity, the symbols are shown
stacked on the map. To display a list of indi- > Swipe your finger across the map in the desired
vidual symbols, press #2; > fig. 155. Press on direction and lift your finger off the map.
a POI in the list.
Zooming in on the map
Center the map to the current vehicle posi-
tion >» Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
gers apart, or
Traffic incidents and display of estimated
> Double-tap on the map with one finger.
losses of time on the route.
— Green: traffic is flowing freely. Zooming out on the map
— Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
— Red: traffic jam or traffic obstructions.
gers together, or
Additional possible symbols on the map > Double-tap on the map with two fingers.
Symbol Description Rotating the map

a Home address © page 211, Favor- > Rotate the map using two fingers.
ites
Tilting the map
Business address > page 211, Fa-
vorites > Drag upward or downward with two fingers. >
2) Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit

display.
210
Navigation
@) Tips Alternative routes

Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu. 3
S|
ny
&<
te guidance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual

cockpit
Fig. 157 Display of alternative routes in the overview map
Opening alternative routes

Requirement: route guidance must be started
= page 206 and the map must be displayed
=> page 210.
> Press on (7 in the side menu on the map

=> page 209, fig. 154.
Fig. 156 Instrument cluster: default view: turning maneu-
ver when route guidance has started @ Current route
The distance to the destination and the calculat-
Requirement: route guidance must be on
ed arrival time will be displayed for the current
=> page 206.
route.
The following information will be displayed in the
driver information system, if available:
@ Alternative route
The difference in travel time compared to the se-
@ Current vehicle position
lected route will be displayed.
@A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the Displaying alternative routes in the
foreground
shorter the distance is until the turn. If there is
no upcoming turn immediately ahead, the dis- > Press @ in the corresponding information win-
tance to the destination or stopover, the calculat- dow, or
ed arrival time, and a direction arrow for the up- > Press and hold the information window for the
coming maneuver will be displayed in the right corresponding alternative route (for example,
speedometer. If there is no upcoming maneuver, @° fig. 157).
the distance to the next maneuver will be dis-
Select route
played.
> Press on the information window for the corre-
@® Lane recommendation
sponding route (for example @) 9fig. 157).
Additional functions
Favorites
You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
80B012721BA
ance using the home address or business address

function.
211
Navigation
Accessing favorites Requirement: the Parking notification must be

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: switched on > page 23, Notification center. The
MMI must be connected to the Internet
NAVIGATION > (8) > Favorites.
=> page 197, Audi connect. Route guidance must
If you use myAudi navigation, your favorites will be active, you must be close to your destination,
be synchronized with your myAudi account and a notification must be displayed or an item
=> page 205. on the map must be marked.
Storing favorites > Press on the notification. Or: press on | on the

> Press YY in the Details menu > page 208, map.
fig. 153. > To navigate to a parking: space, press ona col-
ored marking on the map.
Storing a home address or business address > Select: 2 > Start.
> Press Home address or Business address. Depending on availability, colored markings on
When accessed for the first time, you will be the map indicate the probability of open parking
prompted to set the address. spaces.
> Select: Create now > entera destination > OK.
Color Description
Editing a favorite
Green High probability
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
Orange |Medium probability
played.
Red Low probability
> Setting a favorite as a destination: press ona
favorite.
Satellite map
> Deleting favorites: in the Details menu, press
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and satellite map
¥& © page 208, fig. 153, or select: Z > one or
more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done). You can display the navigation map with satellite
> Moving a favorite: press Z. Touch the sym- images.
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Press Done.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

NAVIGATION > ©} > Map settings > Satellite
— After deleting the home address or business
map).
address, only the address is deleted and the
entry will still be displayed in the favorites. The map view is based on data packets received
— Please note when moving favorites that from the Internet in the form of satellite images,
items 1 and 2 are reserved for the home ad- which are then combined with the roadways from
dress and business address. the > page 209, fig. 154 standard map view.
On-street parking (i) Tips

Applies to: navigation system and on-street parking —The satellite map!) is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The proc-
In supported areas, you can display parking along
ess may take several seconds.
the route.
— When the satellite map display is switched
on ) with the 3D position map type, the >

212
Navigation
display automatically switches to the 2D You can check the status of the download process
map type when driving through tunnels. and the installation in the notification center
— Depending on the Internet connection, the > page 23.
standard map may also be displayed when
the satellite map is switched on )). @) Note
Map update be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> in General information on page 197.

@ Tips
You can update the map data in the MMI witha Because of the high volume of data, Audi rec-
map update. The functions depend on the coun- ommends performing the map update using
try and vehicle equipment. the USB connection > page 214.
— Map update through online map update
> page 213. Map update through the myAudi App
Applies to: vehicles with map update through the myAudi app
— Map update through the myAudi app.
— Import a map update from the USB connection With the map update through the myAudi app,
to your MMI > page 214. you can update the map material in your naviga-
— Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or au- tion system.
thorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in
additional costs. Downloading updates
Requirement: you must have a registered myAudi
Online map update account. Your vehicle must be registered in your
Applies to: vehicles with online map update myAudi account.
Using map update online, you can update the > Install the myAudi app on your mobile device
map material in your navigation system directly and log in with your login information. Use the
from your vehicle. same myAudi account that you use in the vehi-
cle for your myAudi user.
The MMI determines regions based on the vehicle
> Download the map material in the myAudi app.
position. Based on this, update data for these re-
gions are available for your MMI. Installing updates
Start map update > Log in as a myAudi user in the vehicle

Applies to: MMI => page 31.
> Connect your smartphone to the vehicle’s Wi-Fi
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
hotspot > page 198. The MMI detects the map
material on your smartphone. The map update
> To always allow automatic map updates, select will start automatically.
on the home screen: SETTINGS > System main-
You can check the status of the installation in the
tenance > Automatic online map update. The
notification center > page 23.
MMI starts the map update automatically in
the background when new map material is
available.
80B012721BA

213
Navigation
Map update using the USB connection The following information can be displayed
Applies to: vehicle map updates using the USB connection > fig. 158:
With the map update, you can update the map @ Amessage will appear if the MMI calculates a
material in your navigation system. better route for the current route guidance.
The predicted delay takes into account future
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi
changes to the traffic situation on the route.
account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be
Press on an item ina list @ and select the
registered in your myAudi account.
better route. More information can be found
Downloading updates under > page 211.
@ Atraffic message is displayed. The distance
> Download the map update at my.audi.com and
to the hazardous area is calculated from the
store it on a USB flash drive. For additional in-
current vehicle position.
formation, visit my.audi.com.
@® The traffic messages are only shown when
Installing updates route guidance is active. Press ona line to
> Connect the USB flash drive to the Audi music display details about it.
interface > page 226.
> Open the notification in the notification center
G) Tips
on > page 23 and press on the notification. — Particularly critical traffic information, such
> Press Next. The status of the installation is as warnings about wrong-way drivers, is au-
shown in the display. tomatically displayed as a notification.
— Traffic information is not available in some
Traffic information countries.
Introduction
Traffic rerouting
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic
information
By receiving traffic information, your MMI calcu-

[RAX-0180]
a ites lates a better route if available and the possible

The current delay along the route is 30 min.
earch Ogata time saved compared to the current route.
Abetter
route is available. Time saved: 15 min
ocd ec Traffic rerouting
nN
b> Nt)
> Start route guidance.
North
The MMI uses a notification or a note in the traf-
Fig. 158 traffic information overview fic information @ > page 214, fig. 158 to indi-
cate a better route. You can decide which route
Open traffic information you would like to use.
Requirement: the map must be displayed
To select a better route, you have the following
=> page 210.
options:
> Press on the traffic jam symbol in the side > Notification: press F. The better route will be
menu on the map > page 209, fig. 154. used for route guidance, or press on the notifi-
cation. Press on the information window for the
Display traffic report details better route (for example @) > page 211,
> Press on the traffic report @) > fig. 158. fig. 157).
> To display the previous or next traffic report, > Note in the traffic information: press on the
press < or. list entry @ > page 214, fig. 158. Press on the
information window for the better route (for
example 2) > page 211, fig. 157).
214
Navigation
OTN eee late celeurl

ela) Please note that a setting applied to the multi-
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic function steering wheel is only valid for the in-
information strument cluster map.
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic infor- Map settings
mation about congestion, accidents, road con-
struction, and other incidents. Satellite map: see > page 212.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Traffic: you can display current traffic informa-
Internet > page 197, Audi connect. Traffic infor- tion on the map.
mation must be switched on in the MMI — Free flow of traffic
>page 215. — Traffic obstructions
— Traffic information
Traffic information will be displayed on the
standard map > page 209, fig. 154. Map colors
— Automatic: the map display adapts to the light-
Online traffic information is also displayed on the
ing conditions (for example, by changing from
standard map > page 212.
day to night when driving through a tunnel).
G) Tips — Day or Night
— Having the online traffic information func- Map orientation

tion switched on provides the most accurate — 2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the
reports of traffic situations and traffic fore- current vehicle position is displayed. The map is
casting. Your vehicle transmits and process- oriented in the direction of travel or to the
es its anonymous, encrypted position infor- north.
mation at regular intervals to the traffic da- — 3D heading-up map: the current vehicle posi-
ta provider. You can switch off data transfer tion is shown on a three-dimensional map and
at any time > page 305. is aligned to the direction of travel.
— The online traffic information network is — Overview: the entire route from the vehicle po-
not available in all countries, and the cover- sition to the destination or the next stopover is
age is not nationwide. displayed on the map. The map is oriented to
the north.
Settings Automatic zoom
— On: the map scale is adapted automatically de-
You can adjust the navigation system settings in pending on the type of road being traveled (ex-
the instrument cluster and in the MMI display pressway, highway, other roads) so that you al-
separately. The settings depend on the country ways have an optimal overview of the road
and vehicle equipment. ahead. When route guidance is active, the scale
is adjusted automatically for a better detailed
Accessing settings view when there are upcoming maneuvers.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Intersection: when route guidance is active, the
NAVIGATION > ©}. scale is adjusted automatically for a better de-
tailed view when there are upcoming maneu-
Accessing settings using the multifunction vers.
steering wheel — Off
MMI map contents/Map content: you can switch
the display of additional information (such as
80B012721BA
button.
POIs) on the map in the center display on or off. >
215
Navigation
Voice guidance
Voice guidance: you can adjust the navigation
prompts. With the Traffic setting, the MMI will
only give prompts if there are traffic incidents on
your route.
Voice guidance during phone call
Entertainment fader during navigation: the au-

dio playback volume is temporarily lowered when
navigation prompts are active.
Route criteria
You can adjust which route criteria should be al-
lowed or avoided for the route calculation.
HOV/carpool lanes
Highways
Toll roads
Ferries
Route information
When this function is switched on and route
guidance is active, route information
=> page 209, fig. 154 is displayed. The next ma-
neuver will be displayed at the bottom. POIs and
traffic information will also be displayed. Press
route information to display a preview of the next
maneuver on the map. You can switch the follow-
ing information on or off in route information.
— Points of interest along the route
— Traffic incidents
Presentation mode
In presentation mode, the system simulates driv-
ing on the display along the planned route with-
out the vehicle actually moving. You can use
Specify starting point when you would like to
calculate a route starting from a location other
than the current vehicle position, for example.
Simulating route guidance: start route guidance
and press presentation mode.
@ Tips
You can change the volume of navigation an-
nouncements while one is playing > page 30.
216
Radio
Radio be muted since they can no longer be re-

ceived.
General information © Radio ID
Selecting the radio Your radio ID and contact data for your satel-
lite radio provider are displayed.
ey Channel number
e®
ney) os 2 ) % No reception
\) ea
102.9 1)2 FM-HDB The station cannot be received.
(3) OME 4)
aa In addition to the symbols for the usual frequen-
e 106.7 ama my cy bands, the following information may also be
available depending on vehicle equipment:
Symbol | Description
fa RAX-0190)
mee
The station provides information in
eo £0010 0—=@)
the background for an online station
Saray alternative. Online station tracking
ca must be switched on for this
=> page 223.
The station is received through the In-
Fig. 160 Center display: SiriusXM station list ternet.
The system attempts to receive the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the radio
station/podcast through the Internet.
may support the FM, AM, and SiriusXM (satellite
radio) frequency bands. Using the HD Radio re-
G@) Tips
ceiver* also allows you to receive radio stations
on the FM and AM bands in digital format. — Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would
like to receive satellite programming.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the se- — Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth-
lected station list, the following information will er vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
be displayed: affect reception.
@ Station list — Satellite radio* is not available in all re-
Shows the stations that are currently availa- gions.
ble. The station list updates automatically.
@ Stations Adjusting the radio using the MMI
For example, the station name may be dis-
> Applies to: MMI: To set a frequency band, select
played depending on availability.
on the home screen: RADIO > Source a catego-
@ HD Radio technology
ry.
FM/AM stations that can be received by digi-
> Applies to: MMI: To set a station, select on the
tal radio are marked with the HD Radio tech- home screen: RADIO > Source > a category >a
nology symbol H). station/podcast*.
If reception quality declines, the radio auto- > To select a frequency, follow the instructions
matically switches to the analog FM/AM sta- under > page 219, Free text search.
tion depending on availability.
@ Additional audio programs Adjusting the radio using the multifunction
80B012721BA
Digital HD Radio stations may contain multi- Tare maa 118

ple additional audio programs. If you lose re-
ception, the additional audio programs will Requirement: radio mode must be on. >
217
Radio
> Select the radio/media tab in the instrument > To select a station or a source, turn and press
cluster. the left thumbwheel.
> To switch between radio and media, select the
button > Switch to radio/Switch to media. @) Tips
> Turn the left thumbwheel to display the station
Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: De-
list. 5 .
, : = pending on the selected function, operation
> fe switch to a different source, press the [=] through the MMI may be required.
utton.
Radio functions
[RAX-0191
Cora ei)
tee
Fig. 161 Center display: left side: playback view of radio functions, right side: sources
Operating The following functions may be available depend-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @, ing on the selected radio station/podcast* and
select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > a
the vehicle equipment:
category > a station/podcast*.
> Applies to: MMI: To open the sources (2), select
on the home screen: RADIO > Source.
Symbol/Description | Description
® ao Displaying categories in a frequency band.
@ Source Displays sources in the Radio menu.
© Frequency band Shows the current station frequency band.
Indicates that on demand content is playing. The MMI must be con-
© ON nected to the Internet and a data plan must be available for this
=> page 201.
@ w/e See > page 220.
& Settings > page 223.
Depending on availability, you can switch between the image views:
press on the station logo. Use one finger to swipe to the right or left
Station logo
to switch between the Station logo and Cover art (album cover). Al-
©
so see > page 223, Online additional data.
218
Radio
Symbol/Description |Description
a Go back one level.
|@/@O|O|O\O|©
Search See > page 219.
Last stations See > page 220.
Presets See > page 220.
FM Displays stations from the FM frequency band.
Online See > page 221.
Displays stations from the SiriusXM frequency band.
SiriusXM Combines SiriusXM Live channels and on demand content, depend-
©
ing on vehicle equipment.

AM Displays stations from the AM frequency band.
Q|
Start over Go to the beginning of the broadcast.

Related Channels, artists, and shows related to the content that is currently
playing.
® Subscribe Log in to be able to play the content.
Switch to WEB Switch manually to Internet reception.
Switch to SAT Switch manually to satellite reception.
(©) More Access options for the current station > page 222.
Selecting the previous or next track: press /I< or >I.
@ aca Going to the beginning of the recording: press and hold Nix.
Going to the live program: press and hold >!I. The i symbol will
be displayed.
@ K/>| Select the previous/next station.
DAI Start or stop playback
® Wg Unmutes or mutes playback.
@ List The station list is displayed > page 217.
Depending on availability, the station name as well as program in-
@ Info section formation, for example, may be displayed. Also see > page 223,
Online additional data.
® Note Opening free text search

RADIO > Source > Search.
=@ in General information on page 197. Entering search terms
@) Tips You can enter multiple search terms at once in

= any order.
Not all functions are available in every source
and on every touch display. The following information may be available:
eet
Symbol | Description
Results from the list: Last stations
80B012721BA
Using intelligent search, you can search for sta- yy | Results from the list: Presets >
tion names, frequencies, program types (such as
News), podcasts*, or online radio stations*.
219
Radio
Symbol | Description Editing a preset
(| Results from a Station list > Deleting presets: press Ww in the playback view,
For ex- or
ample, Station frequency band > In the presets list, select: Z > one or more sta-
tions or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Requirement: the presets list must be displayed.

TS ae La (ela) > Moving a preset: press a.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
You can listen to the last stations that were desired position.
played in all frequency bands. > Press Done.
Accessing last stations
Live Sports
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
RADIO > Source > Last stations.
Using the Live Sports category, you can find live
Listening to last stations
commentary about your favorite teams during a
> Press ona station. live sports broadcast. Depending on vehicle
equipment, you may be able to switch commen-
Deleting last stations
tary that favors a certain side on or off.
> Select: Z > select one or more stations or Se-
lect all > Delete > (Done). Accessing live games
RADIO > Source > SiriusXM > Sports > Live
Sports > a game.
You can store your favorite stations from every
frequency band in the presets list. The score, the status of the game, and if necessa-
ry the current possession of the ball are dis-
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM: Channels, played.
shows, and sports teams will be stored in the fa-
vorites as Smart Favorites. After switching the ig- Saving/deleting a favorite team
nition and the MMI on, the smart presets store > Press W/W.
radio programs at a specific time.
Switching commentary on or off
Selecting presets using the MMI
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Internet. A data plan must be available
RADIO > Source > Presets > a preset. => page 201.
Storing presets > Press ))/1cl)).

> Press on ¥ @) in the playback view > page 218,
fig. 161. Radio text
Requirement: a list with radio stations must be Program information (for example, general text
displayed > page 217, fig. 159. messages, artist, composer, song) is displayed in
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op- the radio text.
tions menu appears.
Requirement: the selected radio station must
> Press Store as preset.
support the radio text function.
220
Radio
Opening radio text Previous selection

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The station/podcast list for the last station or
RADIO > select a frequency band (such as FM) podcast that was playing will be displayed.
> select a station > More > Radio text.
Top stations
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
The favorite online radio stations are displayed.
functions may be available:
Filter list
Displaying previous radio text entries
> Select: 2 > (a category) > a station/podcast.
> Swipe downward with one finger. The last radio
text entries are displayed if they are available. The following categories are available:
Scrolling through radio text entries — Countries
> Swipe upward or downward with one finger. — Genres
— Languages
Showing Radio Text Plus information
— Editor's picks
If a radio text entry is displayed with a color, a — Themes
phone number or a navigation destination for the — Nearby
station is available as radio text plus information.
@) Note
You have the following options:
Selecting the destination be sure to note the connectivity costs section
> Select: a navigation destination marked in col- =@ in General information on page 197.
or > Set as destination.
@) Tips
Call
— Depending on the Internet connection and
> Select: d phone number marked in color > Call. network traffic, the connection may be lost
when online radio is playing.
@ Tips — Online radio reception may not be possible
A call to a phone number stored in the radio if Internet service is throttled.
text will start immediately. — Online media usage depends on the service
availability of the third party provider.
—The range and screen display of online me-
Online radio
dia services from third party providers in the
General information vehicle can vary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- — Please note that it may not be possible to
line radio
play some online radio stations in certain
You can listen to various radio stations or pod- countries.
casts on the Internet using online radio. — Audi only provides access to online radio
and does not assume any responsibility for
the content of these services.
Internet. A data plan must be available
=> page 201.
Accessing online radio through the MMI

80B012721BA
RADIO > Source > Online.
The following functions are available:
221
Radio
Listening to podcast favorites

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
line radio
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
Opening podcasts using the MMI stored.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
RADIO > Source > Online > Podcasts.
Browsing through podcast favorites
The following functions are available:
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
Listening to a podcast displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
> Press < or >.
Search
> Press 2. Displaying all podcast favorites
The following functions are available in the pod- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
cast playback view: displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
Displaying podcast episodes
> Press All.
> Press List.
Editing podcast favorites
Starting/stopping podcast playback
> Deleting podcast favorites: press Y in the
> Press /II. playback view, or
> In the podcast favorites list, select: All > Z >
Previous/next podcast
one or more podcasts, or Select All > Delete >
> PressKi/ DI. (Done).
Changing the playback position Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
> You can adjust the playback position using the displayed.
knob.
> Moving podcast favorites: Select: All > Z.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
Displaying the online radio menu desired position.
> Press Done.
> Press Ba.
Switching to radio Options and settings

> Press Source. The sources in the Radio menu
are displayed.
Requirement: the playback view @) > page 218,
Podcast favorites
fig. 161 must be displayed.
You can store podcasts in the podcast favorites.
> Press More (9), or
Requirement: the playback view for a podcast
Requirement: a list with radio stations or pod-
must be displayed.
casts* must be displayed > page 217, fig. 159.
> Press YY @ © page 218, fig. 161. > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
Requirement: a list with podcasts must be dis- tions menu appears.
played.
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears.
> Press Save podcast.
222
Radio
Depending on the selected source and vehicle be loaded depending on the availability from the
equipment, the following functions may be avail- different providers.
able.
Online station tracking
— Store as favorite > page 220. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
— Radio text > page 220. Internet. A data plan must be available
— Save podcast > page 222, Podcast favorites. => page 201. Astation provides information in
Related content the background for its online station alternative
and is identified with the ™} symbol.
Channels, artists, and shows related to the con-
tent that is currently playing. During reception loss in the FM frequency band,
the radio tuner can establish a data connection
and switch to an online station alternative, if it is
available. If available, you can receive your local
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: radio stations in every region of your country on-
RADIO > ©}. line. This may result in additional costs >@®. The
symbol indicates a station that is currently be-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following received online.
ing settings may be available: — Automatic/Off: activates or deactivates auto-
HD Radio FM/HD Radio AM matic switching to online station alternatives.
— With request: switching to online station alter-
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
natives must be confirmed manually.
SiriusXM Tune Start
Preferred online radio data rate
If you play a smart preset when this function is
Depending on the selected radio station, you may
switched on, the song currently playing on the
be able to adjust the data rate for Internet radio
channel will play from the beginning.
=> page 221 and for the Online station tracking.
SiriusXM subscription status For optimal sound playback, press High. To re-
This option is available when your subscription is duce data usage, press Low.
about to expire or has already expired. The expi-
ration date for your license is displayed. () Note
Call SiriusXM: the telephone number and radio Read the information about Audi connect, and
ID of your satellite radio provider are displayed.
=@ in General information on page 197.
To call your satellite radio provider using the
MMI, press Call SiriusXM.
@) Tips
Online additional data Delays may occur when switching automati-
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the cally between normal frequency bands and
Internet. A data plan must be available online radio.
=> page 201.
When the function is switched on, additional in-

formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
Do It Yourself
80B012721BA

ment.
223
Radio
A station is no longer displayed in the sta- | Store the station as a preset in advance. Access the pre-
tion list. sets using the presets list > page 220.
Online radio: no playback from online ra-_ | Check if a data plan has been purchased for the applicable
dio. country and it is available > page 201.
224
Media
Media CG) Note

General information Read the information about Audi connect, and
There may be different media sources and con- =@ in General information on page 197.
nections available depending on the vehicle
equipment. For example, you can play media files
Bluetooth audio player
using a connected USB drive or connect your mo-
bile devices to the Audi music interface and oper- With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play
ate them through the MMI. music wirelessly through the MMI from your
Bluetooth-capable mobile device (such as a cell
Media and format restrictions: the MMI (includ-
phone).
ing the USB storage device connection) was test-
ed with a variety of products and media on the Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
market. However, there may be cases where indi- the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
vidual devices or media and audio/video files may settings will open on your mobile device during
not be recognized, may play only with restric- the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and
tions, or may not play at all. visibility of the MMI > page 237 and mobile de-
vice must be switched on.
Restricted functionality: reset the MMI to the
factory default settings if functionality is restrict- Connecting a mobile device
ed > page 237.
Digital Rights Management: please note that MEDIA > Source > Connect external device >
the audio/video files are subject to copyright pro- New connection. The available Bluetooth devi-
tection. ces will be displayed after several seconds.
Files that are protected by DRM and are identi- > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
fied with the symbol f@ will not play. displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press OQ.
Data security: never store important information
on mobile devices. Audi is not responsible for A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
damaged or lost files and media. generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
Loading times: the more files/folders/playlists
there are on a storage medium, the longer it will After connecting successfully, the mobile device
take to load. To reduce the amount of time it will be displayed in the Connected devices menu
takes the audio/video files to load, use a storage as a Bluetooth audio player.
medium that only contains audio/video files, and Playing media > page 227.
create subfolders (for example, for each artist or
album). @ Tips
Additional information: when playing, audio — Check for any connection requests on your
files are automatically displayed with any addi- Bluetooth device.
tional information that is stored (such as the ar- — Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
tist, track and album cover). If this information is paired with the MMI, but only one at a time
not available on the medium, the MMI will revert can be active as a Bluetooth audio player
to the local Gracenote metadata database or > page 238.
search online if necessary. See > page 231, On- — The supported media functions (such as
line additional data. However, in some cases, the shuffle, list view, categories, search, op-
80B012721BA
additional information may not be displayed. tions) depend on the Bluetooth device being
used. >
225
Media
— Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth @ USB adapter for devices with a mi-
device. Audi recommends setting your mo- cro USB connection
bile device to the maximum volume when @ USB adapter for Apple devices with
using it as a Bluetooth audio player. a Lightning connection
—Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices @ USB adapter for devices with USB
can be found in the database for tested mo- type C connection
bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
() Note
Amazon Alexa Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration low it to be pinched.
You can play various Amazon Alexa content using
@ Tips
the MMI. The voice recognition system is used to
operate it. Apple devices with a dock connector can only
be charged using a USB adapter designed for
Requirement: Amazon Alexa must be activated
devices with a dock connector. Data cannot be
=> page 28.
transmitted.
> Start Amazon Alexa using the voice recognition
system. Audi music interface
MEDIA > Source > Amazon Alexa. Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music in-
terface in order to operate them through the
@) Note MMI and charge the batteries.
Read the information about Audi connect, and The Audi music interface USB ports are located in
be sure to note the connectivity costs section the center console in the front and in the rear*
=> page 197. and are labeled with the «> symbol. If multiple
USB devices are connected to the USB ports (for
Multimedia connections example, a smartphone and a USB flash drive),
all of these devices can be used as the playback
USB adapter cable source.
Connecting or charging mobile devices using

[RAH-9202
a USB adapter
> Connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi
music interface USB port and connect it to the
mobile device, such as a smartphone.
The battery will charge automatically.
Mobile devices connected to the Audi music inter-

face can be started and operated using the MMI
Fig. 162 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter => page 227.
You can connect your mobile devices through the Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB music interface
adapter and charge the battery at the same time. > Remove the USB adapter cable from the Audi
You can purchase the USB adapter cable from an music interface.
authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores:
226
Media
ZA WARNING fer to your mobile device owner's manual

for more information.
Driving requires your complete and undivided — The USB adapter on the Audi music inter-
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- face will support iPod touch or iPhone devi-
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate ces from the 5th generation or newer with
mobile devices while driving, because this in- the lightning connector.
creases the risk of an accident. —Aselection of supported devices can be
found in the database for tested mobile de-
@) Note vices at www.audi.com/mp3.
— Pull the cable out of the Audi music inter-
face carefully so that the USB ports are not Playing media
damaged.
— Use a USB extension cable to connect devi-
ces that have an integrated USB connector
(such as a USB stick) to reduce the risk of The following sources can be selected depending
damage to your USB device and the Audi on the vehicle equipment:
music interface. — Amazon Alexa > page 226.
— Extremely high or low temperatures that — USB device = page 226.
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile — External device: you can connect external devi-
devices and/or impair their performance. ces via Bluetooth and use the Bluetooth audio
Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in player > page 225, or you can connect an exter-
extremely high or low temperatures. nal device directly to the Audi music interface
=> page 226.
G) Tips
— Always follow the information found in Accessing media
=> page 82.
Playing media files using the MMI
—When you switch the ignition off, the USB
ports are still supplied with power until the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
energy management intervenes. MEDIA > Source > a source. Depending on the
— Do not use an additional adapter cable or connected device, the symbol for a source may
USB extension cable to connect mobile devi- change. The device name may be displayed (for
ces to the Audi music interface that already example: myPhone).
have a cable or that must be connected with > Select a track from the categories in the media
a USB adapter cable (> page 226, fig. 162). center > page 228.
Using an additional adapter or US extension
Playing media files using the multifunction
cable may impair functionality. steering wheel
— Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile
devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 Requirement: a media source must contain me-
specification. dia files > page 227.
— USB hubs are not supported. > Select the radio/media tab in the instrument
— Video playback through the Audi music in- cluster.
terface is not supported on Apple devices > Turn the left thumbwheel to display the play-
and MTP devices (such as smartphones). list.
— iPod touch or iPhone malfunctions also af- > To switch to a different source, press the [=]
fect the operation of the MMI. Reset your button.
80B012721BA
mobile device in these situations. > To select a media file or a source, turn and
— Audi recommends updating the iPod touch press the left thumbwheel.
or iPhone software to the latest version. Re-
227
Media
> To switch between radio and media, select in @ Categories

the instrument cluster: the =] button > Switch The media center will display categories depend-
to radio/Switch to media.
ing on the connected device, the selected source
content, and the connection type.
G) Tips
Last played track
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On- The last played media file will be played.
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
Artists
ing.
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: All available artists are displayed.
Depending on the selected function, opera- > Select: an artist > an album > a song.
tion through the center display may be re-
quired. Playlists
All playlists and smart playlists in the source are
displayed.
> Select: a playlist > a song.

canoe
RAX-0158
ISTE etal g
Smart playlists
Last played tracks: the tracks that were dis-
played last are displayed.
Most played tracks: the tracks that are played

most frequently are displayed.
Fig. 163 Center display: media center
Directories
There are various categories available in the me-
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
dia center. You can also search for media files
played.
across sources. The current music track continues
playing while you search the MMI. > Select: a folder > a song.
Opening the media center Compilations

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: You can control your compilations through the
MEDIA > Source > a source > a category. MMI.
@ Source symbol > Select: a compilation > a song.
The symbol for the source that is currently in use Composers

is displayed. Depending on the connected device,
All available composers are displayed.
the symbol for the source may change. As an ex-
ample, a USB stick is shown connected to the > Select: a composer > an album > a song.
Audi music interface.
iTunes Radio
@ Source device name > Press ona radio station.
The device name of the source that is currently in
Audio books
use is displayed.
You can control your audio books on the MMI.
> Press on an audio book.
228
Media
Podcasts — Read the information about Audi connect,
You can control your podcasts through the MMI. and be sure to note the connectivity costs
section >@ in General information on
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode. page 197.
Genres
G@) Tips
All available genres are displayed.
— Only the categories supported by the medi-
>» Select: a genre > an artist > an album > a song. um are available.
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
Videos
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
All available video files are displayed. ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing.
> Press on a video.
—When synchronizing a portable device with
Tracks Cloud services, playlists may display incor-
rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
All available tracks are displayed.
the device.
> Press on a track. — Applies to: iPod touch/iPhone: Note the in-
formation about the Audi music interface
Albums
and the supported devices > page 226.
All available albums are displayed.
> Select: an album > a track.
@ Note
— Cloud services and the iTunes radio category

always require an Internet connection.
tele mitardatelary
[RAX-0037,
Baa aeCit)
Ca
The Rock Band
The bigB
eee)
ns
eae)
nc
@
Fig. 164 Center display: left side: playback view; right side: playlist
Operating source > a category (for example, Artists > Al-

bum) > a track.
80B012721BA
> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view (),

select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a
> To open the playlist @, select List in the play-
back view @..
229
Media
The following functions may be available depend-

ing on the selected media source and the vehicle
equipment:
Symbol/Description Description
The media center categories are displayed based on the active
©) oo
oo
source > page 228.
@ Source Displays sources in the Media menu.

Applies to: playback view: Device name of the source that is current-
ly playing.
Source/device name
Applies to: media center view: Source that you are currently brows-
ing > page 228.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
or the covers must be available online > page 231, Online addition-
Album cover in the play-
al data.
©
Sanaa Displays the current album cover.

Display the playlist: press on the cover.
@ & Settings > page 231.
Current track informa- | Display of Track and Artist. Highlights the track that is currently
tion playing.
© List Browsing in the list: drag your finger upward or downward.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
Album cover in the play- or the covers must be available online > page 231, Online addition-
© list al data.
Displays the current album cover.
@ More Opens options > page 231.
O Off Switching between off/playlist/track: press @.
® O Playlist The tracks in the current playlist will repeat continuously in a loop.
© Track The current track will repeat continuously in a loop.
Selecting the previous/next track (or station/chapter): press Kl or
Dl.
@ lea/D Fast forward/rewind: to fast forward or rewind within a track, press
and hold PI or K.
Jumping to the beginning of a track: press on K after the first
three seconds of play time.
@ DAI Start or stop playback
@ =d When this function is switched on, all files in the playlist will play in
random order.
@ List The playlist @) is displayed.
@ Playback position The bar shows the current playback position in the track.
@ Info section Display of Track, Artist, and Album.
G) Tips aay aay laa)
Not all functions are available in every source You can search across all active sources, for ex-
and on every touch display. ample for tracks and video files.
230
Media
Opening the search The following table gives an overview of the as-
Requirement: the selected source must support pect ratios. The possible aspect ratios depend on
the search function. the source or video file being played.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Aspect ra-
Description
MEDIA > Search. tio B
The MMI detects the picture for-
Entries that contain the entered search term are
Auto mat of the source and displays the
listed in the results list. Each result is marked
image in the optimal ratio.
with the symbol for a category in the media cen-
The image is fixed in the corre-
ter > page 228.
sponding ratio. Select one of these
4:3,
You can search for the following categories: options if the image is distorted or
16:9
— Artists a section of the image is cut off or
— Albums blurry when Auto is selected.
— Tracks The image is enlarged to fill the en-
— Genres an tire display.
— Videos The image is displayed in the ratio
of the source format. Select this
Options and settings Original option if the image is distorted or a
section of the image is cut off or
blurry when Auto is selected.
Context-dependent functions and settings may
be available depending on the selected source,
the connected mobile device, and the connection
type.
Accessing settings
Requirement: the playback view must be dis-
played @) > page 229, fig. 164.
MEDIA > ©.
> Press More @).
ing settings may be available:
Play more like this
Online additional data
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
features such as artist, genre, mood, and beat,
Internet. A data plan must be available
and a smart playlist with similar tracks will be
=> page 201.
shown.
When the function is switched on, additional in-
Aspect ratio
formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
Audi recommends the Auto setting for the pic- be loaded depending on the availability from the
ture format. If you press on an aspect ratio, you different providers.
will see a preview of the setting on the screen.
Press OK to apply the selected aspect ratio.
Supported media and file formats

80B012721BA
The USB storage device connection supports the

following media file properties:
231
Media
Audio/video files
Audi music interface: mobile devices > page 226 such as iPhones,
MTP players, and USB storage devices in “USB Device Subclass 1 and
Supported media
6” that conform to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-
Play capable), external USB flash drives, and hard drives
USB storage devices: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS.
File system USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connec-
tion.
Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover
Metadata from the medium or from Gracenote® is displayed, depending on
availability.
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
USB mass storage device: max. 50,000 files per medium; max. 1,000
Number of files
files per playlist/folder
Audio files
Format File extension
MPEG 1/2 Layer 3 -mp3
Up to maximum 320 kbit/s
Windows Media Audio 9/10
wis 48 kHz sampling frequencies
MPEG 2/4 .m4a; .m4b; .aac
Opus Opus; .0gg; .oga
FLAC flac
ALAC .m4a 48 kHz sampling frequency
Monkey's Audio -ape
Video files
Format File extension
MPEG 1/2 -Mpg; .mpeg
MPEG4 AVC (H.264) -.mp4; .m4v; .mov; .avi
up to maximum 15 Mbit/s and
Windows Media Video 9 wmv; .asf
warn, 285 1920x1080 px at maximum 30 fps
MPEG-H (H.265/HEVC) -mp4; .mov
VP8/VP9 .webm
Flash video flv; .f4v
not always display, depending on the sys-

G) Tips
tem language.
— The media sources do not support the Win- — The manufacturer of the storage device can
dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. provide information about its “USB Device
— For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom- Subclass”.
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The — Some MTP player functions are not support-
display showing the remaining play time ed, such as rating music tracks and video
may differ for audio files with variable bit playback.
rate.
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag
information) may display differently or may
232
Media
Do It Yourself
ment.
Problem Solution
Audi music interface/Bluetooth Read the instructions in the chapter > page 226, Multimedia
audio player: the mobile device is connections/> page 225, Bluetooth audio player.
not supported.
Audi music interface: the mobile For many mobile phones or mobile devices, playback is not possi-
device is not recognized as a ble when the battery level is too low (less than 5% charge level).
source. The mobile device will only be recognized as a media source in
the MMI after connecting if the battery charge level is sufficient.
Audi music interface: malfunc- The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
tions during audio playback function off > page 237 when you are not using the Bluetooth
through an iPod touch/iPhone. audio player.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode M7P is selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possible.
Bluetooth audio player: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.
playback. Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your
Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone).
80B012721BA
233
Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone @) Note

interface Read the information about Audi connect, and
Setup
=> page 197.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI @) Tips

with a cable or wirelessly* using the Audi smart- — The functions that can be used depend on
phone interface. Certain content on your smart-
the following factors, among others:
phone is adapted in the MMI while driving and
— The brand of your smartphone
can be operated through the MMI.
— The version of the operating system in
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and your smartphone
the ignition must be switched on. iPhone genera- — The software version of the app used
tion 5 or higher with Lightning connector and iOS — The USB adapter cable and correct connec-
7.1.2 operating system or higher, or smartphone tion
with Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop — Your cell phone service provider
operating system or higher. — The customized settings on your smart-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: phone
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart- — One of the factors above or a combination
phone interface > New connection. of any of them could cause your smart-
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- phone to be incompatible with the Audi
terface > page 226 using a USB adapter smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot
=> page 226, fig. 162, or be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
> To connect your iPhone wireless*, switch on the For more information and assistance, refer
Bluetooth function and Wi-Fi on your iPhone. to the user guide and the manufacturer of
Open the Apple CarPlay settings in your iPhone. your smartphone.
In the MMI, press on your iPhone in the list of — Please note that you can only connect your
displayed devices. smartphone via the front Audi music inter-
> To update the list, press O. face in order to use the Audi smartphone in-
> Follow the system instructions. terface.
> Pay attention to any additional system prompts — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
on your smartphone, if applicable. all countries.
> Applies to: MMI: If you declined use of Apple — Wireless Apple CarPlay* was a planned func-
CarPlay or Android Auto the first time you con- tion at the time this manual was printed.
nected your smartphone, then select on the Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > your vehicle.
Audi smartphone interface > a smartphone. — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is only possible in
> Follow the system instructions. vehicles without a navigation system or
without a detected vehicle position (GPS da-
Z\ WARNING ta) if the following requirement is met: the
Driving requires your complete and undivided embedded SIM card for the vehicle must be
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- logged into the mobile phone network
=> page 197.
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in- — If the connected smartphone has voice con-
trol, you can operate your smartphone using
creases the risk of an accident.
the external voice recognition system
=> page 28.
234
Audi smartphone interface
— The menu language shown in the MMI is — Usage of the Audi smartphone interface de-
based on the settings in your smartphone. pends on the availability of services through
— Some MMI functions are not available when third party providers.
there is an active Audi smartphone interface — Audi merely provides access to third party
connection. services through the MMI and does not as-
— You cannot connect any mobile devices via sume any responsibility for the content of
Bluetooth when an Audi smartphone inter- these services.
face connection is active.
Do It Yourself

ment.
Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the battery charge level on your smartphone.
interface cannot be | Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
opened. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in the country where the vehi-
cle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Connecting the Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
smartphone to the adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
MMI failed. => page 226.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your iPhone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new
vehicles.
Wireless connection: open the settings for Bluetooth and Apple CarPlay on your
iPhone. Remove your vehicle. Open the connection manager in the MMI
= page 238. Delete your iPhone in the Telephone 1 and Audi smartphone inter-
face submenus. Repeat the connection process. Restart the MMI > page 20. Re-
start your iPhone.
The smartphone is Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
not automatically adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
detected. => page 226.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.
80B012721BA
235
Additional settings
Additional settings
System settings Keyboard
See > page 24.
Introduction
General settings are described in this chapter.

You can find specific settings in the chapters
about those settings. The available settings de- Requirement: an audio source must be active.
pend on the vehicle equipment. » Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Sound.
Date and time
Possible settings:
— Treble
SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
— Bass
Possible settings: — Balance/fader
— Speed-dependent volume control
— Automatically set date and time
— Subwoofer
— Surround Level
— Date format Focus

— Time format
You can optimize the sound distribution for vari-
— Automatic time zone
ous locations in the vehicle.
— Time zone
3D effect
Cental ah ey You can adjust the intensity of the 3D effect.
With the Medium setting, you will hear an opti-
mal 3D effect for all sources.
SETTINGS > General > Measurement units.
Possible settings: Plea ee ely
— Speed > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

— Distance SETTINGS > Announcements & tone.
— Temperature
Possible settings:
— Volume
— Pressure — Volume of announcements
— Consumption (engine) — Welcome sound
— Consumption (electric motor)
ZA WARNING
Language and keyboard Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard.
times.
Language
Gi) Tips
You can change the languages for the display,
navigation announcements, and the voice recog- The volume is automatically adjusted to a pre-
nition system. set level when the MMI is switched on.
236
Additional settings
Bluetooth — Map material update for the navigation system

> page 213.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: — Have the software update performed by an au-
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Bluetooth thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Bluetooth Facility. This can result in additional costs.
You can select a setting for visibility of the MMI ZA\ WARNING
to other Bluetooth devices. To connect a new
— Perform the installation only when the vehi-
Bluetooth device, the Visible setting must be se-
cle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases
lected. If Invisible is selected, a Bluetooth con-
the risk of an accident
nection will only be possible with paired devices.
— If the installation fails, contact an author-
If Off is selected, no Bluetooth device can be con-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
nected.
Facility immediately to have the malfunction
Bluetooth audio player corrected.
When this function is switched on, the profile

will load automatically when your Bluetooth au- Online system update
dio player is within range. Applies to: vehicles with online system update
Bluetooth name With the online system update, you can update
the software directly in the vehicle.
The MMI’s Bluetooth name is displayed and can
be changed. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Factory default settings Downloading updates

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. Requirement: notification for an online system
update will appear in the center display.
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Restore > Press on the notification, or
factory settings. > Open the notification in the notification center
> Follow the system instructions. on & page 23 and press on the notification.
The settings will be reset. The system will re-
start. This may take some time. You can also check manually if an update is avail-
able.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Software
Make sure that not only the settings were de-
update > Search for updates > desired update
leted but also the stored data, if necessary.
> Continue.
Software update
The MMI will start the download. You can check
Introduction the status of the download process in the notifi-
Applies to: vehicles with software update
cation center > page 23.
You can update your vehicle’s software.
Installing updates
The functions depend on the country and vehicle Requirement: an online system update must be
equipment: downloaded and a notification must be shown in
80B012721BA
— Update through the online system update the center display.

=> page 237.
> Stop the vehicle safely.
237
Additional settings
> Press on the notification, or Possible menu items:

> Open the notification in the notification center
— Telephone 1
on > page 23 and press on the notification.
> Follow the system instructions. — Telephone 2
— Audio player
Depending on the scope of the update, the online — Wi-Fi hotspot
system update may only be started if you follow
— Headset
these instructions:
> Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary Audi smartphone interface
> Make sure that the starter battery is charged. You can connect your smartphone to the MMI
> To start the update, exit and lock the vehicle.
=> page 234.
The MMI will start the installation. When the up-
myAudi app
date has ended, a notification will be displayed.
This function is available if the myAudi app is in-
Z\ WARNING stalled on your mobile device and started, and if
the mobile device is connected with the vehicle’s
Depending on the scope of the installation,
Wi-Fi hotspot.
the ignition must not be switched on during
the installation to ensure the installation
() Note
completes successfully.
©) Note be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 197.
=@ in General information on page 197.
Managing connected devices
Requirement: the connected devices menu must

@ Tips
be displayed > page 238.
The software update may take some time.
Connecting a device
WEE Tel Requirement: Bluetooth visibility must be acti-

Applies to: vehicles with online system update vated in the MMI & page 237 and mobile device.
Online system update: incomplete. Warning! > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
Vehicle functions limited > To search for and connect your mobile device,
press New connection > page 186.
If an error occurs when installing an online sys-
tem update, certain functions such as the emer- Selecting a connected device
gency call function may not be available. Drive to > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
Service Facility immediately to have the error cor- displayed devices. The connection will be made.
rected.
Disconnecting a connected device
Connected devices > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
> Press on the connected mobile device. The se-
Displayed connected devices
lected mobile device will be disconnected from
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the MMI.
the ignition must be switched on.
Deleting a device
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. >
SETTINGS > Connected devices.
238
Additional settings
> Press and hold an element until the Options — About Audi connect
menu is displayed.
> Press Delete. ONC lad nel M nail
If a device is listed multiple times, it will be de-
leted from all menu items. Requirement: a smartphone must be connected
to the MMI > page 234.
PXe Keli
a Cela] Mey Lately
Depending on the selected function, additional SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart-
options may be available. phone interface.
> Press and hold an element until the Options
Requirement: the connected devices menu must
menu is displayed.
be displayed > page 238.
> Press Legal notes.
> Press ona menu item, such as Telephone 1.
» Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
Bluetooth profile the ignition must be switched on.
You can switch desired profiles on or off sepa- > Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
rately in the MMI. tions tab > page 13.
Favorite >» Press and hold the E=] button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel until the display appears.
To set a paired mobile device as the default
phone, activate this function in the MMI. Possible options:
When the mobile device is in range and the Blue- — Engine code
tooth function on the mobile device and in the — Software information
MMI is switched on, the default phone will be — Version information
given priority over the other Bluetooth devices
and will be connected directly to the MMI.
Head-up display
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
Legal information
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
General information the ignition must be switched on. The head-up
display is switched off.
Information on the software licenses can be
found online at www.audi.com/softwareinfo. > To display the license text in the head-up dis-
play, press and hold the S? button @
Multi Media Interface => page 26, fig. 21 until the display appears.

SETTINGS > General.
Subscriptions
Version information
Legal notes
80B012721BA
Possible options:
— Software information
239
Additional information
Additional information
Brands and licenses
This manual does not contain any symbols, such
as ® or ™, to identify trademarks or registered
trademarks. However, the absence of these sym-
bols does not constitute a waiver of any rights as-
sociated with these names.
Apple, iPhone, iPod touch, Apple CarPlay, Light-

ning, and iTunes Radio are trademarks of Apple
Inc.
10S is a trademark or, in the USA and other coun-

tries, a registered trademark of Cisco and is used
under license.
Other product and manufacturer names may be

trademarks of their respective owners.
240
Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling CG) Note

Fuel — Filling the tank just one time with leaded
fuel or other metallic additives will cause
Types of gasoline permanent deterioration to the catalytic
The correct gasoline grade is stated on the inside converter function.
of the fuel filler door. — When gasoline with an octane rating that is
too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter load can lead to engine damage.
and must only be driven with unleaded gasoline.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

@ Tips
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- The vehicle may be filled with fuel that has a
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. higher octane rating than what is required by
the engine.
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated
by octane ratings. This value is given with (R
+M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON. Gasoline mixture
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-Tert-
filler door (examples): Butyl-Ether)
You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alco-
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY MIN. (R+M)/2 87
hol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated
Regular/ MIN. RON 91 Regular
compounds) as long as the fuel meets the follow-
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / ing conditions:
91 RON > ©.
Gasoline with methanol content (methyl alco-
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with hol or methanol)
minimum 91 AKI/ 95 RON to achieve the rated — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
horsepower and torque.
—No more than 3% methanol
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R — More than 2% solvent
+M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / ethanol)
95 RON is recommended. — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
If premium gasoline is not available, you can also —No more than 15% ethanol
use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However Gasoline with MTBE content
this does reduce the engine power slightly.
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R —No more than 15% MTBE
+M)/2 93 / SUPER PLUS MIN. RON 98
Gasoline adapted to the season
Using premium plus gasoline with at least 93
Many gasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
AKI / 98 RON is recommended.
When the season changes, refueling at high-traf-
If no premium plus gasoline is available, you can fic gas stations is recommended. It is more likely
also use premium gasoline with 91 AKI /95 RON. that the gasoline will be suitable for the season
However this does reduce the engine power there.
slightly.
@) Note
80B012721BA
— Gasoline with methanol content that does

not meet the specified conditions may cause >
241
corrosion damage and damage to plastic or Refueling

rubber components in the fuel system.
— Do not use gasoline that does not meet the
specifications. Messages
— If you are unable to find out if a specific gas-
oline mixture meets the specifications, ask A Tank system: malfunction! Please contact
the gas station operator or their fuel suppli- Service
er. There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system.
— Do not use any gasoline mixture whose Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
composition cannot be identified. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
— Audi does not assume any responsibility for malfunction corrected.
damage to the fuel system or for perform-
ance problems caused by using gasoline Messages
mixtures different from those specified.
This type of damage also does not fall under A Fuel filler door: malfunction! Unlock fuel
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under filler door manually. See owner's manual
the emissions control system warranty. There is a malfunction. You must manually un-
— If you notice a higher fuel consumption or lock the fuel filler door > page 245.
poor handling or performance problems due
to such gasoline mixtures, Audi recom- Al Warning! Vehicle performance may be limit-
mends fueling with unblended gasoline. ed
The fuel tank is almost empty. You must antici-

Gasoline additives pate a significant power loss. Refuel immediate-
ly.
An important issue for many automobile manu-
facturers is combustion residue in the engine & Please refuel and charge battery. Total
that results from the use of certain fuels. range: x mi (km)
Although types of gasoline differ depending on or
the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain f& Tank system: please refuel immediately and
substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in charge battery. Total range: x mi (km)
the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should
keep the engine and fuel system clean do not all If this indicator light turns on and this message
function equally. appears, refuel as soon as possible. Otherwise,
the high-voltage battery is drained > page 123.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- AY Fuel filler door open. Please press button
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. again to refuel
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of Fueling is possible for a little while after pressing
time, the maximum engine performance may be the fi) button. You must press the fd button
impaired by combustion residue. again if the time limit is exceeded.
@) Note
— Damage or malfunctions caused by the use
of incorrect types of gasoline are not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
— Only gasoline additives that have been ap-
proved by Audi may be used.
242
ing procedure the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the
fuel tank.
> Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into
place.
> Close the fuel filler door and then press on the
left side until it latches.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be

found ona label located on the inside of the fuel
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see
=> page 241.
Fig. 165 Right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the
filler door
Technical Data > page 313.
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors

escaping, make sure that the fuel tank is closed
correctly. Otherwise the ES indicator light will
turn on.
ZA WARNING
Improper fueling procedures and improper
handling of fuel can lead to explosions, fires,
severe burns, and other injuries.
Fig. 166 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
— Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames.
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the — The ignition must be switched off when re-
central locking system. fueling.
— Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra-
>» Unlock the vehicle if necessary. dio equipment should always be switched
> Conventional drive system: Press on the left off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays
side of the fuel filler door to open it > fig. 165. could cause sparks and start a fire.
> Plug-in hybrid drive: Pull on the EV switch in the
— If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzle all
driver's door. The fuel filler door will open auto-
the way into the filler tube, then fuel can
matically after venting is complete.
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a
> Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise.
fire.
> Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
— Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If
door > fig. 166.
there is an exceptional situation where you
> Plug-in hybrid drive: Note the information for
must enter the vehicle, close the door and
refueling at the end of this chapter.
touch a metal surface before touching the
> Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the
fuel filler neck.
risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause
> Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Do not
refueling.
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in
the tank
> After the
will be filled with fuel.
fuel pump has switched off, wait five
ZA WARNING
seconds before removing the nozzle to allow Audi does not recommend transporting fuel
containers inside the vehicle. Fuel could leak
80B012721BA
1) Depending on the engine and country
243
out of the container and ignite, especially dur- G) Tips

ing an accident. This can cause explosions,
fires, and injuries.
— When inserting the fuel pump nozzle, make
— If you must transport fuel in a fuel contain-
sure that you do not press on the fuel filler
er, note the following:
door opener @) with the fuel pump nozzle.
— Always place the fuel container on the
See the label in the fuel filler door @)
ground before filling. Never fill the fuel > fig. 166. Otherwise, a valve will close in
container with fuel while it is inside or on
the fuel filler neck and fueling will stop even
the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can oc-
if the tank is not full.
cur while refueling and the fuel vapors
— You must vent the tank system again if you
could ignite.
press on the fuel filler door opener. The fuel
— When using fuel containers made of met-
pump nozzle can stay in the fuel filler neck
al, the fuel pump nozzle must always re-
when doing this. Vent the tank system by
main in contact with the container to re-
pulling the EQ) switch in the driver's door
duce the risk of static charge.
again.
— Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as pos-
— If the engine turned off because the fuel
sible into the filler opening while refuel-
level was too low, then you may need to re-
ing.
fuel with up to 4.0 gallons (15 liters) of fuel
— Follow the applicable legal regulations in in order for the vehicle to detect the new
the country where you are driving when fuel level. Otherwise, the engine may not
using, storing and transporting fuel con- restart.
tainers.
— Fuel can age and may lead to problems
— Make sure that the fuel container meets when starting. Audi recommends replacing
the industry standards, for example ANSI the fuel in your vehicle within six months.
or ASTM F852-86.
©) Note
— Remove fuel that has overflowed onto any
vehicle components immediately to reduce
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
— Never drive until the fuel tank is completely
empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
sults from that can cause engine misfires.
Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust
system and increase the risk of damage to
the catalytic converter.
@) For the sake of the environment

— Do not overfill the fuel tank, or fuel could
leak out when the vehicle is warming up.
— Fuel should never enter the sewer system or
come into contact with the ground.
@) Tips
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not
lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside us-
ing the central locking switch.
244
Fuel filler door emergency release iG) Tips

Applies to: vehicles with manual fuel filler door release
If the central locking system malfunctions, the — The tank will not be vented if the emergency
fuel filler door can be unlocked manually. release function was used on the fuel filler
door. You can only fill a small amount of
BFY-0028
fuel in the tank. Fill only until the fuel pump
nozzle turns off for the first time. Drive to
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have
— Pressure can escape if you open the tank cap
after using the emergency release. This can
create noises.
Fig. 167 Right side trim panel in the luggage compart-

ment: opening the trim panel Emissions control
system
General information
Z\ WARNING
The temperature of the exhaust system is
high, both when driving and after stopping
the engine.
— Never touch the exhaust tail pipes once they
Fig. 168 Luggage compartment: fuel filler door emergency
have become hot. This could result in burns.
release — Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because
The emergency opening mechanism is located the high temperature of the emissions sys-
behind the right side trim panel in the luggage tem could start a fire.
compartment. — Do not apply underbody protectant in the
exhaust system area, because this increases
> Open the cover in the side panel >fig. 167.
the risk of fire.
> To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the red
loop from the retainer and then pull on the
loop carefully > fig. 168 >©. Catalytic converter
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
Observe the safety precautions > page 245, Gen-
open it > page 243, fig. 165.
eral information.
@) Note The vehicle may only be driven with unleaded

Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance. gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be de-
You will not hear it release. If you continue to stroyed.
pull, you could damage the emergency re- Never drive until the tank is completely empty.
lease mechanism. The irregular supply of fuel that results from that
can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel
could enter the exhaust system, which could
80B012721BA
cause overheating and damage to the catalytic

converter.
245
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ZA WARNING

If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there — Turn the engine off.
is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions — Switch the ignition off.
quality and that could damage the catalytic con- — Set the parking brake.
verter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer — Select the “P” (Park) selector lever position.
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the — Allow the engine to cool.
malfunction corrected. — Keep children away from the motor com-
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill- partment.
er cap is not closed correctly > page 2431). — Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These flu-
ids (such as the freeze protection contained
in the coolant) can catch fire.
Motor compartment
— Avoid short circuits in the electrical system.
General information — Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
temperature-controlled and can turn on
Special care is required if you are working in the
suddenly, even when the ignition is switched
motor compartment
off.
For work in the motor compartment, such as — Never open the hood when there is steam or
checking and filling fluids, there is a risk of in- coolant escaping from the motor compart-
jury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For this ment, because there is a risk that you could
reason, follow all the warnings and general be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
safety precautions provided in the following in- escaping.
formation. The engine/motor compartment is a — Plug-in hybrid drive: The coolant expansion
dangerous area in the vehicle. > A\. tank cap is equipped with a seal that must
never be removed under any circumstances
Explanation of warnings (sticker in the motor
=> page 249, fig. 171. If the coolant expan-
compartment):
sion tank for the high-voltage system is not
Hot motor components! sealed, please contact an authorized Audi
@ Rotating parts! dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
The radiator fan can switch on at any — Plug-in hybrid drive: The sealed cap must
a time! only be opened by an authorized Audi dealer
High voltage! Switch off the engine be- or authorized Audi Service Facility.
5 fore coming into contact with any igni- — The cap on the coolant expansion tank must
tion system components! never be opened when the coolant is hot.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid The cooling system is under pressure. There
drive: High voltage! The voltage in the is a risk of burns
high-voltage system is high enough to —To protect your face, hands, and arms from
cause fatal injuries. Touching a damaged hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
high-voltage component can result ina thick cloth when opening.
fatal electric shock. — Do not remove the engine cover under any
circumstances. This increases the risk of
The catalytic converter can be damaged
burns.
"127i if the oil level is too high!
— Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch
Always follow the instructions in the op-
the ignition cable or other components in
erating manual.
the electronic high-voltage ignition system
when the engine is running or is starting.
D_ Depending on the engine and country
246
— If a gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta- to cause cancer and birth defects or other
tionary and the engine is running, do not reproductive harm.
press the accelerator pedal inadvertently. — Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the sories contain lead and lead compounds,
vehicle to move, and this could result in an chemicals known to the State of California
accident. to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
— If inspections or repairs must be performed Wash hands after handling.
while the engine is running, moving compo-
nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator, () Note
and radiator fan) pose an additional risk. When filling fluids, be sure not to add any flu-
— Set the parking brake first and select the ids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe
“P” (Park) selector lever position. malfunctions and engine damage will occur.
— Always make sure that no parts of the
body, jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and (@) For the sake of the environment
long hair can be caught in moving engine You should regularly check the ground under
components. Before any work, always re- your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
move any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
hair, and make sure all clothing fits close bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
to the body to reduce the risk of anything er or authorized Audi Service Facility to be
becoming caught in engine components. checked.
— Pay attention to the following warnings list-
ed when work on the fuel system or on the
ey Teme ma Cire) hood
electrical equipment is required.
— Do not smoke. The hood is released from inside the vehicle.
— Never work near open flames.
— Always have a working fire extinguisher
nearby.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
this, all work must be performed only by an
Service Facility.
— Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
Fig. 169 Footwell: release lever
cals to as short a time as possible.
ZX WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning:
— Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
Fig. 170 Unlocked hood: lever
ucts of component wear contain or emit
80B012721BA
chemicals known to the State of California
247
Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from The hood latch is not locked correctly. Stop im-
the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be mediately and close the hood.
damaged.
Z\ WARNING
Opening the hood
— Never open the hood when there is steam or
> Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive: coolant escaping from the motor compart-
Switch the ignition off before releasing the ment, because there is a risk that you could
hood so that the gasoline engine does not start be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
automatically. escaping.
> With the door open, pull the lever <> below — For safety reasons, the hood must always be
the instrument panel in the direction of the ar- latched securely while driving. Because of
row > fig. 169. this, always check the hood after closing it
>» Raise the hood slightly > page 246. to make sure it is latched correctly. The hood
> Press the lever > fig. 170 in the direction of the is latched if the front corners cannot be lift-
arrow. This releases the hooks. ed.
> Open the hood. — If you notice that the hood is not latched
Closing the hood while you are driving, stop immediately and
close it, because driving when the hood is
> Push the hood down until you override the not latched increases the risk of an accident.
force of the struts.
> Let the hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not
press it in. > A\.
Message
B Warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicle
and check the lock
D_ The & symbol is not available in all countries.
248
Col kel mel nator Tadnat-lal ae) lav (7
The most important check points.
Fig. 171 Typical location of the reservoir and the engine oil filler opening (example)
Observe the safety precautions > page 246. within the engine compartment, depending on
the engine version.
@ Washer fluid reservoir (S) > page 259
@ Jump start point (+) under a cover, (-) with iG Tips
hex head screw > page 258, Charging the 12
Plug-in hybrid drive*: read the information re-
Volt vehicle battery > page 294, Jump start-
garding the coolant expansion tank under
ing
=> page 254 and the jump start under >@ in
Version 1: coolant expansion tank for com-
Preparation on page 294.
©
bustion engine (-£) under a cover

=> page 254
Engine oil filler opening (%2~) > page 251
Engine oil
©®
Brake fluid reservoir (OC) under a cover If the engine oil level is too low
=> page 255
If you need to add engine oil, use an oil that is
Plug-in hybrid drive: coolant expansion tank
listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the
©
for the high-voltage system (-E£) > page 254

front of the engine compartment > page 249,
Version 2: coolant expansion tank for com-
Ge
fig. 171. When using the engine oil listed on the

bustion engine (-£) > page 254 sticker, you can adjust the oil level as often as
Sticker* for engine oil specifications needed.
©
=> page 249

80B012721BA
If engine oil that meets the recommended speci-

The coolant expansion tank and the engine oil fication is not available, in an emergency you >
filling opening may be located in different places
249
may add a maximum of 1 quart (1 liter) of BB Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please
ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil one time until the contact Service
next oil change.
Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause
For more information on the correct engine oil the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine
for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal- oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil
er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil to reduce the level, because this will increase the
changed by an authorized Audi dealer or author- risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized
ized Service Facility. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have engine oil extracted.
@ Tips
==.) Oil level system: malfunction! Please con-
Audi recommends using engine oils provided tact Service
by Audi Genuine Parts.
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has
malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an author-
Messages
Ei Turn off engine. Oil pressure too low ty to have the malfunction repaired.
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the & Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please
engine oil level > page 250. contact Service
— If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure
=> page 251. Only continue driving once the in- has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an au-
dicator light turns off. thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
—If the engine oil level is correct and the indica- Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and FI Please drive to warm up engine
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as- Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
sistance. outside temperatures or frequent short drives.
Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in
Applies to: vehicles with oil level warning the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine
2 Please add oil immediately. speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the when doing this.
engine oil level > page 250 and add engine oil
immediately > page 251. Gi) Tips
The oil pressure warning BB is not an oil level
E& Add max. x qt (x 0) oil. You can continue
indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
driving
Add the amount of oil shown immediately Checking the engine oil level
=> page 251.
The engine oil level can be checked in the MMI.
Es Please reduce oil level Observe the safety precautions > /A\ in General
There is too much oil in the engine and there is a information on page 246.
risk of damaging the catalytic converter or en- > Park the vehicle on a level surface.
gine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- >» Shut the engine off when it is warm.
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have > Switch only the ignition back on.
engine oil extracted if necessary. Avoid high en- > Wait approximately two minutes.
gine speeds, full acceleration, and heavy engine » Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
loads. HICLE > Settings & Service > Oil level.
250
> Read the oil level in the display. Add engine oil — If you believe that your engine has in-
if the bar in the oil level indicator is just below creased its oil consumption, contact an au-
“min” > page 251. thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility to determine the cause.
@) Note Please note that an exact oil consumption
measurement must be done with the neces-
If the engine oil level is too low or too high,
sary care and accuracy and may take time.
there is a risk of engine damage.
An authorized Audi dealer or authorized
@ Tips Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately
measuring the oil consumption.
The oil level indicator in the display is only an
— You can find information on engine oil and
informational display. If the oil level is too
engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
low, a minimum oil warning appears in the in-
audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
strument cluster. Add oil and close the hood.
ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/
The current oil level will be displayed on the
customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
MMI the next time the ignition is switched on.
audi-service-schedules.html, or call
. 800-822-2834.
@) Tips
1a al A miles
0.5 quart/600 cea a de-
(0.5 liter/1,000 km), gang
pending on driving style and operating condi- S
tions. Consumption may be higher during the 5
first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil a
level must be checked regularly. It is best to
check each time you refuel your vehicle and
before long drives.
— Because of the lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
oil. The oil consumption varies depending
on the engine and may change during the Fig. 172 Engine compartment: engine oil filler opening
service life of the engine. Engines generally cover
consume more oil at the beginning during
the break-in period. Then oil consumption Observe the safety precautions > page 246, Gen-
stabilizes after the break-in period. eral information.
— Under normal conditions, oil consumption > Turn the engine off.
depends on the quality and viscosity of the > Open the hood © page 247.
oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions, > Unscrew the cap x for the engine oil filler
and the road conditions. The dilution of oil opening © fig. 172.
from condensation or fuel residue as well as > Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct
the age of the oil also play a role. Because oil > page 249.
engine wear increases with mileage, oil con- > Close the engine oil filler opening cap.
sumption will increase again over time until > Close the hood © page 247.
it may be necessary to replace worn compo- > Restart the ignition after two minutes and read
nents. the current oil level in the MMI > page 250,
— Because all these variables play a role, it is Checking the engine oil level.
not possible to define an oil consumption > Applies to: using engine oil that meets the rec-
80B012721BA
standard. Therefore, the oil level must be ommended specification: Add some more oil
checked regularly. again if necessary.
251
ZA\ WARNING The engine oil must be changed at the intervals

specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Book-
— When adding oil, do not let oil drip onto hot let. This is very important because the lubrication
engine components. This increases the risk function of the oil gradually declines during regu-
of a fire. lar vehicle operation.
— You must close the cap on the oil filler open-
ing correctly so that oil does not leak out on- The engine oil should be changed more frequent-
to the hot engine and exhaust system when ly under certain circumstances. Have the oil
the engine is running, because this is a fire changed more frequently if you often drive short
hazard. distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stop-
and-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environ-
— Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into
ments, or is operated for long periods of time in
contact with engine oil.
temperatures below zero.
— Engine oil is poisonous and must be kept out
of reach of children. Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil ap-
— Store the engine oil securely in the original pear darker after the engine has run briefly. This
container. is normal and no reason to change the engine oil
more frequently than recommended.
@) Note
Because correctly disposing of engine oil is diffi-
— The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cult and special tools and technical knowledge
cover damage or malfunctions if the recom- are needed for an oil change, Audi recommends
mended intended use of the vehicle and having your engine oil changed by an authorized
maintenance measures listed in the Audi Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Main-
If you change the engine oil yourself, please note
tenance Booklet were not followed.
the following important information:
— Only use high-grade engine oil that explicit-
ly meets the Audi oil quality standard for
your vehicle. Using another oil may cause
ZA WARNING
severe vehicle damage. If you change the engine oil on the vehicle
— Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. yourself, the following precautions must be
Additives may cause engine damage that is followed:
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited — Wear protective eyewear.
Warranty. — Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
to cool down sufficiently.
@ For the sake of the environment — Maintain enough distance when you are re-
— Oil should never enter the sewer system or moving the oil drain plug. While doing this,
come into contact with the ground. keep your forearm parallel to the ground to
reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
— Follow the legal regulations in the country
arm.
where you are located when disposing of
— Drain the oil into a container designed for
empty oil containers.
this purpose that is large enough to hold the
full amount of oil in your engine.
CET Ute Rie Lae!
— Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of
Audi recommends having the oil changed at an reach of children.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv- — Prolonged contact of used engine oil with
ice Facility. the skin may cause skin damage. Always
wash oil off immediately with soap and wa-
ter to protect your skin.
eral information.
252

@) Note
for assistance.
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil.
Additives may cause engine damage that is |} Coolant system: malfunction! Please turn
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War- off engine
ranty. Do not continue driving, shut the engine off, and
switch the ignition off.
— See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Before changing the engine oil, make sure
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
you can dispose of the used engine oil cor-
rectly. Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive
— Engine oil must always be disposed of cor- B Electric drive: malfunction! Cooling system.
rectly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for- Please contact Service
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew-
There is a malfunction in the cooling system.
ers. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Have your used engine oil recycled by bring- Audi Service Facility immediately.
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact
a gas station. Coolant additive
The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and
Cooling system corrosion protection agents. Only add the follow-
ing coolant additives mixed with distilled water.
Coolant additive Specification

The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture
of purified water and coolant additive at the fac- Gl2evo TL774L
tory. This coolant must not be not changed. The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
The coolant level is monitored using the |_| indi- mixed with water depends on the climate where
cator light. However, occasionally checking the the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-
coolant level is recommended. tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze
and damage the engine.
Messages
Coolant Freeze protec-
HAturn off engine and check coolant level. See
additive tion
owner's manual
Warm min. 40% min. -13 °F
The coolant level is too low. regions max. 45% (25 ®C)
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
coolant level > page 254. regions max. 55% (-40 °C)
— If the coolant level is too low, add coolant

@) Note
=> page 254. Only continue driving once the in-
— Before the start of winter, have an author-
dicator light turns off.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
& Coolant temperature: too high. Please let Facility check if the coolant additive in your
engine run while vehicle is stationary vehicle matches the percentage appropriate
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to for the climate. This is especially important
cool off, until the indicator light turns off. when driving in colder climates.
— If the G12evo coolant additive is not availa-
80B012721BA
— If the indicator light does not turn off, do not ble in an emergency, do not add any other
continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
additive. You could damage the engine. If >
253
this happens, only use distilled water and > Switch the ignition off.
restore the correct mixture ratio with the > Open the hood > page 247.
specified coolant additive as soon as possi-
The coolant expansion tank for some engines is
ble.
located in the water drip tray under a cover. If
— Only refill with new coolant.
necessary, remove the cover that is located under
— Radiator sealant must not be mixed with
the windshield wiper on the front passenger's
the coolant.
side.
— You can continue driving if the permitted » Check the coolant level in the coolant expan-
G12evo coolant additive was not added. sion tank > page 249, fig. 171 using the outer
However, go to an authorized Audi dealer or markings (2) > fig. 173. The coolant level must
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately be between the markings (2) when the engine is
to have the coolant replaced to reduce the cold. When the engine is warm it can be slight-
risk of engine damage. ly above the upper marking.
— Due to the risk of engine damage, the cool- > Conventional drive system: When you add cool-
ing system should only be refilled by an au- ant to the expansion tank, please refer to
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi => page 253, Cooling system.
Service Facility. An authorized Audi dealer or > Plug-in hybrid drive: If you add coolant to the
authorized Audi Service Facility can also pro- coolant expansion tank for the combustion en-
vide you with important information about gine, see > page 253, Cooling system.
the recommended coolant additive. > Plug-in hybrid drive: If coolant is missing from
the high-voltage system coolant expansion
eta dU mets tank, do not continue driving. Contact an au-
z Facility immediately > A\.
@ MAX 2
a Adding coolant
Applies to: coolant expansion tank for combustion engine
When adding coolant to the combustion engine

expansion tank, please observe the following in-
structions.
AK Requirement: there must be a residual amount of
Fig. 173 Engine compartment - Coolant expansion tank:
coolant in the expansion tank >@).
@ cover with release button; @) markings If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water
and coolant additive. Audi recommends mixing
the coolant additive with distilled water.
eral information.
> Allow the engine to cool.
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive:
> Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
Your vehicle has two coolant expansion tanks
sion tank cap.
that are separate from each other > page 249,
> Push the release button @ > fig. 173 on the
fig. 171. One expansion tank for the combustion
cap and carefully turn it to the left until you
engine and one tank for the high-voltage system.
feel resistance > /\.
The coolant expansion tank for the high-voltage
> Push the release button again and remove the
system is sealed and must not be opened > /\
cap completely.
and> A\. > Add coolant mixed in the correct ratio
Checking the coolant level = page 253 up to the MAX marking.
> Make sure that the fluid level remains stable.
> Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Add more coolant if necessary.
254
> Turn the cap to the right to tighten it until you — When adding coolant, it may leak into the
feel resistance a second time. inside of high-voltage components and
cause a short circuit, increasing the risk of
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak.
fire.
Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized
@) Note
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can re- Do not continue driving if the coolant expan-
sult from the coolant boiling due overheating sion tank is empty. Do not add any coolant,
and then being forced out of the cooling system. because air could enter the cooling system
and damage the engine. See an authorized
ZA\ WARNING Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
— The engine/motor compartment in any vehi- for assistance.
cle is a potentially dangerous area. Stop the
engine and allow it to cool before working in Brake fluid
the engine compartment. Always follow the
BFV-0229]
information found in > page 246, General
information.
— Never open the hood if you can see or hear
steam or coolant escaping from the motor
compartment. This increases the risk of
burns. The cooling system is under pressure.
When you no longer see or hear steam or
coolant escaping, you may open the motor
compartment with caution.
Fig. 174 Motor compartment: cap on brake fluid reservoir
— When working in the engine compartment,
remember that the radiator fan can switch
on even if the ignition is switched off, which
eral information.
increases the risk of injury.
— Coolant additive and coolant can be danger- Checking the brake fluid level
ous to your health. For this reason, store the
The brake fluid reservoir is located under a cover
coolant in the original container and away on the driver’s side.
from children. There is a risk of poisoning.
> Lift the cover > page 249, fig. 171 at both
A WARNING openings and remove it.
> Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid res-
ervoir > page 249, fig. 171. The brake fluid lev-
The coolant expansion tank for the high-volt-
el must be between the MIN and MAX markings
age system may only be opened or filled by an
ofA.
Service Facility. The brake fluid level is monitored automatically
— The coolant expansion tank cap is equipped
Message
with a seal that must never be removed un-
der any circumstances > page 249, fig. 171. Ea / @ Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake
If the coolant expansion tank for the high- fluid level
voltage system is not sealed, please contact
Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
80B012721BA

Audi Service Facility.
Service Facility for assistance. >
255
Changing the brake fluid Do not continue driving and switch the ignition
Brake fluid should be changed at regular inter- off > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
vals. Have the brake fluid changed by an authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- = Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not
ty. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi possible. Please contact Service
Service Facility will inform you of the replace-
If you switch the ignition off, you will not be able
ment intervals.
to restart the vehicle. Vehicle functions or driving
Z\ WARNING stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
mediately.
marking, it can impair the braking effect and
driving safety, which increase the risk of an = Electrical system: malfunction! Please con-
accident. Do not continue driving. See an au- tact Service
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Switch off all electrical equipment that is not
Service Facility for assistance. needed. If necessary, some equipment will be
— If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in switched off automatically. Vehicle functions or
the brake system during heavy braking. This driving stability may be limited. Drive to an au-
could impair braking performance and driv- thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
ing safety, which increases the risk of an ac- Facility immediately.
cident.
— The brake fluid in your vehicle must meet = Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
the standard VW 501 14 and is available at
tery will be charged while driving
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized The starting ability may be impaired.
Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not
If this message turns off after a little while, the
available, another high-grade brake fluid of
vehicle battery has charged enough while driving.
equivalent quality may be used, and it must
meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Stand- If this message does not turn off, drive immedi-
ard (FMVSS) 116 DOT 4, Class 6. ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility.
@) Note
— If the brake fluid level is above the MAX
ZA\ WARNING
marking, brake fluid may leak out over the When there is an electrical system malfunc-
edge of the reservoir and result in damage tion, vehicle functions may not work and driv-
to the vehicle. ing stability may be limited, which increases
— Do not allow any brake fluid to come into the risk of an accident. Do not continue driv-
contact with the vehicle paint, because it ing and switch the ignition off. See an author-
will corrode the paint. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility for assistance.
Electrical system
Battery
If the ie} / B or z= indicator light turns on,
there is a malfunction in the power supply, the Peale ees)
battery, or the vehicle electrical system.
Because of the complex power supply, all work on
= / B Electrical system: malfunction! Safely batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc.,
stop vehicle should only be performed by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\. >
256
Multiple batteries with different technologies authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
may be installed in your vehicle: Service Facility.
— Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the — Never connect a charging cable or jump
engine, basic power supply) > page 257, 12 start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle
Volt vehicle battery or > page 258, Other bat- battery. Only use the connections in the en-
tery types gine compartment > page 258.
— Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation
or optional equipment) > page 258, Other bat- Z\ WARNING
tery types California Proposition 65 Warning:
— Plug-in hybrid drive: High-voltage battery (for — Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
example, for electric driving) > page 122, In- sories contain lead and lead compounds,
troduction. chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Not running the vehicle for long periods of
Wash hands after handling.
time
The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle @) Note
does not run for long periods of time. To ensure
— If the vehicle will be parked for long periods
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical
of time, protect the battery against the cold
equipment will be limited or switched off. Some
so that it will not be destroyed by “freezing”
convenience functions, such as interior lighting
=> page 258, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle
or power seat adjustment, may not be available
battery.
under certain circumstances. The convenience
— There are electrical components under the
functions will be available again when you start
cargo floor behind a trim panel that warm
the engine.
up during operation. To reduce the risk of
Even when electrical equipment is switched off, the components overheating, do not store
the equipment can still drain the battery if the objects such as blankets under the cargo
vehicle is not driven for long periods of time. floor. If the components overheat, they will
Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that switch off temporarily. This will be indicated
destroys the inside of the battery. The battery by a message that will be displayed in the
must be charged every month to prevent this instrument cluster until the temperature re-
= page 258. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or turns to normal.
authorized Audi Service Facility for more infor-
mation. 12 Volt vehicle battery
Winter operation
Explanation of warnings:
Cold weather places an especially high load on
Always wear eye protection.
the 12 Volt vehicle battery. Have the battery
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility before cold weather be- Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always
gins. wear protective gloves and eye protection.
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
ZA\ WARNING forbidden.
— All work on the battery or electrical system A highly explosive mixture of gases can
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi- form when charging batteries. >
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
80B012721BA
this, all work must be performed only by an
257
@
Always keep children away from battery @) For the sake of the environment
acid and the battery.
OE These types of batteries must be dis-
@/ Always follow the instructions in the oper-
posed of using methods that will not harm
oo ating manual.
the environment. Do not dispose of them in
household trash. They contain harmful sub-
@ For the sake of the environment
stances and recyclable raw materials. Contact
2 ¥ Lead-acid batteries must be disposed of an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
using methods that will not harm the environ- Service Facility for more information.
ment. Do not dispose of them in household
trash. They contain harmful substances, such rging the 12 Volt vehicle battery
as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable
aN
raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi S
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for a>
a
ao
more information.
Other battery types
Explanation of warnings:
®
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
forbidden.
Fig. 175 Engine compartment: connectors for a charger or
®
Always keep children away from battery jump start cables
acid and the battery.
@/ Always follow the instructions in the oper- Observe the safety precautions > page 246, Gen-
oo ating manual. eral information, > A\ in Battery general infor-
mation on page 257 and > A\.
ZA WARNING Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum
All work on the batteries must only be per- charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca-
formed by an authorized Audi dealer or au- bles remain connected.
thorized Audi Service Facility.
The charging cable connections are located in the
— Gases that escape from these different bat-
motor compartment. The ground point ©) is al-
tery types can be poisonous or flammable.
ways located on the vehicle body.
— The contents of these battery types can be
corrosive. If any battery contents come into > Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
contact with the skin, flush the affected ment.
area for at least 15 minutes with clean wa- > Open the hood > page 247.
ter. Then wash the affected area with soap. » Press the release lever on the positive terminal
Have the affected area examined by a medi- and fold the cover upward > fig. 175.
cal professional. > Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump
start pins according to the instructions. (Hex
©) Note head bolt under a cover @), hex head bolt on
the vehicle body ©).
Components must not be connected to the
> Insert the power cable for the charging device
battery terminals and wires on these battery
into the socket and switch the device on.
types because this increases the risk of dam-
> At the end of the charging process, switch the
age, for example due to overvoltage.
charger off and pull the power cable out of the
socket.
» Remove the charging device terminal clamps. >
258
> Close the cover on the positive terminal. => fig. 176, > page 249. The reservoir capacity
> Close the hood > page 247. can be found in > page 313.
To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the

ZA WARNING spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts
— Never connect a charging cable or jump of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the wa-
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle ter. When the outside temperatures are cold, an
battery. Only use the connections in the en- anti-freezing agent should be added to the water
gine compartment > page 258. so that it does not freeze.
—A highly explosive mixture of gases can form
Message
when charging batteries. Only charge the
battery in well-ventilated areas. BS Please add washer fluid
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or
system and the headlight washer system* when
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the ignition is switched off.
the battery housing can crack and battery
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
CG) Note
risk of an explosion and chemical burns.
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- —The concentration of anti-freezing agent
ized Audi Service Facility for more informa- must be adjusted to the vehicle operating
tion.
conditions and the climate. A concentration
that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
— Do not connect or disconnect the charging
— Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
cable while charging because this increases
the risk of an explosion. tives to the washer fluid.
— Do not use a glass cleaner that contains
@) Tips paint solvents, because this could damage
the paint.
Read all of the manufacturer's instructions
for the charger before charging the battery.
Service interval display
Windshield washer The service interval display detects when your ve-
hicle is due for service.
system
The service interval display works in two stages:
B4M-0135)
— Inspection or oil change reminder: after driv-

ing a certain distance, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display each time the igni-
tion is switched on or off. The remaining dis-
tance or time is displayed briefly.
— Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle
has reached an inspection or oil change interval
or both intervals at the same time, the mes-
Fig. 176 Motor compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap sage Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil
change and inspection due! appears briefly af-
Observe the safety precautions > page 246, Gen- ter switching the ignition on or off.
eral information.
Checking service intervals
The windshield washer reservoir <> contains the
80B012721BA
You can check the remaining distance or time un-

cleaning solution for the windshield/rear win-
til the next oil change or next inspection in the
dow* and the headlight washer system*
Infotainment system.
259
Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

HICLE > Settings & Service > Service intervals.
Resetting the indicator

An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility will reset the service interval dis-
play after performing service.
If you have changed the oil yourself, you must re-

set the oil change interval.
Applies to: MMI: To reset the display, select on

the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service
> Service intervals.
@) Note
— Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil
was changed.
— Following the service intervals is critical to
maintaining the service life and value of
your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if
the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not ex-
ceed the time for the next service.
260
Wheels
Wheels —Always adapt your driving to

Wheels and Tires the road and traffic condi-
General information tions. Drive carefully and re-
duce your speed on icy or slip-
> Check your tires regularly for pery roads. Even winter tires
damage, such as punctures,
can lose traction on black ice.
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire () Note
tread.
—Please note that summer and
>If driving over curbs or similar winter tires are designed for
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
the conditions that are typical
proach the curb at an angle. in those seasons. Audi recom-
> Have faulty tires or rims re-
mends winter tires during the
placed immediately. winter months. Low tempera-
>Protect your tires from oil,
tures significantly decrease
grease, and fuel.
the elasticity of summer tires,
>Mark tires before removing which affects traction and
them so that the same running
braking ability. If summer
direction can be maintained if
tires are used in very cold tem-
they are reinstalled. peratures, cracks can form on
>Lay tires flat when storing and the tread bars, resulting in
store them ina cool, dry location
permanent tire damage that
with as little exposure to light as can cause loud driving noise
possible.
and unbalanced tires.
—Burnished, polished or
A WARNING
chromed rims must not be
—Never drive faster than the used in winter driving condi-
maximum permitted speed for tions. The surface of the rims
your tires. This could cause the does not have sufficient corro-
tires to heat up too much. This sion protection for this and
increases the risk of an acci- could be permanently dam-
dent because it can cause the aged by road salt or similar
80B012721BA
tire to burst. substances.
261
Wheels
Tire designations @ Tire construction

©
2
“R” indicates a radial tire.
2
x
©
oO
©) Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
© Load index and speed rating

The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed. Also
see > A in General information on
page 261.
“EXTRA LOAD”, “xl” or “RF” indi-

cates that the tire is reinforced or
Fig. 177 Tire designations on the side-
wall is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- /Maximum permitted speed
@ Tires for passenger vehicles ing
(if applicable) P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
“P” indicates a tire for a passen-
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
ger vehicle. “T” indicates a tire
Ss up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
designated for temporary use. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
U up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
@ Nominal width
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Nominal width of the tire be- Vv up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
tween the sidewalls in millime- Zz above 149 mph (240 km/h)?)
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)?
ters. In general: the larger the
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
number, the wider the tire.
@ For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
@) Aspect ratio tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code “ZR”.
Height/width ratio expressed asa
percentage.
262
Wheels
@ US DOT number (TIN) and must also specify the materials

manufacture date used in the tire. These include
The manufacture date is listed on steel, nylon, polyester and other
the tire sidewall (it may only ap- materials.
pear on the inner side of the tire): @) Maximum permitted load
DOT... 2220... This number indicates the maxi-
means, for example, that the tire mum load in kilograms and
was produced in the 22nd week of pounds that the tire can carry.
the year 2020. @ Uniform tire quality grade
Audi Original Tires standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
Audi Original equipment tires resistance
with the designation “AO” have
Treadwear, traction, and tempera-
been specially matched to your
ture ranges > page 277.
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards @ Running direction
for safety and handling. An au- The arrows indicate the running
thorized Audi dealer or author- direction of unidirectional tires.
ized Audi Service Facility will be You must always follow the speci-
able to provide you with more in- fied running direction
formation. => page 293.
@) Mud and snow capability Maximum permitted
“M/S” or “M+S” indicates the tire inflation pressure
is suitable for driving on mud and This number indicates the maxi-
snow. /4\ indicates a winter tire. mum pressure to which a tire can
Composition of the tire cord be inflated under normal operat-
and materials ing conditions.
The number of plies indicates the

number of rubberized fabric lay-
ers in the tire. In general: the
80B012721BA
more layers, the more weight a

tire can carry. Tire manufacturers
263
Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading Cord

terminology means the strands forming the
Accessory weight plies in the tire.
means the combined weight (in Cold tire inflation pressure
excess of those standard items means the tire pressure recom-
which may be replaced) of auto- mended by the vehicle manufac-
matic transmission, power steer- turer for a tire of a designated
ing, power brakes, power win- size that has not been driven for
dows, power seats, radio, and more than a couple of miles (kilo-
heater, to the extent that these meters) at low speeds in the three
items are available as factory-in- hour period before the tire pres-
stalled equipment (whether in- sure is measured or adjusted.
stalled or not).
Curb weight
Aspect ratio
means the weight of a motor ve-
means the ratio of the height to hicle with standard equipment in-
the width of the tire in percent. cluding the maximum capacity of
Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
low sidewall for improved steer- tioning and additional weight of
ing response and better overall optional equipment.
handling on dry pavement.
Extra load tire
Bead
means a tire designed to operate
means the part of the tire that is at higher loads and at higher in-
made of steel wires, wrapped or flation pressures than the corre-
reinforced by ply cords and that is sponding standard tire. Extra load
shaped to fit the rim. tires may be identified as “XL”,
Bead separation “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF” on
the sidewall.
means a breakdown of the bond
between components in the bead.
264
Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating Maximum (permissible)

inflation pressure
(“GAWR’”)
means the load-carrying capacity means the maximum cold infla-

of a single axle system, measured tion pressure to which a tire may
at the tire-ground interfaces. be inflated. Also called “maxi-
mum inflation pressure.”
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(“GVWR”)
Normal occupant weight
means the maximum total loaded means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
weight of the vehicle. times the number of occupants
Groove seated in the vehicle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi-
means the space between two ad-
cle.
jacent tread ribs.
Occupant distribution
Load rating (code)
means distribution of occupants
means the maximum load that a
in a vehicle.
tire is rated to carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may not find Outer diameter
this information on all tires be- means the overall diameter of an
cause it is not required by law. inflated new tire.
Maximum load rating Overall width
means the load rating for a tire at means the linear distance be-
the maximum permissible infla- tween the exteriors of the side-
tion pressure for that tire. walls of an inflated tire, including
Maximum loaded vehicle elevations due to labeling, deco-
weight rations, or protective bands or
ribs.
means the sum of:
Ply
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and parallel cords.
80B012721BA
(d) Production options weight
265
Wheels
Production options weight Rim

means the combined weight of means a metal support for a tire
those installed regular production or a tire and tube assembly upon
options weighing over 5 lbs. which the tire beads are seated.
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stand-
Rim diameter
ard items which they replace, not
means nominal diameter of the
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, in-
bead seat. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
cluding heavy duty brakes, ride
chase new tires to match the new
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
rim diameter.
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire Rim size designation

means rim diameter and width.
means a pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the Rim width
beads are laid at substantially means nominal distance between
90 degrees to the centerline of rim flanges.
the tread.
Sidewall
Recommended inflation
means that portion of a tire be-
pressure
tween the tread and bead.
see > page 264, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure. Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is
Reinforced tire
designed to be driven for extend-
means a tire designed to operate
ed periods of time. The ratings
at higher loads and at higher in-
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
flation pressures than the corre-
to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
sponding standard tire. Rein-
on page 262. You may not find
forced tires may be identified as
this information on all tires be-
“XL”, “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF”
cause it is not required by law.
on the sidewall.
The speed rating letter code,
where applicable, is molded on
the tire sidewall and indicates the >
266
Wheels
maximum permissible road parisons among tires. The UTQG is

speeds. See also > A in General not a safety rating and not a guar-
information on page 261. antee that a tire will last fora
prescribed number of miles (kilo-
Tire pressure monitoring
system meters) or perform ina certain
way. It simply gives tire buyers
means a system that detects
additional information to com-
when one or more of a vehicle's
bine with other considerations,
tires are underinflated and illumi-
such as price, brand loyalty and
nates a low tire pressure warning
dealer recommendations. Under
telltale.
UTQG, tires are graded by the tire
Tread manufacturers in three areas:
means that portion of a tire that treadwear, traction, and tempera-
comes into contact with the road. ture resistance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
Tread separation
the sidewalls.
means pulling away of the tread
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
from the tire carcass.
Number (TIN)
Treadwear indicators (TWI) This is the tire’s “serial number”.
means the projections within the It begins with the letters “DOT”
principal grooves designed to give and indicates that the tire meets
a visual indication of the degrees all federal standards. The next
of wear of the tread. See two numbers or letters indicate
=> page 270, Treadwear indicator the plant where it was manufac-
for more information on measur- tured, and the last four numbers
ing tire wear. represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel- DOT... 2220...
oped by the United States Nation- means that the tire was produced
al Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- in the 22nd week of 2020. The
tration (NHTSA) that is designed other numbers are marketing co-
80B012721BA
to help buyers make relative com- des that may or may not be used >
267
Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This in- number of seating positions. Re-

formation is used to contact con- fer to the table > table on
sumers if a tire defect requires a page 273 for the number of peo-
recall. ple that correspond to the vehicle
normal load.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and lug- New tires or wheels
gage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilo-
Audi recommends having all work
grams) times the vehicle's desig-
on tires or wheels performed by
nated seating capacity.
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle maximum load on the thorized Audi Service Facility.
tire These facilities have the proper
means that load on an individual knowledge and are equipped with
tire that is determined by distrib- the required tools and replace-
uting to each axle its share of the ment parts.
maximum loaded vehicle weight
>New tires do not yet have the
and dividing by two.
optimal gripping properties.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Drive carefully and at moderate
means that load on an individual speeds for the first 350 miles
tire that is determined by distrib- (500 km) with new tires.
uting to each axle its share of the > Only use tires with the same de-
curb weight, accessory weight, sign, size (rolling circumfer-
and normal occupant weight (dis- ence), and as close to the same
tributed in accordance with > ta- tread pattern as possible on all
ble on page 273) and dividing by four wheels.
two. >Do not replace tires individually.
At least replace both tires on the
Occupant loading and distri- same axle at the same time.
bution for vehicle normal load
> Audi recommends using Audi
for various designated seating
capacities Genuine Tires. If you would like
to use different tires, please
Refer to the tire inflation pressure
note that the tires may perform >
label > page 271, fig. 180 for the
268
Wheels
differently even if they are the damage to the vehicle and an

same size > A. accident could result.
>If you would like to equip your —Only use tire/rim combina-
vehicle with a tire and rim com- tions and suitable wheel bolts
bination that is different from that have been approved by
what was installed at the facto- Audi. Otherwise, damage to
ry, consult with an authorized the vehicle and an accident
Audi dealer or authorized Audi could result.
Service Facility before making a —For technical reasons, it is not
purchase > A. possible to use tires from oth-
Because the spare tire® is differ- er vehicles. In some cases, you
ent from the regular tires instal- cannot even use tires from the
led on the vehicle (such as winter same vehicle model.
tires or wide tires), only use the —Make sure that the tires you
spare tire* temporarily in case of select have enough clearance
emergency and drive carefully to the vehicle. Replacement
while it is in use. It should be re- tires should not be chosen
placed with a regular tire as soon simply based on the nominal
as possible. size, because tires with a dif-
ferent construction can differ
All four wheels must be equipped
greatly even if they are the
with tires that are the same brand
same size. If there is not
and have the same construction
enough clearance, the tires or
and tread pattern so that the
the vehicle can be damaged
drive system is not damaged by
and this can reduce driving
different tire speeds. For this rea-
safety and increase the risk of
son, in case of emergency, only
an accident.
use a Spare tire* that is the same
—Only use tires that are more
circumference as the regular tires.
than six years old when abso-
Z\ WARNING lutely necessary and drive
carefully when doing so.
—Do not use steel rims that are
—Run-flat tires* may only be
80B012721BA
17 inches or larger. Otherwise,

used on vehicles that were
269
Wheels
equipped with them at the ty check the wheel alignment if

factory > page 280. there is unusual wear.
—If you install wheel covers on —Have the wheels rebalanced if an
the vehicle, make sure they al- imbalance is causing noticeable
low enough air circulation to vibration in the steering wheel.
cool the brake system. If they If you do not, the tires and other
do not, this could increase the vehicle components could wear
risk of an accident. more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Tire wear and damage
Original equipment tires contain
treadwear indicators in the tread
B4H-0415
pattern, which are bars that are

1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are
spaced evenly around the tire per-
pendicular to the running direc-
a
tion > fig. 178. The letters “TWI”
Fig. 178 Tire profile: treadwear indica- or triangles on the tire sidewall
tor indicate the location of the tread-
wear indicators.
Tire wear
Check the tires regularly for wear. The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth !) when they
—Inflation pressure that is too low
have worn down to the treadwear
or high can increase tire wear
indicators. Replace the tires with
considerably.
new ones > A.
—Driving quickly through curves,
rapid acceleration, and heavy Tire rotation
braking increase tire wear. Rotating the tires regularly is rec-
—Have an authorized Audi dealer ommended to ensure the tires
or authorized Audi Service Facili- wear evenly. To rotate the tires, >
D Obey any applicable regulations in the

country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
270
Wheels
install the tires from the rear axle and because it increases the
on the front axle and vice versa. risk of hydroplaning when driv-
This will allow the tires to have ing through deep puddles.
approximately the same length of
service life. Tire pressure
For unidirectional tires, make sure
B4H-0664
the tires are installed according to
the running direction indicated on
the tire sidewall > page 293.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can of-
Fig. 179 Driver's side B-pillar: tire pres-
ten occur in locations that are hid-
sure label
den. Unusual vibrations in the ve-
hicle or pulling to one side may
B8K-1151
indicate that there is tire damage. ‘SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT
NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL AVANT
Reduce your speed immediately.
SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE
Check the tires for damage. If no DIMENSIONS | _ PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROID
as KPA, Ml PSI
damage is visible from the out- ARRIERE

‘SPARE
a KPA, Ml PSI
DE SECOURS am KPA, Hl PSI
side, drive slowly and carefully to
the nearest authorized Audi deal- Fig. 180 Tire pressure label
er or authorized Audi Service Fa-
The correct tire pressure for tires
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
installed at the factory is listed on
ed.
a label. The label is located on the
Z\ WARNING B-pillar (driver's side) > fig. 179,
> fig. 180. The location may vary
Tread that has worn too low or
uneven tread depths on the depending on the model.
tires can reduce driving safety. Use the tire pressure specified for
This can increase the risk of an a normal vehicle load when the
accident because it has a nega- vehicle is partially loaded > table
tive effect on handling, driving on page 273. If driving the vehi-
80B012721BA
through curves, and braking, cle when fully loaded, you must
271
Wheels
increase the tire pressure to the and follow the important safe-
maximum specified pressure > /A\. ty precautions in > page 274.
Checking and correcting tire —The tire must flex more if the
pressure tire pressure is too low or if
the vehicle speed or load are
>Check the tire pressure at least
too high. This heats the tire up
once per month and also check it
too much. This increases the
before every long drive.
risk of an accident because it
> Always check the tire pressure
can cause the tire to burst and
when the tires are cold. Do not
result in loss of vehicle con-
reduce the pressure if it increas-
trol.
es when the tires are warm.
—Incorrect tire pressure increas-
>Refer to the sticker > fig. 180
for the correct tire pressure.
es tire wear and has a negative
>Correct the tire pressure if nec-
effect on driving and braking
behavior, which increases the
essary.
risk of an accident.
> Save the changed tire pressure
> page 280.
() Note
Z\ WARNING Replace lost valve caps to re-
duce the risk of damage to the
Always adapt the tire pressure
tire valves.
to your driving style and the ve-
hicle load.
©) For the sake of the envi-
—Overloading can lead to loss of ronment
vehicle control and increase Tire pressure that is too low in-
the risk of an accident. Read creases fuel consumption.
Ncw Yee cme] °c

Please note that the information differences, you should always
contained in the following table follow the tire pressure sticker
was correct at the time of print- > page 271, fig. 179.
ing, and the information is sub- Make sure that the tire designa-
ject to change. If there are any tion on your tire matches the >
272
Wheels
designation on the tire pressure tires according to the load and

label and the tire pressure table. the size of the tires installed.
The following table lists recom-
mended tire pressures in cold
Q5: 255/45R20101W| 29 | 200 | 29 | 200 | 32 | 220] 35 | 240

2.0L 235/55R19101H | 29 200 | 29 | 200 | 33 | 230 | 36 | 250
4-cylinder
255/45 R20 101H 29 200 29 200 33 230 36 250
235/60 R18 103H 29 200 29 200 35 240 38 260
255/40 R21 102Y 32 220 32 220 32 220 35 240
Q5 TFSI e: Steel suspension 30 210 30 210 33 230 36 250
2.0L 235/60 R18 103H
4-cylinder Steel suspension 30 | 210 | 30 | 210 | 33 | 230 | 36 | 250
255/45 R20 101W
Steel suspension 30 | 210 | 30 | 210 | 35 | 240) 38 | 260
235/55 R19 101H
Steel suspension 30 210 30 210 35 240 38 260
255/45 R20 101H
Air suspension 30 | 210 | 30 | 210 | 38 | 260 | 41 | 280
255/45 R20 101W
Air suspension 30 | 210 | 30 | 210 | 38 | 260] 41 | 280
235/55 R19 101H
Air suspension 30 210 30 210 38 260 41 280
255/45 R20 101H
SQs: Steel suspension 33 230 33 230 36 250 39 270
3.0L 255/40 R21 102Y
6-cylinder Air suspension 33 | 230 | 33 | 230 | 39 | 270 | 42 | 290
255/40 R21 102Y
255/45 R20101W | 36 250 33 230 41 280 44 300
Steel suspension 33 230 30 210 36 250 36 250
255/45 R20 101H
Air suspension 33 230 30 210 39 270 39 270
255/45 R20 101H
a) Two people in the front, one person in the rear

80B012721BA
273
Wheels
Z\ WARNING plus maximum load. The maxi-

mum load includes the number of
Please note the important safe-
passengers that the vehicle is in-
ty precautions regarding tire
tended to carry (“seating capaci-
pressure > page 271 and load
ty”) with an assumed weight of
limits > page 274.
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passen-
ger at a designated seating posi-
Tires and vehicle load limits
tion and the total weight of any
There are limits to the amount of uggage in the vehicle. If you tow
load or weight that any vehicle a trailer, the weight of the trailer
and any tire can carry. A vehicle hitch and the tongue weight of
that is overloaded will not handle the loaded trailer must be includ-
well and is more difficult to stop. ed as part of the vehicle load.
Overloading can not only lead to The Gross Axle Weight Rating
loss of vehicle control, but can al-
(“GAWR’”) is the maximum load
so damage important parts of the
that can be applied at each of the
vehicle and can lead to sudden
vehicle’s two axles.
tire failure, including a blowout
and sudden deflation that can The fact that there is an upper
cause the vehicle to crash. limit to your vehicle’s Gross Vehi-
cle Weight Rating means that the
Your safety and that of your pas-
total weight of whatever is being
sengers also depends on making
carried in the vehicle (including
sure that load limits are not ex-
the weight of a trailer hitch and
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev-
the tongue weight of the loaded
erybody and everything in and on
trailer) is limited. The more pas-
the vehicle. These load limits are
sengers in the vehicle or passen-
technically referred to as the vehi-
gers who are heavier than the
cle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
standard weights assumed mean
(“GVWR”). that less weight can be carried as
The “GVWR” includes the weight luggage.
of the basic vehicle, all factory in-
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
stalled accessories, a full tank of
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating >
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids
274
Wheels
are listed on the safety compli- Determining correct load

ance sticker label located on the limit
driver’s side B-pillar.
Use the example below to calcu-
late the total weight of the pas-
A WARNING
sengers and luggage or other
Overloading a vehicle can cause
things that you plan to transport
loss of vehicle control, a crash
so that you can make sure that
or other accident, serious per-
your vehicle will not be overload-
sonal injury, and even death.
ed.
—Carrying more weight than
your vehicle was designed to Steps for Determining Correct
carry will prevent the vehicle Load Limit
from handling properly and in- 1. Locate the statement “THE
crease the risk of the loss of COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU-
vehicle control. PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
—The brakes on a vehicle that NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX
has been overloaded may not LBS” on your vehicle’s placard
be able to stop the vehicle (tire inflation pressure label)
within a safe distance. => page 271, fig. 180.
—Tires on a vehicle that has 2. Determine the combined
been overloaded can fail sud- weight of the driver and pas-
denly, including a blowout and sengers that will be riding in
sudden deflation, causing loss your vehicle.
of control and a crash. 3. Subtract the combined weight
—Always make sure that the to- of the driver and passengers
tal load being transported - from “XXX” kilograms or “XXX”
including the weight of a trail- pounds shown on the sticker
er hitch and the tongue => page 271, fig. 180.
weight of a loaded trailer - 4. The resulting figure equals the
does not make the vehicle available amount of cargo and
heavier than the vehicle’s luggage load capacity. For ex-
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. ample, if the “XXX” amount
80B012721BA
equals 1400 lbs. and there will >
275
Wheels
be five 150 lbs. passengers in ZA WARNING

your vehicle, the amount of Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
correctly can become loose and result in loss
available cargo and luggage
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of
load capacity is 650 lbs. an accident. For the correct tightening specifi-
cation, see > page 293, Finishing.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650
— Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
lbs.) in the wheel hub clean and free of grease.
5. Determine the combined — Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim.
— Always have damaged rims repaired by an
weight of luggage and cargo authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
being loaded on the vehicle. Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
That weight may not safely ex-
of an accident.
ceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculat-
ed in Step 4. Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's
6. If your vehicle will be towing a handling when driving in winter conditions. Be-
cause of their construction (width, compound,
trailer, load from your trailer tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction
will be transferred to your vehi- on ice and snow.
cle. Consult this manual to de- > Use winter tires on all four wheels.
> Only use winter tires that are approved for your
termine how this reduces the vehicle.
available cargo and luggage > Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in
load capacity of your vehicle. General information on page 261. An author-
>Check the tire sidewall ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility can inform you about the maximum per-
(=> page 262, fig. 177) to deter-
mitted speed for your tires.
mine the designated load rating > Check the tire pressure after installing wheels
=> page 271.
for a specific tire.
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great-
Wheel bolts and rims ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of
0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires
Wheel bolts also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten of the remaining tread.
easily.
Rims
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel time, because they provide better handling
covers* consist of multiple pieces. These compo- when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
nents were bolted together using special bolts tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel
and a special procedure. You must not repair or consumption.
disassemble them > A\.
276
Wheels
wheel housings and other vehicle compo-

@) Tips
nents can be severely damaged.
You can also use all season tires instead of
winter tires. Please note that in some coun- G) Tips
tries where winter tires are required, only win-
When using snow chains, it may be advisable
ter tires with the 44 symbol may be permit-
to limit the ESC > page 120.
ted.
Low-profile tires
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
Snow chains improve both driving and braking in Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
winter road conditions. profile tires offer a wider tread surface and a
> Only install snow chains on the rear wheels. larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls.
> Check and correct the seating of the snow This results in an agile driving style. However, it
chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Fol- may reduce the level of comfort and increase
low the instructions from the manufacturer. road noise when driving on roads in poor condi-
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph tion.
(50 km/h). Observe the local regulations. Low-profile tires can become damaged more
Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain quickly than standard tires when driving over
rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons. large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and
Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author- curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to
maintain the correct tire pressure > page 271.
ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use
snow chains. To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and
Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add rims, drive very carefully on poor roads.
more than 0.53 in (13.5 mm) in height, including Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi
the chain lock. (3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for
You must remove the snow chains on roads with- bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks
out snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving on the rims.
ability and damage the tires. After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires
and rims inspected or replaced immediately by
ZA WARNING an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow Service Facility.
chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand-
control, which increases the risk of an acci-
ard tires.
dent.
Uniform tire quality grading

@) Note
— Snow chains can damage the rims and — Tread wear
wheel covers* if the chains come into direct — Traction AAABC
contact with them. Remove the wheel cov- — Temperature A BC
ers* first. Use coated snow chains.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
— Do not install and use snow chainsif there is
the tire side wall between tread shoulder and
a malfunction in the air suspension, be-
maximum section width > page 262, fig. 177.
cause the vehicle height will be very low. If
80B012721BA
you drive with snow chains anyway, the For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Tem-
perature A. >
277
Wheels
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac-
teristics.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating Z\ WARNING
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ernment test course.
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern- in combination, can cause heat buildup and
ment course as a tire graded 100. possible tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
ZA WARNING
may depart significantly from the norm due to Temperature grades apply to tires that are
variations in driving habits, service practices and properly inflated and not over or underinflat-
differences in road characteristics and climate. ed.
Traction
Tire pressure monitoring
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
system
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un- (1) General notes
der controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
marked C may have poor traction performance
>A. ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
Temperature tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, tires of a different size than the size indicated on
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate bel, you should determine the proper tire infla-
heat when tested under controlled conditions on tion pressure for those tires).
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate- equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, (TPMS) that illuminates a Low tire pressure tell-
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tale when one or more of your tires is significant-
tire failure > A. ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un- them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
the minimum required by law. and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop-
ping ability.
Z\ WARNING
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
based on straight-ahead braking traction
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, >
278
Wheels
even if under-inflation has not reached the level only monitors the tire pressure you have stored.
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- Refer to the tire pressure label for the recom-
sure telltale. mended tire pressure for your vehicle
=> page 271, fig. 180.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys- Tire tread circumference and vibration character-
tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- istics can change and cause a tire pressure warn-
function indicator is combined with the low tire ing if:
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
— The tire pressure in one or more tires is too low
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
— The tires have structural damage
mately one minute and then remain continuously
— The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
changed and it was not stored > page 280
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
— Tires that are only partially used are replaced
function exists.
with new tires
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal Indicator lights
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions If the @ indicator light turns on, there is a loss
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the of pressure in at least one tire .> A\ Check the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check and
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS correct the pressures of all four tires and store
from functioning properly. Always check the the pressure again > page 280.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
manual
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function fi appears after switching the ignition on or
properly. while driving and the @ indicator light in the in-
strument cluster blinks for approximately one
Gatede Me) Laie Miele] Keds minute and then stays on, there is system mal-
appears function. Try to store the correct tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in- => page 280. In some cases, you must drive for
dicator several minutes after storing the pressures until
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light
cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low does turn off or turns on again after a short peri-
or if there is a system malfunction. od of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitor- have the malfunction corrected.
ing system compares the tire tread circumference
and vibration characteristics of the individual Z\ WARNING
tires. If the pressure changes in one or more
— If the tire pressure indicator appears in the
tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster
display, reduce your speed immediately and
display with an indicator light (J and a message.
avoid any hard steering or braking maneu-
If only one tire is affected, the location of that
vers. Stop as soon as possible and check the
tire will be indicated.
tires and their pressure.
The tire pressures must be stored again each — The driver is responsible for maintaining the
time you change the pressures (switching be- correct tire pressure. You must check the
tween partial and full load pressure) or after tire pressure regularly.
80B012721BA
changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle — Under certain conditions (such as a sporty
=> page 280. The tire pressure monitoring system driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved
279
Wheels
roads), the tire pressure monitoring system Continuing to drive on run-flat tires is no
indicator may be delayed. longer possible if:
— There is visible damage to the tires, such as
@) Tips cracks in the sidewalls
— The tire pressure monitoring system can al- — Strong vibrations are felt while driving, or the
so stop working when there is an ESC mal- tire begins to smoke due to a strong build-up of
function. heat
— Using snow chains may result in a system — The tire has been heavily damaged, for example
malfunction. in an accident. There is a risk that parts of the
— The tire pressure monitoring system in your tire tread will detach and damage important
Audi was calibrated with “Audi Original vehicle components.
Tires” > page 268. Audi recommends using — The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) is not
these tires. working or is continuously running
— The tire pressure monitoring system is not
working
Storing tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in- If it is no longer possible to continue driving de-
dicator
spite having run-flat tires, see an authorized Audi
If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced, dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
it must be confirmed in the system. sistance.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the ZA\ WARNING
tire pressures in all four tires meet the speci-
Run-flat tires may only be used on vehicles
fied values and are adapted to the load
that were equipped with them at the factory.
> page 271.
— The vehicle must have suspension designed
> Switch the ignition on.
for run-flat tires and a factory-installed tire
pressure monitoring system.
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure
— Incorrect use of run-flat tires can lead to ve-
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
hicle damage or accidents. Contact an au-
now.
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility to learn if run-flat tires may
@ Tips
be used on your vehicle and if so, which
Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains ones.
are installed. —If run-flat tires are used, they must be in-
stalled on all four wheels. Mixing tire types
Run-flat tires is not permitted.
Applies to: vehicles with run-flat tires — If you have to drive when the tire pressure is
Run-flat tires can allow you to remain driving too low or there is no tire pressure, note the
when there is a loss of pressure. following:
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
Run-flat tires have reinforced sidewalls that pro- because this increases the risk of an acci-
tect the tire if there is a loss of pressure. dent. Observe any laws specific to the
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicates a country where you are driving.
loss of pressure in one or several tires, you can — Avoid full-throttle acceleration, heavy
continue driving on run-flat tires for at least braking, and fast cornering, because this
20 mi (30 km). Drive to an authorized Audi dealer increases the risk of an accident.
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to —The vehicle may become more difficult to
have the problem corrected. control.
280
Wheels
— See an authorized Audi dealer or author-

ized Audi Service Facility for assistance if
the tire is too heavily damaged.
— Have the faulty tires replaced and the rims
checked for damage by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
— The driver is responsible for the vehicle, for
correcting the tire pressure, and for replac-
ing faulty parts. Therefore, always adjust
your driving to the current situation.
@) Tips
— Audi Original run-flat tires can be identified
by the “AOE” labeling on the tire sidewall.
— You can use the tire mobility kit* on run-flat
tires > page 288.
80B012721BA
281
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning seals on the side windows, doors, lids or the sun-
roof* or at tires, rubber hoses, insulating materi-
General information al, sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of
at least 16 in (40 cm).
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi-
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when Plug-in hybrid drive: Do not direct the stream of
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage water towards the wall mount clip*.
and paint defects on the body.
Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
The required cleaning and care products can be washer.
obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
thorized Service Facility. Read and follow the in-
structions for use on the packaging. The water temperature must not be above 140 °F
(60 °C).
ZA\ WARNING Automatic car wash
— Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
Spray off the vehicle before washing.
can be dangerous to your health.
— Always store cleaning and care products out Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed
of reach of children to reduce the risk of poi- and the windshield wipers are off. Make sure that
soning. the vehicle is still able to roll during the washing
process in the car wash. Follow instructions from
@ For the sake of the environment the car wash operator, especially if there are ac-
— Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning cessories attached to your vehicle.
products if possible. If possible, use car washes that do not have
— Do not dispose of cleaning and care prod- brushes.
ucts with household trash.
Washing by hand
Car washes Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work-
ing downward using a soft sponge or cleaning
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve-
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight hand
increase the damaging effect. To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with washing, first remove dust and large particles
plenty of water. from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fin-
gerprints are best removed with a special cleaner
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree for matte finish paint.
sap are best removed with plenty of water anda
microfiber cloth. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To re-
duce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once not use too much pressure.
road salt stops being used for the season.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then
Pressure washers clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash- fiber cloth.
er, always follow the operating instructions pro- Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air
vided with the pressure washer. This is especially dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois. >
important in regard to the pressure and spraying
distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the
282
Care and cleaning
A WARNING height and width of the inside of the car

wash.
—To reduce the risk of accidents, only wash —To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
the vehicle when the ignition is off and fol- wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
low the instructions from the car wash oper- —To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
ator.
decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
—To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself —To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
from sharp metal components when wash- do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen
ing the underbody or the inside of the wheel
sponges, or similar items.
housings.
— When washing matte finish painted vehicle
— After washing the vehicle, the braking effect components:
may be delayed due to moisture on the
— To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
brake rotors or ice in the winter. This in-
face, do not use polishing agents or hard
creases the risk of an accident. The brakes
wax.
must be dried with a few careful brake appli-
— Never use protective wax. It can destroy
cations.
the matte finish effect.
@) Note — Do not place any stickers or magnetic
signs on vehicle components painted with
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car matte finish paint. The paint could be
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in damaged when the stickers or magnets
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. are removed.
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only
be folded in and out using the power folding (@) For the sake of the environment
pee Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially de-

—To reduce the risk of damage to the rims
signed for that purpose. This will reduce the
and tires, compare the width between the
risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from
wheels on your vehicle with the distance be-
entering the sewer system.
tween the guide rails in the car wash.
—To reduce the risk of damage, compare the
height and width of your vehicle with the
Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle are not listed, consult an authorized Audi dealer
components, refer to the following tables. The or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
information contained there is simply recommen- __ the information found in > A.
dations. For questions or for components that
Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solution
Windshield wiper | Deposits Soft cloth with glass cleaner, > page 59
blades
Headlights/ Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution?)
tail lights
Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product
80B012721BA
camera lenses Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning sol-
ution
Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray >
283
Care and cleaning

Wheels Road salt Water
Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution
Exhaust tail pipes | Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if nec-
essary
Decorative parts | Deposits Mild soap solution ®), a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
and less steel, if necessary
trim
Paint Paint damage Repair with touch-up paint
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, con-
sult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Water no longer Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
beads on the surface
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen with water immediately and remove with a micro-
sects, bird droppings, fiber cloth
tree sap, and road
salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ® anda
taminants such as soft cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon compo- Deposits clean the same way as painted parts > page 282
nents
Decorative decals | Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
Audi e-tron Deposits Soft, dry towel
charging system
Wall mount clip | Deposits Soft towel with alcohol-free cleaning solution
2) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Interior cleaning
Window glass Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorative parts {Deposits Mild soap solution®
and
trim
284
Care and cleaning

Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth
Heavier deposits Mild soap solution ®), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
tion, if necessary
Displays/instru- | Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the
ment cluster instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush.
Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®)
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution ), allow to dry before letting them re-
tract
Textiles, Deposits adhering to | Vacuum cleaner
artificial leather, |the surface
microfiber Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
etc.
Certain types of de- Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
posits such as ink, afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary)
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Natural leather Fresh stains Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®
Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
such as coffee, tea, dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
such as oil, make-up, for leather
etc. dried stains: oil cleaning spray
Certain types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from
light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored
conditioning cream, if necessary.
Carbon compo- Deposits Clean the same way as plastic components
nents
a) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
ZA WARNING darkness, and when the sun is low, these coat-

ings can cause increased glare, which increas-
80B012721BA
The windshield must not be treated with wa-

es the risk of an accident. They can also cause
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un-
wiper blade chatter.
der unfavorable conditions, such as wetness,
285
Care and cleaning
ZA\ WARNING — To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle

must be free of dirt and dust before pol-
— Never immerse the Audi e-tron charging sys- ishing or waxing.
tem and connectors in water. —To prevent paint damage, do not polish or
— The Audi e-tron charging system must only wax the vehicle in direct sunlight.
be cleaned when the control unit is com- —To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
pletely disconnected from the power supply polish away rust spots.
and from the vehicle.
— Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi-
ately because they could damage the
@) Note paint.
— Headlights and tail lights — Decorative decals
— Never clean the headlights or tail lights —To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
with a dry cloth or sponge because the any rough powder or abrasive cleaning
lights could be damaged. products.
— Do not use any cleaning products that con- —To reduce the risk of damage, do not pol-
tain alcohol, because they could cause ish decorative decals that have a matte or
cracks to form. printed finish.
— Wheels — Due to the risk of damage, do not use an
— Never use any paint polish or other abra- ice scraper to remove snow and ice on win-
sive materials. dows with decorative decals on them.
— Damage to the protective layer on the — Displays and instrument cluster
rims, such as stone chips or scratches, — Make sure that the display and instrument
must be repaired immediately. cluster are switched off and have cooled
— Camera lenses down before cleaning. To switch off the
— Never use warm or hot water to remove center display, select on the MMI home
snow or ice from the camera lens. This screen: SETTINGS > Display & brightness
could cause the lens to crack. > MMI > Screen cleaning.
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials or — Displays, the instrument cluster, and the
alcohol to clean the camera lens. This trim surrounding it must not be cleaned
could cause scratches and cracks. with dry cleaning methods because they
— Door windows could become scratched.
— Remove snow and ice on windows and ex- — Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be-
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To re- tween the instrument cluster and the
duce the risk of scratches, move the scra- trim, because that could cause damage.
per only in one direction and not back and — Controls
forth. — Make sure that no fluids enter the con-
— Never remove snow or ice from door win- trols, because this could cause damage.
dows and mirrors using warm or hot water — Safety belts
because this could cause cracks to form. — Do not remove the safety belts to clean
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rear them.
window defogger, do not apply any stick- — Never clean safety belts or their compo-
ers on the heating wires on the inside of nents with chemicals or with corrosive flu-
the window. ids or solvents and never allow sharp ob-
— Decorative parts and trim jects to come into contact with the safety
— Never use chrome care or cleaning prod- belts. This could cause damage to the belt
ucts. webbing.
— Paint
286
Care and cleaning
—If there is damage to the webbing, the

@) Tips
connections, the retractors, or the buck-
les, have them replaced by an authorized — Insects are easier to remove from paint that
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- has been freshly waxed.
cility. — Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
— Textiles/artificial leather/microfiber forming.
— Never treat artificial leather or microfiber — Decorative decals can age due to environ-
mental conditions, which can result in dam-
with leather care products, solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or simi- age such as brittleness. The color may fade
lar products. if exposed to excessive sunlight.
— Have a cleaning specialist remove stub-
born stains to reduce the risk of damage. Taking your vehicle out
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard of service
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
If you would like to take your vehicle out of serv-
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
ice for a long period of time, contact an author-
the seat.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
ty. You can receive information about the meas-
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
ures to take depending on the conditions for tak-
damage to the surface.
ing the vehicle out of service (duration, location,
— Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
etc.).
ple on clothing, can damage seat covers.
Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
closed.
— Natural leather
— Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
—To help prevent the leather from fading,
do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight
for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
hicle parked for long periods of time, you
should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
— Wall mount clip
— Do not us any abrasive cleaning products
or any that contain alcohol, because these
increase the risk of discoloration.
80B012721BA
287
Emergency assistance
Emergency assistance The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack, tire mobility kit
and compressor are stored in the luggage com-
General information partment under the cargo floor cover.
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving > Lift the cargo floor using the handle © fig. 181.
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event > Applies to: vehicles with spare tire: Turn the
of a flat tire, park the vehicle ona level surface. handle counter-clockwise and remove the spare
If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful. tire.
> Set the parking brake.
Plug-in hybrid drive: The vehicle tool kit, the tire
> Switch the emergency flashers on.
mobility kit and the compressor are located in
> Have the passengers exit the vehicle. They
the side trim panel@ and Q) and in the compart-
should move to a safe place, for example be-
ment @) under the cargo floor cover > fig. 182.
hind a guard rail.
_Z\ WARNING @ Tips

— The vehicle jack in your vehicle is mainte-
Follow the steps given above. This is for your
nance-free.
protection and the for the safety of others on
— Plug-in hybrid drive: The vehicle must not
the road.
be operated without a tire mobility kit.
Equipment Tire mobility kit

Vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit, a Preparation
vehicle jack
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
Applies to: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit,
and vehicle jack
> Read and follow the important safety precau-
tions > page 288.
» Set the parking brake.
> Select the “P” position.
> Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible > page 288.
ORT Ranma muie) isa

Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
B8K-1475
Fig. 183 Tire: tire damage that cannot be repaired

TT eeeee TTL
Applies to: vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive The tire repair is only meant for temporary use.
Fig. 182 Luggage compartment: side trim panel and com- Change the damaged tire as soon as possible
partment SA.
288
If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail, — Follow the legal regulations that are appli-
do not remove the object from the tire. cable in the country where you are operating
the vehicle.
The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures
as low as -4 °F (-20 °C).
Repairing tires
The tire mobility kit must not be used: Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
—If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
[RAZ-0054]
than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ ©fig. 183
— If the rim is damaged (2)
— If you have driven with very low tire pressure or
without air in the tire @)
Service Facility for assistance in these situations.
ZA WARNING
— Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
[RAZ-0055]
ly be used temporarily.
— The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing.
— If tire sealant comes into contact with your
eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the af-
fected area immediately with clean water.
— Do not inhale the fumes.
— If you swallow any of the tire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and Fig. 185 Tire mobility kit connection
drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately. Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
— Change your clothing immediately if it out and ready for use > page 288.
comes into contact with tire sealant.
Setting up the tire mobility kit
— If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately. > Open the cover (2) on the compressor!)
— Keep the tire sealant away from children. > fig. 184.
> Remove the connector () and pressure hose (5)
@ Tips from the housing.
> Connect the compressor pressure hose (5) to
— If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You
the flange © on the tire sealant bottle @.
can then peel it off like a sticker.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the
— Note the expiration date on the sealant bot- bottom into the opening @) on the compressor.
tle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized > Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- > Connect the filler hose @) to the valve ()
cility. > fig. 185.
— Radio reception can be interrupted when > Connect the plug @) > fig. 184 to an outlet in
operating the compressor. the vehicle. >
80B012721BA
2) The compressor may look different. However, the way it is

operated is generally the same.
289
> Switch the ignition on. — Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
— Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-
Inflating a tire
ing fast around curves.
> Move the switch (8) > fig. 185 on the compres- — The vehicle may become more difficult to
sor into position I. control.
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) — If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
the gauge. Service Facility for assistance.
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the
filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet
(@) For the sake of the environment
(10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant
can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
again > A\.
Service Facility for disposal.
ZA\ WARNING Gi) Tips

— Read and follow the manufacturer's safety
Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant
precautions on the compressor and in the in-
from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
structions on the bottle of sealant.
Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
— Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not con-
Changing a tire
tinue driving.
— If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au- You must complete the preparation before
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. changing a tire.
> Read and follow the important safety precau-

G@) Tips tions > page 288.
Do not operate the compressor for more than > Set the parking brake.
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat. > Select the “P” position.
Once the compressor has cooled, you can con- » When towing a trailer: disconnect the trailer
tinue to use it. from your vehicle.
> Lay out the vehicle tool kit > page 288 and the
eet als} spare tire > page 293.
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit > Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: Select
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. Service > Air suspension: wheel change.
80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobili- > Switch the ignition off.
ty kit within the driver's field of vision.
>» Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi-
ZA\ WARNING
nutes and check the tire pressure.
> If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130 The vehicle must also be secured to prevent it
kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do from rolling when using the vehicle jack*. Use
not continue driving. suitable objects to block the front and back of
the wheel that is diagonal from the wheel
Z\ WARNING with the flat tire.
Pay attention to the following after repairing

the tire:
290
Removing the caps Raising the vehicle

Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack
B4L-1337
BFY-0032
Fig. 186 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps
> Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit
onto the cap until it engages > fig. 186.
>» Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
Loosening the wheel bolts

B8K-1481
Fig. 189 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack
» Place the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit

ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if
necessary. On a slippery surface such as tile,
you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber
Fig. 187 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
mat > /\.
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to
> Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool
the tire that will be changed >fig. 188. Behind
kit all the way onto the wheel bolt.
the marking, there is a lifting point on the side
> Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to
sill for the vehicle jack.
the left. To achieve the required torque, hold
> Turn the handwheel to raise the vehicle jack un-
the end of the wheel wrench*. If the wheel bolt
der the lifting point on the side sill until the
will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel
bracket on the jack @) completely covers the
wrench* with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle
notch on the vehicle.
securely while doing this and make sure your
> Align the vehicle jack so the bracket (@) covers
footing is stable.
the notch and the base @) is flat on the ground.
The base (2) must be directly under the mount-
ZA WARNING ing point @.
To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen > Mount the crank on the vehicle jack: insert the
the wheel bolts gently one turn before raising crank into the opening on the handwheel. Turn
the vehicle with the vehicle jack*. the crank to the left or right to secure it.
> Continue raising the vehicle jack with the crank
until the wheel lifts off the ground slightly. >
80B012721BA
291
6
ZA\ WARNING +
4
0
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no oO
one is in the vehicle before raising it.

— Make sure the vehicle jack is stable. The risk
of injury is increased when the ground is
slippery or soft, because the vehicle jack
could slide or sink.
— Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack
provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle Fig. 191 Wheel: alignment pin in the top hole
jack designed for another vehicle, your vehi-
cle could slip and cause injury. Removing a wheel
— Position the vehicle jack only at the desig-
> Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
nated mounting points on the side sill and
the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from
align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack
the vehicle tool kit > fig. 190 and place it ona
could slip and cause an injury if it does not
clean surface.
have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
> Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle
—To reduce the risk of injury, do not raise any
tool kit in the empty wheel bolt hole by hand
other vehicles or other loads using the vehi-
> fig. 191.
cle jack provided by the factory.
> Remove the rest of the wheel bolts.
— Applies to: vehicles with air suspension:
> Remove the wheel >(). The alignment pin re-
Changes in temperature or load can affect mains in the hole while doing this.
the height of the stopped vehicle.
— To reduce the risk of an accident, never start Installing a wheel
the engine when the vehicle is raised. Read the directions on > page 293 when instal-
—To reduce the risk of injury, no work should ling unidirectional tires.
be performed under the vehicle while it is
raised. > Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@.
> Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
@) Note using the hex socket.
> Remove the alignment pin and tighten the re-
Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the
maining wheel bolt.
vehicle jack only at the designated mounting
> Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle
jack*.
could be damaged.
> Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern
using the wheel wrench*.
moving and installing a wheel
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and
tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the
i B8k-1479|
wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces

must be removed before installing the wheel.
~~ Z\ WARNING
— Read and follow the important information
and notes under > page 268.
— Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver
handle or the hex socket wrench with the
Fig. 190 Wheel: internal hex socket to turn the wheel bolts
ratchet to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
This increases the risk of an accident, >
292
because you will not be able to achieve the and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi
correct tightening specification. dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
as possible.
() Note There are some restrictions on the use of the col-
When removing or installing the wheel, the lapsible spare tire. The collapsible spare tire has
rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the been designed specifically for your type of vehi-
rotor. Work carefully and have a second per- cle. Do not replace it with the collapsible spare
son help you. tire from another type of vehicle.
The collapsible spare tire is located in the lug-

Unidirectional tires gage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows Requirement: the vehicle tool kit > page 288 and
on the tire sidewall that point in the running di- the compressor must be laid out.
rection. You must always maintain the specified
Removing
running direction. This is necessary to ensure the
tire's optimal performance in regard to adhesion, > Lift the cargo floor using the handle.
running noise, and friction, and to reduce the risk > Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
of hydroplaning. move it.
> Remove the collapsible spare tire.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the uni-
directional tire design, you should replace faulty You must inflate the collapsible spare tire before-
tires as soon as possible and restore the correct hand in order to use it.
running direction on all of the tires.
Inflating
> Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
spare tire.
> Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if necessa- > Tighten the compressor hose on the collapsible
ry. spare tire valve.
> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated > Connect the compressor hose to a vehicle sock-
place. et and switch it on.
> If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare » Let the compressor run until the specified value
wheel well, store it securely in the luggage on the tire pressure sticker is reached
compartment > page 84. > page 271, fig. 180 >©.
> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel > Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
as soon as possible.
> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the MMI Returning to storage
=> page 280. > To release air, turn the valve insert. See an au-
> The wheel bolt tightening specification must be thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
100 ft lbs (140 Nm). Have it checked as soon as Facility.
possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully > Turn the valve insert back once the air has been
until then. released.
> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as > Wait several hours before placing the collapsi-
possible. ble spare tire in the spare wheel well. Only then
will it fold down completely so that you can
Collapsible spare tire store it securely.
Applies to: vehicles with collapsible spare tire > Then screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
80B012721BA
> Secure the collapsible spare tire with the hand-

The collapsible spare tire is intended for short-
wheel.
term use only. Have the damaged tire checked
> Fold the cargo floor cover back into place. >
293
Snow chains Jump starting

Using snow chains on the collapsible spare tire is
not permitted for technical reasons.
You should only perform the steps that follow if
If you need to drive with snow chains and your
you have the necessary tools and technical ex-
vehicle has a flat tire, install the collapsible spare
pertise.
tire on the axle where snow chains are not per-
mitted > page 277. Install the snow chains on If the engine does not start because the vehicle
the tire that you removed, and install that in battery is drained, you can jump start your vehi-
place of the flat tire. cle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are
needed to do this.
ZA WARNING
Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal
— Only use the collapsible spare tire in emer-
voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle
gencies and drive very carefully, especially if
battery that is giving power must not be less
it is more than six years old.
than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery.
— The compressor and the hose can become
very hot during operation which increases Jump start cable
the risk of burn injuries. Only use a jump start cable with a large enough
— After installing a collapsible spare tire, the diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifica-
tire pressure must be checked as quickly as tions.
possible to reduce the risk of an accident.
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) Only use a jump start cable with insulated termi-
with the collapsible spare tire. Driving faster nal clamps.
than that increases the risk of an accident. Positive cable - usually red.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
Negative cable - usually black.
acceleration or braking and driving fast
around curves with the collapsible spare
tire.
ZA WARNING
— Never drive using more than one collapsible — A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
spare tire, because this increases the risk of tures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-
an accident. tery is frozen, it must be thawed before con-
— Normal tires or winter tires must not be necting the jump start cables. If it is not,
mounted on the collapsible spare tire rim. the risk of an explosion and chemical burns
increases. After jump starting the vehicle,
@ Note drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to
The compressor must be switched off after six
have the vehicle battery checked.
minutes at the most to reduce the risk of
— Read the warnings when working in the en-
overheating. Let the compressor cool down
gine compartment > page 246.
for several minutes before using it again.
— Handling the jump start cables incorrectly
may cause the vehicle battery to explode
and lead to serious injuries.
() Note
— Jump start cables can cause considerable
damage to the vehicle electrical system if
they are connected incorrectly.
294
— Plug-in hybrid drive: You must not give a Connecting the positive cable (red) to the
jump start with your vehicle. This could positive terminal
cause significant damage to the electrical > Open the cover on the positive terminal
system in your vehicle. > fig. 192.
1. Attach one end of the positive cable (red) to
@) Tips the jump-start pin @ © fig. 193 on your vehi-
— There must be no contact between the cle.
vehicles, or else voltage could flow when 2. Attach the other end of the positive cable
connecting the positive terminal and drain (red) to the positive terminal @) on the pow-
the vehicle battery of the vehicle providing er source.
the jump start.
Connecting the negative cable (black) to the
— The drained vehicle battery must be con-
negative terminal
nected correctly to the electrical system.
— Switch off electrical equipment that is not 3. Attach one end of the negative cable (black)
needed. to the negative terminal @) on the power
source.
4. Attach the other end of the negative cable
(black) to the jump-start pin @) on the vehi-
Both jump start cables must be connected in the cle.
correct order.
Starting the engine
a
nN3
aS=
> Start the engine in the vehicle giving the charge
a and let it run at idle.
o
> Now start the engine in your vehicle, which has
the drained battery.
> If the engine does not start, stop the starting
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it
after approximately 30 seconds.
> Turn on the rear window defogger in your vehi-
cle in order to reduce any voltage peaks that
Fig. 192 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start
may occur when disconnecting the jump start
cables or a charger
cables. The headlights must be switched off.
> With the engines running, remove the cables in
reverse order of the way they were installed.
> Close the cover on the positive terminal.
Z\ WARNING
— Never connect the jump start cable directly
to your vehicle battery. Only use the connec-
tions in the engine compartment.
— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the
terminal clamps. The cable must also not
come into contact with vehicle components
The jump start cable connections are located in
that conduct electricity when it is connected
the engine compartment.
to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This
Follow the information about the vehicle battery
80B012721BA
can cause a short circuit.

=> page 256. — The plugs on the battery cells must not be
opened. >
295
— Keep ignition sources (such as open flames, Tow bar and towing cable
burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi- The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow-
cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo- ing cable. Both drivers should be familiar with
sion. the special considerations when towing, especial-
— Route the jump start cables so they cannot ly when using a towing cable.
get caught in the moving parts in the other
Always make sure the traction force does not ex-
vehicle's engine compartment.
ceed the permitted level and there are no shock
©) Note loading conditions. There is always the risk of the

coupling becoming overloaded when driving off-
Please note that the connecting process previ- road.
ously described for the jump start cables is in-
tended for when your vehicle is being jump For the most safety and security, drive with a tow
started. bar. You should use a towing cable only ifa tow
bar is not available. Use a towing cable made of
G) Tips synthetic elastic cable similar elastic material.
Make sure that the connected jump start ca-

bles have sufficient contact with metal.
ZA WARNING
— Towing highly increases the risk of an acci-
dent, for example from colliding with the
Towing
towing vehicle.
ere eeeurisela) — To reduce the risk of an accident, do not al-
low anyone to remain inside the vehicle
You should only perform the steps that follow if
when it is being transported by a tow truck
you have the necessary tools and technical ex-
or a special transporter.
pertise.
Towing requires a certain amount of practice. @) Note

Audi recommends contacting a towing company — If normal towing is not possible, for exam-
to have the vehicle transported. ple if the transmission is faulty or if the
You should only have your vehicle towed by an- towing distance is greater than 30 miles
other vehicle when disabled in exceptional cir- (50 km), then transport the vehicle on a
cumstances. Inexperienced drivers should not
special carrier.
tow. — If the vehicle is towed by a tow truck at the
axle that is not permitted, this can cause se-
Notes on towing vere damage to the transmission.
When the engine is stopped, the transmission — The vehicle must not be tow started for
will not be sufficiently lubricated if traveling at technical reasons.
high speeds and long distances:
G) Tips
— The maximum permitted towing speed is 30
— If the power supply is interrupted, then it
mph (50 km/h).
will not be possible to move the selector
— The maximum permitted towing distance is 30
lever out of the "P" position. The parking
miles (50 km).
lock must be released using the emergency
Additional information on towing with a tow release before towing the vehicle
truck => page 103.
— Switch Audi pre sense* off > page 170 when
The vehicle may only be towed with the front axle
raised. Do not wrap any chains or cables around loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier,
the brake lines. train, ship, or other type of transportation, >
296
or when towing the vehicle. This can prevent diately and consult an authorized Audi deal-
an undesired intervention from the pre er or qualified repair facility.
sense* system.
— Follow the local legal regulations for tow-
Front towing loop
ing.
Read and follow the important information under

=> page 296.
Preparations
BX
> Only secure the towing cable or tow bar at the
designated towing loops > page 297,
=> page 298.
Fig. 194 Front bumper: installing the towing loop
> Make sure the towing cable is not twisted. Oth-
erwise it could disconnect from the towing loop The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-
while towing. cated on the right side of the front bumper.
> Switch the emergency flashers on in both
vehicles > page 52. However, do not do this if it > Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool
prohibited by law. kit > page 288.
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
Towing vehicle (front) => fig. 194. The cap will loosen from the bump-
> Only start to drive when the towing cable is er.
taut. > Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into
> Press the brake pedal very carefully. the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the
> Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers. towing eye completely and securely in the
mount.
Vehicle being towed (rear) > After using, place the towing loop back in the
> Make sure the ignition is switched on so that vehicle tool kit.
the steering wheel is not locked and so that you
can use the turn signals, the horn, and the Z\ WARNING
windshield wipers if needed > A\. If the towing loop is not tightened until it
> Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped stops when installing, the threads may be
may impair the function of the brake booster pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
and power steering. You would then need to in an accident.
use more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
> Release the parking brake > page 111. @ Tips
> Select the “N” selector lever position.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap
> Make sure the towing cable is always taut.
can vary.
ZA WARNING
— Never tow a vehicle using a tow bar or tow-
ing cable if the vehicle does not have electri-
cal power.
— If the vehicle runs out of power while it is
80B012721BA
being towed, stop towing the vehicle imme-
297
Rear towing loop
RAZ-1119
Fig. 195 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop
The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-

cated on the right rear of the bumper.
> Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool

kit > page 288.
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
> fig. 195. The cap will loosen from the bump-
er.
> Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into
the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the
towing eye completely and securely in the
mount.
>» After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
If the towing loop is not tightened until it

stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
in an accident.
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap

can vary.
298
Fuses and bulbs
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that

have burned through.
The fuses are located in the footwell under the

foot rest (left-hand drive vehicle) () or behind
the cover (right-hand drive vehicle) @). Additional
fuses are located on the front side of the cockpit
(driver's side) © and under the left cover in the
luggage compartment (6).
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment

off.
> Check the table that follows to see which fuse
belongs to the equipment.
> Remove the screwdriver and the reversible Torx
bit from the vehicle tool kit > page 288.
> Remove the footrest or the corresponding cov-
er.
> Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse
panel, if necessary > page 300, fig. 198.
> Remove the clip from the rear side of the cover
» Remove the fuse using the clip.

> Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that
has the same amp rating.
> Reinstall the plastic bracket.
>» Reattach the footrest or the cover.
Fuse color identification

BFY-0092
Color Current rating

in amps
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 723)
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent [25
Green 30
Orange 40
Z\ WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.
80B012721BA
Fig. 197 Driver's side cockpit (left-hand drive/right-hand

This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
drive vehicles): cover ©, left side of luggage compartment:
cover () tem and increases the risk of fire.
299
Fuses and bulbs
a
@) Note Ss$
2
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you 8
have installed it, have the electrical system

checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.
G@) Tips
— The following table does not list fuse loca-
tions that are not used.
— Some of the equipment listed in the follow-
ing tables applies only to certain model ver-
sions or certain optional equipment.
3
2
=& Fig. 199 Front passenger's footwell (right-hand drive vehi-
a
cle): fuse panel with plastic clip
Fuse panel
No. | Equipment
Catalytic converter heating
2 |Engine components
Exhaust doors, fuel injectors, radiator in-
let, crankcase housing heating
Vacuum pump, hot water pump, NOx sen-
4 |sor, particulate sensor, biodiesel sensor,
exhaust doors
Brake light sensor
6 | Engine valves, camshaft adjustment
Heated oxygen sensors, mass airflow sen-
sor, water pump
Fig. 198 Driver's footwell (left-hand drive vehicle): fuse Water pump, high pressure pump, high
panel with plastic clip 8 | pressure regulator valve, temperature
valve, engine mount
Hot water pump, motor relay, 48 V drive-
train generator, 48 V water pump
10 | Oil pressure sensor, oil temperature sensor
Clutch position sensor, 48 V drivetrain
11 | generator, water pump, 12 V drivetrain
generator
12 | Engine valves, engine mount
13 | Engine cooling
300
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel
(4) (brown) Fuse panel © (black)
14 | Fuel injectors, engine control module 1 Left rear door control module, left rear
15 | Ignition coils, heated oxygen sensors power window
16 | Fuel pump 12 | Parking heater
Fuse panel (8) (red) Fuse panel (©) (black)

No. | Equipment No. | Equipment
Anti-theft alarm system Front seat electronic, seat ventilation,
2. [Engine control module 1 rearview mirror, testclimate control sys-
tem control panel, windshield heating, di-
3 Left front seat electronics, lumbar sup- agnostic connection
port, massaging seat a A 7
Diagnostic interface, vehicle electrical sys-
4 |Automatic transmission selector lever 2 tem-control module
5 [Horn 3 |Sound generator

6 | Parking brake 4 |Clutch position sensor
7 | Diagnostic interface 5 | Engine start, emergency shut-off
8 | Roof electronics control module Diagnostic connection, traffic information
9 |Emergency call module 6 antenna (TMC)
10 | Airbag control module 7 |USB input
11 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC), An- 8 | Garage door opener
ti-Lock Braking System (ABS) Audi adaptive cruise control, distance reg-
12 | Diagnostic connection, light/rain sensor 2 ulation
13 | Climate control system 10 | Exterior sound, active accelerator pedal
14 | Right front door control module 11 | Front camera
15 | Climate control system compressor 12 | Right headlight
16 | Brake system pressure reservoir 13 | Left headlight
Fuze panel © (black) 14 |Transmission fluid cooling
No. | Equipment 15 |Alarm and hands-free calling system
1 | Front seat heating Fuse panel (©) (red)

2 |Windshield wipers No. | Equipment
3 |Left headlight electronics 1 {Ignition coils
4 | Panoramic glass roof 2 |Climate control system compressor
5 |Left front door control module 5 |Left headlight
6 | Sockets 6 |Automatic transmission
7 Right rear door control module, right rear 7 |Instrument panel
power window 8 |Climate control system blower
All wheel drive control module 9 | Right headlight
9 |Right headlight electronics 10 | Dynamic steering
10 Windshield washer system/headlight 11 | Engine start, thermal management
washer system control module 7
80B012721BA
12 |Oil pump
301
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse assignment - Driver's side of the Fuse assignment - Left side of the luggage
(ole 4) g (eTTataahg
cy¢ Q
oO
2
=
a=
Fig. 200 Driver side cockpit: fuse panel with plastic bracket
Fuse panel
No. | Equipment
4 |Head-up display
5 |Audi music interface, USB input
6 | Front climate control system control panel
7 |Steering column lock
8 | Center display
Fig. 201 Left side of the luggage compartment: fuse panel
9 |Instrument cluster with plastic clip
10 | Volume control
11 | Light switch, switch module Fuse panel (@) (black)
12 | Steering column electronics No. | Equipment
14 | Infotainment system 1 |Thermal management, coolant pumps
15 | Steering column adjustment 2 | Windshield defroster
16 Steering column electronics, steering 3_|Windshield defroster
wheel heating 5 |Air suspension/suspension control
6 | Automatic transmission
7 |Rear window defogger
8 | Rear seat heating
9 |Left tail lights
10 | Airbag control module
Luggage compartment lid lock, fuel filler
11 | door lock, convenience system control
module
12 |Luggage compartment lid
Fuse panel (8) (red)

No. | Equipment
2 |High-voltage battery
3 | High-voltage battery water pump
4 | Electric motor
302
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel
(8) (red) Facility in cases of doubt. These facilities have
6 | Electric compressor
the correct tools and replacement parts as well
as the required technical knowledge.
8 |Climate control system compressor
9 |Temperature control
LED lights*
10 | High-voltage battery Your vehicle is equipped with maintenance-free
11 | Charging device headlights and tail lights. However, if a light bulb
needs to be replaced, please contact an author-
Fuse panel
© (brown) ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
No. | Equipment ty.
Exterior antenna
Z\ WARNING
2 | Audi phone box
If you still would like to try replacing the
Right front seat electronics, lumbar sup-
bulbs in your vehicle yourself, read the warn-
port, massaging seat
ings regarding working in the engine compart-
4 |Side assist ment > A\ in General information on
6 | Tire pressure monitoring system page 246.
Convenience access and start authoriza-
tion control module cy Note
Auxiliary heating, tank module Make sure the covers are fitted correctly on
9 |Climatized cup holder the headlight and tail light so that no water
will leak in from the outside and the light
TV tuner, data exchange and telematics
function will not be impaired.
” control module
11 | Auxiliary battery control module
12 | Garage door opener
13 | Rearview camera, peripheral cameras
14 | Right tail lights
16 | Airbag control module
Fuse panel
(£) (red)
No. | Equipment
Exhaust treatment
Mm|w
Right trailer hitch light

Trailer hitch
WO) O;N]/
Left trailer hitch light

Trailer hitch socket
All wheel drive control module, sport dif-
10
ferential
11 | Exhaust treatment
Bulbs
Replacing bulbs
80B012721BA
Audi recommends having a bulb replaced by an

303
Data privacy
Data privacy airbags. These vehicle control modules store data

while driving normally that is required by an au-
Privacy notice thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility for diagnosis and repair purposes. Only
You can find information about responsibility for
certain types of data are recorded for a very short
data protection in the MMI.
period of time ifa control module has detected a
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SET- system event. No noises, conversations, or im-
TINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi ages will be recorded in the vehicle.
connect.
The data may include information such as the ve-
hicle speed, the direction of travel, and informa-
Image recording tion about the brake system, or also the behavior
See aye Le MUL ea La) of the restraint system in the event of an acci-
Applies to: vehicles with surrounding area monitoring dent. The stored data can be exported and down-
loaded with special devices, which must be con-
Some vehicle functions require the vehicle’s path nected directly to the vehicle.
to be detected and evaluated. This is done by
cameras installed permanently on the vehicle On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
that detect objects in the vehicle's surroundings There is a diagnostic connector socket in the driv-
(such as obstacles or guard rails). The live images er's side footwell to read out the various control
from the cameras are transmitted to the applica- modules and the event data recorder. Data re-
ble control module. garding the function and condition of the elec-
The camera images are transmitted to the appli- tronic control modules is stored in the event
cable control module and stored for processing. memory. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or
The control module analyzes the current camera authorized Audi Service Facility read out and de-
image using image evaluation software. This im- lete the event memory.
age evaluation software detects anonymized
technical measurements, such as distances to ob-
ZA WARNING
jects. The control module evaluates these techni- — Incorrect use of the connection port for the
cal measurements and makes it possible for the On Board Diagnostic System can cause mal-
assist systems to control the vehicle, if necessary. functions, which can then result in accidents
and serious injuries.
Data memories — Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the
motor data.
~
1p
o
S|
=z rash data recorder
x
a.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
Fig. 202 Driver's side footwell: connection port for the On ing how a vehicle's system performed. The EDR is
Board Diagnostic System (OBD) designed to record data related to vehicle dynam-
ics and safety systems for a short period of time,
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
modules for various vehicle systems such as the cle is designed to record such data as:
304
Data privacy
— How various systems in your vehicle were oper- of Audi connect remote vehicle services, and
ating; adaptation to customer expectations. For exam-
— Whether or not the driver and passenger safety ple, various technical function data, environmen-
belts were buckled/fastened; tal data, driving data, and usage data will be col-
— How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the lected for a specific purpose and forwarded to
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Audi. The data will be sent from the vehicle at
— How fast the vehicle was traveling. the time the data was collected.
These data can help provide a better understand- Applies to: MMI: You can find additional informa-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and in- tion about data collection in the MMI. Select on
juries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal
vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; notes > About Audi connect.
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal If you would like to deny data transmission to
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. Audi, contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are re- thorized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
corded. However, other parties, such as law en- tion. You also have the option to deactivate data
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the transmission within the privacy settings.
type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
Privacy settings
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
SETTINGS > Privacy settings.
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in- When using Audi connect services or during data
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the collection, data will be transmitted from the ve-
EDR. hicle.
> To display additional information about the pri-
Data usage
vacy settings and the associated symbols in the
Audi can read out the information stored in the status bar, press @ in the MMI.
data memories or similar data, or give this infor-
mation to third parties, especially in the follow- Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
ing situations: Setting the maximum privacy settings
— If the vehicle owner or lessee agrees When the Activate privacy mode function is
— If there is an official request from the police switched on, the data connection is deactivated
— Ifa court or authorities request it or sending of data is restricted, but all safety-re-
If legally permitted, Audi can also use the data lated, legal, or contractually required Audi con-
for analysis of vehicle operation and safety per- nect services remain activated. The majority of
formance or provide this data to third parties for the Audi connect services are deactivated.
research purposes. When the function is switched off, the data con-
nection will be available in order to use Audi con-
Transmitted information nect services.
Data collection Adjusting individual privacy settings

Applies to: vehicles with data collection
In the MMI, you can adjust individually which da-
Depending on the country, Audi may collect data ta should be transmitted from the vehicle. If you
80B012721BA
for the following purposes, for example: offer switch on a data category, the data will be trans-
and product optimization, public safety, provision mitted. >
305
Data privacy
Depending on the country, you may also be able main available without restrictions and
to deactivate individual services for your vehicle continue to transmit data.
at my.audi.com if you are logged into the vehicle — Stored destinations (favorites, last desti-
as the key user > page 31. These deactivated nations) are only stored in the vehicle. If
services will not be available in the vehicle. For you allow transmission of data again,
additional information, visit my.audi.com. these destinations will be synchronized via
the myAudi account. To prevent synchroni-
@) Note zation of destinations, delete the destina-
You are responsible for all precautions taken tions before you allow data to be trans-
for data protection, anti-virus protection, and mitted again.
protection against loss of data on mobile de-
vices that are used to access the Internet
through the Wi-Fi hotspot. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
Audi collects, uses, stores and shares your per-

G) Tips
sonal information, such as contact data, vehicle
— The following interfaces are not affected by data, usage data, driving data and precise geolo-
changes to the privacy settings: Bluetooth, cation, in order to provide you with the products
Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi, Audi and services you have purchased or requested,
smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field
and for a number of other purposes, for example,
Communication (NFC), charging communi- to track quality issues, to performance and safe-
cation (high-voltage system), Electronic Toll ty, to meet our internal compliance or legal re-
Collect (ETC), On-Board Diagnostic System quirements and to market to customers and po-
(OBD) if equipped. tential customers. For a more complete list of
— If the maximum privacy settings are switch- the data we collect, how we use it and with
ed on, your vehicle may not receive security whom we share it, please visit your Audi nation-
updates and certificates for establishing an al/sales region website at www.audi.com.
encrypted connection, depending on vehicle
equipment. In order to receive security up- The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-
dates and certificates, switch the maximum ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-
privacy settings off for at least ten minutes tion status, or the service offering. For example,
every six months. Make sure that your vehi- collection, use and sharing may vary between
cle is connected to the Internet. A symbol in Audi connect services, if you have designated a
the MMI status bar indicates if the required key user, or if you are driving a model equipped
data connection is available > page 23. with persistent data logging. Please review the
— If the transmission of data is limited, it will complete Privacy Statement to understand our
have the following effects on the exchange data handling practices with respect to a particu-
of data for Audi connect services and emer- lar service.
gency calls, if equipped: You can find additional information about our da-
— The emergency call function will remain ta privacy practices in your MMI.
available without restrictions and will con-
> Applies to: MMI: On the home screen, select:
tinue to transmit data.
SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About
— If an online roadside assistance call is ini-
Audi connect.
tiated, no data will be transmitted, but a
call will be made. Information about our privacy practices in con-
— If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert, junction with the mobile Audi connect applica-
and/or Valet Alert services have been acti- tion can be found in the Application’s Privacy
vated by the key user, then they will re- Statement.
306
Data privacy
For additional information about the privacy

practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or
other websites, applications or online services as
well as your obligations with respect to using
these services, and for additional information re-
garding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region web-
site at www.audi.com.
80B012721BA
307
Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and — Replacement parts may not always be availa-

ble.
technical changes
— Navigation systems for vehicles built for the
Warranty U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in
Europe, and may not work in other countries.
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
— New Vehicle Limited Warranty (1) Note

— Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle re-
— Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal sulting from these country-specific differen-
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, ces.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
— Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Maintenance, repairs,
Limited Warranty and technical modifi-
— Applies to: USA models: California Emissions
cations
Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions De-
fects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Observe the safety precautions > page 246, Gen-
Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects eral information and > page 291, Raising the ve-
Warranty, California Emissions Performance hicle.
Warranty
General information
You can find detailed information in your Warran-
ty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California Due to the increasing complexity of technology in
Emissions Booklet*. these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
mental standards that apply, you can only per-
form a very limited amount of repairs and modifi-
Audi Literature Shop cations to the vehicle yourself.
Service information is made available as soon as Proof of maintenance work may be required to
possible after a model is introduced and can be submit a claim within the warranty period.
ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http://
literature.audiusa.com We recommend that you have your vehicle serv-
iced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts
Driving in other
and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This
countries helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality,
Government regulations in the United States and performance, and safety are not impaired.
Canada require motor vehicles to comply with Maintenance and repairs
emissions regulations and safety standards.
Your vehicle was designed to help keep mainte-
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
nance requirements to a minimum. Some regular
U.S. and Canadian markets are different from
maintenance is required to help ensure that your
vehicles produced for other countries.
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
United States or Canada, it is possible that: nance Booklet for more detailed information
— Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rat- about vehicle maintenance.
ing. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage. When operating the vehicle under more extreme
— Proper maintenance and repair work may not operating conditions, for example when outside
be possible because special service equipment, temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
tools, or measuring devices needed for your ve- ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
hicle may not be available. formed between the specified intervals.
308
Usually maintenance and repair work requires — Never perform any work in the motor com-
special tools, measuring devices, and other partment unless you know exactly how to
equipment that is available to trained vehicle carry out the job and have the correct tech-
technicians in order to help ensure that your vehi- nical information and the correct tools.
cle and all of its systems operate correctly, relia- — If you are uncertain about what to do, have
bly, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle the work performed by an authorized Audi
incorrectly can impair the operation and reliabili- dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
ty of your vehicle and may void one or more of or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
your vehicle's warranties. sonal injury may result from improperly per-
formed work.
Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components, their @) Note
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause
— Maintenance work, repairs, or technical
malfunctions. Because of the way electronic com-
modifications to the vehicle (such as instal-
ponents are interconnected, such malfunctions
ling additional equipment) that is not per-
can also impair systems that are not directly in-
formed correctly can cause vehicle damage.
volved. This means that you risk both a substan-
— If emergency repairs must be performed,
tial reduction in the operational safety of your ve-
take your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
hicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
er or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
Some convenience functions, such as the conven- as possible.
ience turn signal function, individual door open- — Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle
ing function, and displays, can be reprogrammed resulting from failure to comply with these
using special workshop equipment. If functions guidelines.
are reprogrammed, the information and descrip-
tions about these functions in this Owner's Man- @) For the sake of the environment
ual may no longer apply to the changed func-
— Regular maintenance can help protect the
tions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi
environment.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform
— Technical modifications to the vehicle can
and verify any reprogramming procedures.
have a negative impact on fuel consumption
ZA WARNING and vehicle emissions.
Maintenance work, repairs, or technical modi- @) For the sake of the environment
fications to the vehicle (such as installing ad-
Certain components in your vehicle such as
ditional equipment) that is not performed
undeployed airbag modules, pretensioners
correctly can cause serious injuries and in-
and remote control batteries may contain Per-
crease the risk of an accident.
chlorate Material - special handling may ap-
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Z\ WARNING perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the
The engine/motor compartment in any motor restraint system including airbag modules
vehicle is a potentially dangerous area and can and safety belts with pretensioners are scrap-
cause serious personal injury. ped, all applicable laws and regulations must
— Always use extreme caution when doing any be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is
work in the motor compartment. Always fol- familiar with these requirements and we rec-
low commonly accepted safety practices and ommend that you have your dealer perform
use common sense. Never risk personal in- this service for you.
80B012721BA
jury.
309
netic waves can cause malfunctions in the ve-

@) Tips
hicle. Observe the regulations in the country
Because of your vehicle's aluminum body de- where the vehicle is being operated and the
sign, all service and repair procedures affect- instructions from the radio equipment manu-
ing the body should be performed by an au- facturer.
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ice Facility, who will perform the work accord-
Reporting Safety Defects
ing to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi
Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts Applicable to U.S.A.
perform repair or service procedures. Failure
to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Ac- If you believe that your vehicle
cessories or performing repairs incorrectly
may result in severe vehicle damage, such as
has a defect which could cause a
corrosion. crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
Accessories and parts
form the National Highway Traffic
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility before purchasing ac-
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
cessories or replacement parts. Audi recom- addition to notifying
mends having your vehicle serviced by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Audi of America, Inc.
ty and using Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genu-
2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive
ine Accessories.
Herndon, VA 20171
Audi does not endorse the use of products and
accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the If NHTSA receives similar com-
product is approved by a certified testing agency
or government agency. plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
ZA WARNING
defect exists in a group of
— Installing unapproved accessories or incor-
rect replacement parts can cause vehicle vehicles, it may order a recall and
damage and can increase the risk of an acci- remedy campaign. However,
dent.
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li- NHTSA cannot become involved in
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- individual problems between you,
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made
your dealer, or Audi of America,
of the same material. Do not install any li- Inc.
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles
that do not have factory-installed brackets. To contact NHTSA, you may call
Otherwise, the function of the system could
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
be impaired.
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-
@) Note 800-424-9153); go to http://
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is re-
www.safercar.gov;
quired for operating radio equipment in the
vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromag-
310
or write to: Transport Canada

Administrator NHTSA Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
1200 New Jersey Ave., tions Laboratory
S.E. West Building 80 Noel Street
Washington, DC Gatineau, QC
20590. J8Z OA1
You can also obtain other infor- For additional road safety infor-
mation about motor vehicle safe- mation, please visit the Road
ty from http://www.safercar.gov. Safety website at:
English:
Applicable to Canada
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
If you live in Canada and you be- motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
French:
fect that could cause a crash, in- http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
jury or death, you should immedi- securiteautomobile/menu.htm
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. Declaration of
You should also notify Audi Cana- compliance for telecom-
munications equipment
da.
and electronic systems
Canadian customers who wish to The manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunc-
report a safety-related defect to tions that are caused by unauthorized changes to
the equipment.
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls, may either FCC Part 15.19
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
call Transport Canada toll-free at:
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa re- interference received, including interference that
gion and from other countries) may cause undesired operation.
TTY for hearing impaired: FCC Part 15.21
1-888-675-6863 Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could
or contact Transport Canada by void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
mail at:
80B012721BA
311
RSS-Gen — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

This device contains licence-exempt transmit- technician for help.
ter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Science and Economic Development Canada’s li- Canadian ICES-003.
cence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: Integrated Toll Module* - FCC (USA) and
ISED (Canada)
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
This device complies with FCC rules part 90 and
(2) This device must accept any interference, in- Innovation, Science, and Economic Development
cluding interference that may cause undesired Canada RSS-137. Operation is subject to the fol-
operation of the device. lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
RSS 102
must accept any interference that may be re-
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: ceived including interference that may cause un-
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi- desired operation. WARNING: The transmitter
ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol- has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED
led environment. This equipment should be in- rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
stalled and operated with minimum distance of proved by the party responsible for compliance
20 cm between the radiator and your body. This could void the user’s authority to operate the de-
transmitter must not be co-located or operating vice.
in conjunction with any other antenna or trans-
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-
mitter.
ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
Class B devices led environment. End Users must follow the spe-
cific operating instructions for satisfying RF ex-
This equipment has been tested and found to
posure compliance. This transmitter must be at
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
least 20 cm (8 inches) from the user and must
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-
not be coocated or operating in conjunction
its are designed to provide reasonable protection
with any other antenna or transmitter.
against harmful interference in a residential in-
stallation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not in- @ Tips
stalled and used in accordance with the instruc- Additional information or supplements about
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio the radio systems based on the vehicle equip-
communications. However, there is no guarantee ment and country can be found on the follow-
that interference will not occur in a particular in- ing website: www.audi.com/generalinfo
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equip-
ment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

— Increase the separation between the equip-
ment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a cir-
cuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
312
Technical data
Technical data The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
Identification data @ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, motor output, transmission
Vehicle data label @ Motor and transmission codes
@) Paint and interior codes
RAZ-0668
XXXXX XX =X = XXXX XXX XX © Optional equipment numbers
(Daa aa xxxxxxxx XX x XXXXXXXK
| pein AK Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Q5 a Beh XX The VIN is located in the following areas:
(B)--we gs. XXX XK YXK — Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
GBR M. - AUSST.
/ OPTIONS
YNYX YN YX XK HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa-
tion.
EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG 5RW — On the vehicle identification label
2EH JOZ 1LB 1AS_ 1BA
3FC SMU 7X1 — At the front behind the windshield*
: FOA 9G3 0G7 OYH OJF
SG TL6 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZ7 — Inthe motor compartment on the right side
1XW 8Q3 9Q8 8Z4 D2D
716 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2
3L4 AKC 3Y0 413 5D2 Notes about technical data
1SA 7GB Q1A 4GQ
The values may vary based on special equipment

as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
uring methods.
Fig. 203 Vehicle identification label

Please note that the specifications listed in the
vehicle documentation always take precedence.
The vehicle identification label > fig. 203 is locat-
ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo
floor cover. Any technical data that is missing was not
available at the time of printing.
The vehicle identification label information can
also be found in the Warranty & Maintenance
booklet.
Vehicle data
Q5 184.3 (4,682) 74.5 (1,893) 84.2 (2,140) 65.3 (1,659)

SQ5 184.3 (4,682) 74.5 (1,893) 84.2 (2,140) 65.5 (1,663)
Capacities
80B012721BA
Fuel tank 18.5 gal (70 L)

Windshield and headlight washer system* 5.3 qt (5.0L)
313
Technical data
A/C system refrigerant oil

The exact type and amount of refrigerant oil in
the A/C system is specified on the sticker on the
refrigerant compressor.
Refrigerant oil 100/110 g® +/-10g

Oil with plug-in hybrid drive 160g +/-10g
2) The specifications depend on vehicle equipment.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

B8U-0380 The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ or the rear axle @) is listed on the safety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the
driver's door pillar.
Load
= MINA AO The maximum permitted load is listed on the tire

pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Fig. 204 Safety certificate
Roof load
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The maximum permissible roof load is 165 lbs
The maximum permitted total weight @ of the (75 kg).
vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the
side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Trailer load
Q5,SQ5 4409 lbs (2000 kg) 441 lbs (200 kg)

Q5 TFSIe 2000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
314
Index
Numbers and
Symbols ASR
3-zone deluxe automatic climate control.... 92 refer to Anti-Slip Regulation.........
Audi active lane assist................
A Cleaning the camera area............
Audi adaptive cruise control
AIC cooling MOde:. « « vesiare «sas © wrens 6 avers 92
Cleaning the sensors...............
A/C system refrigerant oil............005 314 Predictive control..............0005
Accelerator pedals sseis so esas x & eases 8 & exes 101 Traffic jam assist............00.-00.
also refer to Accelerator pedal.......... 101 Audi adaptive light..................
ACCESSORIES « sssiers oo: seaues + exsusunn + wane a 6 esine 310
Audi connect
Active lane assist FefEr LO CONNEC: = « gaws + = eames v news
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 165 Audi drive select =: ss g2c8 ss peau s i deme
Adaptive cruise control................. 154 Audi e-tron compact charging system...
Adaptive dampers ............-..2+-05- 116 Adjusting the charging power level....
Adjusting air distribution (automatic climate Changing or attaching the power cable... .
control system) ...... 0.0.0.
e cee eee eee 93 SeCUrINg.. 2... cee eee eee eee
Adjusting the brightness................. 54 Status and malfunction indicators ....
Adjusting the sound..............-..00- 236 Audi music interface.................
Adjusting the temperature (automatic climate Audio files..............00
eee eee ee
control system) ......... 0.0.00. e ee ee eee 93
Adjusting the volume ............
eee ee eee 30
Adjusting the volume (announcements) .... 236
Adjusting the welcome sound............ 236
Airbag'system ; « eses s saves s eee ss veep eee 71
AICSUSPENSION ex « = som « = nee Hg Ses SE Be 116
Alarm system
refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... 37 Safety measures........ 0.0... e ee ee
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... 288 Audi side assist
refer to Side assist..............0..
All-weather lights...............-..20--- 50
Audi smartphone interface............
Allseason tires............220202220005 276
Legalinformation..................
All wheel drive
Audi virtual cockpit
refer tOQUAtEOmms: 5 = woos + 5 ewe so ewe 118
refer to Instrument cluster..........
Amazon Alexa integration
AUTO
Media playback’. « oii. eons 6 6 cris 6 0 ow 226
Automatic climate control system.....
Operating...............0..0 000.0000. 28
Automatic headlights...............
AMI
Auto Lock (central locking) ............
refer to Audi music interface........... 226
Automatic climate control system......
Android Auto
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 234 Automatic luggage compartment lid....
Anti-lock braking system............0005 119 Automatic transmission..............
Anti-Slip Regulation.................05. 119 Automatic wipe/wash system..........

Anti-theft alarm system...............00 37 Auxiliary climate control..............
80B012721BA
Apple CarPlay Average consumption................

refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 234 Average speed... ..... 2.2.02
315
Index
B Cameras
Coverage areaS.... 6... eee eee eee 142
Bag hooks ..........
0... c eee eee eee ee 83
LOGALIONS ccm s 2 wom « § aoe 5s REE 3s eee 143
Band
Capacities
refer to Frequency band............... 217
Fuel tant. so wesc oo seems o wand ov sae 2 2 313
Battery Washer fluid reservoir.............0005 313
Charging (12 Volt vehicle battery)....... 258 Carg@Plembiscns x x cscacn wx rans we re oe Moa 88
High-voltage battery...............0.. 122
Cat KOYbiwiue © sveveware o seam @ 6 anccoms a 8 asuwone ww vomeT 38
Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............0.8. 256
Gar WaShiy 2 aicscs ss swcna © & swam wo orem © oe 282
Winter operation (12 Volt vehicle battery) . 257
Catalytic converter.............--00000- 245
Battery (vehicle)
Cell phone
refer to High-voltage battery........... 122
refer to Telephone............00eee
eae 186
BLOCK FOULS caus + & eau o » Rees ov REwW 3 eR 211
Cell phone compartment
BlOWEP's = sours = © egups 3 ¥ saws 7 e Seon ze pees ze 93
refer to Audi phone box............... 188
Bluetooth
Central lockingeins «+ ccs + 2 ances 0 comsens « & ose 34
‘Audio player « sii 3 6 wes ao nese ee wenn o 225
Auto Lock... 0... cece eee eee eee eee 34
Connecting adevice...............00-. 238
Convenience key...... 0... eseee eevee 39
Connecting a mobile phone............ 186
Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Deleting adevice................0000- 239
Luggage compartment lid.............0. 42
Device overview... . 6... 00. eee eee eee 238
Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 37
Disconnecting a device................ 238
Messages « anise «seas 3 3 mara @ wavimin © wave 36
Displaying Profiles « caves x « xayre a 2 waurs a « 239
Remote control key.............--.00-- 39
Selecting adevice.................00. 238
SECUG: o x sure x = swe & a eR Fe ee 2 5 ee 35
Specifying a favorite.............0000- 239
Vehicle key sais xs cers se namie 6 ceri wo rete 39
Boost... 2... cece 16
Central locking switch.............000005 36
Boost function.................000000. 102
COrtifiCatienins « « waws « « eews 4 e cows 9 o eee 311
Boost pressure indicator................. 16
Charging
Brake fluid
refer to Power sourceS..............00-- 82
Checking the brake fluid level........... 255
Charging clip
Brakes... 2... eee 109
referto Wall mount clip............... 136
Brake tluidis « « mays ¢ gave © saan ¢ 8 meres F 255
Charging display ccc. «eves ao eases oo oes x 127,
Emergency braking function............ 112
Charging the battery
HOt. cece eee eee eee 112
Mobile devices. ..........00
cece eee 226
New brake pads..............----000-- 110
USB... eee 188
Brands............2..02. 000 e cece ee 240
Wirelessi: = » aeons « 2 waves x 5 wayne 4 & Haus 8 = 189
Break-in security feature..............00- 37
GharGiniG titties: « sass = 2 neue x = neem & o weer 2 123
Breaking in
Child safety lock
New brake pads..............---000-- 110
Climate control system controls in the rear. 44
New tires’: « + soe « + cagme 5 2 eeuwe oe ae oo 268
Power windows............00000e eee ee 44
Browser
Rear dOGrsion x s anan ¢ a ecwe i Kamen ¢ BORE Ee 44
refer to Mediacenter.................. 228
Child safety seats........ 0... cece eee eee 76
Business. addressii. : viii 6 < aes eo soaom oo 211,
Securing to the top tether anchor........ 80
Securing with a safety belt.............. 79
Cc Securing with LATCH.............000005 78
California Proposition 65 Warning........ 247 Cleaning... 0... . cece eee 282
Battery specific.................-000. 257 Cleaning artificial leather............... 285
CALGUISE & cciwass so cusetie oo examen sa avawans & @ wesw a 190 Cleaning carbon components........ 284, 285
Cleaning:controls « sacs < vse wv een ee eee 285 Consumer information.................5 308
Cleaning decorative parts andtrim........ 284 Consumption
Cleaning exhaust tail pipes.............. 284 Reducing...........
eee eee eee eee eee 107
Cleaning microfiber.................005 285 Consumption (fuel) . . srerice © cssese ws secs ws we L?
Cleaning plastic parts.................. 285 Contacts
Cleaning textiles..................000, 285 Importing ......... 0.0 e cece eee eee ee 194
Climate control system ............00000. 91 Updating inthe MMI.................. 194
also refer to Automatic climate control sys- also refer to Directory...............4. 191
HEIN s & cvescs 5 Sewanee os soamase vam wwe oo ore 91 Convenience keyls «sie ss wa o 6 seve so woes 34
Climate control system controls in the rear Convenience closing.............000005 46
Child safety lock... 0.0.0... cece ee eee 44 also refer to Vehicle key..............-. 38
Climatized cup holders.................. 83 Convenience opening and closing
Windows or panoramic glass roof........ 46
Closing
Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 42 Coolant temperature display.............. 14
Convenience closing..............-.45. 46 Cooling system
HOO « wssw a % mec oo me aw awe ww eS we 247 Adding coolant’: cess 2s ews ss eeces crew 254
Luggage compartment lid............... 42 Checking the coolant level............. 254
Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 43 Coolant... 1.2... eee eee eee 253
Panoramic glass roof................0-. 46 Cornering light. .... 0... cee eee eee eee ee 50
Sunshade (roof) ............000 ce eee eee 46 Cruise control system...............00. 151
Windows........ 0.00 45 GupHholdensrcnins + ssn x 0 manene « oi mpeneve « o cteeene « 82
Cockpit dimming..............00e esas 54 Climatized... 2.20... 0. eee eee eee eee 83
Cockpit (overview)... 0.0.0.0
0 cece eee eee 6 Current consumption..............000005 17
Collapsible sparetire................00. 293
Collapsible tire D
refer to Collapsible spare tire........... 293
Data module
Color code... 2... eee ec eee eee eee eee 313
Serial number (IMED) ¢ esc. ss scans scene 194
Combustion engine startup.............. 102
Data plans... 6.2... eee eeeeee 201
Comfort auxiliary climate control.......... 95
Data Privacy. ...... cee eee eee eee eee 306
Compartments: 6 vss xo wens so eee & ¥ ewe 83
Date... eee eee 17
Compassinthe mirror’. « wows s esx ss ween as 60 Setting..............0
0.0. . eee eee 236
Compliance’: s sews » » seme se mewe ge ewe eee 311 Daytime running lights................-. 50
Conference Callen: « » wus ss ween ss omen gee 193 Declaration of compliance............... 311
Configuration wizard...............-.04. 20 DEF (instrument cluster) ..............005 12
CONNECE. 1... eee 197 Demo mode
Data plans: « cuss ss cee se coma seme gee 201 refer to Presentation mode............. 215
Data Privaeylicns x + swe + x acne v texan ¥ theme 306
Destination onthe map...............4. 208
Emergency call...............00.0 00 202
Details, . resco « sxanene os stineous io smnine mo auncems 208
Infotaininietitis » s wan ss mewn a ¢ waven 2 2 oem 197
Determining correct load limit........... 275
Infotainment services..............004 198
Digitalicompass sass «seas
oo save oo same 2 60
Online roadside assistance............. 203
Vehicle control services..............0. 199 DIMENSIONS's « « scans = ¢ wisee 5 ¢ eaes s E eovER 5 2 313
Connected devices Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 56

DEVICE OVERVIEW vases 2 4 wesmu a 4 earwe a x caves 238 Dimming the rearview mirror............. 56
80B012721BA
Connections
referto Medians «6 ves.
¢ acces 6 swe 225,227
317
Index
Diteetoryess 6 s cscaves ws sacewes v6 aneims v © sxeams 6 0 191 Electronic Differential Lock.............. 119
Business card... 6... eee eee eee 192 Electronic immobilizer cvs. 6. ow sa sia ves 39
SCttinGSanww + wuwn x 3 mee ee ReUeE SE eee & 194 Electronic Stabilization Control........... 119
Display Embedded SIM: card « « secu + 2 gaye 4 2 ese « ¢ 198
Cleaning’s « «sew 2s seas © 2 eww vo ene woe 285 Emergency assistance..............-.-. 288
Displaying tooltips..................0.. 20 Emergency braking function............. 112
DispoSaliv: ss seus s ¢ sees av wees vv teen swe 308 Emergency call..............000.. 193, 202
DIStaHCO sas = » saeas + ¢ sacee @ 2 Sacee 7 a Hae Ya: 17 Emergency flashers.............--..00-- 52
Distance warning............0.see
ee eee 164 Emergency mode.............--.000005 103
Doors Emergency operation
Child safety lock 22s ¢ 2 eee es geen ss eees 44 Doors... 2. eee eee B7
Doorcontactiswiteh « « sisi ss wes «6 mewn 2 6 53 FUG TINLERAGOr ss « 2 wows x o yawn a a wows 4 ee 245
Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 37 Luggage compartment lid............... 44
Driver information system................ 13 Panoramic glass roof...............000. 47
Drives Emissions control system.............05 245
refer to Media................-4- 225,227 ENergy CONSUMENS i 6 6 ess © reseeee e eiee e o 8 17
Drive select Energy flowdisplay’s seas: o 6 cscs 2 6 eevee s vv 106
refer to Audi drive select............... 115
Energy management............--.00ee 107
Drive systeM... 0... cee eee eee 104
Energy TECOVErYcews 5 s eave + o ewig + 5 ewe & 104
(Audi drive’select s coac 2 ¢ cawe ¢ s gence so ae LIS
Engine
Drive system (message)...............-. 109
Breakingiinis « csv. + 2 ewe 2 6 wwe a 6 aes a 104
Driving down hills............0.--00
ee 112 Coolant............... 00. cece 253
Driving program... .. 6... cee ee eee eee eee 161 Emergency Stop ss « s ee.8 se ees s sees es we 97
Driving through water................5. 114 JUMP Starting « = sce 5 x secre © 2 seweEe vo sore 294
DGiVIMNG BIER. « » exesene « 0 ssinsocie © of emetinze © ovation» « 17 Start/Stop system ........
eee eee ee eee 108
Driving tips Starting/stopping.................0 ae 97
Driving through water.............00-- 114 Engine braking effect
Efficient driving » sxc. x» see: ss eee se eee 107 refer to Recuperation................. 104
GFRrOAGNARIVING 2 cxcwie & wromenow » aresum « ¥ anaie 113) Engine oil
Uphill and downhill................... 112 AGING « seswies «vere © & oxaners a o Sensis ve oTIEENs 249
Drivinguphills................0...005. 112 Changing.............. eee ee eee eee 252
Dust filter Checking GILlEVEl: x = sase ys sae a 3 Beam 3 249
refer to Pollutant filter..............00. 91 CONSUMPTION & & swe « 0 ors = 5 semen wo ome 249
Dynamic steering...............0..000. 117 Indicator light... 2... cece eee eee eee 250
Replacement interval................. 259
Temperature display................... 16
= Engine sound
E-mail Audi driverselecti, «sisi s+ iusiest a a samen a LI5
Message Options: « < seas 5 = was 5 v ween s 195
Engine Start/Stop mode
SettinQSwasiess + wen ee aaron so meena & @ eae 8 195 refer to Start/Stop system............. 108
EDL Engine Start:syStei vceca « cose o 6 econ @ x anon 98
refer to Electronic Differential Lock...... 119
Engine stop
EDR refer to Start/Stop system............. 108
refer to Event Data Recorder (EDR)...... 304
Entry/exit lighting................-.000- 52
Efficiency assist... 0... eee ee 152
EMtry ASSiStamGes. « « sesess 6 « samme © a samme oo mace 64
Electrical system. .........-.0
02 e ee eee 256 also refer to Exit assistance............. 64
Electromechanical parking brake......... 111
318
Index
Environment Front passenger’s seat adjustment

Unleaded gasoline..............
eee eee 241 Rear... eee
eee eee 64
ESC Front wiper blades
refer to Electronic Stabilization Control... 119 CHANGING ss + s weae + 5 wees s ERee a eee Ges 58
ESC Offroad... .. eeeeee eee 120 Cleaning’: «2 see 2 ¢ swe 2 2 een ooo eee © 2 oe 58
eSIM FUG: ¢ agers ¢ ¢ saws oy eee 2s Hee zd ee Yoo 241
refer to Embedded SIM card............ 198 AGGIES «scone + cneusne « 1 emowom © eyenems te te 242
Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 304 Current consumption................... 17
EV mode.........
cee cece eee eee 105 Eueldisplay’: saws x sess «smu te gs ges 12
Gasoline... .... cece
eee eee 241
Exit assistance... 0... cece eeeee 64
Reducing fuel consumption............ 107
EXtEWAETIIG)s « » cases w + ansunas 4 u annanoe #8 sommes 173
Tank:capacity’s « « weiss s eecew s eeee oe ee 313
EX€CHIOMANTCNNA sinciis « 6 ocnin +s coesan © 6 axesors 188
Fueling
Exteniorlightiing’ sxcsc: x «suas 2 + menawe ox awweom 50
Fuel filler dor ei ¢ s sissow 2 ena ss wesem a wc 243
Exterior itrOrsic. « 2 sor © somes vo orem 9 © ony 55
Fuel filler door emergency release....... 245
Folding settings................00
ee eee 35
Functions:on demands « + cic + 6 ware © vere 199
External voice operation................. 28
Functions that require a license.......... 199
also refer to Functions on demand....... 199
F
Fuses
Factory default settings Assignment .............0..0.0020005 300
Multi Media Interface..............0.. 237 Replacing « seis « enews + g nee + comm & + Her 299
Fast route... .. eee eee eee 206
FAVOTIECSS. 5 2 rccass « « ormane « o: snwanen = suscewone 5 mouse 22 G
Bluetooth. ........ 0... cee eee 239
Garage door opener............-.000000- 47
Navigation’: « s sae 5 ¢ cews + + sawie « o tems = 207
GarMenthOOKks some « says ov eee 2 esa 2 ee 83
Telephone cris « «cose « srcusne to wrasse @ 6 oneenie 191
Gasoline... 2.0.6... cee eee eee eee 241
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 311
CGIRIVGS » weiss 3 2 mewn 4 » ney & Pee @ ewe 242
File formats (media drives).............. 231
Gasolime MiXtUne cosine =o sewers « 9 sense « 0 one 241
Filling
GAWR
Tank. capacities: cu: 2 ewin ee cna ee amor « 313 refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 314
For the sake of the environment
Gears... eee 99
Disposing of engine oil................ 252
Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 264
PUGUING's = asses ¢ & aves & © Sates ¢ § Repos 5 E Ber 243
Glove compartment.............-0.00005 83
LO aKSiics = 2 ees ee sew 2 wane © were © ¥ were 247
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 314
Forward gear
refer to Gears. 1... eee 99 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 314
GVWR
Free text search
refer to Gross Vehicle Weight
Media... .... eee ee eee 230
Rating (GVWR) .......
0.0. e cee eee eee 314
Ra@iGvcs « = wcme « = wome 5 2 was ¢ 2 wae x coe 219
also refer to Intelligent search.......... 206
Freeze protection H
Coolant...... 2... eee eee eee 253 Handsfree..................0.00000005 187
Windshield washer system............. 259 Hands:Free/Profilez. s . sxiuis so neieos «x semen = 187
Frequency band.............00--00 ees 217 Head-up display
80B012721BA
also refer to Frequency band........... 217 Adjusting ........... cece eee eee eee 26
Front center armrest .s..5 0c cces ese as 64 Adjusting the brightness................ 54
Operating’: « = soe « sicsees w snawens ow omens wv on 26
Index
Headlight range control................0. 50

I
Headlights: « scincs xo snes oe mms 2 o ones ow a0 50
Idle
Cleaning......... 0... e eee eee eee 283
TOPE CO'GESISs ween x 3 wean a x woen se weeG ae 99
Headlight range control................ 50
Ignition
Washer'system « = ses09 + see ey eeru ee es 57
Switching on and off................... 97
Washer system (filling washer fluid) ..... 259
Headsrestraints cies m + eassen wo iecwne © o aiemne so 3 67 Imbalance (wheels) ...........00..00005 270
Heated rear window.............0000

sees 94 Immobilizer
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 38
Heated steering wheel................0.. 94
Tni¢linfometetios. « s eon so wenn vo womens oo nae L13
HOAtinG cer x = seas & s Kame Fe em ee ew ee 91
Indicator lights’; « ese. 5 ¢ eewe ee see se eee 7
HFP
refer to Hands Free Profile............. 186 Inspection interval..................00. 259
High:voltagebattery’s « ssw 4s asww s enews « 122 Instrument cluster.............0seeeeuee 12

Adjusting the layout................... 13
Audi e-tron compact charging system.... 131
Charging.............c eee eee eee 123,125 Cleaning... ... 2... ee eee eee eee eee ee 285
Failure... 0... eee eee eee eee 12,
Charging display on the vehicle......... 127
Charging equipment.................. 129 MOtorcOdehis « sive « s wena o 2 wee a 2 wane 239
On-board computer............-..00-0- 17
Charging methods.................04. 123
Operating............... 0. cece ee eee 13
Charging ports on the vehicle........... 123
Service interval display................ 259
Charging time iin: . aici ev eye 3 vere s vs 123
Software information.............0005 239
Connecting the charging cable.......... 125
Messages while driving................ 129 Switching tabs......... 0... eee eee eee 13
Switching the VieWir. s + eses « eee xe exw» 13
Not running for long periods of time..... 124
Opening the charging port door......... 125 Vehicle fUNGtIONS). 6 wiicaue as asiere sa uae ao ac 16
Version information.................. 239
Quick charginGiss « ¢ eas sv eee sy eee 2 we 123
Setting the timers. + circ a cane a a sane a ao 127 Instruments
Transporting charging equipment....... 130 Adjusting illumination.............00005 55
High-voltage system..............0000e 122 Integrated Toll Module................. 149
High beams Intelligent search
High beam assistant................... 51 NaVigatiOticns + ney = yawe so mame x ¢ Hee 206
Highway lights........ 0.0... eee eee ee eee 50 Interference-Causing Equipment Standard

Hill descentiassist's ccciose oo scarce eo sonsee a a en 114 CIGES) 5 0 mces so sami oe came oo somes 2 x one 312
Interior lighting... e.:3 secs s eee eee 53,54
Hill descenticomtrol. « swssiwe sa ssaiia sv amen 112
INteriOr MONICOFING® ss ese « = eoee y 2 wees ae 37
Hill hold assist «cco so sewn 6 wane wv wea a oo 99
Home
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) ..... 57
refer to Home address................ 211 International travel.................5-5 201
Hometaddnesss, « ws 4s isvawese i « onaseme ow ates 211 Internet
refer to CONNECts « = secs es eeen ee eee ee: 197
HomeLink
refer to Garage door opener............. 47 Internet radio
refer to Online radio.............. 221, 222
HOME:SEFEON:. 5 5 worn so cewtei « w veosen « wratess a oo 19
iPhone
HORM w & ssccase oo asessie wo cecoans © or aoawne © stan B Bees 6
refer to Audi music interface........... 226
Hotspot
refer to Wi-Fi........
0... cece eee eee 200
J
JUMpIStarting, ssw 6 vans a 6 aman w 6 sews ww ae 294
320
Index
K Locking and unlocking

By remote control. ...... eee eee eee 39,
Key... eee eee eee eee eee 34, 38
Using the lock cylinder................. 37
Convenience opening and closing......... 46 With the convenience key............... 39
Key replacement..............-.000 eee 38
Low beam headlights.................... 50
Mechanical key.............2000000000e 38
Lowering the rear of the vehicle........... 85
PANIC BUttORN ase: « 2 emu: 2 sauee ¢ o Heme 2 2 ee 39
Replacing the battery .. 5. sci 66 wewe seis 40 LTE
refer to Exterior antenna.............. 188
Unlocking and locking............-...-- 39
Vehicle: COd@ oss se ces es vous et goes s ees 38 Luggage compartment.................. 84
Key user... 2... eee eee 32

COVER sc sss: asastons v avaunna 9 suantne @ # exaitene 0 9 ennse 85
Increasing the size................. 86, 87
Kick-down .. 2... eee eee eee eee eee 102
POWErSOUNCES sews ss gavey 3 cea + name a ea 82
Tied OWI Sirens 6 o onesie « suecemnse = myeyeae w= etemme m 8 88
L also refer to Luggage compartment...... 84
Lane assist Luggage compartment lid
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 165 Closing BUttOfi ‘ss s = 2ems ¢ » sews x o eee es oe 42
Lane departure warning General information.............000005 4l
refer to Audi active lane assist.......... 165 Mechanically unlocking.............0065 44
Lap timer’: seis < = seis s = cewes s+ Hews se es 148 Opening and closing............-...--- 42
Evaluating « ssi eo sows ve sone vo sonnene oo « 149 Opening and closing with foot motion..... 43
Starting... 60... cece cece eee eee eee 148 Power opening and closing.............. 42
LATCH (securing child safety seats)......... 78 Luggage compartment net............... 88
LaumehiControlh. « « smesses 6 2 sans « stores 2 tere 102 LUMbar'SUPPOPt ss esccsin se cece ee eeevene ov eee 63
Leather care and cleaning............... 285
Legal information M
License subscriptions................. 239 Maintenanee ss « ssasin s 2 cases @ 2 scene oe mare es 308
Software information................. 239 Maintenance intervals................5. 259
Software licenses’. « «ssw sa samme o 2 meso a 239
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 246
Version information.................. 239
Manually releasing the charging connector. 128
License plate bracket................... 310
Manually releasing the charging port door.. 128
Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 291
Manual shifting..................-005. 101
Light/rain sensor
Map
Automatic headlights.................. 50
Changing the Seale ccs sx ecwes 5 x meme 2 to 208
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) .... 57
Display’: sisi s s vec as mew ee wes 2 sven 210
Lighting
Operating.............
00 eee eee eee eee 209
ERt@riOn » snau 2 x qemye 2 2 mew i y eee 2 RoE 50
Setting the destination................ 208
TnterOtisccss os wane os swans oo aston 6 v omen a as 53
MAP
LIQHES scsen 2s ese « 2 cium v2 em 2 cere eH a 50
refer to Message Access Profile......... 194
Lights on the charging port
Map PrevieW cx s + cmes « eee oem a ee 208
refer to Charging display............... 127
Map Update. acs zs secns = 5 earns 3 ¢ eames & x eae 213
Listening to music
IMYAUCIAPD » ween « ¢ wees 5 2 neues oe eee ov 213
refer to Media..............0005- 225,.227
OTLIMG « cesseue « « aniswue oo: meuatin 4m arauers 0 enon « 213:
LOAM scone 1 « veconice + a sueuane ow wens mw sorneits wir 314 USB connection............-...00000- 214
LOGaluserss. 5 6 wesin = a secon = 6 anscee © states w 9 ee 31
Massage function
80B012721BA
FROME x 2 wows 5 2 peas < EOR x E MewE E oeEOE 64

Mechanical kéy'.s ss sees se ens s beens epee 38
Media... . 2... cee eeeeee ee 225,,.227 Navigation « & cscs + & ssceons wo seein 6 aman Ha 205
Supported formats............-00000- 231 Better route... 6... 2. cece ee eee eee 214
Media center......................0000. 228 COUIAG excsw + seer ss eee ae CoE ee ee a 208
Memory function..............020000
ee 71 Changing the scale win. «2 seen ve nee eee 208
Menu language also refertoMap..........0..ce ee eee 209
refer to Setting the language........... 236 Navigation database
Menu paths. ............. 0000s cece 19 Version information.................- 239
Message Access Profile................. 194 Navigation (instrument cluster) .......... 211

Messagesi: ss sacs 3 + anes ov wares a a same oo 194 SY 310
Mirror cOMpass:. « sess 6 & come +o some oo woue 5 60 Notification center.............0
02. eee 23
Mirrors
Adjusting exterior mirrors.............-. 55 Oo
Dimming ........ 6. cece cece eee 56 Octane rating (gasoline)................ 241
Vanity:mirrot’s sees « s sews x = ews x o oes a 57
Odometer’: « sesso. vv wre xv swan oi wmanane Yo omen 15
MMI Navigation plus Resetting ............0 0.0. c cece eee eee 15
refer to Multi Media Interface........... 20
Office address
MMI radio refer to Business address.............. 211
Offroad
MMI Radio plus refer to Offroad driving s ss aes sc cee ee Lia
Offroad AriVinG wax « « sewe 2 s meee sy seme : oe 113
Mobile device
OFF (button) ...................0000000. 92
referto Telephone...........-.eeseeee 186
Oil
Mobile device reminder signal............ 190 réferto EnGin@ Oils s « racs ss news « x rows a 249
Motor compartment
On-board computer..............2
ee eee 17:
Opening and closing the hood.......... 247
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)... 246, 304
OVERVIEW. wees «2 sonsees @ x sunsens ¥ 2 comene @ 2 sR 249
Online map
Safety precautions..............000005 246
refer to Satellite map................. 212
Mountain passes...............00
eee ee 112
Online radio: : seas + 2 cows + 2 sees Fe ewe Fe 221
Mountainnoadsts « i issise sv aveveue 0 2 veicine oo on 112
also refer to Online radio.......... 221, 222
Multifunction steering wheel
Online roadside assistance.............. 203
Buttons ..... 0... 0. ccc eee ee eee 13,30
Online services
QOPERACING’s = same ¢ = mae s E wae FE ROUNR o 2 we 13
PEfErCOVCONMECE is. « sencs as waren wx wanes wo 2 197
Programming buttons.................. 30
Voice recognition system............... 27 Online system update.................. 237
Online traffic information............... 214
Multi Media Interface................0.. 20
Menus andsymbols.............00+-005 21 OPGNiNGiss « = wees x y cess & eee Fe ee Fe oe 34
Operating’: « sss 5 2 wwe « x wees sy eee 5 18,21 Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 42
Switching OMOrMOffrsse x x cw v x evavere + « ome 20 Convenience opening............-...005
Fuel filler’'dOOr es « < gee s sows ss wes a ee
MUI gins ic & aoswins oo seemnes «wana © ¥ sManews oF seH8 30
HOGG: 2 sevescs oo wens oo mes 2 eam s wee @
MYAUI ¢ « sewn so mewn oe ew 2 a cows Fw 31, 198
Luggage compartment lid
myAudi navigation................. 205, 208
Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 43
MYAUGI USEFS ¢ seve sc eee se ees ge eee ewe 31
Panoramic glass roof...............2.4. 46
Sunshade (roof) ...........000 0c eee eee 46
N Windows ......... 000 eee 45
Natural leather care and cleaning......... 285 Opening and closing
refer to Unlocking and locking........ 34, 39
322
Opening the charging port door.......... 125 PedalStevi: «+ acenue eo emcee v anor ¥ ate we coe 101
Operating Perchlorate’ « svc x «wwe ov nase ov wows < we 308
Head-up display...............0000200. 26 Peripheral cameras........0
see cee ences 176
Instrument cluster si. 6. sce a seesscene 13 Phone
Multifunction steering wheel............ 13 Connecting a second mobile device...... 187
Multi Media Interface............... 18, 21 Disconnecting a mobile device.......... 188
Text input.............0..0 002.020 24 SGttingS sac = s amie + HeeE Es ROE Fx SESE E 194
Touch display: « = sess ss news 2s wees s opens 18 Phonebook
Voice recognition system............... 27: We fer tol DIreGtOry’s 2 sews 2 swan vv ere wos 191
Operating:mode’. « sisson x x eisww & eases eo erences 105 PIN
Optional equipment number............. 313 A-digit MyAUdi PIN . wesc ee cee ee eae a ee 31
Options Protection................. 000.000 008 32
Media. 2 sseioe wo stein wo cases oo enema oe © anetenus 231 Playback (media) ............020200005. 227
Radio... eee eee
eee eee 222 Plug-in hybrid drive..............000005 104
Outside noise. .... 6... 6. eee eee eee 107 Climate control... ... 2. eee eee eee eee 94
Overview (cockpit) ..........
00. c cece eee ee 6 COOLANE seas 2 + cere + e aes ao we ¢ 253, 254
Powertmeter ies « 2 mses w x wmowee oo senate o 6 ate 15
P Plug-in hybrid mode..............--000- 105
Podcast
Paimbeodes, « a sense « senor 2 oneness @ = stenuie = oe 313)
refer to Online radio.............. 221, 222
Paint-damage’. « « secuis «a sxawera a seanave wo omsceis 284
BOLISHIDG cans x 2 cxceom so cmansus ¢ cestsm © weanstens = ¢ 284
PANIC BUttoMs. « asscea sc avis ae anise ew aoe 38,39.
Pollen filter
Patti¢ FUNCLION + cas v « cams oo ews 2 x cow ae 38
refer to Pollutant filter................. 91
Parioramic:glass roofs «wie ss caw x & eam a 46
Pollutant filter. .................0000008 91
Convenience opening and closing......... 46
POWER IMOECR*. sacwas « = cresune x m ames» a aamsens 6 ¥ ie 15
Emergency closing.............0.000005 47
Quik Opening a: < s sees se sees s een 6s wes 47 POWEr'SOULCeS'. « & siscns ae cess «seen
a 82, 226
ParkassiStass ss meee ¢ 5 ees s GR e Gam G 183 Power WindOWS.. 5 sews seuss eeu es ween ee 45
Malfunction... .......
00... cee eee 45
Parking ..... 0.00. cece cece ee eee eee 98
Power windows malfunction.............. 45
Parking aid... .. cece eee eee 174
Adjusting the volume...............-- 175 Predictiveicomtrols + cscs © 2 wasn ae sense @ 2 sun 157
Automatic activation................0. 174 Predictive messages’: s wasws
s eaea a ss 101, 153
Cleaning the sensors/camera........... 283 pre sense
Parkassist': sacs ¢ x seam = x seus & e aes ¢ 2 183 refer to Audi presense.............5.. 167
Parking aid plUS « saves
& sions «2 ares & avers 174 Presentation Mode... . 0.0...
cece een eues 216
Parking space search.................. 181 Presets
Peripheral cameras............-.00005 176 Radio... 2... ee eee
eee eee 220
Rearview camera.........--..000-0
00 176 Presets list
Trailereview’s « sovcese sw cauens oo susveme « senna 2 0 178 refer to PresetS......
0... cece eens 220
Parking and maneuvering.............-. 174 Pressure
Parking brake Tire pressure monitoring system........ 279
refer to Electromechanical parking brake. 111 TiN@Sis «+ wen 2s onsen 9 + eae oo eI o 6 saEEeS 271,
Parking lights. ..........
0... e eee eee eee 50 Profile picture « soc s sees ss wees ov eee sve 31
Parking lock PROCECtING'x:: « = see 5 x seers 5 o eee oe ee ee 284
Manually releasing................0.. 103 Pyrotechnic elements............-..005 308
80B012721BA
also refer to Gears... eee eee eee 99

Partition Weta: << sees ¢ sees Fe ewe so RE 87
323
Index
Q Unlocking and locking................-.

also refer to Vehicle key...........00005
39
38
quattro... 2... eee 118
Removing the caps (wheel bolts)......... 291
Selective wheel torque control.......... 119
REPaitS « sincus » « uence mo ommens 5 # omnes Fa meENE 308
QUICK CHANGING « seas sy sews & 2 weaG § yD 9 123
Repeatins + suse oo wee oo amuses 3 v ne oo ame 229
Replacement key..............--00
ee eee 38
R Replacement parts.............eee
eee 310
Radio... eee eee eee 217 Replacing BULBS ssw s + sea « & eee ee weed 303
Radiostexthss « s ase ¢ s caus a 2 meme a 9 eee 220 Reporting Safety Defects................ 310
SEATON St rcvias » o cccmeme 2 = seman as simtene wo sen 217 Reverse gear
Radio communications equipment........ 310 referto Gears : secs ss ween ss ees 2 v Hewes 99
Radio equipment .............0
ee eee eee 310 RIMS’ & < wmeye & F Wem oP Gee & 2 Se oe ee 276
Radio Standards Specification (RSS) ....... 311 Cle AMIM irs « swawne vx smonsrs ¥ cvameme 2 a seamen eo 284
Raibearrien: auwn xs warm 2 2 mown 8 2 meee + 8 ae 116 Road Canriel’. wcrc « 2 cmos s 2 osm oa avon es 116
Rain/light sensor RONG :cz = + sey = & oeoes 5 & Hews 5 Eee FE ee 98
Automatic headlights .................. 50 Rolling ability
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) .... 57 Electromechanical parking brake........ Lit
Random Transmission idle..................005 100
refer to Shuffle...............0000005 229 Roof
Range monitor............
0. cece ee eee 106 refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 46
Range potential. ........ 2... eee eee eee 106 Roof load... 2.22...
... 0.222 eee eee eee 314
Range: (fuel-level)s. « « ccsseus « a esense © sveruene © wna 17 Roof rack... 22.0... e eee eee eee ee 88
Reading lightst.s < csus as wean 2 2 ween o si 53: also refer to Roof rack..........-0000005 88
Rear cross-traffic assist .............004. 180 Route guidance
Rear fog lights ss: = : sexs sy wees ev eee gs 50 StOPPlng s sw x & wares ¢ & ees xo wR ee 209
Rear lid also refer to Navigation............... 205
refer to Luggage compartment lid........ 42 Runneflate (tires) 2 a sos < wanes ws voaniss 6% aman 280
Rear lOWEriNGtes « = wos « ¢ waren & s rene & § Haun 85 Running direction (tires)..............-. 293
Rear seatS..........-.-0-0
20 ee ee 65, 86, 87
Rearview Camera « = sss < : sees sy ean se os 176 S
Rear window defogger............-+-.05- 94
Safety belts cso < ccs s + gene & ¥ een x Hew a 67
Rear wiper blades Cleaning......... 00... cece eee eee 285
ChanginGins « asm 5 s news 3 x deme s a ame a ae 59 LOCKING... occ eee eee ee eee 79
Cleanings + « serve v 2 swawes + a evewere ¥ ot seevene ¥ eee 59 Securing child safety seats.............. 79
Recirculation Mode sass ss sissies
soese 6 6 wee 93 Satellite: map « cess s » sens s ees ev BeeR es 212
Recuperation ses ¢ sway a 2 ose a 2 ewes = 17, 104 Saving fuel
REfriGEFatit Olli x = wave xo eas @ x ewe Eas 314 Energy: COnSuMe!S sieves oo crea se eee ao oes LZ:
RETUGLING « < cews sa wows se ees Fe ema a ee 242 RECUPERATION). . wicca © scceneas @ : primase «6 sno Ll?
Remote access authorization (key user)..... 32 Screen
Remote control refer to Touch display................-. 18
Garage door opener. .......se.ceee
veces 47 Screwdriver... 2.2.0...
.. 000 e cece eee eee 288
Remote control key.........:eeeeee eres 38 Search function
Convenience opening and closing......... 46 refer to Free text search............... 230
Key replacement.............02-.00 eee 38 Seat heating.............
0... c eee eee 93
LED... ees 40
Replacing’ the battery sie. ss css vs sees aes 40
324
Index
Seats Smartphone
Adjusting .... 20.0... eee cece eee eee 63 refer to Telephone............00ee
eee 186
Adjusting the rear seats................ 65 Snow chains........
00.000 277
Cleaning « « sire a scan 2 aise vv anes oo ore 285 Socket
Folding the rearseats............... 86, 87 refer to Power sourceS...........-00
000s 82
Head restraints’: + xaos « s sayy x s seus ¢ 2 ee 66 Software information
Memory function s aes 2 2 secu «5 women 6 wenn 7A, Legalinformation..................-- 239
Resetting the position.................. 64
Software version (MMI)
Storing a seat profile................... 71
Version information................4. 239
Seat ventilation...................0000. 93
Sound
Securing the vehicle.................-00. 98 refer to Adjusting the sound............ 236
Selecting a source (media).............. 227 Speed limit information
Selectormlever’. « cris = + swine w= sinmne a seine © ¥ 99 refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 145
Selector lever position Speed limits
refer to Gears... eee eee ee 99 refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 145
Sensors Speedometer..............00
cece eee ee 12
COVERAGE STESS asses 3 ¢ xarnu ¢ 5 Same 4 5 GER a 142 Speed warning system..............-00. 145
LOCAGONS ss: 2 & cece 2 wesmns 2 wens < 2 wee eo 143
Sport differential...................0.. 118
Service interval display..............-.- 259
Start/Stop'systeMisi: « 2 swe. © 9 sees ¥ waves w= 108
SET REAR (bUttON) wx s = geen = v eowe < wees « 93 Switching offandon................0. 108
Setting measurement units.............. 236 Starting climate control after unlocking..... 95
SettingS ..... 20.0.0 0 0. eee eee eee eee 236 Starting to drive........
2... eee eee eee
Announcements and tones............. 236
Starting (@ngitte)s. «+ seis «© sisane oo exmnece «3
BLU e@EOOER ss: cxcsna 6 vcewins & w seanene « anenaon ir 237
SUGOKING ssa = & casos wo omen ¥ & cwmae oH smETIE To
Date andtime....................00. 236
Audi drive select
LanQuage@ sw: = = wows = x wees + o Sea ee eee 236
also refer to Steering..............065 117
Measurement units................00. 236
Steering lock. .... 0... . ccc eee eee eee 97
Media... ... cece 231
Navigation « = ses « 2 sees 2 2 wees 5s peme = 215
Steering wheel
RadiOien « + sasusm x 2 mwa sv omens a yume © ¥ oem 223 AGjUStING wes ¢ ¢ ewes 2 2 eee cs meen so ewes 66
Adjusting manually.................04. 66
Sound .... cece cece eee ee eee 236
SYSEEM « « ens ¢ » come : Boe ss Pe ge He 236
Shift paddles................00--000. 101
Steering wheel heating................. 94
THIMeZON Chas & owas as sane +o mesa oe inane 236
Wi-Fi hotspot.........-......00000 00 200 also refer to Multifunction steering wheel. . 13
Setting the language................... 236 Steps for determining correct load limit... 275
Setting the time. « . ses ve see ee eres oe ve 236 Stopover (navigation). . v.0 « sees
se aes 209
StOPPiNG es ss eces se ees se oee es Fee ee Hes 98
Shift paddlesins « « ssc <3 ven oo meee = ween 101
Stopping the vehicle..............-..005 98
Ship Carrier cscs s 2 swan i 2 ses + ¢ see ¥ 8 oes 116
Stopping (engine).............
eee eee 108
SHOp's = seoys « ¢ news ¢ 5 neem & Sees ¢ yew 199
Storage... 2. eee 83
SHUT cs 5 « ewes oo bean ¢ 9 oee8 4 eee N 4 es 229
Storageiareasis « w snsus » « sec 6 4 camnecs «9 comes W 83
Side assist... 2.2... eee eee eee 171
Cleaning the sensors...............--- 283 Stored stations
refer to Presets... 0.0.0...
0c eee eee 220
SIMGard gorse « & wesw «5 sae & 2 Ee Ee SE 198
StrapS 2. eee 83
Sliding/tilting sunroof
Sunshade
80B012721BA
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 46

Rear doors... 0.2...
eee eee eee 57
Smart Favorites
refer to PresetS.... 0.00...
cece cece 220
325
ROOF. = asec x avenue wo oewees o a awavi wo ame 46 tiptronic
also refer to Sunshade............-.04. 46 refer to Manual shifting............... 101
SUN VISOFS 2... eeeeee 56 Tire Mobility System (tire repair set)....... 288
SUSPENSION s:csics x 0 exenem o> wm © 8 eR © «eee 116 THOS © crsscas we 6 worsen © wipcous © a seers oH cman © 261
Audi drive select. ..........ceeeee
eee 115 Changing........ cece eee eee eee ee eee 290
Swapping calls...........0.
2. cee eee eee 193 Low-profile tires..............2--004- 277
Swerve assist... 0.00.00...
cee eee eee 169 Re pail S@t:. © = cnecsis © « senses» o ssssene © ¥ sesvenw © 288
Symbols Run-flat.. 0... eee ee 280
Charging equipment.................. 129 SERVICE lifsies = = acme 5 = seme se HOS 3c RE 270
NaVidatiOtie: « s sew 2 s eee + wees ee neem 5 209 THRE PFOSSUNC xis 6 & sissese s & sree @ & oto 6 5 271,
TREE css x cman 4 x metas a x Kone we MRR 8 214 Tire pressure monitoring system.... 278,279
also refer to Indicator lights.............. 7 Tire pressure table..........00..2e0 ee 272
Tire pressure (trailer mode)............ 138
SYNC (button) ....................0.00005 93
Treadwear indicators...............00. 270
SYSECIMMSEEEINGS siereroce » sswneze w 6 sswzers « & snowene 236
Unidirectional; = 2 sae. ¢ e sees zs es 263, 293
T Uniform tire quality grading............ 277
Tires and wheels
Tachometer...........
000 eee eee eae 12,14 Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 264
Tail lights Tires and vehicle load limits............ 274
Cleaning... .... eee eee eee eee 283 Toll Module
Techmicaldattar. . scausus x sexes « snanene oo sinses 313 refer to Integrated Toll Module......... 149
Technical modifications ..........0..0005 308 TOOIS css s & ease = & a0 5b cet & 2 Set Fd eS 288
Telephones ss sin <2 wimen 3 wm o orem a 3 a 186 Top tether anchor (securing the child safety
Accepting/ending acall................ 192 Sab) ioc : 2 woes s Rees gs meee Gof Hane o ZR 80
Audi phone boxes « sssas cs esses ease eee 188 Touch display
Charging the battery (USB)............. 188 Adjusting the brightness................ 20
Charging the battery (wireless) ......... 189 Operating. ........ 0. cece eee eee eee 18
Connecting a mobile phone............ 186 TOWING... eee ce ee eee 296
Dialing anumber...............--.0.- 192 TowinglOop’s i ima + svenewive + nraueas 1 6 aves 297, 298
Exteriomamtenmas. . . cscs» 0 scene 6 a anni 0 6 188 Towing protection monitoring............. 37
Mobile device reminder signal.......... 190 TPMS
Options during aphonecall............ 193
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 279
Playing music............
0 0c 225
Trafficinformations. « snes «sess « ¥ anvee vos 215
Temperature display (outside temperature) .. 16 Online traffic information.............. 214
Temperature gauge also refer to Online traffic information... 214
Coolant...... 0.00.00...
eee eee eee 12 Traffic janmassist’s + ensue = : sows 2 meee 8 ew 162
TXCMPUIE cones 5 2 cmmccs # © oomeees 5 a mmeorane © mame 24
Traffic light information................ 147
Text messages
Traffic sign recognition................. 145
SettingS .. 0.0... cece eee 194
Traffic SignS.. 66... eee eee eee 148
Text messaging settings............6... 194
Trailer load... 2... eee
eee eee 314
alsocreferto Text messages wo...
0% 0s vs 194
Trailer mode
Tie=dOWiSis « seen + ¢ eeme ¢ 2 ews 2 2 wows 9 won 88
Air suspension...........00.00e
ee eee 138
Tightening specification
Trailer towing.................000ee eee 138
Wheel Doltsiin oo sess w svavane to ivosiie a oniusne 293
Tongue weight.............eeeeeeeeee 138
Tightening specification (wheel bolts) ..... 293
Trailer load « = = sews s wean a 2 wena a 5 wees oo 138
TiM@s & cases x & sous & ears oo mews +o REIS eH 17
TrailerView « ess = + mews 2s eee ge feee ee pes 178
Timer (high-voltage battery)............. 127
TUPMaSSiSts sous x ¢ em sy eee & EE & 2 170
326
TUPMESIQMALS seco eo ssenecs + = waves ¥ ot reeves w sevens 51, Wentilationt. 2 succu: we cron a awsenos ov aommmue ao 91
VIEW DUttOM is. 4 & ssvens & o onavee x arene © 8 ameeei 3 13
U Voicetiiails « x acan a x same « 2 weene 4 2 neue a as 192
Voice recognition system.............000. 27
Uniform tire quality grading............. 277
Extetimall swivios 0 « swanes w snewenise © wecwes oo caniaun a 28
Unlockingjand locking iis ss gees seas ces 34
Operating................ 0c eee eee eee 27
By remote control...............00 eee 39
Using the lock cylinder...............0. 37
with Audi connect vehicle control......... 40 WwW
With the central locking switch.......... 36 Wall mount clip...............0
cee eee 136
With the convenience key.............-. 39 Warning lights
Update (software) ........ 6. cece eee eee 237 refer to Indicator lights.................. 7
USB Washing matte finish paint.............. 282
Adapter ..... 0.0... eee eee 188 Wave band
USB charging port...............00
eee 82 refer to Frequency band............... 217
USB drive Weights... 0... cece eee eee eee eee 314
Supported types/formats.............. 231 Wheel bolts. ...........
0c e cee eee eee 276
USB stick Changing a tire : sees <2 ese: yee ee oes 290
refer to Audi music interface........... 226 WhGelS « sass ¢ 2 maces 2 < pate 3 Fae 5 E Sa 261
Users GLEAMING): oo seine: 2 2 samen 7 o soem oon oem YB 284
LoGal US@rSrixces ss scans oe samme a a anauine oo ateiens 311, Glossary of tire and loading terminology.. 264
myAudi users... ...........000 0c eee 31 Replacing.......... 0... eee eee eee eee 290
Using residual heat..............2..0000. 94 Tire pressure monitoring system........ 279
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 274
V Wheebwreneltic « o sssess 0 suswens 1 2 secxaue @ © enon 288
Wi-Fi
Vaniby ROP an 4 o wewcce wo vesmene x arenenente «ones 57!
Hotspot settings................00004 200
Vehicle
USING a HOtSpot ; sa. . s h eens eee ee vows 198
Angle... .. 2... eee eee eee eee 113
Window and mirror heating............... 95
Gare/cleaning eee se eves so eews ce ewe 282
Dimensions cic ics cceee co omens vo enone ow oe 313 Windows
Identification data............... 000. 313 Child safety lock eve: zs eee ts pees as wees 44
OUTOT SERVICE: = = sews xs ewe sa eee a 287 Cleaning and removing ice............. 284
Raising « waer so issn & aaeies vv mene +H aa 291 Convenience opening and closing......... 46
Starting. ........ 0.2... eee eee eee 97 Defrosting « ¢ cows ees sk ews ba wea a 94
Trans POtt ccs + « eaes + ¢ wees so eens Bees 116 Opening and closing...............000- 45
Unlocking and locking...............005 39 Power windows...........00000e sees AS
Vehiclecareics « 2 mews + ¢ saws x 2 meme ¥ 2 ees 282 Windshield
Cleaning... .. cece eee eee eee eee 57
Vehicle control Services sites is sees scans 199
Defrosting « «exc < + neue eres ee Hews gee 94
Vehicle data label. : = secs ss eeed se tees sve 313
also refer to Windshield................ 57
Vehicle identification number............ 313
Windshield washer system...........- 57259.
Vehicle jack.................0..0.000005 288
Windshield 'wipersivs. « «sews os seme 6 e een o 57
Lifting, POintS:: ¢ wees ss ees 2 o ews 7s eee 291
Winter operation
Tire-change:Mode sxe x 2 wesc «6 ernie 8 woe 290
Auxiliary climate control................ 94
Vehicle:key’s « ssws sv even oo sna oe ween « 34, 38
Car washes ............ 00000 e cece eee 282
80B012721BA
Vehicle sotitidws «wags

s aawe 2s seme 2 2 mee 107
COOLING 'SYStEM « < sess < e eeers ee eee gee 253
Vehicle starting system.............000. 109 Defrosting the windows................ 94
VehiCl@tooL Kitts sassy s « savas 9 u aera sg seems 288
327
Index
Rear window defogger...............0- 94

Removing ice from windows............ 284
Seat Heating’: s sews s + wae 5 ¢ wes « 2 cers x a 93
SMOWIGHAINS anes 2s suscens ox mas vv once wa owe 277
Steering wheel heating................. 94
Tir@S = 2 2aem sy exes x & cee § oem Fe eee 276
Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............00. 257
Windshield washer system............. 259
Winter tines cccrecs 6 « socewse 2 x onic ow wemtere 6 0 see 276
Wireless Apple CarPlay
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 234
Wireless charging................-.00. 189
328
These instructions may not be reproduced or @ Forthe sake of the environment
translated in whole or in part without written
consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
AG. out chlorine, recyclable).
Owner's Manual
English North America 06.2020
80B012721BA
80B012721BA www.audi.com

2021 Audi Q5 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Audi Q5 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.

About this Owner's Manual...... Lights and Vision.................

Display and operation........... 12 Sitting correctly and safely...... 62

Global functions................. 30 Driving...........

High-voltage system............. 122 MeSSaQeS essscns sa cavswce ww amuses vo someone vw oe 194

Driving information.............. 145 EMErGéency CALL. . « ccc cs ses een 202

Settings...............0 0000000000. 194 Do It Yourself. .........

Audi smartphone interface...... 234 JUIMIPFSTANEING 5 x exces 6 w erates @ a cawcens vw ae 294

Wheels............. 6.0. c eee eee 261 Technical data.................... 373

Do'lt Yourself sos so isis é genes scene 288

This owner's manual describes the equipment

Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

@ Door handle @ Lockable glove compartment with:

(ESO) ca ss wuss 5 4 Hema a i eos a ee 120

@ Socket ......... 0... c eee eee

Center armrest with storage com- Indicator lights overview

@8 Connection port for the On Board

Drive system Pre sense

Brake system => page 250

Brake system Central indicator light

Steering intervention request Engine start system

Vehicle sound Distance warning

Steering intervention request

Parking lights Adaptive cruise control

Electromechanical parking brake Pre sense

=> page 167

Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)

ZA WARNING Information is organized within various tabs@

First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Adjusting the display

Fig. 5 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit

Switching the view Normal range

Depending on the vehicle equipment, various lay- @) Note

Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument cluster

Fig. 9 Instrument cluster: reset button

Outside temperature Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en-

At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake Vehicle functions

Z\ WARNING The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of

— On-board computer > page 17

» Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit:

On-board computer Energy consumers

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call @) Tips

— Time and date > page 236

Short-term memory and long-term memory

Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

bar is green, your vehicle is saving fuel (for exam-

Applies to: touch display

The center display is a touchscreen. Operation is

Fig. 12 Touch display: pressing and pulling

Applies to: touch display : Moving an item

You can position some items at any location on

inching fingers together and ling a

Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing

Selecting a function or button

Applies to: touch dis play

Fig. 13 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

Zooming in and out on an item

tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of